Skip to main content

AI assistant

Sign in to chat with this filing

The assistant answers questions, extracts KPIs, and summarises risk factors directly from the filing text.

BOOT (HENRY) PLC Annual Report 2026

Jun 3, 2026

4667_10-k_2026-06-03_0a4c85d1-e17f-4266-a038-250ebb53f383.html

Annual Report

Open in viewer

Opens in your device viewer

Henry Boot PLC

Where

great

places

start

Henry Boot PLC

Annual Report and Financial Statements

for the year ended 31 December 2025

Henry Boot Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Our values

Put people first

People have always been the

heart of our business. Looking

after people and supporting

them as they strive to be the

best. Fostering connection.

Truly collaborating. Fully

committing to diversity and

inclusion. Acting responsibly,

sustainably and with compassion.

Do the right thing

We’ve always been true to our

word. We’re experts who use our

knowledge to do the right thing

(not just the easiest thing). Think

ahead. Provide solutions. Deliver

the highest standards, the best

result, the fairest terms. Commit

to delivering well tomorrow, not

just today.

Be open to change

We’ve been around since 1886

because we’re able to adapt to a

fast-changing world. We seek out

new opportunities. We evolve and

we change. We set new targets.

We actively listen, learning from

the ground up, not just the top

down. We always ask: what can

we do better?

From land promotion and property

development to home building,

Henry Boot is where great places start.”

Welcome to

the Henry Boot

Annual Report 2025

Henry Boot is one of the UK’s leading land, property

development and home building businesses – and we’ve

been transforming land and spaces since 1886.

Our vision

To grow sustainably, creating

transformational places and

spaces for generations to come.

Our purpose

Creating great places today,

to build a better tomorrow.

henryboot.co.uk

Overview

Our purpose 02

How we measure our performance 04

Chair’s introduction 06

Group structure 08

Strategic value in the business 10

Investment case 14

Strategic

Chief Executive Officer update 18

Business model 20

Our marketplace 22

Our integrated strategy 27

– Performance 30

– People 35

– Partners 40

– Places 42

– Planet 44

Segmental review

– Land promotion 46

– Property investment and development 48

– Home building 51

– Construction 52

Financial review 53

Principal risks and uncertainties 57

Our risks 60

TCFD report 68

Section 172 statement 85

Governance

Board of Directors 92

Executive Committee 94

Governance at a glance 96

Chair’s corporate governance statement 98

Corporate governance report

– Division of responsibilities 102

– Board leadership and company purpose 104

– Audit and Risk Committee report 116

– Corporate governance statement 121

– Nomination Committee report 124

– Responsible Business Committee report 129

– Directors’ Remuneration report 134

– Summary of the Remuneration Policy 139

– Annual Report on Remuneration 141

Directors’ report 152

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in

respect of the Financial Statements

159

Financial Statements

Independent auditor’s report 162

Consolidated statement of

comprehensive income

170

Statements of financial position 171

Statements of changes in equity 172

Statements of cash flows 173

Notes to the financial statements 174

Shareholder Information

Notice of Annual General Meeting 236

Financial calendar 240

Advisers 240

Group contact information 241

Glossary 242

01

Shareholder informationOverview Strategic report Governance Financial statements

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Creating

great

places

today

Our purpose challenges us and everyone who

works with and for Henry Boot to deliver to the

highest possible standards.

If we do, we’ll create healthy, sustainable and attractive places that make a

positive contribution to our communities – the kind of places that generate long

term social and economic value hat we can be proud of. We’ve been true to our

purpose since we were founded in 1886. It’s part of who we are.

Sustainability at the core

Sustainability is embedded in

everything we do. By aligning our

projects with our purpose, we ensure

that every development prioritises

environmental responsibility whilst also

delivering significant value creation for

shareholders.

Our focus on sustainable practices

means that the places we create today

will not only stand the test of time but

contribute to a healthier planet for

generations to come.

We remain committed to quality and

to delivering a premium customer

experience. We work collaboratively

and in partnership to seek new

opportunities, and to deliver lasting

impact. Henry Boot gave us a legacy

we’re proud of and fuels our desire

to be a business where great places

start. Then, now, and for future

generations to come.

We are a solutions-

driven and customer-

focused business.

Core customers

Talent

Our people – past, present

and future

Customers

Occupiers, buyers, service-users,

communities

Landowners

Private, institutional, public sector

Partners

Joint venture, commercial

development, local authority

Investors

Individuals, family, institutional,

real estate

Other

Community leaders

Local authorities, community

leaders

Influencers

Policymakers, national & local

government, trade bodies, media

Suppliers

Professional services,

contractors, trades

Read how we are committed to net zero on page 44

henryboot.co.uk02

to build

a better

tomorrow

On this journey of being an impact-led business we use Halifax’s

“Theory Z” to guide us, and report on our 5 P’s. We dene our

success and impact through ve key, interlinked measures.

Financial

performance

Places and

planet

Partners People

The culture we foster

“Putting people first, investing

in development, working to

sustain and improve our people’s

working experience.”

Customer

“Enables us to fulfil our promise

to society and our customers . . .”

Creating value

“Delivering returns to our

shareholders . . . ”

Enhancing operations

“Improving the way we

do things . . .”

The culture

we foster

The way we

do things

Benefitting

society

Protecting the

environment

People

We create great places

by working closely

with our people to

build an inclusive,

supportive culture,

investing in wellbeing,

diversity, inclusion, and

team development so

everyone can thrive.

Partners

We strive to be the

partner of choice by

investing our time and

expertise in strong,

responsible relationships

with our supply

chain, advisers, and

commercial partners to

create the best value for

everyone we work with.

Places

Supporting and

working alongside the

communities we serve

is central to Henry

Boot, and we continue

to invest our time,

resources, and funding

to create long-lasting,

genuine social value for

our community partners.

Planet

We create sustainable

places to help lower

our environmental

impact and working

with partners to share

practical, innovative

solutions that protect

the planet.

Performance:

Delivering sustainable returns and growing financial performance is our focus, but we also want to be judged

by other priorities...

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

03

How we measure

our performance

We combine commercial success with positive societal impact.

Alongside our commercial performance we’re committed to creating

healthy, sustainable and attractive places that make a genuine

contribution to our communities.

People highlights

We succeed by investing

in our own people,

improving internal

communications,

creating a sense of

shared purpose, and

via policies that include

industry-leading pay

and reward, employee

wellbeing, health

and safety.

• Our eNPS score

was 29, which is

considered ‘very good’

by our HIVE employee

engagement partners.

• Launched a financial

wellbeing portal with

Finwell to support our

people with budgeting,

pensions, mortgages,

and retirement

planning.

• Leadership

programme delivered

to approximately 50

of our leaders across

the business.

Partners highlights

We succeed by investing

in long term, productive

partnerships and being

a partner of choice in

our industry. We work

hard to put people first

and offer fair terms and

conditions, best practice,

safety, and through our

unwavering commitment

to high standards,

quality and delivery in

everything we do.

• Paid our suppliers

promptly and provided

support and guidance

for our supply

chain partners on

industry issues.

• Partnered with the

Yorkshire Climate

Action Coalition to co-

deliver the Yorkshire

Climate Action dinner

in Leeds.

• Worked in partnership

with Crisis to

undertake consultation

on how the property

sector could better

collaborate to

tackle and prevent

homelessness.

Places highlights

We build a better

tomorrow through

progressive placemaking

and working in

partnership with the

communities where we

work. Our partnerships

demonstrate a

commitment to creating

healthy, high quality

communities and

neighbourhoods that

people can live and

work in – and enjoy –

for generations.

• Contributed over

£300,000 of value

to our community

and charity partners

(including over

£70,000 raised for our

charity partner Crisis

in the partnership

to date).

• Contributed over 3,500

volunteering hours to

support a wide range

of community and

education partners.

• Engaged over 3,000

learners across our

areas of operation.

Planet highlights

We adapt to the

challenges and

opportunities posed by

climate change via our

Responsible Business

Strategy, sustainability

targets – and by

adopting a sustainable

mindset across the whole

group. We measure

success not just by short

term targets, but by

the lasting legacy our

sustainable approach

generates.

• Further implemented

the utilisation of

hydrogenated

vegetable oil (HVO)

fuels for use across

our fleet and generator

requirements.

• Reduced our direct

greenhouse gas (GHG)

emissions by 40%

(when compared to our

2019 baseline).

• Worked with industry

partners including

the UK Green

Building Council and

Yorkshire Climate

Action Coalition to

share knowledge

and solutions across

our sector.

henryboot.co.uk04

Performance highlights

Strong, sustainable financial performance

and commercial growth is our primary goal.

Group revenue Profit before tax

£307.0m £29.1m

2025

£307.0m

2024

£315.8m

2023

£359.4m

2022

£341.4m

2021

£230.6m

2025

£29.1m

2024

£30.7m

2023

£37.3m

2022

£45.6m

2021

£35.1m

Capital employed Return on capital employed (ROCE)*

£446m 7.5%

2025

£446m

2024

£439m

2023

£417m

2022

£399m

2021

£376m

2025

7.5%

2024

8.0%

2023

9.9%

2022

12.0%

2021

9.6%

NAV per share (excluding defined

benefit pension scheme surplus)

Dividends per

ordinary share

312p 7.86p

2025

312p

2024

312p

2023

300p

2022

290p

2021

276p

2025

7.86p

2024

7.70p

2023

7.33p

2022

6.66p

2021

6.05p

This report contains the following alternative performance measures (APMs): Including discontinued operations; Underlying

profit; Return on Capital Employed; Net Asset Value (NAV) per share; Net (debt)/cash; Total Property Return; Total Accounting

Return; before revised classification. More details can be found on page 56

* Before the revised classification of the group’s main borrowing facility (based on revised classification ROCE was 6.2%)

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

05

Chair’s introduction

Henry Boot delivered a resilient

performance in 2025 despite being

impacted by challenging markets

as a result of continuing global

political and economic uncertainty.

In particular, we saw strong demand

from housebuilders for our high quality

residential land, achieving a record

number of plot sales.

Across our markets, generally

transaction volumes remain subdued,

with deals taking longer to complete,

particularly in the second half of the

year in the run up to November’s

budget. Against this backdrop, we

delivered a profit before tax, including

the initial profit recognition on

disposal of Henry Boot Construction,

of £29.1m (2024: £30.7m), broadly

in line with market expectations*, or

on an underlying profit basis £27.5m

(2024: £29.4m) excluding revaluation

movements on completed investment

property. We are closely monitoring

the events in the Middle East, and

the implications it might have on the

wider economy, our markets, and

our customers.

The group’s NAV per share, excluding

the defined benefit pension scheme,

was broadly unchanged at 312p (2024:

312p), and including dividends paid

in the period, we delivered a total

accounting return of 2.5% (2024: 5.8%).

This reflects lower retained earnings

and the impact of the completion of

the first tranche of the Stonebridge

Homes acquisition. We continue to

drive the store of worth within our

portfolio through increased levels of

planning permissions achieved in both

Hallam Land and HBD. It is important

to highlight that the majority of our

assets are conservatively held at

cost, rather than marked to market,

therefore the value we have created

will be recognised in future periods,

on disposal.

Strategically, 2025 marked a year of

significant progress. We accelerated

planning applications to grow our

consented plots within Hallam Land,

and following the increase in our

ownership of Stonebridge Homes

to 62.5%, we have introduced new

processes to further professionalise

its operations. Agreeing the sale of

Henry Boot Construction in September

2025 was a significant step, allowing

us to streamline our structure and

sharpen our focus on high quality

land, prime property development,

and premium homes. In anticipation

of these changes, the Future Ways of

Working programme commenced in

March 2025, driving organisational

and management changes to boost

agility, resilience, responsiveness,

and efficiency.

The Board has proposed to pay a final

dividend of 4.62p per share, which,

together with the interim dividend of

3.24p, gives a total dividend of 7.86p

(2024: 7.70p), an increase of 2.1% for

the year. Subject to approval at the

AGM on 21 May 2026, this will be paid

on 29 May 2026 to shareholders on

the register at the close of business on

1 May 2026.

The decision to hold the final dividend

at last year’s level is consistent with

our policy to invest selectively across

the group while acknowledging the

importance of delivering an income

return to our shareholders. We remain

committed to a progressive dividend

over the medium term as earnings

pick up.

On behalf of the Board, I wish to

extend my thanks to our people

for their dedication and hard work

throughout the year. Our annual

Employee Engagement Survey

continues to inform our ambition to

make Henry Boot an outstanding place

to work. This year’s results maintained

a ‘very good’ employee Net Promoter

Score (eNPS) of +29 (2024: +30), which

is +14 points above our peer group

average, a true reflection of our team’s

commitment to Henry Boot.

Peter Mawson

Chair

* Company compiled market consensus for 2025

profit before tax is £29.2m.

The Future Ways of Working programme

is driving organisational and management

changes to boost agility, resilience,

responsiveness, and eciency.”

Peter Mawson

Chair

Read more about the Board’s activities

in the Governance section on

page 100

henryboot.co.uk06

Future Ways of Working

In March 2025, we launched our Future Ways of Working (FWoW)

programme. Our aim is to drive growth by strengthening collaboration,

aligning working practices and leveraging synergies across our group.

At the heart of FWoW is a commitment to involve our people. Many colleagues expressed a desire to contribute and play

an active role in shaping the change. A high-performance culture is critical to delivering our growth strategy and every one

of our people has a role to play in delivering it. Through extensive engagement and feedback, four priority areas emerged:

21

3 4

Strengthening alignment

Developing our group-wide business strategy, to

create clearer strategic and operational alignment.

This includes establishing more structured opportunities

to innovate, share expertise and resources, ultimately

fostering closer working relationships to make the right

calls for our customers and shareholders.

Enabling decision making

We want to ensure we are leveraging the right skills

and experience across the group at the right cost.

This means empowering decision making at lower

levels, encouraging accountability, and enabling our

people to operate with greater autonomy to make the

right choices.

Refining our business structure

We will continue to refine our centralised group

functions, placing stronger emphasis on business

partnering and the use of data and analytics. This will

help us identify synergies, improve efficiency and

deliver greater value to all our stakeholders.

Investing in our people and culture

Our culture remains one of our greatest strengths.

We will continue to support our people in developing

a mindset of growth, resilience, responsiveness and

agility. We are honest and straight talking, and these

qualities are essential for navigating change and

driving progress.

We believe that investing time and energy into FWoW will become a defining part of our business philosophy and a vital

discipline for our continuing evolution. We have learned that when we commit – individually and collectively – and act

with positivity, clarity, and purpose, we create the conditions needed to deliver at our best.

We’ve made meaningful progress this year, and that momentum matters. But there is still more to do and we will continue

building the environment we need to shape Henry Boot for sustainable long term growth and ensure we are ready for the

opportunities ahead.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

07

Hallam Land

Hallam Land

Henry Boot

Construction

Banner Plant

H B D

Hallam Land

Hallam Land

Henry Boot

Construction

Banner Plant

H B D

Group structure

We focus on high quality land, prime property

development and premium homes.

Last year we made some key changes to simplify our business model.

Completed sale of Henry Boot

Construction for £4m

At the end of last year, we completed

the sale of Henry Boot Construction.

The business has made only a small

contribution to group profits, with the

disposal reducing the risk profile of

the group.

This move fits our strategy and

enhances growth prospects with a

more focused portfolio with greater

synergies. All things being equal, this

will improve the equity narrative and is

likely to attract greater understanding

and investor interest.

Home building is an important

business segment

The residential markets are driven

by positive long term trends such as

population growth.

In January 2025, we became the

majority owner of Stonebridge Homes,

which builds premium homes in

some of the most sought-after areas

of Yorkshire, the Midlands and the

North East.

A rock-solid balance sheet provides a

strong platform to accelerate growth

and improve returns.

Well placed for the future

Investing to support growth.

Our endorsed brand model

Land promotion Property investment

and development

Home building

c.106,000

strategic land plots

c.£1.4bn

development pipeline

Multi-regional premium home

builder with land bank of

c.2,500 plots

henryboot.co.uk08

Key

Head Office

Regional Office

Hire Centre

Our geographical reach

National coverage and strategic sites

The head office of the Henry Boot group is located

in Sheffield but we operate throughout the country.

We have eight regional offices and seven plant hire

centres to ensure we are close to our strategic sites and

we are able to maximise our development opportunities.

Our reputation is built on our ability to promote and deliver high quality schemes.

Operating across the UK, and employing nearly 400 people, we focus on three long term growth markets.

Residential

A market in which we continue to

grow our presence through one of

the largest strategic land portfolios

in the country and a growing

premium home builder

• Hallam Land achieved record

sales of nearly 4,000 plots,

exceeding its financial target

for the year

• Positive changes to the National

Planning Policy Framework

resulted in the group materially

accelerating planning

applications, with c.11,000

plots submitted in 2025

• In January 2025, the group

increased its ownership in

Stonebridge Homes to 62.5%,

and continues to make progress

in professionalising and

integrating the business into

the group

Industrial and Logistics

We have a strong track record of

delivering prime Industrial and

Logistics units across England

• In 2025, the group completed

449,000 sq ft of Industrial

and Logistics development

through its Origin JV with

Feldberg Capital, at a total

combined GDV of £100m

(our share: £25m)

• In line with our ambition to

scale up Origin, we added

three further schemes with

a combined GDV of £56m

(our share: £14m) into its

pipeline in December 2025

Urban development

Urban development is becoming

increasingly uneconomic without

public sector grant support, and

as a result we have begun to

focus more on innovation and

technology-led opportunities,

including:

• The £1bn Golden Valley project

in Cheltenham, which received

outline planning in July 2025

for 1 million sq ft of commercial

space and 576 homes. The first

£98m phase is due to start in

H2 2026

• Duxford AvTech (£120m GDV)

a 435,000 sq ft project set to

create a technology campus,

dedicated to developing

low and zero carbon aircraft

technology at IWM Duxford

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

09

0 100,00080,00060,00040,00020,000

Dec

2025

105,854

Dec

2024

104,787

Dec

2023

100,972

Dec

2022

95,704

Dec

2021

92,667

19,580 9,024 77,250

82,819

79,003

73,976

68,543

13,146 8,822

13,468 8,501

12,297 9,431

11,25 9 12,865

120,000

Strategic value in the business

Land promotion

Hallam Land manages one of the top five largest land portfolios in the country,

with the potential to facilitate nearly 106,000 homes.

We continue to grow one of the

largest strategic land banks in

the country.

Regional breakdown

105,854

Total plots

North

13,497

South Midlands

21,799

South East

10,655

Scotland

12,069

North Midlands

19,254

South West

22,475

South

6,105

Residential land plots

Key

Plots in planning Plots with permission Future plots

Plots with permission

9%

Plots in planning

18%

Future plots

73%

henryboot.co.uk10

Property investment and development

HBD manages a development pipeline of £1.4bn (our share), the equivalent of 7 million sq ft of

developments across our key markets, while maintaining a £119.8m investment portfolio.

Future development pipeline

The group has a total

development pipeline of £1.7bn

GDV (our share £1.4bn), with all of

these opportunities sitting within the

group’s three key markets.

Key

Consented Controlled

Industrial and

logistics big box

22%

Industrial

and logistics

mid/small box

34%

Urban

residential

19%

Urban

commercial

25%

Industrial and

logistics

56%

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

11

Newcastle

Hull

Leeds

Sheeld

Manchester

Liverpool

Stoke

Nottingham

Leicester

Strategic value in the business

continued

Home building

Stonebridge Homes, our majority owned home building business, manages

a land portfolio capable of delivering c.2,500 homes, with an ambition to

deliver up to 600 new homes a year.

Key

Owned Controlled

Stonebridge outlets and land bank

Added 1,031 plots to the land bank across five sites

Read more in the Business

Review on page 51

henryboot.co.uk12

Key

Owned Controlled

Pictured: Grainger Park, Goldsborough

13

Shareholder informationOverview Strategic report Governance Financial statements

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Investment case

21

3

5

4

Effective management

and shareholder returns

The group has a strong track record of effectively

managing the balance sheet, while continuing to

create shareholder value through our strategic focus

on delivering sustainable growth. We have delivered

attractive returns through the cycle with a 10-year

return on capital employed of 11.7% per annum and

total accounting return of 9.4% per annum.

Clear focus on three key markets

driven by positive long term trends

Our strategy remains achieving long term growth

through our focus on three key markets. I&L is a sector

where long term growth is supported by several

structural drivers, with occupier take-up experiencing

a steady recovery in 2025. UK house prices

marginally increased in 2025, with Northern England

outperforming. Within urban development our focus has

shifted to innovation and technology-led opportunities.

Significant embedded

value in the business

There is significant embedded value across the group,

with our strategic land and property developments

held at cost, rather than revalued on a mark-to-market

basis. This includes c.106,000 strategic land plots

(of which c.9,000 have planning permission) and a

£1.4bn (our share) development pipeline (with 55%

focused on Industrial and Logistics). Added to this,

we have a premium housebuilder, with a land bank of

c.2,500 plots.

Our culture and people

Our people are vital to Henry Boot’s long term success.

A positive and inclusive embedded culture enables us

to create and maintain long standing relationships with

our customers, clients and communities. This is crucial

to our sustainability, creating an environment which

empowers our people to deliver the group’s strategy,

while continuing to attract and retain people who

support our culture.

Responsible business approach

We concluded the first phase of our Responsible

Business Strategy (launched in January 2022) at the end

of 2025. The strategy, which outlined forward-looking

targets aimed at further embedding our environmental,

social, and governance (ESG) approach into the group’s

commercial and strategic decision making, saw us make

strong progress on our responsible business practice. It

will be followed by phase two in 2026 which will include

our ongoing commitment of achieving net zero carbon

(NZC) by 2030.

henryboot.co.uk14

2025

2024

2023

2022

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

0.0p 1.0p 2.0p 3.0p 4.0p 5.0p 6.0p 7.0p 8.0p 9.0p

2025

2024

2023

2022

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

200 250 300 350 400 450

Dividend per share Capital employed

HY FY £ million

Our strengths

Our diversified businesses

Henry Boot operates across the whole property

value chain.

With our uniquely sustainable business model, we

have built a market-leading group of companies that

source, develop and deliver across the whole property

value chain.

We manage the combined effort and expertise of four

subsidiaries, investing in our future to create long term

value and robust returns for all our stakeholders.

Our capital structure

We reinvest the cash generated from our investment

portfolio into higher returning areas of the business.

Our financial structure allows us to invest in the more

profitable areas of the business to ensure we can

maximise value, while maintaining prudent gearing

levels. HBD’s property investment portfolio generates

rental income each year, allowing us to borrow against

the investment portfolio at attractive rates.

Our planning and

development expertise

The group has been in business for nearly 140 years

and we are valued for our expertise and forward-

thinking approach.

Henry Boot recognises that our people are fundamental

to the success and sustainability of the group. It is their

expertise across our three key markets that executes

our business model successfully and delivers the value

created by the business to our stakeholders.

Our relationships

We work closely with our stakeholders, including our

landowners, key property advisers (who inform us

of potential opportunities), planning consultants and

legal advisors.

At Henry Boot, we pride ourselves on collaboration.

We set clear mutual expectations and strive to achieve

them. We promote cross-team working and work in

partnership to make things happen.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

15

Strategic

report

16 henryboot.co.uk

Strategic

Chief Executive Officer update 18

Business model 20

Our marketplace 22

Our integrated strategy 27

– Performance 30

– People 35

– Partners 40

– Places 42

– Planet 44

Segmental review

– Land promotion 46

– Property investment and development 48

– Home building 51

– Construction 52

Financial review 53

Principal risks and uncertainties 57

Our risks 60

TCFD Report 68

Section 172 statement 86

The Directors present the group Strategic

Report for the year ended 31 December 2025.

This report sets out how Henry Boot continues to

create consistent value through the promotion of

new land opportunities, the development of, and

investment in, high quality property assets, and

construction activities.

The Business Overview and Strategic Report on

pages 16 to 89 have been approved by the Board and

signed on its behalf by

Tim Roberts

Chief Executive Officer

14 April 2026

Pictured: Spark, Walsall, a 464,000 sq ft

industrial and development scheme.

17

Shareholder informationOverview Strategic report Governance Financial statements

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Chief Executive Officer update

The macroeconomic environment

remains challenging, with transaction

volumes across our markets still below

long term averages as investors,

occupiers and customers take longer

to make decisions.

The prolonged lead up to the

November Budget had a particularly

negative impact on both consumer

and business confidence. Despite

this, we continued to experience

good demand from housebuilders for

our high quality residential land, as

many look to increase the number of

sales outlets. Against this backdrop,

we were relatively pleased that total

sales of land, commercial property,

and houses for the year were £356m

(2024: £347m) with our share at £193m

(2024: our share £224m). We are alert

to the events in the Middle East, and

the effects will depend on how long

the conflict lasts.

Commercial property markets are

recovering, with capital values rising

by 1.4% and total returns reaching

7.1% in 2025 according to the CBRE

Monthly Index. Industrial performed

particularly well, with capital values

increasing by 2.5% on the back of

4.8% rental growth. The majority of

our committed developments and

pipeline sit within the industrial sector,

where we are also leveraging our

operational expertise through the

Origin JV. Urban development has

become increasingly uneconomic

without public sector grant support.

We have therefore pivoted our

focus toward the innovation and

technology-led opportunities, where

we can leverage our experience in this

specialist sub sector. This includes

market leading schemes in Cheltenham

and Duxford.

In 2025, UK house prices rose by 0.6%,

with residential land values softening

slightly. Benefiting from the changes

to the NPPF, we secured consents

for 4,159 plots, a significant 39%

increase on the prior year. In 2025, we

invested £28.8m of capital, growing

our store of consents to 9,024 plots

and into new opportunities. We plan

to invest an additional c.£27m in 2026,

submitting a similar level of planning

applications, as we materially increase

our portfolio of consented land to sell

to housebuilders.

To support our growth ambitions, we

are streamlining and coordinating our

sales processes within Hallam Land,

ensuring more efficiency and agility

as we move forward. Last year, we

sold 3,957 plots, a record number,

with expectations to sell more in

  1. The investment and growth in

consents and the number of planning

applications create a sustainable

platform to achieve our medium term

target of selling 3,500 plots per annum

on average and to grow sales beyond

that level.

Throughout 2025, we completed

schemes with a total of £119m GDV

(our share: £33m) with 32% pre-let

or sold. We maintained a good level

of I&L activity, including completing

on c.449,000 sq ft of industrial space

through our Origin JV. We have

seen encouraging occupier interest

and anticipate securing additional

lettings. At the start of the year, we

are committed to £66m GDV (our

share: £18m), delivering an additional

412,000 sq ft, the majority of which

is in Origin. The JV provides us

with the dual benefit of receiving

development management fees

alongside the opportunity to generate

performance fees.

We continue to upgrade and replenish

our development pipeline, which

currently stands at £1.4bn (our share)

and provides us with a strong near

term pipeline to create value. It also

gives us optionality to increase our

level of committed development in line

with demand, while in the meantime,

allowing us to keep our capital

employed in future opportunities low

at £61m. In this respect, in the summer

we expect to commit to phase one

of Golden Valley Cheltenham (£98m

GDV), a £1bn flagship mixed use

campus adjacent to GCHQ, focused

on national security and emerging

technologies such as AI and quantum

computing. Public sector funds have

already been secured to fully fund

the construction of this nationally

significant cybersecurity development.

We remain condent in the group’s potential

to deliver attractive returns for shareholders

given the increased depth and quality of

opportunities within our portfolio.”

Tim Roberts

Chief Executive Officer

henryboot.co.uk18

Last year was challenging for

Stonebridge Homes, which

experienced slower sales, completing

185 homes, with delays in obtaining

detailed planning consents, affecting

our ability to get on site and open new

outlets. Combined with a relatively

high number of sites that are almost

fully sold, this resulted in a sales rate of

0.37. We also saw some cost overruns.

However, we are focused on rebuilding

momentum, with output expected to

recover to between 200–220 homes

in 2026, putting us back on track to

achieve our medium term target of

delivering 600 homes per annum.

The residential market is long term,

and with Hallam Land now directing

the land buying strategy, we have the

skills, a clear plan to scale, and strong

conviction in our regional model.

Having become the majority owner

of Stonebridge Homes in 2025, we

replaced the Managing Director as part

of our programme to professionalise

and integrate the business into the

group. The search for a permanent

replacement is underway, and,

meanwhile, Ed Hutchinson, Managing

Director of HBD and Executive

Committee (ExCo) member, is serving

as Interim Managing Director. Ed has

extensive expertise in building and

construction processes, as well as land

acquisition, planning and stakeholder

engagement, including customers. He

has overseen the successful delivery

of several major premium residential

developments for HBD, including The

Chocolate Works in York and SETL

in Birmingham.

We are investing in our people and

systems, supported by our group

function teams, to strengthen

Stonebridge Homes’ sales capability

and elevate the customer experience.

Our improvement plan focuses on

enhancing operational efficiency and

improving our use of data to create

stronger links between teams. We also

expect to make selective land disposals

to increase asset turn and ensure site

sizes align with our premium homes

strategy. While it’s still early in 2026,

we are encouraged by the fact that

net private weekly reservation rates

at Stonebridge Homes are running at

0.43 over the 11 weeks to 15 March,

compared with 0.34 for the same

period in 2025.

At the end of 2025, we completed

the sale of Henry Boot Construction.

This transaction creates a more

focused mix of businesses with greater

synergies, as well as reducing the

risk profile of the group. Henry Boot

Construction begins this year with a

strong order book, which leaves our

former colleagues well positioned for

future success and able to commence

repayment of the £4.0m vendor loan

due over the next five years.

In anticipation of the sale of Henry

Boot Construction, the integration of

Stonebridge Homes and our ambition

to create a more agile, robust and

responsive organisation, supported

by a leaner central function, we

commenced our FWoW programme

in March 2025. The programme is

designed to drive efficiency, improve

collaboration and the sharing of

expertise and resources across our

three core businesses. This included

reshaping functions within the group,

with Steve Stacey, formerly Group

Finance Director, appointed as Chief

Operating Officer. Jaimie Read has

been promoted to the role of Company

Secretary, and Iain MacSween has

been appointed Managing Director of

Hallam Land. Steve and Iain will also

join ExCo.

As part of the FWoW programme, we

have already delivered a reduction

in central overheads of 20% in 2025,

with further savings anticipated in

  1. This initiative is designed to

strengthen profitability by aligning our

resources and capabilities with the

group’s new structure and strategic

focus, while still enabling incremental

investment in priority areas that will

support medium term growth. We have

also implemented the first phase of

Dynamics 365, enabling processes to

be systemised and data to be captured,

stored and used more effectively to

support decision making.

Outlook

We continue to focus on land

promotion and premium home

building, while expanding our industrial

development activity. Within urban

development, we are increasingly

targeting high growth specialised sub

sectors such as cyber and innovation,

where we see strong medium term

prospects.

Land promotion remains a core driver

of value creation for the group, with

Hallam Land focused on growing

its store of planning consents and

increasing volumes of plot sales to

housebuilders. As a result of the

positive planning changes, we believe

this is an opportunity which is very

deliverable and will support our

expectations for medium term profit

growth. Hallam Land is therefore

expected to have another good year.

However, the anticipated sales mix,

with a higher percentage of promotion

agreements and a lower share of

freeholds, is likely to result in profit

per plot being lower than our typical

rate of £10,000, with a corresponding

impact on operating profit.

Within HBD, the strategic focus

remains on industrial development,

primarily through the Origin JV. This is

underpinned by a £1.4bn development

pipeline, which is expected to support

an increase in committed development

activity over £150m by late 2026 and

into 2027. A key milestone will be

the commencement of phase one of

Golden Valley (£98m GDV), which is

scheduled to start this summer.

At Stonebridge Homes, we anticipate

that performance will begin to recover

during 2026. Delays in the planning

system are expected to remain a

limiting factor on the number of new

outlets during the year. While the

important spring selling season is

still in its early stages, there are early

indications of market recovery.

Primarily due to the timing of large land

and development transactions in the

pipeline, together with the inherent

seasonality of housebuilding, means

that, as in previous years, the group

expects performance to be heavily

weighted towards the second half of

the financial year. It is expected that

these large transactions will also help

reduce gearing towards our optimum

range. While we continue to monitor

the situation in the Middle East and

its potential impact on inflation and

interest rates, which could affect

transaction volumes in our markets,

there are significant opportunities

across our portfolio, supported by a

rock solid balance sheet. Assuming the

impact from the conflict in the Middle

East is not prolonged, the business is

well positioned to deliver the recently

revised market expectations for FY26*

and with a continued belief that we

will deliver against our medium term

growth and return targets.

Tim Roberts

Chief Executive Officer

* Company compiled of recently updated market

consensus for 2026 profit before tax is £20.2m.

This report contains the following alternative

performance measures (APMs): Including

discontinued operations; Underlying profit;

Return on Capital Employed; Net Asset Value

(NAV) per share; Net (debt)/cash; Total Property

Return; Total Accounting Return; before revised

classification. More details can be found on

page 56.

Read more about the Board’s

decision making on the HBC sale on

pages 88-89

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

19

Business model

Our group comprises four businesses, Hallam Land, one of the

UK’s largest land promoters, HBD, our property investment and

development business, Stonebridge Homes, our premium home builder,

and plant hire specialist Banner Plant.

Being part of the Henry Boot group

The strength in being part of our

collective continues to grow.

The obvious benefits associated

with being part of a PLC such as

funding, reputation, governance,

HR and stewardship have always

been there and each year we focus

on continually raising important

standards.

There are many collaborative

opportunities that the individual

businesses can share and benefit

from. Our detailed knowledge of the

planning system meets the latest

environmental credentials, using the

latest technology (including AI) to

automate and optimise developments

to the customers’ needs.

These are all examples of skills and

capabilities that can be shared and

help elevate the overall capabilities

of the collective. Working together

can also help create opportunities to

work with partners and customers to

forward fund a development and de

risk a scheme.

Balance of activities through the ‘value chain’

Land promotion Property investment &

development

Home building

Securing planning permission is

a complex but valuable process

central to our land promotion and

development. Hallam Land, our

land promotion company, works

with advisers and landowners to

identify and optimise agricultural

sites, selling them after permission

is granted. Using agency and

option agreements reduces

costs and increases involvement,

allowing Hallam Land to maximise

returns on capital employed.

HBD acquire land, obtain planning

permission, and develop it

themselves, primarily focusing on

commercial schemes. They can

self-fund or secure prefunding,

enabling commitment to long

term regeneration projects

without relying on bank loans.

Some developments are sold;

others are retained in their

investment portfolio.

Our majority-owned home builder,

Stonebridge Homes, delivers

premium homes across Yorkshire,

the Midlands and the North East.

Our master planning and design

focus on sustainability and long

term viability, means we deliver

homes that are energy-efficient in

desirable places to live.

henryboot.co.uk20

Development

of sites

Creating value through three core markets

Residential

In our residential developments,

we go beyond building homes

– we create communities. Our

planning and design prioritise

sustainability, biodiversity, and

long term viability. Through

Stonebridge Homes, we

are committed to delivering

homes that meet the highest

environmental standards, ensuring

they are not only energy efficient

but also desirable places to live.

Industrial and Logistics

Our approach to Industrial and

Logistics development is rooted

in our purpose. We create

strategically located logistics

hubs that meet the demands of

modern cities, integrating cutting-

edge technology to optimise for

efficiency and sustainability. By

working closely with partners

and stakeholders, we ensure that

these developments contribute

positively to economic growth and

social value.

Urban development

Our urban projects are guided

by our commitment to creating

vibrant, inclusive and sustainable

city spaces. With a focus on strong

ESG credentials, we ensure that

our developments contribute

positively to urban environments,

fostering community engagement

and delivering long term value to

residents and stakeholders.

Identify

opportunities

and acquire land

Property investment

and development

Land promotion

Home building

The impact we are making

When creating our Responsible Business Strategy, we

engaged our stakeholders to understand which of the

UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) they felt our

business could most positively impact.

Based on the feedback received, the Responsible Business

Committee selected the below SDGs as those best aligned

with our corporate purpose.

Society

All of the targets contained within the Responsible

Business Strategy have been influenced and shaped

through consultation with our people, our commercial and

community partners, our senior management and Board, and

our professional advisers to ensure that they are robust and

ambitious (while also achievable), and will create the impact

we aspire to.

To learn more about our responsible business progress go to

page 34 or read our separate Responsible Business Strategy

Progress Report

Our value generation

People

Our people deliver the core activities of our business model.

We invest a significant amount of time and resource in their

training and development to ensure they are empowered

in their roles. We apply the same methods and dedication

when we are recruiting to ensure we attract the highest

calibre of people within the group.

Places

We have offices in eight locations across the UK, but we

have projects that extend our community impact across the

country. Wherever we operate, it is fundamental to us that

we develop strong relationships and partnerships with our

communities. This could be by using the local supply chain

on projects or volunteering our skill set to a local charity.

Partners

We are committed to maintaining our long standing track

record of customer satisfaction. We continue to listen,

understand and adapt how we can improve upon what we

deliver, so we are able to further enhance the competitive

advantage our group brings to its customers.

Shareholders

Our priority is to protect the sustainability of the group

for our shareholders. By operating transparently and

responsibly, we are able to create added value for our

shareholders, providing updates on performance and

changes to the strategic direction of the group.

Track record of generating attractive returns

Obtain

planning

permission

Investment

portfolio

Sale of

land

Sale of

property

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

21

Our marketplace

Read more in the Business

review on pages 46 to 52

Residential Industrial and Logistics Urban development

According to Nationwide, UK

house prices increased by 0.6%

during 2025 on a seasonally

adjusted basis. Most regions

recorded modest house price

growth, with Northern England

continuing to outperform the

South. While there was an increase

in new home registrations in 2025,

completions remain 39% below

the 2022 peak according to the

National House Building Council.

The UK Industrial and Logistics

market remained resilient in 2025,

with occupier demand holding

up well despite a more cautious

economic backdrop. Take up

was broadly stable, supported

by logistics and manufacturing

demand, although decision

making slowed and vacancy

rates edged higher as new

developments completed.

Urban development has become

increasingly uneconomic without

public sector grant support. We

have therefore pivoted our focus

toward innovation and technology-

led opportunities, where we can

leverage our experience in this

specialist sub sector. This includes

market leading schemes in

Cheltenham and Duxford.

Market context

Our key markets

In 2025, across our markets, transaction volumes generally remained subdued, reflecting cautious sentiment. Deals were

taking noticeably longer to complete, with extended negotiation periods becoming increasingly common. This was

particularly noticeable in the second half of the year, as both buyers and sellers adopted a wait-and-see approach in

anticipation of November’s Budget and its potential implications for market conditions, taxation, and government spending.

Despite this uncertainty, we still believe our markets are driven by long term structural trends such as population growth,

retail moving online, near shoring of supply chains, the drive for sustainability, plus the increase in household numbers.

henryboot.co.uk22

Key long term trends affecting our business

Urbanisation

According to the United Nations’ World Urbanisation

Prospects 2025, the UK population is expected to

reach around 75.5 million by 2050, with approximately

87% of people living in urban areas. As the population

grows, major cities will continue to act as key drivers

of UK economic growth, driving increased demand for

housing, warehouses and high-quality office space.

People don’t choose cities simply because they are

close to work. They are drawn to the lifestyle – access

to amenities, culture, connectivity and the vibrancy that

urban living offers. This shift in how and why people

choose to live in cities will continue to shape the future

of real estate and the places we create.

Technology

The digital landscape is evolving at pace, reshaping how

we live, work, shop and communicate. This is driving

a growing need for services that can adapt not only to

emerging technologies but also to the environments in

which they operate. In real estate, we are already seeing

greater adoption of property technology from data and

analytics to automation that streamline processes and

improve efficiency. These trends are contributing to

increased demand for warehouse space from third-party

logistics providers, online retailers and manufacturers.

The potential of AI to reshape real estate is significant,

from optimising operations to the emergence of new

markets and asset classes.

Demographics

The UK population continues to grow, with net migration

expected to be a major driver over the next 25 years.

Although demographic trends are inherently uncertain,

the latest ONS projections assume that net migration

will gradually decline over the coming years before

stabilising at around 340,000 annually from mid-2028

onwards. Within this broader picture, the most notable

shifts in the working-age population over the next

decade are expected amongst 20- to 30-year-olds and

40- to 50-year-olds, who are projected to increase by

8% and 7% respectively. These demographic trends

provide strong underlying support for both senior

living and Build to Rent, particularly schemes aimed

at young professionals.

Environment

The built environment accounts for around 25% of the

UK’s carbon emissions, placing increasing pressure

on businesses in our sector to adapt their operations

and transition to more sustainable practices. The

pressure to operate more sustainably is not only from

government regulations, it is coming from occupiers,

investors and other stakeholders. As a result, demand

for energy-efficient, environmentally responsible

green buildings continues to rise creating a growing

‘brown discount’ for assets that fail to meet modern

environmental standards.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

23

Our marketplace

continued

Residential

Residential planning approvals in Great Britain

0

50,000

100,000

150,000

200,000

250,000

300,000

350,000

400,000

2025202420232022202120202019201820172016

0

5,000

10,000

15,000

20,000

25,000

Number of projects Number of units

New home completions

0

20,000

40,000

60,000

80,000

100,000

120,000

140,000

160,000

180,000

2025202420232022202120202019201820172016

Private Rental and affordable

Market overview

UK greenfield land values fell by an average of 1.4% in 2025,

according to Savills Research. This shift reflects softer

housing-market fundamentals, while speculation around

potential policy changes also weighed on transaction

volumes and pricing. National averages, however, mask

significant regional variation. The South East experienced

the sharpest declines, with values down 4.0%, whereas

Scotland recorded the strongest growth, with land values

rising 2.7% over the year.

Although recent changes to the NPPF have prompted an

increase in planning applications, this has not yet translated

into approvals. According to the Home Builders Federation,

the number of homes granted detailed planning consent

in the first nine months of 2025 was 27% lower than the

same period the previous year.

The UK housing market remained relatively subdued in 2025,

with homebuyer demand still constrained by comparatively

high mortgage rates. According to Nationwide, UK

house prices rose by 0.6% over the year, with Northern

England continuing to outperform the South, recording

annual growth of 2.3%. The only region to see a decline

was East Anglia, where house prices fell by 0.8%. Overall

housebuilding activity continued to slow, with the number

of new homes completed in 2025 falling 2% compared with

2024 and some 19% below the 2022 peak, according to the

National House Building Council.

henryboot.co.uk24

Industrial and Logistics

Warehouse take up and availability

0

20

40

60

80

100

2025202420232022202120202019201820172016

0

2

4

6

8

10

Vacancy rate – % (RHS) Take up – m sq ft

Annual rental growth

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

2025202420232022202120202019201820172016

Newmark Prime Logistics rents

CBRE All Industrial rents

Market overview

Occupier demand has eased from the record highs seen

during the pandemic, but momentum improved through

2025, with take-up 1% ahead of 2024. Availability tightened

in the second half, and with speculative development at

historically low levels, Q2 2025 is likely to have marked the

cyclical peak. Demand remains broad-based, led by logistics

operators and manufacturers many of whom are reshaping

supply chains through nearshoring to reduce risk and

improve resilience.

Although e-commerce now represents a smaller share of

overall take-up, it continues to be a powerful long-term

structural driver of logistics demand. New sectors are

also emerging as meaningful contributors, including green

energy production and electric vehicle manufacturing.

At the same time, high-street retailers are upgrading their

logistics networks, seeking more sustainable facilities and

expanding their online fulfilment capabilities.

Industrial has been the standout performer in UK

commercial property over the past five years, and it remains

the sector to invest in. Rental growth remained strong in

2025, with the CBRE UK Monthly Index reporting 4.8%

growth – the highest of any commercial property segment.

Prime yields have largely stabilised over the past 12 months,

although the buyer pool for core logistics assets remains

relatively thin.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

25

Our marketplace

continued

Urban development

Annual prime regional office rental growth

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

2025202420232022202120202019201820172016

Average prime regional office rental growth

Rental value growth

90

100

110

120

130

140

150

2025202420232022202120202019201820172016

UK private residential UK commercial property

Market overview

The urban development market experienced some of the

most significant disruption during the pandemic. However,

we are now seeing a steady reversal of those trends, with

rising footfall as more businesses encourage employees

back into the office or make it mandatory to return full time.

This shift is reflected in residential rents, which increased by

3.9% in 2025 according to the ONS.

Demand for prime office space in regional cities has also

remained resilient, particularly for buildings with strong

ESG credentials. Prime office rents grew by 4.8% in 2025,

underscoring the continued appetite for high-quality,

sustainable workplaces that support modern ways

of working.

henryboot.co.uk26

Our integrated strategy

The group set a medium term strategy in 2021 to grow the size of the business

through a 40% increase in capital employed to over £500m and a targeted

focus on three key markets: Industrial and Logistics (I&L), residential, and urban

development, while maintaining ROCE within a 10–15% range.

Although we continue to make progress towards our

medium term objectives, persistent economic and political

uncertainty, which has led to a subdued market environment

have made it increasingly difficult to deliver against the

timeframe envisaged in 2021.

Looking ahead, we remain confident in the group’s

potential to deliver attractive returns for shareholders given

the increased depth and quality of opportunities within

our portfolio.

Long term

markets

Residential Industrial and Logistics Urban development

Value

delivery

Land promotion

Property investment

& development

Home building

Returns

Grow capital employed to over £500m + ROCE 10-15% pa

Responsible

approach

People strategy + ESG

Our performance Our planetOur placesOur partnersOur people

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

27

Our integrated strategy

continued

Our material issues

Material issues What are the risks? Where do we see opportunities?

The health and

wellbeing of

our people and

partners

We recognise the increasing pressures that poor

physical and mental health and wellbeing poses

to our society. Without strategic intervention

and an open and honest approach, we may face

the risk of increased employee absence and

burnout negatively impacting our productivity and

workplace culture.

Our Health and Wellbeing Strategy embeds a collaborative

relationship between the business and our people to promote

a positive and open culture relating to wellbeing. We aspire to

embed people-led leadership and review wellbeing at all levels

of our business to ensure that we continue to invest in and

protect our greatest asset – our people. Taking this approach

provides us with the opportunity to evolve our workplace culture

and attract a broader range of diverse talent to our business. We

will continue to engage with our people and partners to ensure

we are best responding to their diverse needs.

Equity, diversity

and inclusion

(EDI)

The built environment still struggles to attract

diverse talent. Continuing failure to do so poses

a risk of increased skills gaps (particularly in

operational roles) exacerbated by an ageing

workforce, a restricted workplace culture and

limited opportunities for growth.

We have made good progress in increasing our workforce

gender balance. We are, however, aware that there is still

significant work to be done on how we collate and analyse

our workforce data, engage our people and develop a culture

that allows everyone to thrive. Taking this approach presents

an opportunity to strengthen our business resilience, support

our growth aspirations, and better represent the communities

we serve.

Achieving our

NZC target and

adapting to

climate change

As our business aspires to grow and increase

productivity, there is a risk that our direct

GHG emissions could rise, having a damaging

environmental impact.

Our climate working group reports to senior management

and shares knowledge and promotes collaboration across the

business to reduce our direct GHG emissions. We continue

to adapt our approach to reduce our impact and, in doing

so, embed excellence in sustainability that meets market

and investor demand as well as attract talent to work for

our business.

Education

engagement

Skills and developing employment pathways is a

critical concern for national and local government.

It is increasingly difficult to attract diverse talent

to the built environment (particularly in operational

roles) and a failure to do so could lead to skills gaps

and reduced productivity and growth. Henry Boot

is reliant on a thriving and robust construction

sector and so this is a risk to our own growth.

Our group invests significant amounts of time and resources

into providing workplace encounters and experience to

a broad range of learners. We frequently engage and

collaborate with education leaders and specialists to identify

where we can create the greatest impact and aspire to

create excitement about the opportunities in our business

and industry.

Community

investment

We recognise the increasing challenges that our

communities face as a result of the legacy of

COVID-19, the cost-of-living crisis and economic

instability. The role of social value continues to

evolve and is an important consideration in both

public and private sector procurement. Failure to

demonstrate authentic investment and credentials

risks the ability to win work.

We are pleased to have exceeded our medium term target of

generating £1 million of value for our community partners.

We continue to invest significant funds, resources and

time to create long lasting and genuine social value in the

communities where we work.

A collaborative approach enables us to showcase a sincere

commitment and understand the issues our communities

face. As a result, we are well regarded for our social value

approach and performance.

Responsible

consumption

and nature

stewardship

Adapting to climate change goes beyond just

reducing GHG emissions and accounts for

how businesses use resources and protect the

natural world.

We rely on biodiversity and the natural world

to produce many of the materials required for

our buildings. A failure to limit our consumption

and protect natural habitats could affect our

ability to procure the materials we require and

remain compliant with evolving legislative and

regulatory demands.

We remain committed to protecting the habitats where

we work and source our materials. We continue to engage

partners and our supply chain to reduce our consumption

of materials and utilise internal subject matter and external

experts to shape our approach to ensure it is ambitious

and collaborative.

henryboot.co.uk28

1 2

Read more in Stakeholder

Engagement on page 85

What’s important to our stakeholders

What matters to our people

Henry Boot is evolving to thrive and grow. Our people

are at the heart of this journey and they want to play

a fulfilling role in supporting us as a forward thinking,

inclusive and collaborative business. They want us to

invest in their progression and wellbeing, and feel that

their voice is heard in our decision making. We regularly

collaborate and engage with them to ensure that our

direction is led and owned by the people of Henry Boot.

What matters to our communities

Communities across the UK remain resilient in the

face of mounting challenges but need investment

and partnership to navigate health, employment and

financial challenges. We have seized the opportunity

to play a more involved and collaborative role in

supporting communities where we work to address

their challenges. We are evolving our focus on tackling

and preventing homelessness and supporting the

development of skills and aspirations through working

with and learning from key partners. The places we

create are for the communities we serve and we want

to address the issues we know matter to them including

wellbeing, social mobility, good and inclusive economic

opportunity, and protecting their environments.

What matters to our investors

With the divestment of Henry Boot Construction

increasingly has a clear and coherent investment

proposition and is able to clearly communicate the

value we can create for our investors. Providing clear

communications is essential to build and maintain

strong investor relationships and we ensure we are

open and transparent, giving regular updates on our

strategic and commercial progress, and engage with

investors throughout the year on key developments and

addressing any concerns that may arise.

What matters to our customers

We are proud to deliver some of the UK’s most

sustainable places for a diverse range of customers. Our

customers have come to expect the highest standards

of our business as we live our values of putting people

first, doing the right thing, and being open to change.

We work closely through partnership to ensure that our

placemaking not only delivers exceptional sustainability

and wellbeing credentials, but also creates a positive

legacy to be enjoyed by generations to come.

4

3

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

29

Strategy

Performance

This report contains the following

alternative performance measures

(APMs): Including discontinued

operations; Underlying profit;

Return on Capital Employed; Net

Asset Value (NAV) per share; Net

(debt)/cash; Total Property Return;

Total Accounting Return; before

revised classification. More details

can be found on page 56.

Group risk key

1

External markets

2

Sustainability targets/

communications

3

Underperformance of

subsidiaries

4

Reputational incident

5

Loss of critical systems/data

6

Business continuity incident

7

Attract, retain and develop

workforce

8

Loss of key personnel

9

Health, safety and

environment incident

10

Execution

11

Failure to adhere to

regulation/legislation

12

Adverse changes in

regulation/legislation

13

Funding

14

Erosion of profit

15

Fraud

Objective

To grow capital

employed to £500m

To generate a ROCE

of 10–15%

Grow Hallam Land’s

plot sales

Grow HBD

development

completions

Grow investment

portfolio value

Grow Stonebridge

Homes house sales

Work towards a more

coordinated H&S

approach to ensure

our group is a safe

place to work

Medium term target

£500m

Medium term target

10–15%

Medium term target

c.3,500 pa

Medium term target

c.£200m

Medium term target

£150m

Medium term target

c.600 units

Medium term target

<395

Capital

employed

£446m

ROCE

7.5%

Plot

sales

3,957

Development

completions

£33m

Investment

portfolio

£120m

Unit

completions

185

Accident

incident rate

405

2025

£446m

2024

£443m

2023

£415m

2022

£399m

2021

£376m

2025

7.5%

2024

8.3%

2023

9.9%

2022

12.0%

2021

9.6%

2025

3,957

2024

2,661

2023

1,944

2022

3,869

2021

3,008

2025

£33m

2024

£188m

2023

£111m

2022

£83m

2021

£69m

2025

£120m

2024

£107m

2023

£113m

2022

£106m

2021

£126m

2025

185

2024

270

2023

251

2022

175

2021

120

2025

405

2024

683

2023

785

2022

202

2021

630

Performance

On track to grow capital

employed to over

£500m.

Performance

Lower operating profit

reduced ROCE to be out

of our target range.

Performance

2025 plot sales exceed

target with record sales

achieved.

Performance

Development

completions decreased

after taking a disciplined

approach to starting new

projects in response of

softer market conditions.

Performance

The value of the portfolio

increased due to the

retention of the schemes

within Origin.

Performance

Completions down

due to slower sales and

delays in opening new

sales outlets.

Performance

The group’s AIR

decreased in 2025,

reflecting robust systems

implemented in the year.

Aim for 2026

On track to continue to

grow capital employed.

Aim for 2026

We remain confident in

the group’s potential to

deliver attractive returns

over the medium term.

Aim for 2026

Fast tracked applications

to grow our consented

plots, positioning the

group to meet its target.

Aim for 2026

We have a strong near

term pipeline, are well

placed to respond

quickly to market

conditions, and are set to

build up the committed

programme this year.

Aim for 2026

Further enhancing

portfolio quality, with

retained developments

from Origin.

Aim for 2026

Focus on rebuilding

output in 2026 and the

growth trajectory in the

near term.

Aim for 2026

To reaffirm our strong

health and safety

approach while

refreshing the AIR target

to reflect the reduction in

construction activities.

Link to group risk

1

12

3

14

4

15

5 6 9

10

Link to group risk

1

12

3

14

4

15

5 6 9

10

Link to group risk

1 3 4 7 8

12

Link to group risk

1 3 4 7 8

12

Link to group risk

1 3

13 14

Link to group risk

1 3 4 7 8

12

Link to group risk

6 8 9

henryboot.co.uk30

Objective

To grow capital

employed to £500m

To generate a ROCE

of 10–15%

Grow Hallam Land’s

plot sales

Grow HBD

development

completions

Grow investment

portfolio value

Grow Stonebridge

Homes house sales

Work towards a more

coordinated H&S

approach to ensure

our group is a safe

place to work

Medium term target

£500m

Medium term target

10–15%

Medium term target

c.3,500 pa

Medium term target

c.£200m

Medium term target

£150m

Medium term target

c.600 units

Medium term target

<395

Capital

employed

£446m

ROCE

7.5%

Plot

sales

3,957

Development

completions

£33m

Investment

portfolio

£120m

Unit

completions

185

Accident

incident rate

405

2025

£446m

2024

£443m

2023

£415m

2022

£399m

2021

£376m

2025

7.5%

2024

8.3%

2023

9.9%

2022

12.0%

2021

9.6%

2025

3,957

2024

2,661

2023

1,944

2022

3,869

2021

3,008

2025

£33m

2024

£188m

2023

£111m

2022

£83m

2021

£69m

2025

£120m

2024

£107m

2023

£113m

2022

£106m

2021

£126m

2025

185

2024

270

2023

251

2022

175

2021

120

2025

405

2024

683

202

3

785

2022

202

2021

630

Performance

On track to grow capital

employed to over

£500m.

Performance

Lower operating profit

reduced ROCE to be out

of our target range.

Performance

2025 plot sales exceed

target with record sales

achieved.

Performance

Development

completions decreased

after taking a disciplined

approach to starting new

projects in response of

softer market conditions.

Performance

The value of the portfolio

increased due to the

retention of the schemes

within Origin.

Performance

Completions down

due to slower sales and

delays in opening new

sales outlets.

Performance

The group’s AIR

decreased in 2025,

reflecting robust systems

implemented in the year.

Aim for 2026

On track to continue to

grow capital employed.

Aim for 2026

We remain confident in

the group’s potential to

deliver attractive returns

over the medium term.

Aim for 2026

Fast tracked applications

to grow our consented

plots, positioning the

group to meet its target.

Aim for 2026

We have a strong near

term pipeline, are well

placed to respond

quickly to market

conditions, and are set to

build up the committed

programme this year.

Aim for 2026

Further enhancing

portfolio quality, with

retained developments

from Origin.

Aim for 2026

Focus on rebuilding

output in 2026 and the

growth trajectory in the

near term.

Aim for 2026

To reaffirm our strong

health and safety

approach while

refreshing the AIR target

to reflect the reduction in

construction activities.

Link to group risk

1

12

3

14

4

15

5 6 9

10

Link to group risk

1

12

3

14

4

15

5 6 9

10

Link to group risk

1 3 4 7 8

12

Link to group risk

1 3 4 7 8

12

Link to group risk

1 3

13 14

Link to group risk

1 3 4 7 8

12

Link to group risk

6 8 9

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

31

Strategy

Performance

Objective

Reduce directly

controlled GHG

emissions

Seek high levels

of employee

satisfaction and

engagement

Create a high

performance

culture led by a

range of training

opportunities

Medium term target

20% reduction

Medium term target

+40

(eNPS)

Medium term target

4 days

(per employee)

Direct GHG

emissions (tCO

2

e)

2,002

tonnes

Employee Net

Promoter Score

(eNPS)

+29 (eNPS)

L&D Interventions

delivered

(per employee)

3.4 days

2025

2,002

2024

2,989

2023

2,833

2022

2,930

2021

2,706

2025

+29

2024

+30

2023

+30

2022

+39

2021

+26

2025

3.4

2024

4.0

2023

4.0

2022

4.7

2021

2.5

Performance

Scopes 1 and 2 GHG

emissions reduced by

40% against our 2019

baseline.

Performance

Our eNPS remained very

good, and higher than

industry benchmarks.

Performance

The number of

L&D interventions

decreased last year

due to the completion

of the Management

Development

Programme in 2024.

Aim for 2026

To continue

implementing NZC

strategy across

the group.

Aim for 2026

To address feedback

which has arisen from

the survey.

Aim for 2026

To further implement

diverse training

opportunities that align

with our strategic goal

of creating a high-

performance culture.

Link to group risk

2

Link to group risk

7 8

Link to group risk

7 8

Group risk key

1

External markets

2

Sustainability targets/

communications

3

Underperformance of

subsidiaries

4

Reputational incident

5

Loss of critical systems/data

6

Business continuity incident

7

Attract, retain and develop

workforce

8

Loss of key personnel

9

Health, safety and

environment incident

10

Execution

11

Failure to adhere to

regulation/legislation

12

Adverse changes in

regulation/legislation

13

Funding

14

Erosion of profit

15

Fraud

This report contains the following

alternative performance measures

(APMs): Including discontinued

operations; Underlying profit;

Return on Capital Employed; Net

Asset Value (NAV) per share; Net

(debt)/cash; Total Property Return;

Total Accounting Return; before

revised classification. More details

can be found on page 56.

henryboot.co.uk32

Pictured: ARK, Markham Vale

33

Shareholder informationOverview Strategic report Governance Financial statements

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Strategy

Responsible Business Strategy –

Key achievements

In January 2022, we launched Phase 2 of our Responsible Business Strategy. Between 2022-2025, we created positive

impact for our community partners, reduced our environmental impact, and invested in our people and partners.

We were particularly proud to have achieved the following:

To learn more about our 2022-25 Responsible Business Strategy, please

read our separate Responsible Business Strategy Progress Report

Launched our Health and Wellbeing Strategy including the creation

of a Mental Health First Aider network.

Increased female representation in the workforce to 30%

Contributed over £1 million of value (financial and in-kind) to community,

charity and education partners with a key focus on tackling homelessness.

Contributed over 10,000 volunteer hours to a range of good causes

and community initiatives.

Engaged over 10,000 learners through careers education outreach

programmes and events.

Reduced our direct GHG emissions by 40%

(when compared with our 2019 baseline).

Invested in high impact partnerships with Business in the Community (BITC),

Crisis, the Royal Foundation, and the Confederation of British Industry (CBI).

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

henryboot.co.uk34

Strategy

People

Our strategy in action

Throughout 2025, Henry Boot underwent a period

of transition. Despite operational changes, our

commitment to our people - our greatest asset –

remains constant. They are vital to our long term

strategic success and sustainability.

Engaging and developing our workforce has never been

more crucial to our continued performance and growth.

We know our success relies on our people feeling

productive, fulfilled and engaged.

Our values remain at the centre of our People Strategy and

were co-created with our people. These have been central

to our decision making and actions as we collectively

navigated the changes in 2025.

• Put people first.

• Do the right thing.

• Be open to change.

Everyone at Henry Boot is responsible for, and works

hard to achieve, a workplace culture that is inclusive,

characterised by collaboration, diversity and which fosters

engagement at all levels to achieve our collective goals

and group strategy.

Agile working

We continually adapt our approach to

ensure our people can maintain a work-

life balance, which in turn supports

our business to thrive. We recognise

that not all roles will be able to achieve

the same level of agility, but we strive

to give managers the autonomy they

need to support their teams to find

the balance between individual agile

requirements and business needs.

While we invest in workplaces that

support collaboration and engagement

and encourage our people to

work collaboratively in person, we

respect that everyone has different

circumstances and requirements.

We support our people to make

considered decisions about when

and where they work, whilst always

meeting the needs of our customers

and supporting high-performing teams.

Employee engagement

survey

We undertake an annual engagement

survey, to understand employee voice

and sentiment and to respond to the

experiences and opinions shared.

We want our culture to prioritise our

people’s experience and place their

thoughts and ideas at the heart of

our decisions.

The survey and our findings focus on

the group as a whole. Whilst we can

look at our subsidiaries as separate

entities (which will be beneficial

for business specific feedback), we

have opted to look at the scoring

holistically as a group to push for

more collaboration, a collective

responsibility and a joined-up

approach to culture and engagement.

Our process

Our process facilitated by HIVE (our

employee engagement partner), saw

our annual Employee Engagement

Survey housing a framework of 39

questions that were used to measure

progress when compared with the

responses within our previous surveys

conducted over the last four years.

Some questions were based on those

posed previously to allow for statistical

analysis of change; however, other

questions were more focused in 2025

and specifically how we have, and

continue to, adapt to develop the

experience of working at Henry Boot.

• Our response rate in 2025 was 66%

which, whilst lower than in previous

years, is expected as we integrate

Stonebridge Homes into the wider

group engagement survey process

and ensure full understanding of

the group.

• Our eNPS score was 29, which is

considered ‘very good’ by our HIVE

employee engagement partners.

• Our Engagement Index, which

measures key elements such as

pride, loyalty and advocacy was

7.7 which maintains the same level

as 2024.

The survey results show that our

people have remained resilient, proud

to work for Henry Boot, and focused

on working as a team to maintain

delivering high standards for our

clients and partners. The employee

engagement survey results are

reflective of how our people felt during

a time of transition.

The survey results and feedback are

carefully reviewed by our Board, ExCo,

and Group Employee Forum to identify

any areas where there is scope for

increased engagement and support.

We undertook a series of engagement

sessions across the business following

our 2025 survey to further explore

the results and identify key areas. Our

senior management teams and forums

were involved and identified some

focus areas as follows:

• Enhance recognition and

transparency around

reward decisions

• Strengthen clarity around strategic

direction and priorities

• Review resourcing levels in relation

to workload expectations

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

35

Reward Strategy

2025 marked three years since the

launch of our Reward Strategy, a

long-term framework designed to

ensure that our people are fairly,

transparently and competitively

rewarded. Since its introduction in

2022, the strategy has continued

to underpin how we attract, retain

and develop talent across the group,

ensuring our approach to reward

remains aligned with our values and

expectations for behaviours.

In line with our commitment made

at launch, in 2025 we undertook a

full market benchmarking exercise

to evaluate whether our existing

pay bands and comparator groups

remained appropriate. Working

with independent market data from

Korn Ferry and Paydata, our analysis

confirmed that both comparator

sets remain fit for purpose, and

importantly, that our current salary

bands remain broadly in line with

market expectations. This validation

ensures that our structure continues to

support fairness, competitiveness and

consistency across the group.

With our foundations confirmed, our

focus now turns to the next priority

pay progression. This continues to

be one of the most frequent areas of

feedback from our people, who want

to better understand how they can

grow, develop and progress through

their pay band over time. Over the

coming year, we will begin engaging

with our colleagues across the group

to co-design a clear, accessible and

meaningful approach to progression,

ensuring it reflects performance,

capability and development while

remaining aligned with our values and

operational needs.

Our commitment remains the same:

a transparent, inclusive and equitable

reward structure that supports

long-term career development and

recognises the contribution and

performance of every individual.

Health and wellbeing

The health and wellbeing of our people

continues to be at the forefront of

our delivery.

At a time of mounting social and

economic pressure, we understand

how important it is to routinely engage

with our workforce to co-design

initiatives and benefits that meet the

diverse needs of a multi-generational

workforce.

Throughout the past year, we have

strengthened our strategic partnership

approach and continued to deliver

activity across our four wellbeing

pillars; physical, mental, digital and

financial wellbeing.

We are currently working to further

align our Health & Wellbeing Strategy

with the wider responsible business

agenda. This includes improving how

we use wellbeing data, refining how

we measure impact, and ensuring our

programmes reach the colleagues

who need them most. As part of this

work, we are refreshing our wellbeing

reporting and reviewing how our

internal resources, campaigns and

support offerings can be strengthened

for the year ahead.

We continue to invest in delivering

a diverse programme of wellbeing

activities, supported by our Mental

Health First Aider network, Employee

Assistance Programme, and a growing

suite of resources and training. Our

goal remains to foster a culture where

wellbeing is openly discussed, support

is easy to access, and our people feel

empowered to prioritise their health

both in and outside of work.

Our network of approximately 20

Mental Health First Aiders works in

close partnership to provide a bottom-

up source of support to our people and

partners to complement our existing

range of health-related benefits and

support including our Employee

Assistance Programme.

Financial wellbeing

Over the past year we have enhanced

our focus on financial wellbeing. In

late 2025, we launched a financial

wellbeing portal with Finwell,

specialists who offer practical,

accessible support on topics such

as budgeting, pensions, mortgages,

family finances and retirement

planning.

Rather than adopt a one-size-fits-all

approach, we have taken a targeted

and data-driven strategy to deploy our

financial wellbeing support. Analysis

of internal indicators, including usage

of EarlyPay (accessing pay in advance

of payroll during the pay month) and

other data sources, highlighted that

colleagues at Banner Plant were

experiencing increased financial

pressures. As a result, we prioritised

Banner Plant for the first phase of

our Finwell programme, ensuring our

support reached those who would

benefit most. A series of toolbox talks

were delivered across October 2025 to

give colleagues a chance to learn about

financial wellbeing, ask questions and

seek 1:1 support. Linked to this we also

launched a partnership with Tembo,

who provide mortgage and savings

advice.

Our aim is to foster financial

confidence, resilience and

empowerment, helping our people feel

more in control of their finances both

today and in the long term.

We operate the Henry Boot PLC Group

Stakeholder Pension Plan (defined

contribution pension), where the group

pays contributions to an independently

administered fund (AVIVA) based upon

a fixed percentage of employees’

salaries. Member benefits from the

plan are determined by the amount of

contributions paid by the group and

the member, the investment returns

on the investments made by the

individual based on their risk appetite

(with most people remaining in the

pre-selected Default Fund), and the

decisions made by the member on

Strategy

People

henryboot.co.uk36

retirement age and how they choose

to receive their retirement benefits.

We have implemented the UK’s auto-

enrolment pension requirements,

including re-enrolment on a triennial

basis, and our people are informed

of auto-enrolment and other pension

choices through our online portal and

our intranet, the Hub.

In October 2025, we granted share

options to all our people who met the

eligibility criteria for the Company

Share Option Plan (CSOP). We

also sent invitations to those who

were eligible to participate in the

group’s 2025 Sharesave scheme,

which allows people to contribute

a maximum of £500 per month to

one or a combination of current

Sharesave schemes. The Remuneration

Committee agreed to apply a 20%

discount on the share price, the

maximum discount allowed under the

HMRC rules.

Equity, diversity and

inclusion (EDI)

EDI remains a core priority for Henry

Boot, and over the last year we have

continued to embed our EDI principles

and activities across the group and

have shifted our focus from equality

to equity. A small but significant shift

from treating everyone the same

(equality) which fails to account for the

fact that people start from different

places and face different barriers; to

equity which focuses on individual

needs, ensuring a truly fair opportunity

for all, rather than merely assuming a

‘one-size-fits-all’ approach works.

Our employee-led EDI Working Group

has strengthened their focus, delivering

more targeted initiatives that respond

directly to colleague feedback. These

working groups continue to play a

vital role in shaping our culture and

informing our responsible business

commitments.

We were proud to see Family Matters,

one of our employee networks,

nominated for two external awards

this year, a significant recognition of

the group’s impact and colleague-led

innovation supporting parents,

guardians and caregivers within

the group.

This year’s data shows that our gender

pay gap has increased slightly, driven

largely by female senior leaders

voluntarily reducing their working

hours. While this movement reflects

the flexibility within our organisation,

it also highlights the ongoing need

to increase female representation at

senior levels, particularly in leadership

roles. Addressing this will continue

to be a key priority within the new

Responsible Business Strategy.

Looking ahead, EDI remains firmly

embedded in our long-term ambitions.

We are committed to increasing

diversity across all levels, improving

data quality and transparency,

strengthening inclusive leadership

capability, and ensuring every

colleague feels valued, respected and

able to contribute fully.

We aim to create a fair, accessible,

diverse and inclusive working

environment, while recognising the

challenges our sector has traditionally

experienced, particularly in relation

to gender, ethnicity and disability

representation and diversity. We want

to foster an inclusive culture, where

everyone feels a sense of belonging.

We believe our ambition will enable our

people to excel, feel they can be their

authentic selves at work, and drive long

term success, competitiveness and

sustainability.

Examples of the networks we are

members of and actively support are

Women in Property, the CBI People

and Skills Network and BITC Yorkshire

and Humber EDI Steering Group.

All employees*

145

345

Total

490

Senior managers**

5

15

Male Female

*Direct workforce (including Road Link

(A69) and Stonebridge Homes) as at

31 December 2025

** Statutory Directors, plus ExCo, that are

not on the PLC Board

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

37

Professional development

Delivering a workplace culture and

positive career experience that attracts

new and diverse talent and retains

experienced people will give us the

ability to compete successfully and

ensure long term sustainability.

We have a stable level of people

turnover as we focus on retaining

and developing our internal talent.

Our turnover in 2025 was 20.6%.

Whilst higher than previous years, this

turnover level is consistent with the

average in our sector and has been

largely driven by our recent business-

led changes. We continue to pay

close attention to engagement levels

and driving retention of key skills and

experience in our people through

providing development and growth.

Our directly employed headcount was

490 at the end of 2025.

We recruited a further four apprentices

in 2025, which brings our total

number of current apprentices to 19

with a further three interns and one

trainee. Our trainees and apprentices

are enrolled on formal courses of

education and supplement their

learning through in-house training and

experiential development.

Our preferred succession planning

method is one of in-house development

and growth; consequently, we also

have a number of experienced

employees enrolled on formalised

education programmes to enhance

their skills and knowledge, in

anticipation of career development and

promotion within the business in which

they operate.

Throughout 2025, five of our

people completed their education

programmes and one person

progressed onto the next level of their

employment programme. We have key

pathways in place for our apprentices

and trainees to ensure our talent

pipeline continues to flourish.

Throughout 2025, we continued

to bring our leadership population

together, building on their learning

from previous years and implementing

this in practice. Approximately 50

people came together regularly, in

support of development centred

on leading people through change,

uncertainty and complexity in the ever-

evolving world and environment in

which the business is operating.

We delivered 1,417 learning and

development days (an average of just

under 3.41 days per person) and there

was also an unquantifiable amount

of ad hoc learning and development,

which takes place daily at our sites,

offices, depots and via remote

engagement. The coming year will

see a more bespoke approach to

development, focused on the specific

needs of our business segments and

outputs from our people’s Performance

Development Review (PDR) processes

to ensure targeted intervention and

support where it is required.

Our PDR process places focus on

a quality, two-way conversation,

aimed at developing our people,

sustaining and improving performance

across the business. Our approach

is to encourage this conversation

throughout the year, through a process

of interim and midyear reviews, to

ensure our people know what is

expected of them and have support in

achieving this.

We continued our approach to

have more open and transparent

conversations about performance

against SMART objectives and

embedded our performance ratings

process, which focuses on both

operational tasks and values and

behaviours. In 2025, we rolled out a

new performance management system

called Appraisd. This facilitates our

PDR process in a more user-friendly

way, also enabling better reporting

and analysis to inform development

requirements and performance

outcomes.

This is an evolving process, which will

continually develop over the years

ahead through engagement with our

people across the whole business.

Health and safety

We have a robust history of ensuring

health and safety is central to how we

operate as a responsible business. The

group is diverse, and each division

fosters a health and safety-driven

culture, to ensure those people

affected by our undertakings are

protected from harm. Health and

safety performance is reported at

subsidiary level, in addition to group

level, to routinely ensure we remain

ethically and legislatively compliant

throughout the group.

Our performance

In 2025 the group’s Accident Incidence

Rate (AIR) was set at <750 (2024: 683).

It is pleasing to report the group target

was reduced in 2025 with an end of

year rate of 405.

Annual reports have been written

based on each subsidiary performance

and benchmarked against previous

reports. Each subsidiary has

performed resiliently during 2025,

despite the difficult market conditions

faced. Each report has resulted in

recommendations which have been

debated by each subsidiary executive

leadership team and approved for

investing during 2025 to ensure health

and safety remains embedded in how

the group operates.

The group, after a period due diligence,

is now the majority shareholder in

Stonebridge Homes. The group has

been involved in Stonebridge Homes

for over a decade and there will be a

period of integration into the group.

Stonebridge Homes operates a

mature health and safety management

system and processes to control their

undertaking, and their health and

safety performance will be monitored

and reported to the group.

Strategy

People

henryboot.co.uk38

We are pleased to report that

the group has retained various

accreditations throughout the year,

which supports the group’s drive to

operate ethically.

• ISO 45001 Occupational Health and

Safety Management System

• ISO 9001 (Quality Management)

standards

• ISO 14001 Environmental

Management

• Gold ROSPA award

Following the sale of Henry Boot

Construction, we will review the AIR

target to account for the decrease in

construction activities. This review

will ensure that our health and safety

benchmarks accurately reflect the

current scope of our operations and

maintain our commitment to high

standards across the group.

Our supply chain

Our partnership with our supply

chain is critical to our success and we

work hard to engage and collaborate

with all our suppliers and partners

to create and maintain long term

successful relationships. We have a

commitment to securing the services

of predominantly local subcontractors

and utilising local suppliers to minimise

the miles and emissions that working

with us produces and to generate

social value for the communities in

which we work. This continues to be

a strong and responsible approach for

our business.

Human rights

Our business is totally committed

to supporting and working to the

UN’s Guiding Principles on Business

and Human Rights. Protecting,

preserving, and respecting human

rights is fully embedded in our culture

and is fundamental to our values.

This commitment is reflected in and

demonstrated by our routinely updated

policies including:

• Anti-Bribery and Corruption

• Equity, Diversity and Inclusion

• Ethics

• Modern Slavery

• Rights to Work

• Whistleblowing

In addition to our policies, we aim to

demonstrate this commitment through

all our behaviour and actions towards

our people, suppliers, partners and the

communities in which we operate.

Modern slavery

We recognise that our industry

is vulnerable to the impacts of

modern slavery and therefore we

have implemented and embedded

a number of measures, which seek

to bring about greater transparency

and scrutiny into our various supply

chains in order to combat slavery and

trafficking activities.

We keep our Human Trafficking and

Slavery Statement (the ‘Statement’)

under regular review and set out the

activities we undertake to reduce the

risk of slavery and trafficking activities

being present within our business

operations. These measures include

enforcing our Modern Slavery Policy,

due diligence requirements, and

mandatory contract clauses seeking

compliance by our supply chain with

appropriate anti-slavery measures.

In addition, we have also engaged

NGOs and other supply chain bodies

to understand where our practices may

be strengthened.

We commit to collaborating closely

with our people, partners, contractors

and suppliers to monitor our

performance, share knowledge, and

maintain vigilance throughout our

business and supply chains.

Anti-bribery and

anti-corruption

Delivering our services with a zero-

tolerance approach to corruption in any

form is essential for us to demonstrate

our values, long-standing commitment

to ethical behaviour and integrity, and

to uphold our reputation and image.

Our Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy

sets out the standards expected of all

group employees and supply chain

members in relation to anti-bribery and

corruption and the Board has overall

responsibility for ensuring this policy

complies with the group’s legal and

ethical obligations and that everyone

in our organisation and supply

chain complies.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

39

Strategy

Partners

What this means

Our partners are the commercial partners we work

alongside. This includes our investors, customers,

supply chain, advisers, agents, professional and

membership bodies, regulators and other commercial

stakeholders.

What we have achieved

• We work hard to be considered as a partner of choice

for our three key markets – urban regeneration,

residential, and Industrial and Logistics.

• We service a diverse customer base across both the

public and private sectors with specialisms in joint

venture and partnership working capabilities.

Key highlights in 2025 included the growth of Origin, our

Industrial and Logistics partnership with Feldberg Capital,

which received further seeding to grow the site pipeline

enabling core delivery of developments with market-

leading ESG credentials such as BREEAM ‘Excellent’

and EPC ‘A’ rating. We also further consolidated our

relationship with Cambridge University as we announced

future development at Duxford (in collaboration with the

Imperial War Museum) and Goole Freeport.

We work closely with our supply chain

partners, regularly engaging them to

share resources and support, including

toolbox talks, bespoke mental health

awareness information from the

Lighthouse Charity, and guidance on

regulations and best practice.

We offer tailored and extensive

support to our contractors and sub-

contractors during turbulent market

conditions. We pay our suppliers

promptly and continue to compensate

our supply chain to ensure that we

pay and offer support fairly. We have

decided to delay membership with

the Living Wage Foundation until we

have integrated Stonebridge Homes

into our business in order to ensure our

approach is inclusive and consistent.

We have also routinely engaged

with our commercial partners and

supply chain to collaborate on

delivering significant social value and

employment and skills opportunities in

alignment with the strategic aspirations

of public sector customers and our

community partners.

We continue to maintain best practice

on the issue of modern slavery through

our Modern Slavery Policy (which is

routinely reviewed) and engagement

with our supply chain.

We also recognise our duty to

collaborate with industry partners on

shared challenges and opportunities.

We work closely with membership

organisations and BITC on people

related matters and placemaking.

We engage other members to share

knowledge and best practice and

are proud to be a contributor to the

BITC EDI Yorkshire and Humber

Steering Group.

We are on the Steering Committee of

the Yorkshire Climate Action Coalition

and routinely engage the UK Green

Building Council to share knowledge

and best practice and educate and

inform our people and partners

on the latest sector environmental

developments.

We routinely collaborate with our

supply chain and professional partners

across all areas of commercial

operations to identify opportunities to

protect the environment and support

the aspirations of our NZC Framework.

Our success depends on strong collaborative relationships with our

commercial partners. We work hard to be perceived as a partner

of choice across our key markets and invest our resources and

expertise in high-impact partnerships to deliver some of the UK’s

most sustainable placemaking for our customers.

henryboot.co.uk40

Case study

Northern Cornerstone Roundtable

As part of our involvement, we

have developed a good working

relationship with the Careers and

Enterprise Company (CEC) – the

national body for careers education in

England that oversees the functioning

of the Cornerstone groups for

each region.

Henry Boot and the CEC worked in

partnership to co-host a roundtable

for the Chairs and Strategic Hub leads

for the northern regions of England

– which was hosted at Henry Boot’s

head office in October 2025.

The roundtable, which was Chaired

by the CEC’s CEO John Yarham,

involved a rich discussion on how

businesses can best engage with

schools and further education

partners to provide a modern and

compelling work experience offer.

Challenges including skills gaps,

capacity for SMEs, and the evolution

of AI and digital skills were discussed

with participants sharing knowledge,

ideas, and support.

The Northern Cornerstone Forum will

now meet quarterly to ensure that

the northern regions have a joined-up

and cohesive approach to delivering

careers education that addresses

regional challenges and opportunities

– as well as influencing and informing

government policy.

Henry Boot are proud to be Co-Chairs of the South Yorkshire Cornerstone

group. Reporting to the South Yorkshire Careers Hub (part of the South

Yorkshire Mayoral Combined Authority), the group is a collection of businesses

and public sector organisations all committed to delivering meaningful and

inspiring careers education for local learners across the region.

Employers play a

vital role in creating

pathways for young

people into the

opportunities that

will shape the future

of our economy. The

Careers & Enterprise

Company values its

partnership with Henry

Boot and recognises

the leadership shown

by Jack Kidder as

Cornerstone Employer

Co-Chair for South

Yorkshire. Their

commitment to careers

education reects a

clear understanding

of how employers can

help prepare young

people for the realities

of modern work. By

bringing employers

together locally and

convening organisations

across the North, Henry

Boot is strengthening

the connection

between education

and the world of work,

equipping young people

with the condence,

connections and skills

to take their next step.”

John Yarham

CEO, The Careers &

Enterprise Company

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

41

Strategy

Places

What this means

We consider our places to be the communities in which

we work and the people in those communities whom

we work alongside. Our community partners include

charities, community organisations, local institutions

and education partners such as schools, colleges, and

universities.

What we have achieved

• We were proud to contribute over £300,000 across

2025 to a range of our charitable and community

partners, including financial donations and sponsorship,

employee fundraising, and expertise, time, resources

and services provided pro bono. This brings the

total value we have contributed since 2022, to over

£1 million.

• We have continued our partnership with Crisis and

our fundraising to support their work now exceeds

£70,000.

• Working with Crisis and local partners, we have

facilitated two property industry knowledge workshops

to explore how the property sector can better

collaborate to tackle and prevent homelessness.

Each year, we contribute a significant

amount of both financial and non-

financial value through donating our

time, resources, expertise, and funding

to support communities. Everything

we do is guided and inspired by the

communities we work alongside.

We take the time to speak with, and

listen to, communities and learn from

what matters to them. Whilst we offer

support to a range of issues important

to our people and partners, our

core focus areas for our community

investment are homelessness

and skills.

Working to tackle and prevent

homelessness strategically aligns with

our corporate purpose and proud

history of creating places and homes.

We are developing our knowledge

of the issue and how it interlinks

with a broad range of social factors

including poverty, housing, poor

health, unemployment and childhood

trauma. In addition to our partnership

with Crisis, we also support a range

of other partners across the areas in

which we work to ensure our people

are connected to the issue at a local

level. We also maintain our strong

working relationships with Landaid and

Homewards – the Royal Foundation’s

homelessness programme.

We work hard to inspire the next

generation of talent to enjoy fulfilling,

productive, and meaningful careers –

in our industry and beyond. We work

with a diverse range of education

partners across the UK and in 2025

directly impacted over 3,000 learners

through a wide range of careers

education activity and initiatives,

including work experience, site visits,

career sessions and mentoring. We

continued to develop our partnership

with the CEC through supporting the

Cornerstone groups (co-chairing the

South Yorkshire group) and aligning our

approach with the Employer Standards.

In 2025, we contributed over 3,500

volunteering hours to a wide range of

charitable, community, and education

partners throughout the year and

saw excellent collaboration and

teambuilding take place for our people

and partners on these opportunities.

We invest in community partnerships to create genuine and

impactful social value for the communities we work alongside and

are proud of the impact we achieve. For us, social value is not a tick

box exercise but a genuine opportunity to create meaningful impact

for communities and an important legacy for the places we create.

henryboot.co.uk42

Case study

How the property sector can collaborate

to tackle and prevent homelessness

Whilst we are one business, we

recognised the positive impact we

could have through leveraging our

influence and network to encourage

and support other businesses

and commercial partners to join

the mission.

In July 2025, Henry Boot and Crisis

partnered to invite leading voices

from across the property sector

to come together at the Crisis

Skylight in central London to share

ideas and opportunities for better

collaboration.

The event was well attended and

supported by contacts from across

the sector. The attendees generously

shared their ideas and experiences as

well as hearing from Crisis about the

work of the Alliance and its impact

on those who have experienced, or

been at risk of, homelessness.

Henry Boot and Crisis continue to

partner to collect views and ideas

from sector representatives as well

as public and third sector experts. A

follow up roundtable took place in

Birmingham in November 2025 with

a further event planned to take place

in Manchester in early 2026.

Henry Boot and Crisis will then work

together to publish the findings in

order to encourage and inform the

industry of the positive steps we can

take to work together on this issue.

In 2024, we became signatories of Crisis’ Homelessness Covenant. This has since evolved into the Homelessness

Alliance – a framework of recommendations for allied businesses to tackle and prevent homelessness.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

43

Strategy

Planet

What this means

Protecting the environment and adapting to climate

change is essential for our business to embed long term

resilience, meet the needs of our stakeholders, and

protect the planet we share for future generations.

We take a long term approach to addressing the impacts

of climate change. In delivering our commercial services,

we strive to reduce our environmental impact, minimise

our use of resources and reduce waste, whilst enhancing

local environments, biodiversity and natural ecosystems.

What we have achieved

• Reduced our direct GHG emissions by 40% when

compared to our 2019 baseline.

• Reduced our electricity usage by 80% and our gas

usage by 28% when compared to our 2019 baseline.

We remain committed to achieving

NZC for our direct GHG emissions

by 2030. In 2025, we achieved

significant reductions and our direct

emissions were 40% lower than our

2019 baseline. These reductions have

been achieved through the adaptation

of our processes, improving the

environmental performance of our

workplaces, and further implementing

as a substitute fuel source across our

fleet and sites. While not a perfect

long term solution, the use of HVO

does create significantly lower GHG

emissions than diesel, and we will

utilise this fuel source in the short

term to address our key sources

of emissions.

Phase 3 of our Responsible

Business Strategy will provide

further information on our updated

decarbonisation trajectory that

has been produced with support

from Nature Positive (part of the

RSK Group). This will include our

commitment to publishing a Climate

Transition Plan that will provide further

information about the methodology

used to establish our decarbonisation

and associated targets and how this

methodology is used to demonstrate

performance progress. It will also

detail our plans to reduce our indirect

emissions and take a holistic approach

to climate change adaptation.

We invest in our property portfolio,

and, through ongoing maintenance

of existing infrastructure, new

infrastructure and employee-led

behaviour change, we have seen our

energy requirements fall. We will

continue to collaborate closely with

our people and occupiers to ensure

that our buildings are energy efficient

and utilise sustainable methods of

heating, cooling and lighting.

We continue to invest in the energy

performance of our investment

portfolio and take careful

consideration of where performance

can be improved through adaption or

re-development. The current average

EPC rating for the properties in the

portfolio is B.

Henry Boot Construction continued

to perform strongly on waste

management with 98% of all waste

diverted from landfill through a

dedicated waste management process.

We chose to pause the implementation

of our Waste Management Programme

whilst we implement Stonebridge

Homes into the group. It is important

that we guide reductions in both

site and non-site-based waste.

Incorporating and aligning data

and performance measures at

Stonebridge Homes will enable us to

be comprehensive and successful in

reducing waste and resource use.

We continue to adopt a forward-

thinking approach to nature

stewardship and comply with

the legislative requirements of

the Environment Act. Our people

are developing their expertise in

collaboration with our partners to

deliver biodiversity net gain across our

commercial schemes.

We continue to routinely collaborate

with like-minded businesses,

membership organisations and industry

bodies on our approach to climate

change adaptation. We are proactive

members of the UK Green Building

Council and are on the Steering

Committee of the Yorkshire Climate

Action Coalition.

We are a business that is committed to reducing our impact on the

natural environment and embedding sustainability and innovation

into the work we deliver.

To learn more about our approach to climate change

adaptation, see our TCFD report on pages 68 to 83

henryboot.co.uk44

Case study

Yorkshire climate action dinner

Over the last five years, the

organisation has regularly connected

businesses of all sizes across

the region to share knowledge,

challenges, best practice and

to create a network focused on

collaboration and partnership.

We joined the network in 2020

and then became members of the

Steering Committee in 2024. In that

time, we have led working groups,

hosted a green skills session and

workshop, and contributed time and

resource to helping the network be as

effective as possible.

In March 2025, the Steering

Committee co-organised and

sponsored a climate action dinner to

celebrate the impact of the network

over five years and facilitate a

conversation around how businesses

can best work together to help the

region adapt to climate change in

the future.

Attended by representatives

from regional businesses and

organisations, the dinner featured

guest speakers from the Steering

Committee and the National Wealth

Fund covering a range of topics

including technical expertise,

resilience, public and private sector

partnership, and investment.

Positive feedback was received from

attendees and the network is now

collaborating with the Yorkshire and

Humber Climate Commission to

explore how the voice and expertise

of business can be central to regional

policymaking and engagement.

The Yorkshire Climate Action Coalition was established in early 2020 by Deloitte, Walker Morris LLP, and Leeds

University to connect businesses in response to growing demand for decarbonisation.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

45

Segmental review

Land promotion

Iain MacSween

Hallam Land Management

During the period, Hallam Land sold a record

number of residential plots, experiencing

strong demand from housebuilders for our

prime deliverable sites.”

A record 3,957 residential plots were

sold (2024: 2,661 plots), monetising

the value it has created and resulting

in the business exceeding its full year

financial target. The average gross

profit per plot was £11,414 (2024:

£10,155), which is ahead of the five year

average of £10,187.

During the period, Hallam Land

experienced strong demand for

prime deliverable sites, with sales

producing an average ungeared

internal rate of return of 27% p.a. Key

disposals included:

• 290 residential plots at

Sittingbourne, Kent, to Taylor

Wimpey. Hallam Land entered into a

promotion agreement in 2017 before

submitting an outline planning

application in November 2022.

After an initial refusal, consent was

successfully secured on appeal in

July 2024.

• 112 residential plots at Yalding,

Kent, to Fernham Homes. Hallam

Land purchased the freehold site

in 2018 and submitted a planning

application in November 2023 in

line with the draft allocation. An

appeal was subsequently made in

May 2024 on the basis of non-

determination and approval secured

in December 2024.

• 1,270 residential plots at Tamworth,

Staffordshire. In 2016, Hallam Land

reached an agreement with the

landowners to promote the 237

acre site. Due to the site being

located on the border between

North Warwickshire and Tamworth,

duplicate planning applications

were initially submitted in 2018.

The site gained outline planning

permission in June 2025 and was

subsequently sold to Persimmon in

November 2025.

UK greenfield land values softened

slightly by 1.4% in 2025 according to

Savills Research. Positive changes to

the planning system, following the

government’s revision to the NPPF,

have significantly increased our

ability to secure outline consents. In

anticipation of this, an early decision

was made to increase resources within

Hallam Land and fast track a number

of planning applications. During the

period, 4,159 plots secured planning

consent, across 17 sites, of which 7

sites were won on appeal. Following

this, plots with planning permission (or

a Resolution to Grant, subject to S106)

increased to 9,024 (2024: 8,822).

Hallam Land continues to accelerate

applications, submitting 11,083 plots

in 2025, across 37 sites (2024: 4,447

plots). As a result of this sustained

momentum, a total of 19,580 plots

currently remain within the planning

system, awaiting determination

(2024: 13,146 plots). A similar level

of applications as in 2025 has been

identified, which are expected to be

submitted for planning over the next

12 months. All of this activity not only

positions the group well to meet its

medium term strategic target of selling

3,500 plots pa, but also to grow sales

beyond that level.

The total land bank marginally grew to

105,854 plots as at 31 December 2025

(2024: 104,787 plots), securing 15 new

sites which have the potential to deliver

c.5,000 plots. Moving forward, the

primary focus will remain on continuing

to increase sales and secure planning

permissions, whilst growing the overall

portfolio at a modest pace.

There is significant latent value in the

group’s strategic land portfolio, which

is held as inventory at the lower of

cost or net realisable value. As such,

no uplift in value is recognised in the

balance sheet relating to any of the

9,024 plots with planning and any gain

will only be recognised on disposal.

As of 15 March, Hallam Land has

exchanged on 465 plots for completion

during 2026, as well as having an

additional 2,181 plots under offer.

Hallam Land performed strongly in 2025, delivering a 35% increase

in operating prot of £32.9m (2024: £24.3m).

henryboot.co.uk46

Residential land plots

With planning permission

In planning Future Totalb/f granted sold c/f

2025 8,822 4,159 (3,957) 9,024 19,580 77,250 105,854

2024 8,501 2,982 (2,661) 8,822 13,146 82,819 104,787

2023 9,431 1,014 (1,944) 8,501 13,468 79,003 100,972

2022 12,865 435 (3,869) 9,431 12,297 73,976 95,704

2021 15,421 452 (3,008) 12,865 11,259 68,543 92,667

with Iain MacSween, Managing Director of Hallam Land

Q

Hallam Land has grown

significantly over the last five

years and now has one of the

largest land portfolios in the

UK. What will you be focusing

on to drive value from the

portfolio?

A

Our priority at Hallam Land is

to turn a very strong pipeline

into planning consents that are

deliverable and commercially

sound. We are focused on the

sites that benefit most in terms

of opportunity from the current

NPPF and offer the best returns,

on managing capital more

carefully and ensuring we keep

momentum behind applications

and disposals. Much of the value

lies in doing the basics well:

clear preparation, good robust

applications and a rigorous

sales process. With improved

data from D365, we can make

decisions earlier and maintain

consistency across the portfolio.

Q

The planning landscape in the

UK has changed significantly

over the last 18 months. What

do you see as the biggest

opportunities and challenges in

this evolving environment?

A

Reforms have created a

more positive window for

securing consents, and that

is a clear opportunity for us.

The challenge is that the land

market is, in places, suppressed,

so buyers remain selective

and pricing reflects that. We

also need to navigate appeals,

infrastructure constraints and

the transition to new policy.

Our role is to manage these

pressures pragmatically, keep

projects moving, and make

sure the consents we secure

are the best in class in terms of

deliverability and commerciality

to appeal most to buyers.

Q

What kind of culture do you

want to build or reinforce

within the organisation?

A

Hallam Land already has a

strong reputation for being

professional, knowledgeable

and steady. I want to reinforce

that, while encouraging a more

open, collaborative and modern

way of working within the team.

People should feel trusted to get

on with their jobs, supported

when needed, and clear about

what’s expected of them.

We will continue investing in

development, wellbeing, and the

basics of good communication.

In short: a culture that is

practical, respectful and focused

on doing things properly.

Q

How will you strengthen

relationships with landowners,

local authorities and

community stakeholders under

your leadership?

A

The starting point is to be

consistent and straightforward

in how we deal with people.

For landowners, that means

clarity, regular communication

and sticking to commitments.

For local authorities and

communities, it means early

engagement, honest dialogue

and well-prepared proposals that

respond to local issues. We will

continue to use our experience

to navigate the complexity of

the process, while being visible

and constructive throughout.

Strong relationships come from

reliability over time, and that

remains absolutely central to

how we work.

Q&A

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

47

Segmental review

Property investment

and development

Hamer Boot

HBD

Our Origin JV performed well in 2025,

accelerating the delivery of Grade A

Industrial and Logistics space. With the

initial three assets completed and securing

lettings, we have replenished the JV with

three more prime sites from our committed

development programme.”

The results of Stonebridge Homes have

been reclassified from the property

investment and development segment

to be reported within home building,

and the prior year restated.

According to the CBRE Monthly Index,

commercial property values increased

by 1.4% in 2025. Industrial property

continues to deliver the highest growth

with capital values up 2.5% during

the period ahead of retail up 1.8%,

and offices down 0.9%. Rental value

growth also remains strongest for the

industrial sector at 4.8% in 2025, with

yields up marginally over the period.

I&L, a sector where long term growth

is supported by several structural

drivers, experienced a further steady

recovery in 2025 with annual occupier

take up 1% and the overall vacancy rate

declining modestly to 7.6%, according

to Newmark. Occupational demand

remains broad-based but is led by

logistics and e-commerce operators,

alongside new international entrants

and defence-related manufacturers.

Speculative development remains

subdued, with starts at their lowest

level since 2017, and stronger

demand for modern, energy efficient

space means that rental growth is

concentrated in new high quality units.

In 2025, HBD completed schemes

with a total GDV of £119m (our share:

£33m GDV), after taking a disciplined

approach to new projects in the

current subdued environment (2024:

our share: £188m GDV). 32% of the

developments have been pre-let or

pre-sold. This included three schemes

totalling 449,000 sq ft (our share:

£25m) within Origin, an I&L JV with

Feldberg Capital, which all completed

on time and budget:

1. SPARK, Walsall (phase one), two

units totalling 270,000 sq ft on a

13 acre site just off the M6 (Total

GDV: £52m).

2. INTER, Welwyn Garden City, a

71,000 sq ft scheme on a three acre

site on Tewin Road near Junction 4

of the A1(M) (Total GDV: £28m).

3. ARK, Markham Vale, completed

four units totalling 107,000 sq ft on a

six acre site (Total GDV: £20m).

All three of these projects are

attracting a good level of occupier

interest, with a total of 53,000 sq ft

let or under offer as of 15 March 2026.

This includes a 17,000 sq ft unit at Ark

let to Capital Angling, an 18,000 sq ft

unit let to Perfect Group at Inter and an

18,000 sq ft unit under offer at Spark.

HBD completed on a further four

development and land sales (our

share: £8m), which included a site at

Aberdeen Bridge of Don, which has

planning for 420 residential units, and a

20,000 sq ft self storage development

at Melton Road, Leicester. A further

land sale was completed at Markham

Vale and a pre-let development at

Southend, which was retained within

the group’s investment portfolio.

Property investment and development, which is now solely made up

of HBD, delivered an operating prot of £9.4m (2024: £14.9m).

henryboot.co.uk48

2025 Completed schemes

Scheme

GDV

(£m)

HBD share

of GDV

(£m)

Commercial

(‘000 sq ft)

Residential

(Units) Status

Industrial and Logistics

Origin, INTER, Welwyn Garden City 28 7 71 – Speculative – 25% let

Origin, SPARK, Walsall (phase one) 52 13 271 – Speculative – 7% under offer

Origin, ARK Markham Vale (phase one) 20 5 107 – Speculative – 16% let

100 25 449 –

Land & other

Aberdeen, Bridge of Don 12 1 – 420 Pre-sold

Leicester, Melton Road 2 2 20 – Pre-sold

Southend 4 4 16 – Pre-sold

Markham Vale 1 1 31 – Pre-sold

19 8 67 420

Total for the year 119 33 516 420

In line with our ambition to scale

up Origin, we added three further

schemes with a combined GDV of

£56m (our share: £14m) into its pipeline

in December 2025:

1. SPARK, Walsall (phase two): A six

acre site with a £25m GDV, located

at junctions 9 and 10 of the M6.

Detailed planning consent was

secured in September 2025 for

101,000 sq ft across three units.

2. APTUS, Preston: The second phase

of the scheme near junction 31a of

the M6, previously held in JV with

Barnfield Construction Limited, was

transferred to Origin in December

  1. The £22m GDV scheme totals

107,000 sq ft across three units.

3. ARK, Markham Vale (phase two): A

three acre site adjacent to junction

J29A of the M1, with a £9m GDV. In

October 2025, a resolution to grant

planning permission was secured for

a 54,000 sq ft unit.

Construction on each development has

now commenced and is on programme

and budget, with delivery from H2 26.

HBD also benefits from development

management fees with the potential

for performance fees.

The group’s committed development

programme now totals a GDV of £66m

(our share: £18m GDV) and is currently

48% pre-let, pre-sold or under offer.

2026 Committed programme

Scheme

GDV

(£m)

HBD share

of GDV

(£m)

Commercial

(‘000 sq ft)

Residential

(Units) Status Completion

Industrial

Origin, APTUS 22 5 107 – Speculative Q4 26

Origin, Markham, ARK (phase two) 9 2 54 – Speculative Q3 26

Origin, Walsall SPARK (phase two) 25 6 101 – Speculative Q4 26

Preston, APTUS 10 5 150 – Pre-sold Q4 26

Total for the year 66 18 412 0

% sold or pre-let 15% 48%*

*This includes space under offer at Origin – 01/03/26.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

49

Investment portfolio – key stats

Dec 2025 Dec 2024

Market values - inc. share of JV's £119.8m £107.4m

Total area – '000 sq ft¹ 706 767

‘Topped-up’ net initial yield 5.2% 5.5%

Reversionary yield 6.2% 6.7%

WAULT to expiry² 9.7 years 9.7 years

Occupancy

3

97% 94%

1

Total completed investment property.

2

Weighted average unexpired lease term (WAULT) on commercial properties.

3

As a percentage of like-for-like completed property portfolio estimated rental value (ERV).

The investment portfolio, including our share of joint ventures, has continued

to outperform the wider market, with a total property return of 11.1% for 2025,

which was ahead of the total return from the CBRE UK Monthly Index (7.1%). Since

2022, HBD has focused on recycling capital from its investment portfolio rather

than acquiring new investments. This continued in 2025, with HBD completing

on four sales, for a total of £17.7m at an average 12% premium to December 2024

book values. This includes TWO45, Skelmersdale, where we secured planning for

245,000 sq ft of I&L space, representing a 66% increase on the original building.

The sale to Garbe, a German fund, for £9.5m was completed in June 2025 and

generated an ungeared IRR of 25% p.a.

The total value of the investment portfolio (including our share of completed

JV investment properties and assets held for sale) increased to £119.8m (2024:

£107.4m), largely as a result of the addition of the finished schemes within Origin.

On a like-for-like basis, capital values increased by 2.0%, with rental value growth

of 2.8% for the I&L assets, which represent 81% of the total portfolio by value.

During the period, like-for-like occupancy remained high at 97% (2024: 94%),

or 75% including the recently completed Origin developments. The weighted

average unexpired lease term is now 9.7 years (8.5 years to first break). Currently,

95% of the IP has an EPC rating of ‘C’ or higher, (76% being rated ‘A’ or ‘B’), with

the remainder of the portfolio allocated for either redevelopment, refurbishment

or sale in the short to medium term.

Post period end, in March 2026, HBD completed the sale of a supermarket and

three adjoining retail units anchored by Waitrose, in Warminster, to a UK real

estate investment trust for £8.6m. The sale represents a net initial yield of 6.6%

and a 7.5% premium to the 31 December 2025 book value.

Segmental review

Property investment

and development

HBD has optionality on a strong near

term pipeline, which includes the

landmark £1bn Golden Valley, located

adjacent to GCHQ in Cheltenham.

In July 2025, the scheme received

outline planning permission for around

1m sq ft of prime commercial space,

including IDEA, the new 160,000 sq ft

National Cyber Innovation Centre, as

well as 576 residential units of various

tenures. The first phase (£98m GDV)

is expected to commence in H2 2026,

having now agreed terms with several

occupiers for around half the space.

The scheme is an important public

private partnership, being part of the

UK Government’s Modern Industrial

Strategy and has secured a £104m

funding package, including £20m

direct from the Government.

HBD’s total future development

pipeline has grown to £1.7bn GDV

(our share: £1.4bn GDV). All these

opportunities sit within the group’s

three key markets of I&L (55%),

Urban Commercial (26%) and Urban

Residential (19%). Last year, the

pipeline was replenished, improving its

quality with schemes such as ‘Duxford

AvTech’ (£120m GDV). The project

totals 435,000 sq ft and is set to

create a technology campus dedicated

to developing low and zero carbon

aircraft technology at IWM Duxford,

eight miles south of Cambridge

city centre. HBD is targeting high

sustainability credentials, including

BREEAM Excellent and an EPC A+

Rating. Additionally, in September

2025, FREEPORT 36, Goole (Phase

one: £130m GDV), in partnership

with St John’s College Cambridge,

secured outline planning to develop

a 5.5m sq ft high quality, sustainable

industrial and manufacturing park, with

buildings ranging from 40,000 sq ft to

1m sq ft.

henryboot.co.uk50

Segmental review

Home building

Ed Hutchinson

Stonebridge Homes

We are committed to delivering an

outstanding customer experience and we

are investing in our people and systems to

strengthen sales capability and customer

engagement .”

According to Nationwide, UK house

prices increased by 0.6% during

2025 on a seasonally adjusted basis.

Most regions recorded modest

house price growth, with Northern

England continuing to outperform the

South. Whilst there was an increase

in new home registrations in 2025,

completions remain 39% below the

2022 peak according to the National

House Building Council.

Stonebridge Homes completed 185

homes (166 private/19 affordable)

(2024: 270) with a private average

selling price of £403,000 (2024:

£402,000). Completions were

materially below our expectation of

240-250 units due to softer trading

conditions and a slower than planned

outlet opening profile, reflecting

delays in securing detailed planning

permission. As a result, Stonebridge

Homes operated from an average of

nine outlets in 2025, compared with

a budgeted 12. In addition, around

30 completions moved into 2026

as build schedules were delayed

by utility connections and changes

in planning conditions. However,

selling prices were broadly in line

with our expectations, with the level

of incentives remaining stable during

the year.

The net private reservation rate per

active outlet per week decreased

by 18% to 0.37 (2024: 0.45). There

were no bulk sales in either period, as

this approach does not form part of

Stonebridge Homes’ sales strategy.

Whilst many of our customers remain

cautious, sales rates were also affected

by several sites nearing the end of

their sales programme and therefore

offering a reduced product range.

Revenue was £69.7m (2024: £88.1m),

excluding part exchanged homes. The

lower level of completions against our

expectations was the primary driver

of an operating loss of £(9.2)m (2024:

£1.9m operating profit). Performance

was also impacted by cost overruns

related to adverse ground conditions

and additional costs associated with

extended site durations due to slower

sales rates. In response, we have

increased contingency within schemes

to better reflect project delivery times.

In 2025, 1,031 plots were added

to Stonebridge Homes’ land bank

across five sites, including Whitby,

Carlton and Kingston Village, which

together have the potential to deliver

846 homes. Stonebridge Homes’

total owned and controlled land bank

now stands at 2,572 plots (2024:

1,726). Following several successful

applications during the year, plots with

full planning consent increased to 842

(2024: 531 plots), representing 4.6

years’ supply based on completions

in the last 12 months. During 2026,

selective land disposals will still

provide us with the land supply needed

to maintain our ambition to scale up

output in line with our medium term

growth ambitions.

In January 2025, we increased our

ownership of Stonebridge Homes

to 62.5% as part of the transaction

agreed in December 2024 to

take full ownership by the end of

  1. The deal is structured to

complete in three tranches, with the

total purchase price linked to the

performance of Stonebridge Homes

over this period. Bearing in mind

the recent underperformance, the

final aggregated payment to take

full control is likely to be materially

less than originally anticipated. Post

period end, in February 2026, we

increased our ownership further to

75%. The third and final tranche to

acquire the remaining 25% is expected

to be completed in January 2030,

with consideration payable in 2030

and 2031.

Stonebridge Homes’ results have been reclassied from property

investment and development to be reported as home building.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

51

Given our market positioning, we are

committed to delivering an outstanding

customer experience alongside the

premium homes Stonebridge Homes

delivers. We are investing in our people

and systems to strengthen sales

capability and customer engagement.

We are also providing direct support

from our group function teams across

several key services to ensure teams

are coordinated and collaborative.

We differentiate our product by

placing emphasis on the design

and layout of our homes, but our

improvement plan recognises the need

to strengthen operational efficiency,

ensuring that our processes and

systems are aligned with our strategic

priorities. We will strengthen the

quality, consistency and timeliness of

data across the business to improve

the link between cost management,

procurement, build programmes

and sales.

As part of the integration into the

group, using the skills of Hallam

Land, we are also undertaking a

comprehensive review of Stonebridge

Homes’ land portfolio. This is expected

to result in selective disposals and

a rebalancing of the land bank to

reduce risk, improve asset turn, and

better align site size and scale with our

premium homes strategy and medium

term growth ambitions.

Trading at the start of 2026 shows

encouraging signs of improvement,

with stronger year on year sales rates.

Over the 11 weeks to 15 March 2026,

our private net reservation rate was

0.43, compared with 0.34 in the

same period last year. There has also

been a corresponding reduction in

cancellation rates and the use of part

exchange. The total forward order

book at 15 March 2026 comprised 96

units (2025: 108) with a value of £36.1m

(2025: £33.6m).

Construction

BP and Road Link (A69) both traded in

line with management expectations.

Road Link’s PFI contract is set to expire

at the end of March 2026.

On 31 December 2025, the group

completed the sale of Henry Boot

Construction to PWS, a new company

formed by its management team,

for £4.0m via a vendor-funded loan.

Additional overage may be payable

depending on future performance. As

a result of the transaction, Henry Boot

Construction’s results for the current

and comparative period have been

reclassified and disclosed separately

from the rest of the business as

discontinued operations. In 2025,

including the initial profit recognised

on disposal, Henry Boot Construction

delivered an operating profit of £2.7m

(2024: loss of £2.3m). With 100% of its

2026 turnover already secured, Henry

Boot Construction is well positioned

to start repayment of the vendor

loan. The group wishes our former

colleagues all the best for the future.

The group’s construction segment, which includes Banner Plant (BP) and

Road Link (A69), delivered an operating prot of £6.7m (2024: £7.2m).

Segmental review

Home building

henryboot.co.uk52

Financial review

Summary of financial performance

2025

£’m

2024

£’m

Change

%

Total revenue

Property investment and development 69.0 69.2 –

Home building 69.7 88.1 -21

Land promotion 83.0 78.0 +6

Construction – continuing operations 29.8 30.8 -3

251.5 266.1 -5

Construction – discontinued operations 55.5 49.7 11

307.0 315.8 -3

Operating profit/(loss)

Property investment and development 9.4 14.9 -36

Home building (9.2) 1.9 -584

Land promotion 32.9 24.3 35

Construction – continuing operations 6.7 7.2 -7

Central overheads (9.4) (11.8) -20

30.4 36.5 -17

Construction – discontinued operations 2.7 (2.3) -217

33.1 34.2 -3

Net finance cost and other (4.0) (3.5) -14

Profit before tax 29.1 30.7 -5

Profit before tax - continuing operations 26.5 33.0 -20

Profit before tax - discontinued operations 2.6 (2.3) -213

Profit before tax 29.1 30.7 -5

The group navigated another

challenging year in 2025. Total

profit before tax decreased 5% to

£29.1m (2024: £30.7m), or £27.5m

(2024: £29.4m) on an underlying

basis. While market activity remains

subdued, the fundamentals of our

three key markets remain compelling,

and we are well placed to benefit from

the significant opportunities we have

been building up within our portfolio,

supported by a strong balance

sheet and a disciplined approach

to investment.

On 31 December 2025, the

group completed its sale of HBC

Construction Limited, formerly Henry

Boot Construction Limited (HBC), part

of the group’s Construction segment.

Results of HBC are classified as a

discontinued operation in both the

current and prior year.

Land promotion (Hallam Land):

Segment operating profit £32.9m

(2024: £24.3m). During the year,

we disposed of a record number of

residential plots at 3,957 (2024: 2,661)

at an average gross profit per plot

of £11.4k (2024: £10.2k) reflecting

continued demand for our high

quality sites.

The fundamentals of our three key markets

remain compelling, and we are well placed to

benet from the signicant opportunities we

have been building up within our portfolio.”

Darren Littlewood

Chief Financial Officer

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

53

Home building (Stonebridge):

Segment operating loss £9.2m

(2024: £1.9m profit). Stonebridge

Homes completed 185 homes (2024:

270). Due to softer trading conditions

and a slower outlet opening profile

as a result of delays in securing

detailed planning, completions were

significantly below our expectation.

Property investment and

development (including HBD):

Segment operating profit £9.4m

(2024: £14.9m). After taking a

disciplined approach to new projects in

the current subdued environment, HBD

completed schemes with a total gross

development value (GDV) of £119m

(our share: £33m GDV) (2024: our

share: £188m GDV), of which 32%

has been pre-let or pre-sold. Fair

value gains on investment property

were £2.1m (2024: £4.5m). We also

recorded profits on sales of investment

properties and assets held for sale

of £0.5m and £0.9m, respectively

(2024: £0.1m, £nil).

Construction:

External sales £85.2m (2024: £80.5m),

with operating profit £9.4m

(2024: £4.9m). As noted above, results

reflect performance up to the disposal

of HBC on 31 December 2025. On

a standalone basis, HBC delivered

revenue of £55.4m and operating profit

of £0.7m or £2.7m including the profit

on disposal; net assets at disposal

were £nil.

Consolidated Statement of

Comprehensive Income

Revenue from continuing operations

declined by 5% to £251.5m

(2024: £266.1m), reflecting the

subdued market backdrop and the

anticipated timing of key transactions.

Land promotion performed strongly,

with revenue rising to £83.0m

(2024: £78.0m) driven by sustained

demand for high quality strategic sites.

Property development held steady at

£69.0m (2024: £69.2m) despite muted

market conditions. Stonebridge Homes

generated £69.7m of revenue (2024:

£88.1m), with the reduction largely

due to a lower volume of completions

compared with the prior year.

The group generated a gross profit

of £65.8m in 2025 (2024: £71.9m),

reflecting a gross margin of 26%,

compared with 26% in the prior year.

Administrative expenses were £40.3m,

a reduction from the prior year

(2024: £42.0m), reflecting tighter cost

control across the group.

Property revaluation gains amounted

to £4.1m (2024: £4.6m), comprising

£2.1m of gains on wholly owned

investment property and £2.0m on the

group’s share of investment property

held in joint ventures.

Property revaluation gains/(losses)

2025

£’m

2024

£’m

Wholly owned investment property:

– Completed investment property 1.5 1.2

– Investment property in the course of construction 0.6 3.3

2.1 4.5

Joint ventures and associates:

– Completed investment property – 0.1

– Investment property in the course of construction 2.0 –

2.0 0.1

4.1 4.6

Tax

The tax charge for the year was

£8.1m (effective rate of tax 30.5%)

(2024: £7.4m effective rate of tax

22.9%) and is higher than (2024: lower

than) the standard rate of corporation

tax due to prior year adjustments.

Current taxation on profits was

£9.5m (2024: £5.9m), partly offset

by a deferred tax credit of £1.5m

(2024: £1.6m charge).

Return on capital

employed (ROCE)

ROCE was 7.5% (2024: 8.0%) before

revised classification of the group’s

main borrowing facility (based on

revised classification ROCE was

6.2% (2024: 6.8%). We remain

confident in the group’s potential to

deliver attractive returns over the

medium term.

Finance and gearing

Net finance costs reflected finance

income of £3.9m and finance costs

of £8.0m (2024: £5.1m and £8.7m,

respectively).

Interest cover, expressed as the ratio

of operating profit (excluding the

valuation movement on investment

properties, disposal of investment

properties and joint venture profits) to

net interest (excluding interest received

on other loans and receivables), was

5 times (2024: 9 times). No interest

incurred in either year has been

capitalised into the cost of assets.

The group’s banking facilities

were renewed on 21 May 2024 at

£125.0m. The facility with Barclays

Bank PLC, HSBC UK Bank plc and

National Westminster Bank Plc runs

for three years and includes two

one-year extensions. The first of

these extensions was called upon on

31 March 2025 extending the facility

to 21 March 2028. Bank facilities in

place at 31 December 2024 totalled

£125m with an accordion to extend

the facility by up to £60m taking the

facility to £185m. The facility was

extended on 21 March 2025 to £140m

and again on 5 March 2026 to £155m,

increasing headroom over the going

concern period.

Financial review continued

henryboot.co.uk54

On 27 June 2024, the group extended

a £25.0m receivables purchase

agreement with HSBC Invoice Finance

UK Limited (HSBC) that allows it to

sell deferred income receivables

to the bank. The risk and rewards

of ownership are deemed to fully

transfer to HSBC and, therefore, this

agreement is recorded off balance

sheet. The group had sold £13.4m of

receivables under the agreement at

31 December 2025 (2024: £15.9m).

The 2025 year-end net debt was

£108.0m (2024: £62.7m) resulting

in gearing of 25.7% (2023: 14.7%)

in excess of our targeted range of

10-20%. Despite challenging market

conditions, we continue to invest in

our prime land portfolio, growing

our premium housebuilder and

delivering our high quality committed

development programme.

All bank borrowings continue to be

from facilities linked to floating rates

or short term fixed commitments.

Throughout the year, we operated

within the facility covenants and

continue to do so.

Cash flow summary

2025

£’m

2024

£’m

Operating profit (including discontinued operations) 33.1 34.2

Depreciation and other non-cash items 2.1 0.4

Net movement on equipment held for hire (1.4) (2.6)

Movement in working capital (49.9)

10.5

Cash generated from operations (16.1)

42.5

Acquisition of non-controlling interest (10.1) –

Disposal of subsidiary (note 8) (9.1) –

Net capital investments 15.4 (4.9)

Net interest and tax (12.7) (13.3)

Dividends paid (12.7) (12.1)

Dividends received from joint ventures –

2.9

Change in net debt (45.3)

15.1

Net debt brought forward (62.7)

(77.8)

Net debt carried forward (108.0) (62.7)

During 2025, cash used in operations

amounted to £16.1m (2024: £42.5m

inflow), after a net movement on

equipment held for hire of £1.4m

(2024: £2.6m) and working capital

outflows of £49.9m (2024: £10.5m

inflow) driven by investment in land and

an increase in deferred receivables.

Net capital investment of £15.4m

(2024: £4.9m outflow) arose primarily

from proceeds on disposal of assets

held for sale of £13.1m (2024: £nil) and

proceeds on disposal of investment

property of £5.2m (2024: £0.6m).

Net dividends totalled £12.7m (2024:

£12.1m), comprising equity dividends of

£10.5m (2024: £10.0m) and dividends

to non controlling interests of £2.2m

(2024: £2.1m), with no dividends

received from joint ventures in the

year (2024: £2.9m).

After net interest and tax of £12.7m

(2024: £13.3m), there was an overall

cash outflow of £45.3m (2024:

£15.1m inflow), resulting in net debt

of £108.0m (2024: £62.7m).

Statement of financial

position summary

Wholly owned investment properties,

over 70% of which are I&L assets,

totalled £94.6m (2024: £105.6m).

During the year, the group disposed

of five properties, two previously held

for sale (£9.3m book value, £0.9m

profit) and a further three properties in

the year (£7.0m book value, £0.4m of

profit). These reductions were partially

offset by £3.5m of additions (2024:

£0.1m), including completion of a new

industrial unit in Southend, along with

£2.1m of valuation gains (2024: £4.5m).

Intangible assets increased to

£1.3m (2024: £0.6m), driven by

capitalisation of costs associated

with the group’s flagship D365 digital

transformation project.

Property, plant and equipment

decreased to £26.9m (2024: £29.3m)

and largely comprises group occupied

properties and equipment held for

hire. Additions during the year of

£2.1m (2024: £5.6m) were offset

by depreciation charges of £3.9m

(2024: £3.9m) and the disposal of

assets. Right of use assets totalled

£2.9m (2024: £3.5m).

Investments in joint ventures and

associates increased to £22.9m

(2024: £13.3m), reflecting additional

investment of £7.9m (2024: £2.9m),

and the group’s share of profits during

the year of £1.7m (2024: £2.4m).

The group continues to undertake

development projects with third party

partners where mutually beneficial.

Inventories increased to £368.1m

(2024: £332.9m), driven primarily

by a £44.7m rise in the group’s

housebuilder land bank (2024: £15.4m).

Despite a record level of strategic

land disposals in 2025, continued

progress of sites through planning has

maintained the value of the strategic

land portfolio. Property development

inventory reduced by £8.8m as capital

continues to be transferred into joint

venture arrangements.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

55

Overall, the net assets of the group decreased by 1.2% to £420.1m

(2024: £425.1m), arising from retained profits less distributions to shareholders and

acquisition of Stonebridge Homes with NAV per share

3

decreasing 0.9% to 313p

(2024: 317p).

2025

£’m

2024

£’m

Investment properties and assets classified

as held for sale 94.6 105.6

Intangible assets 1.3 0.6

Property, plant and equipment, including

right-of-use assets 29.8 32.8

Investment in joint ventures and associates 22.9

13.3

148.6

152.3

Inventories 368.1 332.9

Receivables 126.3 111.6

Payables (113.8) (111.5)

Other (4.1)

(7.3)

Net operating assets 525.1

478.0

Net debt

5

(108.0) (62.7)

Retirement benefit asset 3.0

9.9

Net assets 420.1

425.2

Less: Non-current liabilities and pension asset 137.5

86.4

Capital employed 557.6 511.6

Darren Littlewood

Chief Financial Officer

Receivables increased to £126.3m

(2024: £111.6m), driven by an increase

in non-current trade receivables

relating to strategic land disposals.

Deferred payment receivables

continue to reflect the scale and nature

of strategic land transactions.

Payables increased to £113.8m

(2024: £111.5m), reflecting the timing

of transactions and deferred land

payments. Provisions reduced to

£0.9m (2024: £1.7m) as strategic

land provisions unwind and the Road

Link (A69) concession approaches

completion. Contract liabilities fell to

nil (2024: £4.9m) following the disposal

of the group’s construction business.

Net debt increased to £108.0m

(2024: £62.7m), primarily as a result

of the growth in Stonebridge Homes’

land bank and the sale of Henry Boot

Construction. This resulted in gearing

rising to 26% (2024: 15%), higher than

our preferred range of 10-20%. As we

complete sales throughout the year,

we expect our gearing to move back

towards our optimal range. Net debt

comprises cash and cash equivalents

of £8.4m (2024: £16.8m), borrowings of

£112.0m (2024: £72.5m), other loans of

£1.1m (2024: £3.0m) and lease liabilities

of £3.3m (2024: £3.9m).

At 31 December 2025, the IAS 19

pension valuation reported a surplus

of £3.0m (2024: £9.9m), mainly as

a result of a lower market value of

scheme assets. The scheme continues

to be managed through a diversified

portfolio with oversight from Trustees

and external advisers.

1

Adjusted including discontinued operations.

2

Underlying profit is an alternative performance measure (APM) and is defined as profit before tax excluding revaluation movements on completed

investment properties. Revaluation movement on completed investment properties includes gains of £1.5m (2024: £1.2m) on wholly owned completed

investment property and a gain of nil (2024: £0.1m) on completed investment property held in joint ventures. This APM is used as it provides the users with

a measure that excludes specific external factors beyond management’s controls and reflects the group’s underlying results. This measure is used in the

business in appraising senior management performance.

3

Return on Capital Employed is an APM and is defined as operating profit/capital employed where capital employed is the average of total assets less current

liabilities and pension asset/obligation at the opening and closing balance sheet dates. Before the revised classification of the group’s main borrowing

facility. Previously presented as current liabilities these borrowings are now classified as non-current. See page 174 for prior year adjustment.

4

Net Asset Value (NAV) per share is an APM and is defined as total equity adjusted to remove retirement benefit assets.

5

Net debt is an APM and is reconciled to statutory measures in note 7.

6

Total property return is a metric that combines capital and income returns for the investment portfolio. It is calculated as the percentage value change plus

net income accrual, relative to the capital employed and is calculated on a monthly basis and then indexed in line with the benchmark.

7

Total Accounting Return is an APM and is defined as the growth in NAV per share plus dividends paid, expressed as a percentage of NAV per share at the

beginning of the period.

8

Before the revised classification of the group’s main borrowing facility. Previously presented as current liabilities, these borrowings are now classified as

non-current.

Financial review continued

henryboot.co.uk56

Principal risks

& uncertainties

Managing our risks

For Henry Boot, effective risk

management is essential in achieving

positive outcomes from our

operations and for the delivery of our

strategic targets.

Overview

The group takes a considered

approach to risk. We invest prudently

in pursuit of our strategic targets,

maintain financial strength through

effective cash management, and aim

to be the safest place to work in the

markets in which we operate.

The group operates within a structured

framework of internal controls and risk

management, where long term success

is underpinned by the continuous

review and assessment of both key

business and emerging risks. While a

formal annual reporting process is in

place, risk identification and response

remain ongoing; consequently,

significant developments are reported

to the Board outside of the annual

cycle whenever events dictate

that immediate action is necessary

and appropriate.

In the event of rapidly changing

risks, our business continuity group

and crisis management team have

established procedures and actions

that will support the group’s day-to-

day response to sudden or developing

incidents, providing regular updates to

our people, the ExCo and the Board.

The Responsible Business Committee

and the Audit and Risk Committee

evaluate how ESG-related risks, and

the measures in place to mitigate them,

may affect both the short and long

term value of the group.

Enterprise Risk

Management and

Governance Framework

The group maintains a robust

Enterprise Risk Management

(ERM) framework designed to

ensure that risk-taking is deliberate

transparent, and aligned with the

strategic objectives.

1. Board Accountability and

Committee Oversight

The Board is ultimately responsible

for the group’s risk profile and

the effectiveness of the internal

control environment:

The Audit and Risk Committee set the

group’s risk appetite and tolerance

levels, this details the acceptable

level of risk taking in pursuit of the

strategic goals, and provides dedicated

oversight of the ERM framework. It is

responsible for reviewing the integrity

of the financial reporting, monitoring

the internal control environment,

and ensuring that the group remains

resilient under stressed conditions.

2. Three Lines of Defence

To ensure independent challenge

and rigorous monitoring, the

group operates a Three Lines of

Defence model:

• First Line: Operational management

and subsidiaries are the primary risk

owners. They are responsible for

identifying, assessing and mitigating

risks within their daily operations,

ensuring that controls are integrated

into business processes.

• Second Line: The Risk and

Compliance function provides

the overarching policies and

frameworks for risk management.

This line provides independent

oversight to the First Line, reporting

to the Audit and Risk Committee

on the group’s adherence to its

risk appetite.

• Third Line: Internal Audit provides

independent, objective assurance

to the Board and the Audit and

Risk Committee. It evaluates the

effectiveness of both the first

and second lines of defence,

ensuring that the risk management

framework is functioning

as intended.

3. Risk Culture and Monitoring

Risk governance is underpinned by a

proactive risk culture integrated across

all operational levels. Robust oversight

is maintained through structured

reporting cycles, notably the Audit and

Risk Committee, which convenes four

times a year, and the monthly ExCo,

that has a dedicated agenda item to

evaluate and monitor the evolving

economic risk landscape.

Details on how the Audit and Risk

Committee is preparing for Provision

29 of the UK Corporate Governance

Code can be found on page 118

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

57

Risk

governance

Establish risk

strategy

and appetite

Risk identification

and assessment

Identify and

evaluate risk

Risk response and

reporting

Review, report

and revise

The Board/The Audit and Risk Committee

Oversight of all risk management within the group is undertaken at the highest level by

the Board of Henry Boot PLC, which is delegated in general terms to the Audit and Risk

Committee, who:

• Reviews the adequacy and effectiveness of the group’s internal controls and risk

management systems

• Monitors and reviews internal and external audit

The Executive Committee

Reviews risks and internal controls at a consolidated group level and

coordinates the group’s response.

Business continuity group

Established in 2022, the group meets

monthly to establish the procedures

and plans for management of

continuity events.

Subsidiary boards and PLC

Each subsidiary and group department

has a nominated individual responsible

for maintaining the risks within that

subsidiary/department. In general,

this will be the Managing Directors

(for subsidiaries) and the heads of

department (for the PLC), with input

from other relevant designated team

members as applicable.

Emerging risks

The group believes that its emerging

risks are inextricably linked to

emerging trends in our marketplace

and more widely to global and

economic events. Such trends

include urbanisation, demographics,

technology, political and environment.

Failure to keep pace with these

changes could result in additional risk

exposure to the group. Management

has, therefore, undertaken horizon

scanning exercises that form key

considerations in the group’s risk and

strategic planning.

The continued advancement

of artificial intelligence and the

accelerated digitisation of the group’s

operations have contributed to

an increase in technology-related

risk. As the business adopts new

digital tools and automates more of

its core processes, the complexity

and pace of technological change

introduce heightened exposure

to system vulnerabilities, data

integrity challenges and operational

dependency on digital platforms.

These developments reinforce the

need for robust controls, proactive

monitoring and ongoing investment in

technology governance to ensure the

group can fully benefit from innovation

while managing the associated risks

effectively.

Geopolitical and economic risk levels

remain high demonstrated by recent

and ongoing conflict in the Middle

East and the associated volatility in

global oil prices. These events present

multilayered risks to Henry Boot with

potential impacts in operations and the

macroeconomic environment. Their

impact is regularly discussed and have

been considered across each principal

risk area.

The group continues to recognise

the importance of climate risk and its

impact on our business and the planet;

this is recognised as one of the group’s

principal risks and further information

on our assessment of climate risk is

detailed on pages 77 to 80.

The financial impact of the above is

considered in the going concern and

viability section on pages 65 to 66.

Principal risks

& uncertainties continued

henryboot.co.uk58

Risk name

1

(S) External markets

2

(S) Sustainability targets/communications

3

(S) Underperformance of subsidiaries

4

(S) Reputational incident

5

(O) Loss of critical systems/data

6

(O) Business continuity incident

7

(O) Attract, retain and develop workforce

8

(O) Loss of key personnel

9

(O) Health, safety and environment incident

10

(O) Execution

11

(R) Failure to adhere to regulation/legislation

12

(R) Adverse changes in regulation/legislation

13

(F) Funding

14

(F) Erosion of profit

15

(F) Fraud

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Likelihood

Impact

(S) – Strategic (O) – Operational (R) – Regulatory (F) – Financial

Key

Net (Residual) Risk

Risk heat map

The risk heat map illustrates the 15

principal risks identified by the Board

as having a potential material impact

on the group.

The risks have been plotted by the

Board/Audit and Risk Committee

based on a common understanding of

the risk appetite of Henry Boot. The

risks are presented net (after taking

account of mitigating actions and

internal controls).

Movements from the prior year’s

ranking are indicated by the arrows in

the table below.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

59

Our risks

Risk and

description Mitigation

Changes

during

the year

Link to

strategic

priorities

1

External markets (Strategic)

Adverse external

challenges within

the markets in

which Henry Boot

operates

• Strong relationships with key supply partners.

• Financial stability of Henry Boot is underpinned by diversity

of portfolio.

• Measures in place to ensure financial resilience such as

low gearing ratio, high credit rating, and strong relationship

with lenders.

• Inflation clause in contracts to pass on inflation-induced costs.

• Going concern and viability assessments completed annually.

• ExCo regularly review market intelligence, market conditions,

inflation reports and intelligence reports on potential regulatory

changes to inform decision making.

Gradual

recovery and

improvement

2

Sustainability targets/communications (Strategic)

Failure

(or perceived

failure) to achieve

sustainability

targets/

communications

• Responsible Business Committee formed in 2021 to provide

oversight of the development and delivery of the Responsible

Business Strategy.

• ESG Steering Group considers progress against the Responsible

Business Strategy including cross-cutting issues such as property

environmental performance.

• All members of ExCo have ESG-related targets.

• Recent re-branding centred around impact on 5Ps (People,

Planet, Partners, Places and Performance) and incorporated into

Responsible Business Strategy and brand proposition.

• Responsible business plans developed annually and linked to

Responsible Business Strategy, supported by quarterly reporting.

Lesser focus

in current

market

environment

3

Underperformance of subsidiaries (Strategic)

Material

underperformance

of one or more

of the group’s

subsidiaries

• Clearly defined and communicated group strategy and business

plans for subsidiaries.

• Strict legal procedures and protocols regarding authority to sign

contracts and accept risks.

• Reserve matters process in place, which requires projects over a

certain limit at subsidiary level to be approved by the Board.

• Thorough assessments conducted of client financial standing

(including credit checks and payment guarantees).

• Project risk registers/assessments completed, reviewed and

considered in budgets.

• Diverse nature of subsidiaries and locations spread the risk.

• Regular reviews of pipeline and current opportunities.

• Delivery risk passed to contractors where possible.

Challenges

in reaching

market

expectation

henryboot.co.uk60

Risk and

description Mitigation

Changes

during

the year

Link to

strategic

priorities

4

Reputational incident (Strategic)

Ineffective

response to or

management

of a significant

reputational

incident

• Recent rebranding centred around impact on 5Ps (People,

Planet, Partners, Places and Performance) and incorporated into

Responsible Business Strategy and brand proposition.

• Increased awareness of the importance of ExCo/senior

stakeholders speaking with ‘one voice’.

• Crisis response arrangements included as part of overall business

continuity planning.

5

Loss of critical systems/data (Operational)

Loss of critical

systems and/or

data (malicious or

non-malicious

• Key systems backed up regularly.

• Preventative approach to risk in IT team.

• IT helpdesk system aligned to KPIs.

• Dynamics 365 implemented to digitise processes within Henry

Boot, store information and support group collaboration.

• VPN security is used for connectivity out-of-office.

• Henry Boot is accredited by cybersecurity essentials.

• Controls in place to see where data is being shared externally.

• Project underway to develop an ITDR plan (future state).

• Cyber insurance in place.

Increasing

threat of

cyber and

growing use

of artificial

intelligence

6

Business continuity incident (Operational)

Major disruptive

event/business

continuity

incident (internal

or external)

impacting Henry

Boot or subsidiary

operations

• Business Continuity Plans (BCPs) in place throughout the business

(plans are regularly tested and reviewed).

Key

Change during the year

Increased

Decreased

No change

Group strategic priorities

Performance People Partners Places Planet

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

61

Our risks

continued

Risk and

description Mitigation

Changes

during

the year

Link to

strategic

priorities

7

Attract, retain and develop workforce (Operational)

Failure to attract,

retain and develop

an appropriately

diverse, skilled

and experienced

workforce to meet

current and future

business needs

• Opportunities to move across subsidiaries.

• Group employee engagement survey conducted annually to

measure morale/staff engagement.

• Development/formalisation of People strategy includes initiatives

on pay and reward, career progression, agile working, equity,

diversity and inclusion, health and wellbeing.

• Recent benchmarking and review of remuneration and

benefits package.

• Work done to address any single points of failure and

skills shortages.

• Increased internal training (growing our own colleagues) within

the operational side of the business.

• Emerging talent workstream focusing on strategic engagement

with education partners to attract and retain diverse talent.

• Relocated head office November 2023 (enhanced working

environment to encourage greater collaboration).

Increase in

unemployment

rates

8

Loss of key personnel (Operational)

Loss of key

personnel within

Henry Boot

subsidiaries/loss

of multiple senior

employees in short

succession

• Formal review of succession planning and plans in place for

potential successors for certain senior roles.

• Recent benchmarking and review of remuneration.

• Contractual protections and retentions in employment contracts

of senior management and other key employees.

• Introduction of Dynamics 365 to encourage information sharing

and storage.

Structural

changes

to ensure

group

is fit for

the future

9

Health, safety and environment incident (Operational)

Occurrence of

a significant

health, safety or

environmental

incident across

any of the group’s

subsidiaries

• Regular testing of health and safety scenarios through business

continuity work.

• Emergency response protocol in place with risks grouped into

three tiers and linked to BCP.

• Strong team compliance and safety culture with group

impact measured on 5Ps (People, Planet, Partners, Places and

Performance).

• Staff appropriately trained and report near misses.

• KPIs associated with reporting of near misses.

• Sub-contractors need to obtain approved status and evidence

that they meet required standards.

• Health and Wellbeing Strategy launched Feb 2023 with a project

team established to oversee implementation and delivery of a

range of activities.

• Annual health and safety reports (which include targeted

recommendations) completed for all subsidiaries.

• Regular internal audits and accreditations obtained.

henryboot.co.uk62

Risk and

description Mitigation

Changes

during

the year

Link to

strategic

priorities

10

Execution (Operational)

Failure to

deliver strategic

plans in the

intended manner

• Annual review of five-year strategy and business plan undertaken

with Board and ExCo.

• Project teams establish to plan and deliver key initiatives.

• Objectives and KPIs aligned with delivery of strategic plans.

Key

initiatives well

progressed

11

Failure to adhere to regulation/legislation (Legal/regulatory)

Breach or failure

to adhere to

key regulation/

legislation

• Group legal department have oversight of key risk areas and

develop guidance and systems to ensure requirements are

fulfilled (i.e. for BSA and DPA).

• Detailed review conducted of exposures under BSA and DPA

(i.e. for legacy projects).

• Project-level risks discussed in regular meetings.

• Risks discussed in meetings with ExCo.

• Internal control environment regularly reviewed and updated.

12

Adverse changes in regulation/legislation (Legal/regulatory)

Breach or failure

to adhere to

key regulation/

legislation

• Advanced notice associated with any upcoming regulatory

changes (ongoing monitoring undertaken).

• Actively engage with Government (directly and via

trade associations).

• External legal advisers provide updates and trackers.

• Membership and subscription to groups and industry publications

such as IOSH, Constructing Excellence and the National

Federation of Builders.

• The Board undertake legal horizon scanning twice a year.

Lower

volume of

material

changes in

legislation

13

Funding (Financial)

Failure to secure

funding at

favourable terms

• Look to ensure balanced leverage/gearing (operate within optimal

framework).

• Good relationships with banking partners.

• Internal audit function in place.

• External legal contacts.

• Hire purchase agreements with Lombard bank.

• Significant amount of equity is retained in the group to lessen the

need for external borrowing.

Debt and

gearing

operating at

higher levels

Key

Change during the year

Increased

Decreased

No change

Group strategic priorities

Performance People Partners Places Planet

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

63

Our risks

continued

Risk and

description Mitigation

Changes

during

the year

Link to

strategic

priorities

14

Erosion of profit (Financial)

Significant and/

or sustained

erosion of profit

and operating

margin on the

viability of

transactions and

schemes

• Use of joint ventures to share capital requirements and risk.

• Cost-benefit analysis completed for new projects.

• Preference for pre-funded and pre-let opportunities.

• Viability assessment completed annually.

Margin

erosion

across

housing

market

15

Fraud (Financial)

Occurrence of

fraud, bribery or

corruption

• Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy in place which sets standards

for the group and supply chain members.

• Policy regularly reviewed and updated with further guidance

issued as required.

• Regular anti-bribery training provided.

• Fraud and Corruption notices completed across the business

on a monthly basis.

Key

Change during the year

Increased

Decreased

No change

Group strategic priorities

People Partners Places Planet Performance

henryboot.co.uk64

Going concern

In undertaking their going concern

review, which covers the period

to December 2027, the Directors

considered the group’s principal risk

areas that they consider material to the

assessment of going concern.

As the UK economy continues to

prove challenging, the Directors have

assessed the group’s ability to operate

in a more uncertain environment

in modelling a base case scenario.

They have also modelled what they

consider to be a severe downside

scenario, including further curtailment

in activities. This downside scenario

shows a c26% reduction in sales and

c90% reduction in operating profits

from the base case. Development

activity and land sales only take place

where already contracted or well

progressed. For Stonebridge Homes a

10% decline in house prices is assumed

along with a 10% reduction in the

number of plots sold and Banner Plant

revenue declines c17%. This downside

model assumes that acquisition and

development spend is restricted other

than that already committed and is all

consistent with previous experience

in recessionary environments. Having

started 2026 with net debt of £108.0m,

and with c.£118.6m of net debt as

at 20 March 2026, against current

facilities of £155.0m the Directors

have concluded that the group is able

to control the level of uncommitted

expenditure while delivering

contracted schemes. Allowing it to

retain and even improve the cash

position in the event of a severe

downside scenario, although the

impact of doing so on the profit and

loss account would be unavoidable.

The group meets its day-to-day

working capital requirements through a

secured loan facility (see note 25 of the

Financial Statements). The facility with

Barclays Bank PLC, HSBC UK Bank

plc and National Westminster Bank

Plc runs for three years and includes

two one-year extensions. The facility

includes an accordion to increase the

facility by up to £60.0m, increasing the

overall facility to £185m.

None of the modelling undertaken by

the Directors gives rise to any breach

of bank facility covenants. The most

sensitive covenant in our facilities

relates to the ratio of EBIT (Earnings

Before Interest and Tax) on a 12-month

rolling basis to senior facility finance

costs. Our downside modelling, which

reflects a 26% reduction in revenue

and 90% reduction in operating

profit from our base case for 2025,

demonstrates headroom over this

covenant throughout the forecast

period to the end of December 2027.

As part of the going concern

assessment, the Directors considered

a reverse stress test to determine the

level of adverse performance required

to exhaust debt facility headroom

and cause covenant breaches over

the assessment period. The Directors

concluded that the combination

of events required to cause such

breaches are remote, and even

in a case of worsening economic

conditions, the group has several

additional levers available to it which

remain unmodelled in the stress

test scenarios.

The Directors have also considered

the current ongoing conflict in the

Middle East and the potential impact

upon the group should the conflict be

prolonged. Whilst the group is not

immune to global economic shocks,

the Directors believe that the strength

of the group balance sheet, the facility

headroom demonstrated in the group’s

downside modelling, and the strong

supply and demand fundamentals

underpinning our key markets mean

the group is well positioned to manage

economic deterioration as a result of

the conflict.

At the time of approving the Financial

Statements the Directors expect that

the company and the group will have

adequate resources, liquidity and

available bank facilities to continue

in operational existence for the

foreseeable future. Accordingly, they

continue to adopt the going concern

basis of accounting in preparing the

Financial Statements.

Viability statement

Introduction

The business model and strategy of

Henry Boot PLC can be found on

pages 20 to 21 and 27 and 45 in the

Strategic Report. These documents

outline the long term business model

and are central to the understanding

of how the group operates. We have

operated the current business model

successfully since 2004 and have a

140-year unbroken trading history.

By their nature the group’s activities

tend to be very long term, especially

in the land promotion business

and increasingly within property

development. The group’s strategy

and experience in the markets in which

we operate has been built up over

many years. Over the last ten years,

the group has reported an average

profit before tax of £38.9m per annum,

added over £200m to net assets (an

increase of 91%) and paid 70.3p per

share in dividends, and at no stage in

the last economic downturn, between

2008 and 2010, nor during the CV-19

outbreak, between 2020 and 2021, did

the group make a trading loss.

The assessment processes

The group’s prospects are assessed

through a three-year forecasting

process led by the Board, Executive

Directors and the boards of the

individual subsidiaries. A detailed

three-year bottom up base case

budget is agreed for the current

financial year. This is then reforecast

each month throughout the financial

year within each business and

consolidated at a group level. As

a largely deal-driven business, it is

considered inappropriate to attempt to

prepare detailed bottom-up forecasts

over a longer-term period. Whilst our

strategic land promotion business

commenced 2026 with 9,024 plots

with planning permission which, at

a five-year average disposal rate of

3,088 plots would imply that we have

2.9 years of sales already in hand,

a property development pipeline

of over £1.4bn Gross Development

Value (GDV) to be delivered over a

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

65

period extending beyond five years

and c1,400 plots with some form

of planning in Stonebridge Homes

equating to a land supply of over

four years, it becomes difficult to

accurately forecast the timing of

transactions beyond year three.

We have stress tested our financial

results based on the downside

scenario modelled to December

2027, as described in the Going

Concern statement on page 65

followed by an assumed return to

planned levels of activity for year

three. Our modelling assumes that

deferred land sale debtors falling due

of c£33m as at 28 February 2026

will continue to be received during

the period either directly from the

debtors themselves or via the use

of our debt purchase facilities or

promissory notes which management

consider to be viable alternatives

facilitated by UK banks. These models

highlight that as economic conditions

worsen and construction activity,

developments and land sales do not

happen as envisaged, deferred land

sale receipts, reduced investment

and tight cost control sees the group

retain cash in the short to medium

term, although long term profitability

would be significantly lower if the

aforementioned mitigating actions

were required to preserve cash.

Find out more about how our principal

risks have informed the identification

of our material controls: Read about

our Board’s review process and

internal controls review on page 118

Assessment of viability

The long term strategy: the three-year

monthly forecasts reflect the Directors’

best estimates of the prospects for the

business and the Directors consider

a three-year period to be appropriate

over which to assess the viability of

the group. In addition to the downside

modelled, we have also reviewed

several potential viability risks to the

group and consider that the following

represent scenarios which, if not

carefully managed, could impact on

the group’s viability.

Firstly, overtrading developments in

progress with the attendant increase

in leverage, at the same time as the

property cycle turns down, asset

values are falling, and schemes must

be completed to create best value.

This creates a potentially damaging

scenario where debt is rising, and

asset values are falling. Mindful of this

scenario, we look to maintain prudent

debt levels, pre-let or pre-sell 65% of

the committed development pipeline

and secure development costs on

fixed price contracts. Secondly, a

decline in residential property markets

where margins decline due to a lack

of government support and planning

delays or rejections, compounded

by lower sales prices, higher build

costs and increased legislative costs.

Where possible the group mitigates

this risk by providing quality products

from healthy land banks (including

consented land) in prime locations.

Finally, a health and safety-related

breach that causes a fatality (or similar

serious outcome). We manage this

risk through a very robust health and

safety policy, zero tolerance towards

policy breaches and consider health

and safety at all of our company board

meetings. Our safety scores continue

to be well into the top quartile of the

UK construction industry and we

have achieved a very safe working

environment over the last 20 years.

Viability statement

Based on their assessment of

prospects and viability above, the

Directors confirm that they have a

reasonable expectation that the group

will be able to continue in operation

over the three-year viability period.

Our risks

continued

henryboot.co.uk66

67

Shareholder informationOverview Strategic report Governance Financial statements

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Report on the recommendations of the

Task Force on Climate-related Financial

Disclosures (TCFD)

An overview of our journey to adapt to climate change

Governance

We have a robust governance framework to oversee

and implement how we adapt to climate change.

• Board – Has ultimate authority, oversight, and

scrutiny of how we are decarbonising, mitigating

risk, and pivoting to seize opportunity.

• Board committees – The Responsible Business

Committee has oversight of our Responsible

Business Strategy. The Audit and Risk Committee

oversees how we manage and mitigate risks.

The Remuneration Committee oversees how we

link climate adaptation performance to executive

remuneration.

• ExCo – Our senior management team have

responsibility for implementation of the

decarbonisation strategy and climate change

adaptation.

• ESG Steering Group – formed of senior

management and tasked with reviewing ESG

related risks and opportunities and reporting

to ExCo.

• Climate Working Group – employee subject

matter body tasked with operational delivery of

the decarbonisation strategy.

Strategy

• Group commercial strategy and subsidiary

strategies detail how the business would adapt to

climate-related risks and opportunities, based on a

1.8°C and a 3.6°C scenario.

• Strategy is annually stress tested to ensure

resilience and responsiveness to the identified

risks and opportunities.

• Decarbonisation strategy forms part of the

Responsible Business Strategy and includes our

target to achieve NZC for direct GHG emissions

by 2030.

Risk

We routinely review and update our understanding

of our climate associated risks and plan mitigation

measures to address these.

Our risk categories are:

• Environmental

• Financial

• Supply chain

• Operational

We integrate management of these risks into our

robust risk management processes which includes:

• Scheme-level risk management

• Board risk review processes

• Annual climate change risk assessment process

• Internal audits

• Annual external verification

Metrics and Targets

We have a headline target to achieve NZC for

direct (Scope 1 and 2) emissions by 2030.

This headline target is supported by the

following 2030 sub-targets:

• 100% of fleet cars and vans to be electric.

• 20% reduction in business travel.

• 100% of generators to be replaced by

sustainable alternatives.

Whilst we have not yet published an indirect (Scope

3) emissions target, we have reviewed our baseline

and initial reduction measures. We are continuing to

develop plans to publish a Scope 3 reduction target

and action plan aligned to our new Responsible

Business Strategy.

henryboot.co.uk68

Compliance Statement

Over the course of 2025, Henry

Boot continued to implement the

recommendations of the TCFD, and

the accompanying guidance notes.

2025 saw a period of transition

in the business as we announced

the divestment of Henry Boot

Construction and the integration of

Stonebridge Homes. These significant

composition and operational

changes have required us to review

our approach to ensure that we are

effectively adapting our strategy to

climate change. For this reason, we

delayed further development of the

quantitative scenario planning to

enable these changes to be enacted

– at which point we will model our

risk exposure according to the chosen

scenario outcomes.

We are also aware of the evolution

to the UK’s climate reporting

framework and are preparing for

the future implementation of the UK

Sustainability Reporting Standards

(SRS). Reporting effectively

against this new framework will

require further development of our

climate reporting which we will

be undertaken throughout 2026.

To continue to provide our investors

with accurate and useful information

on how our business is adapting to

climate change, we are continuing to

report against the recommendations of

the TCFD here.

The table below sets out, in more

detail, where we have assessed

ourselves in relation to our level of

consistency with the recommendations

of the TCFD, and an explanation of the

steps yet to be taken where we are

not currently fully consistent. Where

we have indicated

‘full’

consistency

with the recommendations of the

TCFD, this means that we believe

we have achieved the minimum of

the recommendations set out, but,

nevertheless, acknowledge that there

will be further work to do to refine

and enhance this approach in coming

years.

‘Partial’

consistency indicates

that we have carried out some work

but are not yet fully consistent with the

recommendations. We are pleased that

all provisions are either fully or partially

compliant, with plans in place to

progress further in the short term. The

table also provides references to other

sections and the wider Annual Report

where further detail can be found.

Given that the industries represented

within our group include construction

and property development, we are

aware that we are classed as a

‘higher-

risk business’

and acknowledge that

we need to continuously develop

our level of disclosure to ensure

that it is increasingly thorough and

progressively advanced.

This will be an area of further

development for us over the course

of 2026 and beyond, as well as

involving appropriate levels of

external assurance to the risks and

opportunities we identify, the scenario

modelling work we undertake,

and the materiality of the financial

impacts those risks may present to

the business.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

69

Assessment table

Provision

Consistency

level

Achieved

to date

Future

developments

More

information

Governance

Board oversight

of climate

related risks and

opportunities

F

As set out under

‘Governance’ below.

Further development of the Board

Sponsorship roles to provide

additional leadership expertise,

scrutiny, and visibility.

Further training and upskilling

sessions to be held with Responsible

Business Committee and ExCo

during 2026.

Internal subject matter experts

to routinely report to the Board

and ExCo to ensure the collective

understanding of operational

delivery is consistent, up to date

and scrutinised.

Page 74 below

Responsible

Business

Committee

Report, page 129

Governance

Structure, page

132

Risk Report page

78

Management’s

role in assessing

and managing

climate-related

risks and

opportunities

F

As set out under

‘Governance’ below.

Development of ExCo sponsorship

roles to provide additional

leadership, scrutiny, and visibility.

Increased amount of ESG updates

to subsidiary businesses and ExCo

planned for 2026.

Further training and upskilling

sessions to be held with ExCo and

other senior leaders within the

business during 2026.

Page 74 below

Responsible

Business

Committee

Report,

Management

roles on

committee and

groups page 132

Responsible

Business

Committee

Report,

governance

arrangements

page 133

Report on the recommendations of the

Task Force on Climate-related Financial

Disclosures (TCFD) continued

henryboot.co.uk70

Key:

F

Fully

consistent

P

Partially

consistent,

progress made

Provision

Consistency

level

Achieved

to date

Future

developments

More

information

Strategy

Climate-related

risks and

opportunities

identified over

the short,

medium, and

long term.

F

These have been identified

and are set out in the table

within this report below.

These will remain under review

on an annual basis in line with our

usual risk review process, with the

additional developments regarding

the risk review process that are

outlined below.

Risk Report page

78

Impact of

climate-related

risks and

opportunities on

the organisation’s

business,

strategy, and

financial planning

P

The overarching objective

of the Responsible Business

Strategy is to embed ESG

into the group’s commercial

decision-making processes

and operating procedures.

In 2025, our aligned strategic

framework gave clear direction

for how the commercial and

responsible business strategies

are to be co-delivered and

assessed. This incorporates

how we approach risk.

The 2025 Strategy Days

incorporated assessment

of climate-related risks and

opportunities and reflected

on how decarbonisation and

climate change adaptation will

be achieved over the medium

term via the next phase of the

Responsible Business Strategy.

Further work to be carried out to

implement the best approach to

scenario modelling.

Scoping of the remaining scenario

modelling work will take place

during 2026.

Page 77

Resilience of

the strategy,

taking into

consideration

different climate-

related scenarios

F

Scenario modelling work to

date is captured within the

scenario modelling section of

this report.

The 2025 Strategy Days

incorporated assessment

of climate-related risks and

opportunities into strategies

presented to provide

resilience, and reflected on

how decarbonisation and

climate change adaptation will

be achieved over the medium

term via the next phase of the

Responsible Business Strategy.

Qualitative scenario modelling work

is ongoing, and consideration will

turn next to quantitative scenario

modelling and how this could further

impact on strategic considerations

and further financial planning.

Scoping of the remaining scenario

modelling work will take place

during 2026.

Page 77

Risk Report page

78

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

71

Provision

Consistency

level

Achieved

to date

Future

developments

More

information

Risk

Processes for

identifying

and assessing

climate-related

risks

P

As set out in the

accompanying notes to the

table within this report.

Risks are assessed, once

identified, against a risk matrix

which reviews the likelihood

and severity against a number

of factors.

We will continue to deepen our

exploration of how these risks are

prioritised as against the other

principal risks identified, and our

assessment of their materiality, over

the course of 2026 and beyond.

Page 77

Processes

for managing

climate-related

risks

P

As set out in the table within

this report.

Qualitative scenario modelling

work relating to the risk identified

is ongoing and consideration will

turn next to quantitative scenario

modelling and how this could further

impact on strategic considerations

and further financial planning.

Page 78

How processes

for identifying,

assessing,

and managing

climate related

risks are

integrated into

the organisation’s

overall risk

management

F

The group undertakes an

annual review of its principal

risks as documented in

page 57 of this report. This

review which is undertaken

at a subsidiary level includes

consideration of the risks

and opportunities relating to

climate change. The financial

impact of the risks, is in

part, quantified in our NZC

transition workings, although is

not material to the business.

As part of the assessment

of the climate-related risks

and opportunities, the

management and/or mitigation

of each item identified sets out

the response, and a decision

to Treat, Tolerate, Terminate or

Transfer each relevant item.

We will continue to deepen our

exploration of how these risks are

prioritised as against the other

principal risks identified, and our

assessment of their materiality, over

the course of 2026 and beyond.

Principal Risks

page 57

Report on the recommendations of the

Task Force on Climate-related Financial

Disclosures (TCFD) continued

henryboot.co.uk72

Provision

Consistency

level

Achieved

to date

Future

developments

More

information

Metrics and targets

Metrics

used by the

organisation to

assess climate-

related risks and

opportunities

in line with its

strategy and risk

management

process

F

Metrics relating to GHG

emissions have been adopted

as part of overall Responsible

Business Strategy – see page

44 and, for further information,

see our separate Responsible

Business Strategy Report.

GHG emissions reduction

target supported by sub

targets focused on reduction

of business travel, fleet

electrification, sustainable

generator usage and reduction

of waste and water usage.

Remuneration targets on

GHG emissions have been

incorporated into the bonus

objectives for ExCo members

and also incorporated into LTIP

objectives for 2025 and 2026.

Scoping of the remaining scenario

modelling work will continue

into 2026.

Further work is being undertaken

to understand the impact that

these outcomes have on the

group’s responsible business and

commercial strategies and whether

this should alter any metrics

previously determined.

The next phase of the Responsible

Business Strategy will incorporate

the required cross industry, climate-

related metrics to adopt a fully

holistic approach to climate change

adaptation and align with the

forthcoming UK SRS.

Our integrated

Strategy page 27

Directors’

Remuneration

Report page 134

• Net Zero

Carbon

Framework at

henryboot.co.uk

Scope 1,

Scope 2, and,

if appropriate,

Scope 3 GHG

emissions, and

the related risks

P

Scope 1 and Scope 2 GHG

emissions are set out below.

Also find below a summary of

the work carried out to date

on assessing our Scope 3

GHG emissions.

The risks related to these have

not been fully quantified and will

be the subject of further review

and assessment.

Further work to be carried out to

review the baseline and target for

Scope 3 GHG emissions.

This work is continuing during 2026

as part of the development and

implementation of the next phase of

the Responsible Business Strategy.

Page 82

Our integrated

Strategy

page 27

Targets used by

the organisation

to manage

climate-related

risks and

opportunities

and performance

against targets

F

Targets relating to a number

of environmental factors

have been adopted as part of

overall Responsible Business

Strategy – see page 44 and,

for more information, see our

separate Responsible Business

Strategy Report.

Further work will be required

following the climate-related

scenario planning work to

understand the impact that

these outcomes have on the

group’s responsible business

and commercial strategies, and

whether this should alter any targets

previously determined.

Further work to be carried out to

review baseline and target for Scope

3 GHG emissions.

This work is continuing during 2026

as part of the development and

implementation of the next phase of

the Responsible Business Strategy.

Our integrated

Strategy

page 27

Key:

F

Fully

consistent

P

Partially

consistent,

progress made

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

73

Report on the recommendations of the

Task Force on Climate-related Financial

Disclosures (TCFD) continued

Our climate governance framework

Integrating decarbonisation and energy actions

across our key functions to meet our ultimate goal to

be NZC by 2050.

Board

ExCo

Climate Working Group

1

2

3

henryboot.co.uk74

Governance Bodies Roles

Board

Board:

• Responsible

Business

Committee

• Audit and Risk

Committee

• Remuneration

Committee

Has ultimate authority, oversight, and scrutiny of how

we are decarbonising, mitigating risk, and pivoting

to opportunity.

The Responsible Business Committee has oversight

of our Responsible Business Strategy. The Audit

and Risk Committee oversees how we manage and

mitigate risks. The Remuneration Committee oversees

how we link climate adaptation performance to

executive remuneration.

ExCo

ExCo:

• ESG

Steering Group

• Executive Sponsors

Our senior management team have responsibility for

implementation of the decarbonisation strategy and

climate change adaptation.

The ESG Steering Group (formed of senior

management) is tasked with reviewing ESG related risks

and opportunities and reporting to ExCo.

Executive sponsors are responsible for supporting and

overseeing the output of the Climate Working Group

and championing climate change adaptation within the

business and externally.

Climate

Working

Group

Climate

Working Group:

• Chair and

Vice-Chair

• Workstream leads

Employee subject matter body tasked with operational

delivery of the decarbonisation strategy.

The Chair is responsible for operational delivery and is

supported by the Vice-Chair who leads on reporting.

Workstream leads are tasked with overseeing

delivery of the component workstreams of our

decarbonisation strategy.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

75

Report on the recommendations of the

Task Force on Climate-related Financial

Disclosures (TCFD) continued

Henry Boot has a comprehensive

governance structure incorporating

the Responsible Business Committee

of the Board, plus a number of

working groups, which is set out in

further detail above and on page

133 within the Responsible Business

Committee Report.

Through this structure, we can ensure

that necessary activities are delegated

to the appropriate groups to provide

the required focus to these areas, with

the Responsible Business Committee,

and ultimately the Board, maintaining

overall oversight and direction. The

Responsible Business Committee

receives regular reports regarding the

progress of achievement against all

ESG-related metrics and targets, and

these are also reviewed annually by

the Board.

In addition, page 132 of the

Responsible Business Committee

Report sets out the roles of various

senior managers within the business,

and their links to the various groups,

to outline how senior management

has the necessary oversight and

involvement with responsible business

delivery.

The Responsible Business Committee

ultimately provides Board-level

importance to all ESG-related

matters, including oversight of the

group’s Climate Change Framework,

and achievement of all ESG-related

targets within the Responsible

Business Strategy.

In addition, there are a number of other

measures in place to ensure the best

governance of all responsible business-

related activities:

• Reporting within the Strategy Days

assessed how the subsidiaries

assessed their climate related

risks and opportunities, based

on a 1.8 degree and a 3.6 degree

scenario, with detail about how the

strategies would respond in these

scenarios (details of which are set

out on pages 78 to 79). These two

scenarios align to scenarios 2 and

4 as described by the IPCC in their

most recent assessment report.

All strategies include wider ESG-

related objectives, and achievement

against previous ESG metrics

and targets.

• The Remuneration Committee has

oversight of the incorporation of

ESG-related metrics into executive

remuneration.

• Skills and experience in climate

issues forms appropriate part of

Non-executive Director recruitment

and are assessed in the Board

Skills Assessment.

• Climate-related risks and

opportunities forms part of

the annual risk management

procedures. Twice a year, the Audit

and Risk Committee reviews and

discusses the principal risks to the

business, including climate-related

risks (as captured in the table on

pages 78 to 79 below), to determine

whether they are appropriate and

sufficient, as informed by the views

of the subsidiary assessments.

In addition to this, at the annual

Strategy Days, climate-related risks

and opportunities, and their impact

on subsidiary strategies, were

reviewed by the Board and ExCo.

• Where individual schemes

and projects are brought for

approval as Matters Reserved

for the Board, the Board reports

relating to these also contain an

assessment of climate-related

impacts and mitigations, and

any environmental factors that

have been taken into account

when recommending a particular

course of action.

• The budgeting process accounts

for all ESG-related expenditure

required for the achievement of

Responsible Business Strategy.

In relation to the role of senior leaders

and managers within the organisation,

other measures are taken:

• ExCo members are responsible for

delivering against specific targets

calibrated to ensure each business

contributes to achievement of

climate-related goals and are

periodically updated about progress

against the Responsible Business

Strategy and annual Responsible

Business Plans.

• The ESG Steering Group

(comprising the Chief Executive

Officer, Chief Financial Officer,

Chief Operating Officer, People

Director and the Responsible

Business Manager) helps to

assess all ESG related issues

including climate issues, to

support the Board, and brings

leaders from across the

group together for a multi-

disciplinary approach. This

considers progress against the

Responsible Business Strategy

but also crosscutting issues

such as property environmental

performance and associated

objectives. The ESG Steering

Group assesses climate-related

risks and opportunities, both

directly associated with the

delivery of the Climate Change

Framework and more broadly

with regards to our key markets,

stakeholder expectations,

and compliance. It engages

the Managing Directors of

the subsidiary businesses to

assess their short-, medium-

and long term climate-related

risks (and mitigation measures)

and opportunities, which are

then incorporated into their

commercial strategy. It then

provides recommendations

or requests for input from

the Responsible Business

Committee, on measures such as

property improvements, energy-

saving initiatives or fuel usage,

and the impacts these can have

on GHG emissions, together

with any associated financial

outlay required.

• The Climate Working Group-

comprised of subsidiary

representatives and subject matter

experts, together with Board and

ExCo sponsors – implements

a number of initiatives relating

to climate change and provides

knowledge transfer and impact

on group strategies. This results

in recommendations to the ESG

Steering Group, and, ultimately, the

Responsible Business Committee,

on areas in which environmental

improvement activities can be made

and innovative measures initiated.

• Senior leaders within the business

have established a relationship with

the UK Green Building Council,

to provide insights specific to the

built environment.

henryboot.co.uk76

• The Chief Executive Officer

has ultimate oversight of

environmental performance and

achievements, which is reported

on to ExCo along with the Board

and disseminated down to other

senior management, and more

widely within the business, through

planned information releases and

interactions with subsidiaries and

ExCo. By chairing the ESG Steering

Group, the Chief Executive Officer

provides executive direction and

accountability for environmental

undertakings by the group and

provides recommendations to the

Responsible Business Committee,

as well as a steer to subsidiaries on

action they should be taking.

Risks and opportunities

and the risk management

process

A risk and opportunity assessment

has been delivered with ExCo and the

Board Committees to identify potential

risks and review the likelihood and

impact against a matrix that scores

the risks based on factors such as

financial, reputational, legal/regulatory

and operational. This focused on each

area of physical and transitional risk

identified as being pertinent to the

industries in which we operate. Once

completed, this was compiled into an

overall matrix of risk and opportunity,

which can be seen in the tables below.

As this exercise has been performed in

respect of each part of the business,

it has included assessment of risk by

sector (and geography to the extent

it is relevant). During 2025, we have

carried out further work with the

various subsidiary businesses to

review the risks and opportunities

identified and further develop the

strategy for whether these climate-

related risks should be mitigated,

transferred, accepted or controlled.

The review also focused on the

potential materiality of the financial

risks that may be posed, assessed

by reference to the two scenarios

that are identified within the table

below, and how this is modelled to

impact on strategic direction, as well

as the opportunities that each part

of the business should focus on in

developing their strategies. This was

then considered within the subsidiaries

for the Strategy Days in November

  1. A summary of the results of

this strategic review is set out under

‘Strategy’

below on page 81.

In relation to the time frames

considered for the risks and

opportunities identified below, the

group considers short term to be up

to 2030, medium term to be up to

2040, and long term to be up to 2050.

The financial commitments required

to address the short term risks are

embedded in the group’s short term

budget and five-year business plan.

For this reason, ‘short term’ relates

to our group for this period of more

certain financial planning. Due to the

nature of our business, property and

land schemes can often be in the

development or planning stages for

over ten years, and so this translates

into a ‘medium term’ timescale

being to 2040, when some of these

schemes may come to fruition. Very

few schemes would be currently in

development or planning beyond

that period, and so ‘long term’ for

our business means beyond the

foreseeable scope of our current

pipeline of opportunities.

We have taken this approach as

we recognise that the response to

climate change is evolving rapidly

and, while it is essential to deliver

cost projections for the investment

needed to tackle climate change, we

must maintain flexibility to adapt our

projections and approach to take into

account changes in the regulatory and

legislative landscape and the evolving

technological response and availability.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

77

Risks

Low emissions scenario:

1.8°C warming

Transition

risk Potential financial impact 2030 2040 2050

Response Impact on strategy

In this scenario, the business is

exposed to significant transition risks,

including more stringent reporting,

regulation, and short-notice

legislative changes with requirements

to adopt new or alternative materials

and technologies that deliver low-

carbon, whole-life infrastructure

assets and buildings. It includes

associated supply chain impacts and

potential cost increases.

Technology Capital cost of replacing/upgrading plant and vehicles.

Subsidiaries affected – BP

A balanced transition to carbon-friendly plant and vehicles considering our

customer base, the group’s NZC targets and availability of technological

advancements. The group has assessed the cost of transitioning as part

of our NZC framework, including the transition of cabins, generators and

electrification of the fleet. These costs are included in the group’s five-year

business plan. We will look at scenario modelling the costs of transition in the

next 18 months.

Investment in plant and fleet, which addresses other challenges and cost

efficiencies (colder weather/frozen ground, ventilation, ground preparation

equipment) is factored into the strategy.

Financial Increase in supply chain costs as their transition costs

(including technological and legislative) are passed through

to main contractor/developer.

Subsidiaries affected – HBD and SBH

It remains difficult to predict the speed and consistency at which our

supply chain will transition due to market and political volatility. As a result,

the resulting increase in cost , and our ability to share the cost with our

customers, can also be difficult to predict. Our aim is to maintain healthy

margins on all developments by appropriately fixing costs and pricing

accordingly while also supporting the transition of our supply chain (through

sharing knowledge and resources) to a low-carbon economy.

Opportunities are to be assessed more thoroughly based on technology

and scheme profile.

Supply chain liaison undertaken to understand capability and offering to

support altered requirements as well as any higher risk materials/ supplies

to value engineer where possible.

Market Demand for sustainable assets rapidly increase/reduced

appetite for assets that do not meet sustainability criteria.

Subsidiaries affected – HBD, SBH and BP

We continue to invest in sustainable schemes and assets in line with our

targets and to position ourselves favourably in the market. The increasing

cost of switching to sustainable options will, in some cases, be passed to

customers or be embedded within initial appraisals. We also expect to

retain costs in some cases as a responsible business. Where this is the case,

provision is made in our budget and business plan.

Adjustments to plant and fleet procurement strategy are underway with

a short term focus on the utilisation of HVO, and a long term focus on

replacing diesel vehicles with electric or hydrogen equivalents where

possible. Investments in hydrogen or electric HGVs will be considered when

models become more widely available.

For development activity, increasing our knowledge of how to achieve

class-leading ESG outcomes for refurbishment or retrofit projects. HBD is

already increasing the number of developments that will achieve the highest

environmental standards and disposing of properties where high standards

cannot be achieved.

On homebuilding schemes, evaluations will include bid/no bid criteria

around site location/characteristics and allocation of risk with clients within

contracts, as well as customer capacity to cover increased costs.

Policy and Legal

Government legislation designed to reduce emissions (such as

the forthcoming SRS standards, emissions trading schemes/

carbon tax requirements, mandatory biodiversity net gain

delivery and the Future Homes Standard) changes specifications

and increases costs of schemes impacting viability.

Subsidiaries affected – HL, HBD and SBH

We closely monitor existing and emerging legislation such as the SRS and the

Future Homes Standard in advance of committing to a scheme. Appraisals

then fully embed additional legislative costs, which currently remain within

accepted targeted return levels.

Residential activity has adopted a follow strategy rather than lead position

so the most cost-effective and proven material and technology designs

can be utilised without incurring early adopter risk. Modern methods

of construction to be explored further rather than traditional build

methodology, where design adaptability can be more easily achieved, and

on-site, weather-related delays can be more easily mitigated.

Strategic land values reduce as housebuilders and developers

look to pass on additional building standards costs as well as

additional site planning and infrastructure cost requirements.

Subsidiaries affected – HL

Strategic land forecasts recognise potential decreases in profit per plot,

although we will look to begin modelling the full financial impact.

Viability of ongoing projects remains under constant scrutiny to understand

the impact on profit per plot of evolving climate change requirements in

order that S106 obligations can be appropriately negotiated, infrastructure

provision phased, and, where necessary, viability assessments mounted

at the application stage to assist in the maintenance of profit per plot.

We have also increased the volume of plots sold per year which supports

offsetting any erosion of profit per plot.

Emerging policies are to be monitored, so as to ‘future-proof’ longer-term

schemes against changing and increasing environmental requirements, and

any impacts on sites not yet within the portfolio.

High emissions scenario:

3.6°C warming Physical risk Potential financial impact 2030 2040 2050

Response Impact on strategy

In this scenario, the business is

exposed to significant physical risks,

both acute and chronic, including

exposure to flooding, strong winds

and heat stress resulting in damage

to assets, prolonged project delivery

timescales, and more onerous

whole-of-life obligations on buildings

and assets to ensure materials can

withstand temperature extremes.

Extreme

weather

conditions –

precipitation,

flood, wind.

Delayed build programmes due to extreme weather events,

leading to additional risk/costs. Ground or site conditions/

location is affected by climate events which means that they

are no longer viable for their intended use.

Subsidiaries affected –SBH, HL and HBD

Current scheme appraisals make allowance for delays, and contractual

protections are used where possible. We, therefore, do not expect any

material short term financial losses. In the longer term, where the group is

unable to contractually mitigate the risk, it could result in margin erosion on

schemes, although we do not foresee this resulting in scheme losses due to

the healthy margins currently achieved.

Ongoing viability pressures will increase and will continue to be

appropriately monitored and mitigated against, through appraisals,

supply chain and customer liquidity checks, and appropriate contractual

mechanisms.

Heat stress Design criteria evolved to combat overheating. Construction

site conditions and practices will need to ensure worker health

and safety and wellbeing.

Subsidiaries affected –SBH and HBD

The group remains mindful to develop sustainable assets and of the health

and wellbeing impact on our people. While we do not anticipate significant

risk, any associated costs will inevitably be passed on to the end user.

On construction schemes, evaluations will continue to include more

sophisticated bid/no bid and appraisal criteria around site location,

characteristics and allocation of risk with clients within contracts, and

customer capacity to cover increased costs.

Flooding Already a key requirement of planning process. Increased

number of flood plains in future may reduce land values.

Subsidiaries affected – HL, SBH and HBD

Flood assessments are considered on all schemes with a particular focus on

strategic land, which can be held for longer durations. We carry out routine

flood risk assessments to maintain an accurate understanding of the risks

posed to our landbank and schemes under development.

In the long term, we could experience a reduction in the volume of suitable

land available leading to reduced margins or the impairment of land values

where flooding becomes more prevalent. This is mitigated in the medium

term by the suitable strategic land bank we hold in prime locations. We will

look to begin modelling the financial impact.

Land appraisals will be ever-more focused on the optimum size and

location of the site, which should be promoted, mindful of maximising

profit when set against the environmental agenda and the emerging need

to accommodate biodiversity and flood measures on site.

Report on the recommendations of the

Task Force on Climate-related Financial

Disclosures (TCFD) continued

henryboot.co.uk78

Unmitigated Risk:

Significant risk

Elevated risk

Low risk

Subsidiary:

HBC Henry Boot Construction BP Banner Plant

HL Hallam Land SBH Stonebridge Homes

HBD Henry Boot Developments

Risks

Low emissions scenario:

1.8°C warming

Transition

risk Potential financial impact 2030 2040 2050

Response Impact on strategy

In this scenario, the business is

exposed to significant transition risks,

including more stringent reporting,

regulation, and short-notice

legislative changes with requirements

to adopt new or alternative materials

and technologies that deliver low-

carbon, whole-life infrastructure

assets and buildings. It includes

associated supply chain impacts and

potential cost increases.

Technology Capital cost of replacing/upgrading plant and vehicles.

Subsidiaries affected – BP

A balanced transition to carbon-friendly plant and vehicles considering our

customer base, the group’s NZC targets and availability of technological

advancements. The group has assessed the cost of transitioning as part

of our NZC framework, including the transition of cabins, generators and

electrification of the fleet. These costs are included in the group’s five-year

business plan. We will look at scenario modelling the costs of transition in the

next 18 months.

Investment in plant and fleet, which addresses other challenges and cost

efficiencies (colder weather/frozen ground, ventilation, ground preparation

equipment) is factored into the strategy.

Financial Increase in supply chain costs as their transition costs

(including technological and legislative) are passed through

to main contractor/developer.

Subsidiaries affected – HBD and SBH

It remains difficult to predict the speed and consistency at which our

supply chain will transition due to market and political volatility. As a result,

the resulting increase in cost , and our ability to share the cost with our

customers, can also be difficult to predict. Our aim is to maintain healthy

margins on all developments by appropriately fixing costs and pricing

accordingly while also supporting the transition of our supply chain (through

sharing knowledge and resources) to a low-carbon economy.

Opportunities are to be assessed more thoroughly based on technology

and scheme profile.

Supply chain liaison undertaken to understand capability and offering to

support altered requirements as well as any higher risk materials/ supplies

to value engineer where possible.

Market Demand for sustainable assets rapidly increase/reduced

appetite for assets that do not meet sustainability criteria.

Subsidiaries affected – HBD, SBH and BP

We continue to invest in sustainable schemes and assets in line with our

targets and to position ourselves favourably in the market. The increasing

cost of switching to sustainable options will, in some cases, be passed to

customers or be embedded within initial appraisals. We also expect to

retain costs in some cases as a responsible business. Where this is the case,

provision is made in our budget and business plan.

Adjustments to plant and fleet procurement strategy are underway with

a short term focus on the utilisation of HVO, and a long term focus on

replacing diesel vehicles with electric or hydrogen equivalents where

possible. Investments in hydrogen or electric HGVs will be considered when

models become more widely available.

For development activity, increasing our knowledge of how to achieve

class-leading ESG outcomes for refurbishment or retrofit projects. HBD is

already increasing the number of developments that will achieve the highest

environmental standards and disposing of properties where high standards

cannot be achieved.

On homebuilding schemes, evaluations will include bid/no bid criteria

around site location/characteristics and allocation of risk with clients within

contracts, as well as customer capacity to cover increased costs.

Policy and Legal

Government legislation designed to reduce emissions (such as

the forthcoming SRS standards, emissions trading schemes/

carbon tax requirements, mandatory biodiversity net gain

delivery and the Future Homes Standard) changes specifications

and increases costs of schemes impacting viability.

Subsidiaries affected – HL, HBD and SBH

We closely monitor existing and emerging legislation such as the SRS and the

Future Homes Standard in advance of committing to a scheme. Appraisals

then fully embed additional legislative costs, which currently remain within

accepted targeted return levels.

Residential activity has adopted a follow strategy rather than lead position

so the most cost-effective and proven material and technology designs

can be utilised without incurring early adopter risk. Modern methods

of construction to be explored further rather than traditional build

methodology, where design adaptability can be more easily achieved, and

on-site, weather-related delays can be more easily mitigated.

Strategic land values reduce as housebuilders and developers

look to pass on additional building standards costs as well as

additional site planning and infrastructure cost requirements.

Subsidiaries affected – HL

Strategic land forecasts recognise potential decreases in profit per plot,

although we will look to begin modelling the full financial impact.

Viability of ongoing projects remains under constant scrutiny to understand

the impact on profit per plot of evolving climate change requirements in

order that S106 obligations can be appropriately negotiated, infrastructure

provision phased, and, where necessary, viability assessments mounted

at the application stage to assist in the maintenance of profit per plot.

We have also increased the volume of plots sold per year which supports

offsetting any erosion of profit per plot.

Emerging policies are to be monitored, so as to ‘future-proof’ longer-term

schemes against changing and increasing environmental requirements, and

any impacts on sites not yet within the portfolio.

High emissions scenario:

3.6°C warming Physical risk Potential financial impact 2030 2040 2050

Response Impact on strategy

In this scenario, the business is

exposed to significant physical risks,

both acute and chronic, including

exposure to flooding, strong winds

and heat stress resulting in damage

to assets, prolonged project delivery

timescales, and more onerous

whole-of-life obligations on buildings

and assets to ensure materials can

withstand temperature extremes.

Extreme

weather

conditions –

precipitation,

flood, wind.

Delayed build programmes due to extreme weather events,

leading to additional risk/costs. Ground or site conditions/

location is affected by climate events which means that they

are no longer viable for their intended use.

Subsidiaries affected –SBH, HL and HBD

Current scheme appraisals make allowance for delays, and contractual

protections are used where possible. We, therefore, do not expect any

material short term financial losses. In the longer term, where the group is

unable to contractually mitigate the risk, it could result in margin erosion on

schemes, although we do not foresee this resulting in scheme losses due to

the healthy margins currently achieved.

Ongoing viability pressures will increase and will continue to be

appropriately monitored and mitigated against, through appraisals,

supply chain and customer liquidity checks, and appropriate contractual

mechanisms.

Heat stress Design criteria evolved to combat overheating. Construction

site conditions and practices will need to ensure worker health

and safety and wellbeing.

Subsidiaries affected –SBH and HBD

The group remains mindful to develop sustainable assets and of the health

and wellbeing impact on our people. While we do not anticipate significant

risk, any associated costs will inevitably be passed on to the end user.

On construction schemes, evaluations will continue to include more

sophisticated bid/no bid and appraisal criteria around site location,

characteristics and allocation of risk with clients within contracts, and

customer capacity to cover increased costs.

Flooding Already a key requirement of planning process. Increased

number of flood plains in future may reduce land values.

Subsidiaries affected – HL, SBH and HBD

Flood assessments are considered on all schemes with a particular focus on

strategic land, which can be held for longer durations. We carry out routine

flood risk assessments to maintain an accurate understanding of the risks

posed to our landbank and schemes under development.

In the long term, we could experience a reduction in the volume of suitable

land available leading to reduced margins or the impairment of land values

where flooding becomes more prevalent. This is mitigated in the medium

term by the suitable strategic land bank we hold in prime locations. We will

look to begin modelling the financial impact.

Land appraisals will be ever-more focused on the optimum size and

location of the site, which should be promoted, mindful of maximising

profit when set against the environmental agenda and the emerging need

to accommodate biodiversity and flood measures on site.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

79

Report on the recommendations of the

Task Force on Climate-related Financial

Disclosures (TCFD) continued

We also continue to consider lesser risks, which, if they were to increase in either likelihood or impact, would be elevated to

primary risks. These include:

• the cost of investing in new technology to monitor our environmental impact;

• cost of capital;

• the valuation impact of environmental factors on investment property;

• the ability to attract and retain a talented workforce who are committed to climate change adaptation and have the right

skillset to deliver it; and

• an increase in insurance costs and reduced availability.

Opportunities

In addition to the opportunities presented through the adaptation of our strategies as set out in the table above, a summary of

the principal overarching opportunities we have identified is set out below.

Opportunities Description Response

Resources Recruitment of modern and progressive

workforce

The group’s delivery on ESG matters, and in particular climate

change, has already impacted the recruitment process with

candidates often reflecting on this as a reason they join Henry Boot.

We will increasingly engage future talent to ensure that learners are

aware of our approach and have the skillsets we may require in the

future as we adapt to climate change.

Financial Availability and cost of capital to

the group

We routinely discuss potential targets and environmental

expectations with our funders

Market Green credentials support tendering

opportunities

Diversified offerings to customers (green

products, retrofitting, redevelopment)

Increased premium on products

Access to new markets

Environmental credentials and reporting have supported numerous

bids in the year, in particular our position on public sector framework

contracts in the construction segment.

We adhere to the market expectation of excellent environmental

standards in our key property development markets.

In residential development, we adopt a ‘follow’ approach to ensure

that we can offer our customers excellent environmental standards

that remain viable in the price categories of our house types.

Climate change opens up potential new markets which we routinely

explore and assess.

Energy source

and usage

Ability to attract occupiers

Lower operating costs

The group has delivered and is progressing developments that are

operationally net zero and BREEAM excellent. This opportunity

will be progressed as we recycle and develop assets, including

the group’s investment property, enabling us to appeal to a

diverse range of occupiers through increased standards and cost

efficiencies.

Innovation and

resilience

Digital transformation As a group we continue to invest heavily in digital transformation and

systems as we believe this will support efficiency and effectiveness

as the group grows. This is an ongoing opportunity with key system

upgrades currently in process.

henryboot.co.uk80

Strategy

Our commercial strategy positions us to adapt and thrive in a time of changing climate whilst our Responsible

Business Strategy explains how we will achieve this and details our ambitions to decarbonise and holistically adapt.

At the Strategy Days held in

November 2025, each of the main

subsidiary businesses detailed how

their strategies considered both the

group’s and their own climate-related

risks and opportunities, based on a

1.8 degree and a 3.6 degree scenario.

This included details about how their

particular strategies had responded in

these scenarios to ensure resilience,

both in terms of mitigation and in

order to benefit from opportunities

presented.

The 1.8°C and 3.6°C scenarios have

been selected as being the most

appropriate in the absence of our

quantitative scenario modelling having

being completed; representing as they

do a more probable scenario and then

a less probable but more extreme and

catastrophic outcome. By carrying out

this exercise, each of the subsidiary

businesses has ensured that the

resilience of its respective strategies

has been improved by modelling the

impacts of the identified risks and

opportunities within their plans. It

ensures that products and services are

fit for purpose, and any anticipated

trends have been catered for when

thinking about the longer-term future

of the various businesses.

The group now considers each of

these strategies to have incorporated

the necessary resilience to the two

different climate scenarios. We also

recognise the importance of our

approach on environmental issues

to future talent acquisition and

monitor any impact this is having

on our recruitment activities. When

quantitative scenario modelling is

concluded, and a more detailed set

of assumptions and trends can be

explained regarding the scenarios

considered, this will be included within

the relevant disclosures.

2019

Our baseline year

for GHG emissions

reporting

2022

Phase 2 Responsible

Business Strategy

published including

our 2030 NZC

target.

2025

Phase 2

Responsible

Business Strategy

concludes. Direct

GHG emissions

reduced by 40%

2026

Phase 3 of

Responsible

Business Strategy

to be published

including updated

decarbonisation

trajectory and

overview of climate

transition plan.

2030

Target to achieve

NZC for direct

emissions.

2050

Aspiration to be a

fully NZC business

for direct and

indirect emissions.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

81

Report on the recommendations of the

Task Force on Climate-related Financial

Disclosures (TCFD) continued

Metrics and targets

The metrics we currently set relate predominantly to GHG emissions, though we are conscious that additional metrics may be

required in relation to climate-related risks and opportunities, capital deployment, internal carbon pricing and remuneration.

We have a target to reach NZC for all direct (Scope 1 and 2) GHG emissions by 2030. In achieving this target, we are aiming

to decarbonise operational emissions, and adapt our properties, processes, and engage our workforce to influence behaviour

change. Our Decarbonisation Trajectory (see below) plots our projected path to achieve decarbonisation.

2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2030

Total direct emissions –

Scope 1 and 2 (tonnes of CO

2

e) 3,313 2,562 2,706 2,930 2,833 2,989 2,002

Carbon reduction plan total direct emissions

– Scope 1 and 2 (tonnes of CO

2

e) 3,313 3,204 3,095 2,985 2,875 2,765 2,653 1,392

Total emissions (tonnes of CO

2

e) 4,404 3,357 3,654 3,958 3,897 3,983 2,724

Total energy consumed –

Scopes 1, 2 and 3 (MWh) n/a 11,551 12,600 13,647 13,636 14,586 10,692

In 2020/21, we worked with external

consultants to establish a carbon-

reduction trajectory. From a 2019

baseline, reductions were forecast

in alignment with the NZC strategy,

which included fleet electrification,

generator replacement and retrofitting

of controlled sites, among other

activities.

The trajectory forecasts a reduction

in direct emissions to 2,653 tonnes

by 2025 and to 1,392 tonnes by 2030.

Our 2025 direct GHG emissions were

2,002 tonnes (a 40% reduction on our

2019 baseline) and we are pleased

to have exceeded our medium-term

reduction target.

In 2025, we began work with Nature

Positive (part of the RSK Group)

to re-align our decarbonisation

trajectory to take account of progress

to date and the divestment of Henry

Boot Construction. The updated

decarbonisation trajectory will be

published in 2026 and maintains our

commitment to achieve NZC for

direct emissions by 2030. Whilst our

approach to decarbonisation may

evolve due to changes in legislation

and technology, we are confident that

our target can be achieved.

After a successful trial, we have

continued to implement the use of

HVO for our fleet and HBC’s site-based

requirements which has led to material

emission savings. We are currently

reviewing further opportunities to

scale up the use of HVO. We are,

however, cognisant that using HVO,

whilst a good approach to reduce

GHG emissions in the short term, is

not a long term sustainable option.

We ensure the HVO we use is sourced

credibly and is compliant with relevant

accreditation. We also continue to

review and research alternative longer-

term technologies and solutions to

reduce the emissions impact of our

fleet and site-based requirements.

In addition to our direct emissions,

we are committed to reducing our

indirect GHG emissions (Scope 3).

In 2024, we undertook a project

to analyse our indirect emissions

ahead of establishing a reduction

target and action plan. The setting

of this target will require significant

collaboration with our people, supply

chain and customers to ensure we

take a collaborative approach to

reaching NZC and will be an activity

that is being considered as part of the

development and launch of the next

phase of our Responsible Business

Strategy in 2026. Scope 3 emissions

reported on by the group within total

energy consumed include transmission

and distribution losses from electricity,

well-to-tank emissions from all fuels

and employee transport.

In addition to our decarbonisation

targets, we have also established

a range of additional targets (see

our Responsible Business Strategy

Progress Report for further

information) focused on the reduction

of waste, water and plastic usage and

creation. Utilising circular economy

principles, we seek to expand on

our strong existing performance to

implement commercial processes that

utilise resources and avoid creating

waste. We are also committed to

implementing nature stewardship

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

3025242322212019

Tonnes (k CO

2

e)

GHG emissions forecast

GHG emissions actual

henryboot.co.uk82

into our commercial delivery and to

innovate and work with key partners

to enhance natural habitats and

ecosystems in the environments in

which we work.

This holistic approach to tackling

the impacts of climate change will

support our business to adapt to the

evolving framework of regulation

and stakeholder expectations, and

to protect natural capital and reduce

environmental damage.

Our direct and indirect operational

carbon emissions are shown in the

tables below. These sources fall within

our consolidated financial statements.

We do not have responsibility for any

emission sources that are not included

in our financial statements.

When compared to 2019 pre-

COVID-19 levels the group has

reduced direct GHG emissions by

40%; this equates to a decrease of 1.9

tonnes per employee.

Our current evaluation (conducted

in conjunction with the Carbon

Trust) is that our material Scope 3

emission categories will be categories

1a (purchased goods and services

(product)), 11a (use of sold products

(direct)) and 13 (downstream leased

assets). Further development of our

understanding of our material Scope 3

emission categories will be undertaken

as part of the development of Phase 3

of our Responsible Business Strategy,

in which we anticipate setting our

Scope 3 baselines and reduction

targets. We plan to report on our Scope 3 reduction target and pathway, as well as report on material emissions categories, in

alignment with the forthcoming UK SRS.

Non-financial and sustainability information

The following table sets out where stakeholders can find relevant non-financial and sustainability information within

this Annual Report, further to the Financial Reporting Directive requirements contained in sections 414CA and 414CB of

the Companies Act 2006. Where possible, it also states where additional information can be found that supports these

requirements.

Reporting requirement

Relevant Henry Boot

policies and procedures

Where to read more

in this report Page(s)

Business model Business Model 20-21

Principal risks and impact

of business activity

Risks and Uncertainties

Audit and Risk Committee Report

57-66

116-120

Non-financial KPIs Strategy

Key Performance Indicators

27-45

30-32

Employee information Board Diversity Policy and Board

Stakeholder Policy

Nomination Committee Report

Our People

Section 172 statement

Employee engagement

124-128

35-39

85-89

106-107

Human rights Modern Slavery Statement and

Policy, Rights to Work Policy, and

Whistleblowing Policy

Our People 39

Social matters Board Stakeholder Policy Section 172 statement 85-89

Anti-bribery and

corruption

Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy Our People 39

Environmental matters Board Stakeholder Policy and Climate

Change Framework

Our Planet

TCFD

Section 172 statement

44-45

68-84

85-89

Climate-related Financial

Disclosures

Climate-related Financial Disclosures TCFD 68-84

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

83

Report on the recommendations of the Task

Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures

(TCFD) continued

Henry Boot group CO

2

footprint by source

Henry Boot group CO

2

e emissions

2025

Tonnes

2024

Tonnes Trend

Scope 1: Combustion of fuel and operation of facilities (Location based) 1,782 2,564

Combustion of fuel and operation of facilities (Market based) 1,782 2,564

Scope 2: Electricity, heat, steam and cooling purchased for own use

(Location based) 220 425

Electricity, heat, steam and cooling purchased for own use (Market based) 32 131

Total direct emissions 2,002 2,989

Total direct emissions per employee

1

3.9 tonnes CO

2

e 5.6 tonnes CO

2

e

Scope 3: Upstream and downstream indirect emissions (Location based)

2

722 994

Upstream and downstream indirect emissions (Market based) 722 931

Total emissions (Location based) 2,724 3,983

Total emissions per employee

1,3

5.3 tonnes CO

2

e 7.4 tonnes CO

2

e

1

Employee numbers are based on the monthly average for the year.

2

Scope 3 includes transmission and distribution losses from electricity, well to tank emissions from all fuels and employee transport.

3

100% of emissions and energy consumed are within the UK and offshore area.

4

Out of scope emissions in relation to HVO used in the year amounts to 222 tCO

2

e (2024: 52 tCO

2

e).

Carbon emissions by segment

Henry Boot group energy usage

2025

mwh

2024

mwh Trend

Total energy consumed (Scopes 1, 2 and 3) 10,692 14,586

Henry Boot group CO

2

e

emissions

2025 tonnes

of CO

2

2025

intensity

ratio tonnes

of CO

2

e

2024 tonnes

of CO

2

e

(restated for

SBH)

2024

intensity

ratio tonnes

of CO

2

e

(restated for

SBH) Intensity basis

Trend of

intensity

Property investment and

development 88 4.79 339 10.94

per 1,000 sq ft of

investment property

with communal areas

Home building 822 4.44 886 3.28 per plots sold

Land development 28 0.64 33 0.83 per employee

Construction 1,761 20.40 2,687 33.42 per £1m of turnover

Group overheads 25 0.26 38 0.40 per employee

Total gross controlled emissions 2,724 3,983

Our carbon emissions for the year ended

31 December 2025 were calculated

using the GHG Protocol Corporate

Accounting and Reporting Standard,

which provides requirements and

guidance for companies calculating their

GHG emissions and in accordance with

the March 2019 BEIS ‘Environmental

Reporting Guidelines: Including

streamlined energy and carbon reporting

guidance’ and the EMA methodology for

SECR Reporting.

Our direct and indirect operational

carbon emissions are shown in the tables

above. These sources fall within our

consolidated financial statements. We do

not have responsibility for any emission

sources that are not included in our

financial statements.

henryboot.co.uk84

Section 172 statement and stakeholder

engagement strategy

Introduction

Our Board and its committees remain

committed to taking a balanced and

well-informed approach to decision-

making, recognising the importance

of considering the interests and

perspectives of the company’s

stakeholders. While stakeholders’

interests may not always align, the

Board believes it important for all

issues to be considered and seeks

to remain mindful of the broader

implications of its decisions on

stakeholders and the long term

sustainability of the business.

Since adopting our Board Stakeholder

Policy in 2019, the Board has continued

to refine how stakeholder insight is

incorporated into its discussions,

encouraging ongoing reflection on

how best to understand stakeholder

priorities, and bring these into the

boardroom. The Board also recognises

that maintaining a responsible

culture is vital to the company’s long

term success and that our purpose,

vision and values should drive

decision-making.

Set out below are some of the ways

in which the Board seeks to take

account of stakeholder interests and

wider considerations when making

decisions. Within this report, we also

set out a case study, highlighting

a significant decision taken during

2025, and how the Board considered

a range of factors under s.172 to shape

its approach.

Our stakeholders

Our key stakeholder groups were first

identified during the development

of the Henry Boot Way in 2017, and

have been reviewed regularly since.

As part of the wider refresh of our

purpose, vision, and values in 2024, the

Board carried out another engagement

exercise to reassess these groups and

consider whether any new groups

should be recognised. Following

this review, the Board concluded

that the existing stakeholder groups

remain relevant.

Board stakeholder

engagement strategy

The Board Stakeholder Policy,

reviewed annually, sets out current

engagement with the group’s key

stakeholders and prompts discussion

as to whether a different approach is

needed as the business and strategy

evolve. This disclosure only references

Board-specific engagements, rather

than the broader engagement activity

undertaken by management and

operational teams.

For more details on how the Board

engages with employees, see page 106

Board information

• Our Board and senior leaders regularly engage with stakeholders as described on page 85

• Board papers on Reserved Matters include consideration of stakeholder interests and views

• Peter Mawson’s role as designated Board liaison with the Group Employee Forum

ensures that the Board considers the views of, and impacts on, the workforce of various decisions

• Leadership and management receive training on Directors’ duties

to maintain awareness of the Board’s responsibilities under s.172

Long term strategic considerations

• The Board reflects on the Responsible Business Strategy and whether the

outcome of its decisions support and contribute to the agreed targets

• The Board remains mindful of the company’s corporate objectives and KPIs, which

are discussed regularly, and have a wholesale review at each annual set of Strategy Days

• Papers seeking Board approval are required to explain how the matter aligns with the company’s

long term strategy; any items that deviate from the strategy are given additional scrutiny

Decision making

• The company’s culture is a core consideration when making decisions. The Board reflects on whether the action

aligns with our culture and our values, and how culture is embedded within our activities – see more on page 108

• Actions directly brought about as a result of Board engagement –

some examples are set out in the Employee Engagement section on page 106

• Where appropriate, outcomes of decisions are reassessed, and further engagement and dialogue is undertaken

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

85

Stakeholder

Why is it important

for the Board to

engage? How the Board engaged during the year Outcome of engagement

Shareholders

Dialogue with

shareholders is vital

in shaping the Board’s

approach to strategy

capital allocation,

and returns.

• Board attendance at the AGM, followed

by an informal lunch with shareholders

• The CEO and CFO lead ongoing

engagement with institutional

shareholders through results

presentations, roadshows and ad hoc

meetings. Feedback is shared with the

Board outlining key themes, and actions

for future engagement are agreed

• Regular meetings are held with significant

family or individual shareholders either by

the Chair, CEO or CFO. Key issues are fed

back to the Board

• Non-executive Director, James Sykes,

provides insight from family shareholders

during Board discussions on matters

such as the dividend policy, strategy and

gearing preferences

• The Board also receives in person updates

from the brokers on an annual basis and

discusses the engagement strategy. A

brokers’ report is discussed at every

meeting including notable share register

movements

• Consistent feedback from

shareholders was that the

group was perceived to be

overly complex and that they

would welcome a simplification

of the equity narrative. This

view was considered during

the discussions to divest

Henry Boot Construction from

the group

• Shareholders had asked for

increased communications

on significant operational

developments. This led to

an increase in RNS Reach

announcements from 4 in 2023

to 14 in 2025

• Shareholder presentations were

adapted to provide information

specifically requested by

shareholders e.g. the hidden

value within Hallam Land

Employees

Our people are

fundamental to

the delivery of our

strategy and the

group’s long term

success

• The Board held a meeting with the Group

Employee Forum (GEF) in September

to discuss topical matters, employee

sentiment and what the forum had

achieved in 2025

• Every Board member individually has

conducted site visits, attended subsidiary

board meetings or held 1:1 meetings with

members of the workforce throughout the

year to understand workforce views and

understand challenges relevant to them or

their role

• The Board reviewed the outcomes of

the employee engagement survey in

December 2025, analysing key themes

and trends within the group as a whole

and also within each business

• Further examples of workforce

engagement are shown on page 106

• The Board tasked management

with certain actions off the

back of the employment survey

results, including undertaking

regular pulse surveys to

understand the mood within

the businesses allowing them to

react in a more agile way

• Having listened to feedback

from the workforce on other

recent software and process

implementations, the Board

emphasised to management

the importance of preparing

the workforce for the cultural

change that D365 would

present through a programme

of considered communication

and training

• The Board asked that the GEF

attend the briefings to the

workforce on the sale of Henry

Boot Construction

Customers

Long-standing

customer relationships

and high quality

service underpin the

group’s reputation and

performance

• A report on customer insights was

discussed with the Board including

specific feedback from customers for

each business

• A Stonebridge Homes customer (also

a shareholder) shared some concerns

directly with the CEO during the AGM

lunch in May

• Following the feedback from

the customer at the AGM, the

CEO followed up his issues

personally, including visiting him

at his new home

• As discussed on page 111, the

Board is going to increase

its focus on customers

during 2026, particularly for

Stonebridge Homes

Section 172 statement and stakeholder

engagement strategy continued

henryboot.co.uk86

Stakeholder

Why is it important

for the Board to

engage? How the Board engaged during the year Outcome of engagement

Pensioners

As former

employees of the

business, pensioner

engagement ensures

we maintain focus

on our investment

outcomes and returns

• The Board considers whether there are

any notifiable events to report to the

pensions regulator at every meeting

• Regular governance reports are shared

with the Board to provide an overview of

the scheme and its performance

• Other pension matters are brought to the

Board for approval as required by the CFO

including the triennial valuation and ad

hoc Trustee requests

• The Board considered a request

from the Trustee in December

2025 to award discretionary

increases for certain members.

The request was considered but

not awarded due to competing

capital allocation priorities for

the group

Suppliers

Strong supplier

relationships support

delivery, safety

and quality

• Supplier performance and relationships

are monitored through H&S reporting and

operational updates from the CEO and

businesses

• Major projects requiring Board approval

include discussions on key suppliers and

associated risks to project delivery

• The Board approves the modern slavery

statement annually which seeks to combat

any potential slavery and trafficking

activities within our supply chain

• Where H&S performance is

below target level, the Board

encourages follow up training

with the workforce and

suppliers and has requested

specific feedback from the

H&S manager be included in

Board reports to outline what

restorative actions will be taken

Communities

Being a responsible

business is a core

part of our vision

and values. We want

to create impactful

social value for the

communities we work

alongside

• In July, the Board met with the senior

leadership team from BITC to discuss

placemaking and social value. They also

met with Crisis, our charity partners, to

host an event on what the property sector

can do to support the Homelessness

Alliance

• The Board met with the group’s

Community Investment Committee to

discuss their priorities and strategy for

allocating funds

• Tim Roberts chairs the Sheffield Pride

of Place Board established by BITC with

the aim of focusing efforts on Sheffield’s

community priorities

• Reports for major projects requiring Board

approval contain sections on community

consideration and engagement such

as the development of additional

infrastructure such as schools and parks

• This engagement has helped

the Responsible Business

Committee and Board to

develop a new Responsible

Business Strategy which

includes priorities across our

material issues

• You can read more about our

Responsible Business Strategy

and targets on page 34

Environment

We are committed to

being a responsible

business in the

environments we

work in through

achieving NZC,

reducing waste and

protecting nature

• Reports for major projects requiring

Board approval contain sections on the

environment such as biodiversity net

gain targets and the provision of onsite

power supply

• The Board, through the Responsible

Business Committee, receives updates

from the Climate Working Group on the

Climate Change Framework and projects

driving the journey to being fully NZC

• The Board, through the Responsible

Business and Audit and Risk Committees,

reviews the TCFD reporting and debates

the climate-related risks and opportunities

• The Board’s understanding of

environmental issues has helped

inform the new Responsible

Business Strategy with targets

agreed for achieving our NZC

ambitions, reducing waste and

resource use, and protecting

natural habitats and biodiversity

• You can read more about our

Responsible Business Strategy

and targets on page 34

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

87

Stakeholder

Why is it important

for the Board to

engage? How the Board engaged during the year Outcome of engagement

National/Local

Media

To promote the Henry

Boot brand and

manage its reputation

• Tim Roberts has regular meetings with our

PR agency and has undertaken interviews

with various media outlets

• Relevant updates are provided to the

Board as part of the CEO Report

• Engagement is largely

conducted at management

level and is only escalated to

direct Board engagement where

necessary. There are no specific

outcomes to report for 2025

Regulators

To build a two-way

dialogue and influence

potential decisions

that may affect

the group

• Engagements to date have been

conducted through the businesses, with

no direct Board interactions necessary

during the year

• There are no specific outcomes

to report for 2025

Professional

Associations

To liaise with these

groups to understand

best practice, industry

updates and build

relationships

• As discussed above, there has been Board

engagement through the year with BITC

on understanding challenges within the

sector and to discuss the Responsible

Business Strategy

• Interviews with organisations including

the CBI, Home Builders Federation and

the UK Green Building Council were held

to engage during the development phase

of the Responsible Business Strategy to

understand best practice and industry

expectations

• ExCo member, Ed Hutchinson, fed back

to the Board on lessons learned from an

Institute of Directors (IoD) strategy course

that he attended with a view to enhance

our strategy development processes

• Feedback from the interviews

with the associations listed

to the left was compiled and

fed back to the Responsible

Business Committee and

Board to help shape the new

Responsible Business Strategy

• During the IoD feedback

session, the Board discussed

some best practice examples

for strategy development and

co-creation. This is helping to

shape the evolution of how the

Board will shape the group’s

strategy for 2026 and beyond

Section 172 statement and stakeholder

engagement strategy continued

Case study

Management buyout of Henry Boot Construction

The transaction formed a key element

of the Board’s strategic simplification

programme and was considered

across multiple Board meetings,

allowing the Board to revisit the

strategic rationale for the deal, the

associated risks, and the stakeholder

impacts as negotiations progressed.

The Board recognised the value

HBC have delivered value to the

group over many years. They,

acknowledged, however, that the

construction business carried a

different risk, workforce, and returns

profile compared to the group’s

evolving business model. This model

focuses on high quality land, prime

development, and premium homes.

In reaching its decision, the Board

was mindful of its duties under

section 172 of the Companies Act

2006 to promote the long term

success of the Company for the

benefit of its members as a whole,

while having regard to the interest of

a range of stakeholders.

During the year, the Board gave detailed consideration to the management buyout (MBO) of

Henry Boot Construction (HBC), a long-established subsidiary of the group.

henryboot.co.uk88

Consideration of

s172 factors

Likely consequences of the

decision in the long term

The Board considered the long term

strategic implications of retaining

HBC within the group against

pursing an exit. In doing so, the Board

reflected on the historic volatility of

returns from the construction sector,

the credit and bond requirements,

and the level of operational and

reputational risk exposure for

the group.

The Board also considered the

strategic benefits of simplifying

the group composition, including

clearer focus on core activities with

increased synergies and a more

straightforward equity narrative

for investors.

The Board reviewed detailed

financial modelling, the proposed

consideration payable by the new

management team, and downside

scenarios. These included the

potential costs and risks associated

with a wind-down or third-party

disposal, both of which were

considered likely to be more

value-destructive in the long term.

The Board acknowledged that

no option was without risk, but

concluded that the MBO represented

the most strategically aligned

outcome when compared with the

available alternatives.

The Board recognised that residual

exposure would remain over the

five year vendor loan repayment

period following completion, but

was satisfied that this exposure

would reduce over time, and was

appropriately mitigated through

governance arrangements, financial

caps and transitional support. Having

weighed these factors, the Board

concluded that the MBO was most

likely to promote the long term

success of the Company and create

value for its shareholders.

Interest of the

Company’s workforce

The Board carefully considered the

interests of HBC employees and

the wider workforce throughout

its deliberations. In particular, the

Board considered the capability and

credibility of the new management

team, their understanding of the

business, and their ability to lead a

sustainable organisation following

separation from the group. The

Board received assurance that the

management team had already built

a solid forward pipeline of work and

had been encouraged by their actions

to stabilise the business following an

earlier period of restructuring.

The Board also considered the

potential workforce impacts of the

alternative outcomes, including the

significant disruption and uncertainty

that could arise from a wind-down

or external sale. In comparison,

the MBO was viewed as providing

greater continuity for employees,

with a motivated leadership team

and the business continuing to trade

under a familiar structure.

Recognising the importance of

clear and timely communication

to employees, the Board reviewed

the detailed internal and external

communications plan to ensure

that workforce interests were

appropriately considered.

Fostering business

relationships with suppliers,

customers and others

The Board recognised that HBC’s

relationships were critical to the

ongoing viability of the business and

to protect the group’s reputation

during and after the transition. The

Board considered the likely impact

on these relationships, including

the need to maintain confidence

with partners and customers during

the period of change. The Board

reviewed the proposed transitional

service arrangements and oversight

mechanisms intended to support

operational continuity and minimise

disruption.

The Board also considered the

ongoing association between

group and HBC, including branding

arrangements, ensuring that this

struck an appropriate balance

between risk mitigation and enabling

the separated business to operate

independently.

Health and safety was a particular

focus of the Board’s discussions.

The Board sought assurance that

appropriate standards would be

maintained during and following the

MBO. The inclusion of health and

safety targets within the management

team’s remuneration arrangements

and continued group representation

on the board during the transition

period were noted as important

safeguards that would reinforce the

right behaviours.

Maintaining a reputation

for high standards of

business conduct

Given the significance of the

transaction, the Board was mindful of

the need to maintain high standards

of governance and business conduct

throughout the process.

The Board ensured that the

transaction was subject to

appropriate internal challenge and

external advice, including financial,

legal, and accounting expertise.

The Board carefully considered

the handling of inside information

and ensured that information was

managed appropriately in accordance

with the Market Abuse Regulations

and UK listing requirements.

Case study continued

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

89

w

Governance

90 henryboot.co.uk

w

Governance

Board of Directors 92

Executive Committee 94

Governance at a glance 96

Chair’s corporate governance statement 98

Corporate governance report

– Division of responsibilities 102

– Board leadership and company purpose 104

– Audit and Risk Committee report 116

– Corporate governance statement 121

– Nomination Committee report 124

– Responsible Business Committee report 129

– Directors’ Remuneration report 134

– Summary of the Remuneration Policy 139

– Annual Report on Remuneration 141

Directors’ report 152

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in

respect of the Financial Statements

159

91

Shareholder informationOverview Strategic report Governance Financial statements

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Board of Directors

Peter Mawson

Chair

Tim Roberts

Chief Executive Officer

Darren Littlewood

Chief Financial Officer

James Sykes

Non-executive Director

Talita Ferreira

Non-executive Director

Serena Lang

Non-executive Director

Earl Sibley

Non-executive Director

Jaimie Read

Company Secretary

N

B

B B

N

B

N

A R B

N

A R B

N

A R B

Date of appointment

October 2015

Non-independent

Date of appointment

January 2020

Non-independent

Date of appointment

January 2016

Non-independent

Date of appointment

March 2011

Non-independent

Date of appointment

January 2024

Independent

Date of appointment

August 2022

Independent

Date of appointment

April 2025

Independent

Date of appointment

December 2025

Non-independent

Additional roles held

Non-executive Chairman

of Nexus Planning

Limited, independent

Board Representative

for the Paradise Circus

Project on behalf

of Birmingham City

Council.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Wide-ranging

experience in senior

leadership and

practitioner roles

across the built

environment

• Property

development and

planning knowledge

in both the public and

private sector

Peter has a wealth

of experience in

the management

and leadership of

professional service

firms, together with

senior practitioner

expertise across the built

environment, from both

public and private sector

perspectives.

Additional roles held

Chair of Business in the

Community’s Sheffield

Pride of Place Board.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Strong strategic and

corporate experience

accumulated as past

longstanding Director

• Strong property and

leadership experience

• Extensive experience

in delivering

significant property

development projects

Tim joined Henry Boot

as Chief Executive

Officer in January

2020. He is responsible

for developing and

implementing group

strategy and has ultimate

responsibility for group

profitability. Tim leads

the engagement with

all the Company’s

stakeholders, including

interaction with investors

and our people. He

is also the Director

responsible for all

health, safety and

environmental matters.

Tim was previously a

director of The British

Land Co PLC where

he was responsible for

running the London real

estate business.

Additional roles held

Director and Trustee

of South Yorkshire

Community Foundation

Limited and Member

of the CBI Yorkshire

and Humber Regional

Council.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• In depth group and

financial experience

• Establishing and

delivering strategy

whilst protecting

assets in the group

Darren joined the

group in 1999 prior

to his appointment as

Chief Financial Officer

in 2016. He became

qualified as a member

of the Chartered

Institute of Management

Accountants in 2007

and is responsible for

all financial and risk

matters relating to the

group. He is heavily

involved in investor

communications and,

along with Tim Roberts,

is also responsible

for communicating

strategy and results

to both private and

institutional investors.

Additional roles held

Partner in the London

office of Saffery LLP

Chartered Accountants,

which he joined in 1987.

He is a Non-executive

Director of Saffery Trust

International business in

Guernsey.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Significant strategic

land knowledge

• Sound financial

background and

experience

As a partner in the

Private Wealth and

Estates Group at Saffery

he has many years’

experience in the UK

strategic land market and

brings that experience to

Board decision making

generally but particularly

to Hallam Land.

Additional roles held

Non-executive Director

and Chair of the Audit

Committee of FCE

Bank plc, CEO and

Founder of Authentic

Change Solutions

Limited, Course Leader

and Facilitator for the

Institute of Directors.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Extensive finance,

risk and governance

experience

• Extensive experience

in leadership, culture

and transformation

programmes

• Certification from

Cambridge Institute

for Sustainability

Leadership

• Strong strategic and

corporate experience

across multiple

industries

Prior to joining Henry

Boot, Talita held a Non-

executive Director and

Chair of Audit role at

Tandem Bank Ltd and

executive roles as CFO

and People Director at

BMW UK Ltd, BMW

Automotive Ireland Ltd,

BMW Group Financial

Services Ltd (UK and

Ireland) and Alphabet

(GB) Ltd.

Additional roles held

Chair of Trifast plc and

Non-executive Director

of Ainscough Crane

Hire Ltd.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Extensive strategic

leadership,

growth and digital

transformation

experience

• Experience in

industrial, engineering

and construction

environments and

culturally diverse

markets

• Strong sustainability

credentials,

specifically in the built

environment

• Diversity of thought

to the Board having

worked across

multiple industries

Serena was Chair of

Eleco plc until 2023

and previously held

executive roles as CEO

North West Europe &

Africa and Enterprise

Client Executive at

Invensys (now Schneider

Electric), Global VP of

Transformation at BP

plc and as an Executive

Consultant at Capgemini

Ernst & Young.

Additional roles held

Chief Financial Officer

of Highbourne Group

Limited.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Extensive leadership

experience in the UK

listed housebuilding

• Experience

of strategic

transformation,

change management

and M&A activity

Earl joined the board in

April 2025. He brings

extensive leadership

experience in the UK-

listed housebuilding

sector and is currently

Chief Financial Officer of

the private equity owned

specialist merchant

Highbourne Group. Prior

to this, he spent ten

years with Vistry Group

PLC as Chief Financial

Officer, Interim Chief

Executive and Chief

Operating Officer. He

has also previously held

roles at Barratt Redrow

PLC and EY. In addition

to his housebuilding and

strategic land capabilities,

Earl brings experience in

strategic transformation,

change management and

M&A activity, as well as

knowledge of the listed

environment.

Additional roles held

n/a.

Jaimie is a Chartered

Company Secretary

and member of The

Chartered Governance

Institute. She has

FTSE100 and SmallCap

experience, having

worked across the

utilities, construction

and property sectors.

She started her company

secretarial career at

National Grid plc before

joining Henry Boot in

December 2017. Jaimie

was appointed Company

Secretary in December

2025 and leads the

approach to corporate

governance.

henryboot.co.uk92

Peter Mawson

Chair

Tim Roberts

Chief Executive Officer

Darren Littlewood

Chief Financial Officer

James Sykes

Non-executive Director

Talita Ferreira

Non-executive Director

Serena Lang

Non-executive Director

Earl Sibley

Non-executive Director

Jaimie Read

Company Secretary

N

B

B B

N

B

N

A R B

N

A R B

N

A R B

Date of appointment

October 2015

Non-independent

Date of appointment

January 2020

Non-independent

Date of appointment

January 2016

Non-independent

Date of appointment

March 2011

Non-independent

Date of appointment

January 2024

Independent

Date of appointment

August 2022

Independent

Date of appointment

April 2025

Independent

Date of appointment

December 2025

Non-independent

Additional roles held

Non-executive Chairman

of Nexus Planning

Limited, independent

Board Representative

for the Paradise Circus

Project on behalf

of Birmingham City

Council.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Wide-ranging

experience in senior

leadership and

practitioner roles

across the built

environment

• Property

development and

planning knowledge

in both the public and

private sector

Peter has a wealth

of experience in

the management

and leadership of

professional service

firms, together with

senior practitioner

expertise across the built

environment, from both

public and private sector

perspectives.

Additional roles held

Chair of Business in the

Community’s Sheffield

Pride of Place Board.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Strong strategic and

corporate experience

accumulated as past

longstanding Director

• Strong property and

leadership experience

• Extensive experience

in delivering

significant property

development projects

Tim joined Henry Boot

as Chief Executive

Officer in January

2020. He is responsible

for developing and

implementing group

strategy and has ultimate

responsibility for group

profitability. Tim leads

the engagement with

all the Company’s

stakeholders, including

interaction with investors

and our people. He

is also the Director

responsible for all

health, safety and

environmental matters.

Tim was previously a

director of The British

Land Co PLC where

he was responsible for

running the London real

estate business.

Additional roles held

Director and Trustee

of South Yorkshire

Community Foundation

Limited and Member

of the CBI Yorkshire

and Humber Regional

Council.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• In depth group and

financial experience

• Establishing and

delivering strategy

whilst protecting

assets in the group

Darren joined the

group in 1999 prior

to his appointment as

Chief Financial Officer

in 2016. He became

qualified as a member

of the Chartered

Institute of Management

Accountants in 2007

and is responsible for

all financial and risk

matters relating to the

group. He is heavily

involved in investor

communications and,

along with Tim Roberts,

is also responsible

for communicating

strategy and results

to both private and

institutional investors.

Additional roles held

Partner in the London

office of Saffery LLP

Chartered Accountants,

which he joined in 1987.

He is a Non-executive

Director of Saffery Trust

International business in

Guernsey.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Significant strategic

land knowledge

• Sound financial

background and

experience

As a partner in the

Private Wealth and

Estates Group at Saffery

he has many years’

experience in the UK

strategic land market and

brings that experience to

Board decision making

generally but particularly

to Hallam Land.

Additional roles held

Non-executive Director

and Chair of the Audit

Committee of FCE

Bank plc, CEO and

Founder of Authentic

Change Solutions

Limited, Course Leader

and Facilitator for the

Institute of Directors.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Extensive finance,

risk and governance

experience

• Extensive experience

in leadership, culture

and transformation

programmes

• Certification from

Cambridge Institute

for Sustainability

Leadership

• Strong strategic and

corporate experience

across multiple

industries

Prior to joining Henry

Boot, Talita held a Non-

executive Director and

Chair of Audit role at

Tandem Bank Ltd and

executive roles as CFO

and People Director at

BMW UK Ltd, BMW

Automotive Ireland Ltd,

BMW Group Financial

Services Ltd (UK and

Ireland) and Alphabet

(GB) Ltd.

Additional roles held

Chair of Trifast plc and

Non-executive Director

of Ainscough Crane

Hire Ltd.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Extensive strategic

leadership,

growth and digital

transformation

experience

• Experience in

industrial, engineering

and construction

environments and

culturally diverse

markets

• Strong sustainability

credentials,

specifically in the built

environment

• Diversity of thought

to the Board having

worked across

multiple industries

Serena was Chair of

Eleco plc until 2023

and previously held

executive roles as CEO

North West Europe &

Africa and Enterprise

Client Executive at

Invensys (now Schneider

Electric), Global VP of

Transformation at BP

plc and as an Executive

Consultant at Capgemini

Ernst & Young.

Additional roles held

Chief Financial Officer

of Highbourne Group

Limited.

Brings to the Board

Key strengths:

• Extensive leadership

experience in the UK

listed housebuilding

• Experience

of strategic

transformation,

change management

and M&A activity

Earl joined the board in

April 2025. He brings

extensive leadership

experience in the UK-

listed housebuilding

sector and is currently

Chief Financial Officer of

the private equity owned

specialist merchant

Highbourne Group. Prior

to this, he spent ten

years with Vistry Group

PLC as Chief Financial

Officer, Interim Chief

Executive and Chief

Operating Officer. He

has also previously held

roles at Barratt Redrow

PLC and EY. In addition

to his housebuilding and

strategic land capabilities,

Earl brings experience in

strategic transformation,

change management and

M&A activity, as well as

knowledge of the listed

environment.

Additional roles held

n/a.

Jaimie is a Chartered

Company Secretary

and member of The

Chartered Governance

Institute. She has

FTSE100 and SmallCap

experience, having

worked across the

utilities, construction

and property sectors.

She started her company

secretarial career at

National Grid plc before

joining Henry Boot in

December 2017. Jaimie

was appointed Company

Secretary in December

2025 and leads the

approach to corporate

governance.

Committee membership

N

Nomination

A

Audit and Risk

R

Remuneration

B

Responsible Business Committee Chair

To read our independence

assessment, please see

page 128

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

93

Executive Committee

Steven Stacey

Henry Boot PLC

Iain MacSween

Hallam Land

Management Limited

Edward Hutchinson

Henry Boot Developments Limited

/ Stonebridge Homes Limited*

Jonathan Fisher

Banner Plant Limited

Rachel White

Henry Boot PLC

Date of appointment

Chief Operating Officer in 2025

Date of appointment

Managing Director in 2026

Date of appointment

Managing Director in 2018

Date of appointment

Managing Director in 2021

Date of appointment

People Director in 2022

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Steven is a qualified chartered

accountant (ICAEW) who has

worked in a variety of finance roles,

including at big four firm PwC. He

joined Henry Boot in 2017 as Group

Financial Controller overseeing

the group's finance team, and

progressed to Finance Director in

  1. In December 2025, Steven

was appointed Chief Operating

Officer overseeing the group's

Legal, IT, Marketing and Risk teams.

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Iain joined Hallam Land in 2018 and

was appointed Managing Director

in January 2026. Iain has worked

across the UK in the procurement,

planning, design and delivery of

residentially led and mixed-use

development schemes. He is

passionate about the strategic land

sector, and his experience gives

him a deep understanding of its

unique challenges.

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Edward Hutchinson BSc (Hons),

MRICS started his career in

quantity surveying before

quickly progressing into project

management. He joined Henry

Boot Developments in 2004 as

a Project Manager rapidly rising

to the position of Senior Project

Manager in 2006. Edward was

appointed a Director in 2012 and

became Managing Director in

  1. In January 2021, he became

a board member of the Yorkshire

and Humber Regional Board for

LandAid, following which he

assumed the position of Chair

in January 2023. Ed is currently

serving as interim Managing

Director of Stonebridge Homes.

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Jonathan Fisher’s most recent

role prior to joining the Henry

Boot Group was with the Algeco

Group, where he progressed from

Account Director to Regional

Director, overseeing commercials,

operations, and strategic

development. He was subsequently

promoted to UK Sales Director

before moving into his current

position as Managing Director at

Banner Plant.

Earlier in his career, Jonathan

gained valuable experience

in hospitality and facilities

management, beginning as a

General Manager with Whitbread

before transitioning into sales and

operational leadership roles within

the FM sector.

Alongside his professional

responsibilities, Jonathan serves as

Chair of Governors at his local high

school and is actively involved in

the charity sector as a mentor.

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Rachel White joined Henry Boot

PLC in 2001 as a graduate. She

has held a number of roles in the

People team, before taking the

role of People Director in July

  1. Rachel leads the delivery

of our People Strategy to meet

the requirements of our internal

stakeholders including employee

relations, succession planning,

talent management, diversity and

inclusion, wellbeing, reward and

recognition, employee benefits and

employee engagement.

Rachel is also a Trustee Director

for Henry Boot Pension Trustees

Limited and is a member of

the Governance Committee

for the Henry Boot PLC Group

Stakeholder Pension Plan. In 2022

Rachel became a Trustee and

Vice-Chair of Sheffield Children's

Hospital Charity.

* Acting Stonebridge Homes Limited

Managing Director.

henryboot.co.uk94

Darren Littlewood

Chief Financial Officer

Steven Stacey

Henry Boot PLC

Iain MacSween

Hallam Land

Management Limited

Edward Hutchinson

Henry Boot Developments Limited

/ Stonebridge Homes Limited*

Jonathan Fisher

Banner Plant Limited

Rachel White

Henry Boot PLC

Date of appointment

Chief Operating Officer in 2025

Date of appointment

Managing Director in 2026

Date of appointment

Managing Director in 2018

Date of appointment

Managing Director in 2021

Date of appointment

People Director in 2022

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Steven is a qualified chartered

accountant (ICAEW) who has

worked in a variety of finance roles,

including at big four firm PwC. He

joined Henry Boot in 2017 as Group

Financial Controller overseeing

the group's finance team, and

progressed to Finance Director in

  1. In December 2025, Steven

was appointed Chief Operating

Officer overseeing the group's

Legal, IT, Marketing and Risk teams.

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Iain joined Hallam Land in 2018 and

was appointed Managing Director

in January 2026. Iain has worked

across the UK in the procurement,

planning, design and delivery of

residentially led and mixed-use

development schemes. He is

passionate about the strategic land

sector, and his experience gives

him a deep understanding of its

unique challenges.

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Edward Hutchinson BSc (Hons),

MRICS started his career in

quantity surveying before

quickly progressing into project

management. He joined Henry

Boot Developments in 2004 as

a Project Manager rapidly rising

to the position of Senior Project

Manager in 2006. Edward was

appointed a Director in 2012 and

became Managing Director in

  1. In January 2021, he became

a board member of the Yorkshire

and Humber Regional Board for

LandAid, following which he

assumed the position of Chair

in January 2023. Ed is currently

serving as interim Managing

Director of Stonebridge Homes.

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Jonathan Fisher’s most recent

role prior to joining the Henry

Boot Group was with the Algeco

Group, where he progressed from

Account Director to Regional

Director, overseeing commercials,

operations, and strategic

development. He was subsequently

promoted to UK Sales Director

before moving into his current

position as Managing Director at

Banner Plant.

Earlier in his career, Jonathan

gained valuable experience

in hospitality and facilities

management, beginning as a

General Manager with Whitbread

before transitioning into sales and

operational leadership roles within

the FM sector.

Alongside his professional

responsibilities, Jonathan serves as

Chair of Governors at his local high

school and is actively involved in

the charity sector as a mentor.

Brings to the

Executive Committee

Rachel White joined Henry Boot

PLC in 2001 as a graduate. She

has held a number of roles in the

People team, before taking the

role of People Director in July

2022. Rachel leads the delivery

of our People Strategy to meet

the requirements of our internal

stakeholders including employee

relations, succession planning,

talent management, diversity and

inclusion, wellbeing, reward and

recognition, employee benefits and

employee engagement.

Rachel is also a Trustee Director

for Henry Boot Pension Trustees

Limited and is a member of

the Governance Committee

for the Henry Boot PLC Group

Stakeholder Pension Plan. In 2022

Rachel became a Trustee and

Vice-Chair of Sheffield Children's

Hospital Charity.

* Acting Stonebridge Homes Limited

Managing Director.

Additional Executive

Committee members

Tim Roberts

Chief Executive Officer

Read the biographies

on page 92

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

95

FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JULY

How the Board spent it’s time this year

Name Board Audit and Risk Nomination Remuneration Responsible

Business

Peter Mawson 7/7 3/3 2/2 3/3

Tim Roberts 7/7 2/3**

Darren Littlewood 7/7 2/3**

Talita Ferreira 7/7 4/4 3/3 4/4 3/3

Serena Lang 7/7 4/4 3/3 4/4 3/3

Earl Sibley 4/4 1/2* 2/2 2/2 1/2*

James Sykes 7/7 3/3 3/3

* Earl missed the July round of committee meetings due to a personal

commitment that had been arranged before joining Henry Boot. He received

the papers in advance and fed back comments to the respective Chairs for

discussion in the meetings.

**Tim and Darren missed the March Responsible Business Committee meeting

due to other business commitments.

We held the AGM

and shareholder

lunch with over

70 people in

attendance. Senior

leaders within

HBD attended the

Board meeting to

deliver a briefing on

the Golden Valley

development at

Cheltenham.

Earl Sibley joined

the Board on

1 April 2025.

The 2024 financial

results were

approved along with

discussions on going

concern and the

dividend strategy.

Our H&S Manager

attended to discuss

H&S performance

and culture over

the year.

The Board debated

and approved

the 2025 budget

and met with

former MD, Nick

Duckworth, to

discuss the planning

environment and

Hallam Land’s

approach to

increase planning

applications. A

separate Board

session was held on

the company’s risk

management and

internal controls

framework.

Governance

at a glance

The Board meeting

was held in our

London office and

the Board spent

time with the

group’s Community

Investment

Committee

understanding

their strategy and

engagement with

our partners. The

Board also met

with BITC and

co-hosted an event

with Crisis on how

the property sector

can help to tackle

homelessness.

henryboot.co.uk96

SEPTEMBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER

The MBO of Henry

Boot Construction

was formally

approved in

September as well

as the interim results.

The Board met with

senior leaders from

Stonebridge Homes

and approved

the acquisition of

land at Carlton.

Recent feedback

and insights from

customers was

debated.

Board composition as at 31 December 2025

Gender diversity Independence Board tenure

5

2

3

2

00%

1

1

1

2

1

3

Female

Male

Executive Directors

Independent Non-executive

Directors

Non-Independent

Non-executive Directors

Chair

0-2 years

3-5 years

6-8 years

9+ years

A two-day strategy

session was held

to review group

strategy, future

ways of working

and the individual

business strategies.

External attendees

delivered sessions

to lead discussions

on the economy, the

property market and

investor strategy.

Changes to the

ExCo and other

senior leadership

positions were

agreed alongside a

restructuring of the

group functions.

The People Director

attended to share

the employee

engagement survey

results and debate

the trends and agree

actions to address

improvement areas.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

97

Chair’s corporate governance

statement

Following a competitive recruitment

process, we welcomed Earl Sibley on

1 April as a Director and a member

of our four committees. Earl’s

extensive housebuilding experience

has already proved invaluable at a

time when we are fully integrating

Stonebridge Homes into the group.

We said goodbye to Amy Stanbridge in

December 2025 and welcomed Jaimie

Read as our new Company Secretary.

We thank Amy for her many years of

service and excellent guidance.

Strategic progress

The Board has driven significant

strategic progress this year as we

evolve the composition of the group.

The MBO of Henry Boot Construction,

the continued acquisition of

Stonebridge and the end of the Road

Link contract have resulted in a

targeted shift towards our three core

businesses. To support the growth

of these businesses, we have taken

the opportunity through our Future

Ways of Working initiative to reflect

and debate on the right organisational

structure of the group to deliver the

next phase of our strategy. Through

sessions at Board meetings and 1:1

interviews with the specialist change

management lead, the Board has

shaped the new structure to leverage

skills across the group and encourage

working in a more dynamic and

collaborative way, driven by business

partnering and better use of data.

As an organisation with 140 years of

history, we know that we need to keep

evolving, modernise our processes and

embrace technology.

Leadership changes

This year, the Nomination Committee

and the Board have overseen several

changes to our ExCo. Throughout the

summer, the Nomination Committee

led a recruitment process with our

external recruitment partners for the

new MD of Hallam Land after the

long serving MD, Nick Duckworth,

indicated he wished to step down. Nick

leaves the group with our best wishes

and the Hallam business in a very

strong position. We were delighted

to appoint an internal candidate, Iain

MacSween, as his successor and a

member of ExCo. You can read more

about this on page 125.

Future Ways of Working also led to

the creation of a new Chief Operating

Officer role, a key position that sits on

ExCo. Steve Stacey was appointed in

December 2025 and leads the drive for

efficiency, collaboration and alignment

across the group. Ed Hutchinson, MD

of HBD, is currently serving as interim

MD of Stonebridge Homes whilst the

search is underway for a permanent

successor. The Nomination Committee

is overseeing this recruitment process

and we will be able to share more

details in next year’s report.

Capital allocation

Activity in our core markets has

been subdued against a backdrop of

general economic uncertainty. This

has narrowed our focus on the capital

allocation strategy and resulted in

the creation of a management-led

Investment Committee, chaired by

the CFO.

Over 2025, the Board sanctioned

additional investment within Hallam

Land to progress planning applications

and approved key land acquisitions for

Stonebridge Homes to strengthen its

land bank to enable future delivery. We

know our markets are cyclical and we

believe this approach stands us in good

stead for when the markets recover.

In 2026, the Investment Committee

will evaluate investment opportunities

against our strategy, assess risk and

returns and review the responsible

business implications. Major decisions

are then recommended to the Board in

line with our agreed authority limits.

The Board has driven signicant strategic

progress this year as we evolve the

composition of the group. The MBO of Henry

Boot Construction, the continued acquisition

of Stonebridge and the end of the Road Link

contract have resulted in a targeted shift

towards our three core businesses.”

Peter Mawson

Chair

henryboot.co.uk98

Board development

We have increased the emphasis

in recent months on how we can

continually improve our effectiveness

as directors. We have refreshed our

agendas and papers to spend less

time receiving operational updates

from management and focus more

on collaborating and having forward-

looking, strategic conversations.

We now reflect at the end of every

meeting on what went well, and where

improvements could be made in terms

of preparation, the agenda and the

debate. In 2026, we have commenced

a programme of Board development

work, held a session with PwC on

cyber governance and will start to

evolve our approach to strategy

development; more of this to come in

next year’s report.

Engagement

The following section sets out our

structure, governance processes

and key activities undertaken by the

Board and its committees during

  1. We welcome feedback from our

stakeholders, and I would encourage

you to get in touch with us on any

governance matters.

I hope to see many of you at our

AGM on 21 May 2026 which will be

held at the same venue as last year:

DoubleTree by Hilton Sheffield City,

Bramall Lane, Sheffield S2 4SU.

(see pages 236 to 239 for full details)

Peter Mawson

Chair

14 April 2026

UK Corporate

Governance Code

compliance

For 2025, the Company was

subject to the 2024 UK Corporate

Governance Code and the

following report sets out how we

have complied with the Principles.

Given our long history as a family

business, and as a FTSE Small

Cap company, we have adopted

alternative solutions to the

provisions where we believe this is

appropriate. The Code recognises

that good governance can be

achieved by other means, and the

Board believes the approach we

have taken is the most appropriate

for our company and shareholders,

while remaining consistent with the

spirit of the Code.

You can read our full compliance

statement on page 121.

For information on how we have

been preparing for compliance

with Provision 29, see page 118.

Pictured: The Board meeting with the Group Employee Forum in September 2025.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

99

Corporate governance report

Board activities in 2025: Enabling long term sustainable success

Strategy

• In November 2025, the Board

set a 5-year strategy for the

group and the individual

businesses for 2026-2030. The

Board invited ExCo and external

experts to join some sessions to

debate the market outlook, long

term trends and the economy

• The strategy lays out the five-

year strategic priorities which

in turn are broken down into

annual group and subsidiary

corporate objectives

• The Board reviews progress

against the annual corporate

objectives at every Board

meeting, focussing on any areas

where improvement is required

and corrective action may need

to be taken

• The corporate objectives also

flow down into ExCo members’

objectives and then cascade

down throughout the business

so that every team member

has personal objectives

that are clearly linked to the

strategy. We have found this

helps motivate individuals to

understand how their role plays

a part in delivering success

Responsible Business

• The forthcoming 2030

Responsible Business Strategy is

intertwined with our commercial

strategy in supporting the long

term resilience and reputation of

Henry Boot

• Done well, being a responsible

business creates value and

impact for our stakeholders by

addressing key issues for our

people and our partners

• Guided by our vision “to

grow sustainably, creating

transformational places and

spaces for generations to

come”, we understand that

success is not just defined by

financial gain

• The strategy sets out five

priorities linked to our

people, partners, planet and

places, with specific targets

underpinning them

• Delivery of this strategy

should attract and retain

talented people, build

strong relationships with our

partners, increase our ability

to win work and create value

for shareholders

Risk and Internal

Control Framework

• The Board and Audit and Risk

Committee review the group’s

principal and emerging risks

twice a year and determine the

appropriate risk appetite and

tolerance levels

• In February 2025, the Board

held a workshop to discuss a

more strategic risk management

process that resulted in an

updated risk register and

revised principal risks

• During 2025, internal controls

across the group have been

documented and mapped,

ready for testing to be

implemented during 2026 ahead

of the director declaration

in 2027

• The internal audit plan, agreed

annually by the Audit and Risk

Committee, reviews past and

scheduled audits to ensure

coverage of the principal risks

• On an operational level, any

significant projects coming to

the Board for approval must

include information on the key

risks and outline how the risks

are to be mitigated

Culture

• The Board set the group’s

revised vision, purpose and

values in 2024. The Board

is proud of the Henry Boot

culture and regularly references

the company’s values during

discussions, considering the

impact of its decision-making on

key stakeholders

• During a period of significant

change for the businesses, we

have delivered our ‘Leading

Change’ programme to grades

2 and 3 (those immediately

below ExCo) to equip our

senior leaders with the skills

and mindset needed to manage

through a period of transition

• The Board receives updates on

the work of the Group Employee

Forum at every meeting and

meets with the forum in person

at least once a year to gauge

employee sentiment and seek

feedback on certain topics

• Tim Roberts reports on H&S

at every Board meeting. The

Board has overseen a cultural

shift in the attitude towards H&S

for Banner Plant over recent

years with increased training,

reporting to the Board and site

visits from Board members

Diversity

• One of the five key priorities

of our forthcoming 2030

Responsible Business Strategy is

to “recruit, retain and progress

diverse talented people”. We

have set out goals we want

to achieve by 2030 such as

quantifying and reducing our

ethnic pay gap and inclusive

recruitment training for all hiring

managers

• Our Board Diversity Policy

sets out gender and ethnicity

targets and procedures around

recruitment practices which are

monitored by the Nomination

Committee

• Over the last four years (January

2022 to December 2025),

female representation of the

workforce has increased to 30%

Remuneration

• The Remuneration Policy

is designed to motivate

management over the long term

and align their interests with

shareholders. If the company

does well, everyone benefits

• The Remuneration Committee

is always cognisant of the

wider business performance

when making decisions and has

reduced the FY25 annual bonus

award for the CEO and CFO to

reflect this

• During 2025, the Remuneration

Committee oversaw a salary

benchmarking review across

all ExCo and workforce

grades to ensure our packages

remain attractive to new and

existing talent

• The LTIP for Executive Directors

and grades 1-4 includes targets

on diversity and GHG emissions,

as well as financial measures,

to drive positive, sustainable

behaviours

• Holdings periods apply to the

annual bonus and LTIP schemes

as well as post-employment

holding requirements to align

executives’ with the longer-term

interests of shareholders

• Work will begin on designing

the new Remuneration Policy in

the second half of 2026 and will

include consultations with key

stakeholders

Read more on page 27 Read more on page 129 Read more on page 118

Read more on page 108 Read more on page 126 Read more on page 134

Link to Risk:

1

2 3

9 10

11 12

13 14

Link to Risk:

1 2

3 4

76

7 8

Link to Risk:

2 3

4 5

5 6

1312

Link to Risk:

3 4

8 9

10 11 12

14 15

Link to Risk:

1 2

3 4

76

7 8

Link to Risk:

76

7 8

henryboot.co.uk100

Strategy

• In November 2025, the Board

set a 5-year strategy for the

group and the individual

businesses for 2026-2030. The

Board invited ExCo and external

experts to join some sessions to

debate the market outlook, long

term trends and the economy

• The strategy lays out the five-

year strategic priorities which

in turn are broken down into

annual group and subsidiary

corporate objectives

• The Board reviews progress

against the annual corporate

objectives at every Board

meeting, focussing on any areas

where improvement is required

and corrective action may need

to be taken

• The corporate objectives also

flow down into ExCo members’

objectives and then cascade

down throughout the business

so that every team member

has personal objectives

that are clearly linked to the

strategy. We have found this

helps motivate individuals to

understand how their role plays

a part in delivering success

Responsible Business

• The forthcoming 2030

Responsible Business Strategy is

intertwined with our commercial

strategy in supporting the long

term resilience and reputation of

Henry Boot

• Done well, being a responsible

business creates value and

impact for our stakeholders by

addressing key issues for our

people and our partners

• Guided by our vision “to

grow sustainably, creating

transformational places and

spaces for generations to

come”, we understand that

success is not just defined by

financial gain

• The strategy sets out five

priorities linked to our

people, partners, planet and

places, with specific targets

underpinning them

• Delivery of this strategy

should attract and retain

talented people, build

strong relationships with our

partners, increase our ability

to win work and create value

for shareholders

Risk and Internal

Control Framework

• The Board and Audit and Risk

Committee review the group’s

principal and emerging risks

twice a year and determine the

appropriate risk appetite and

tolerance levels

• In February 2025, the Board

held a workshop to discuss a

more strategic risk management

process that resulted in an

updated risk register and

revised principal risks

• During 2025, internal controls

across the group have been

documented and mapped,

ready for testing to be

implemented during 2026 ahead

of the director declaration

in 2027

• The internal audit plan, agreed

annually by the Audit and Risk

Committee, reviews past and

scheduled audits to ensure

coverage of the principal risks

• On an operational level, any

significant projects coming to

the Board for approval must

include information on the key

risks and outline how the risks

are to be mitigated

Culture

• The Board set the group’s

revised vision, purpose and

values in 2024. The Board

is proud of the Henry Boot

culture and regularly references

the company’s values during

discussions, considering the

impact of its decision-making on

key stakeholders

• During a period of significant

change for the businesses, we

have delivered our ‘Leading

Change’ programme to grades

2 and 3 (those immediately

below ExCo) to equip our

senior leaders with the skills

and mindset needed to manage

through a period of transition

• The Board receives updates on

the work of the Group Employee

Forum at every meeting and

meets with the forum in person

at least once a year to gauge

employee sentiment and seek

feedback on certain topics

• Tim Roberts reports on H&S

at every Board meeting. The

Board has overseen a cultural

shift in the attitude towards H&S

for Banner Plant over recent

years with increased training,

reporting to the Board and site

visits from Board members

Diversity

• One of the five key priorities

of our forthcoming 2030

Responsible Business Strategy is

to “recruit, retain and progress

diverse talented people”. We

have set out goals we want

to achieve by 2030 such as

quantifying and reducing our

ethnic pay gap and inclusive

recruitment training for all hiring

managers

• Our Board Diversity Policy

sets out gender and ethnicity

targets and procedures around

recruitment practices which are

monitored by the Nomination

Committee

• Over the last four years (January

2022 to December 2025),

female representation of the

workforce has increased to 30%

Remuneration

• The Remuneration Policy

is designed to motivate

management over the long term

and align their interests with

shareholders. If the company

does well, everyone benefits

• The Remuneration Committee

is always cognisant of the

wider business performance

when making decisions and has

reduced the FY25 annual bonus

award for the CEO and CFO to

reflect this

• During 2025, the Remuneration

Committee oversaw a salary

benchmarking review across

all ExCo and workforce

grades to ensure our packages

remain attractive to new and

existing talent

• The LTIP for Executive Directors

and grades 1-4 includes targets

on diversity and GHG emissions,

as well as financial measures,

to drive positive, sustainable

behaviours

• Holdings periods apply to the

annual bonus and LTIP schemes

as well as post-employment

holding requirements to align

executives’ with the longer-term

interests of shareholders

• Work will begin on designing

the new Remuneration Policy in

the second half of 2026 and will

include consultations with key

stakeholders

Read more on page 27 Read more on page 129 Read more on page 118

Read more on page 108 Read more on page 126 Read more on page 134

Link to Risk:

1

2 3

9 10

11 12

13 14

Link to Risk:

1 2

3 4

76

7 8

Link to Risk:

2 3

4 5

5 6

1312

Link to Risk:

3 4

8 9

10 11 12

14 15

Link to Risk:

1 2

3 4

76

7 8

Link to Risk:

76

7 8

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

101

Governance framework

Board

Subsidiary

Employee

Forums

Executive Committee

Land

Promotion

Property

investment and

development

Homebuilding

Hallam Land

HBD

Stonebridge

Homes

Banner

Plant

Audit

and Risk

Committee

Nomination

Committee

Remuneration

Committee

Responsible

Business

Committee

Group

Employee

Forum

You can read

about the

structure for the

Board’s oversight

of climate-

related risks and

opportunities in

the Responsible

Business

Committee

report on

page 132

Investment

Committee

Corporate governance report

continued

Division of responsibilities

henryboot.co.uk102

Board Committee structure and responsibilities

Board responsibilities are clearly defined, set out in writing and are regularly reviewed. See page 92 for Director roles and

biographies.

Key features Responsibilities

Board

The Board maintains a formal schedule of matters reserved for its decision that cannot be delegated

elsewhere (available to view on the website)

• This schedule is reviewed at least annually and includes:

– establishing long term strategy and objectives

– overseeing culture and stakeholder engagement

– approval of annual budgets, financial results and the dividend policy

– approval of capital expenditure above an agreed amount

– the determination and monitoring of the company’s principal and emerging risks, and reviewing

the effectiveness of the internal controls framework

• When matters require Board approval, management is required to present a detailed paper that

includes any input or feedback received from stakeholders, assessment of key risks and how the

matter links to group strategy

Board

committees

• Delegated authority from the Board to look after specific areas of responsibility

• Each committee operates under its own written Terms of Reference, which are reviewed at least

annually and are available on the website

• Report to the Board and work alongside the other committees, e.g. the Responsible Business Committee

works alongside the Audit and Risk Committee to fully consider the TCFD reporting requirements

• Have access to external consultants where necessary

• See each committee report for more detail on their work during the year

ExCo

Members are set out on pages 94 to 95.

• The Board has reviewed and approved its updated Terms of Reference and delegated levels of authority

• Meets at least ten times a year to debate strategic issues that affect the group, to collaborate and

share best practice and make recommendations to the Board

• Appointments to the ExCo are overseen by the Nomination Committee and the Board. Members of

the ExCo attend the Board meetings regularly and are part of the Strategy Days

Investment

Committee

• Established in 2025 as the group’s principal forum for evaluating, approving, and monitoring

investments, disposals and capital allocation decisions

• Membership comprises the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Managing Directors of

Hallam Land, HBD and Stonebridge Homes together with the Head of Investment at HBD, Head of

Strategy and Investor Relations and Head of Finance

• The Committee ensures that investment activity remains aligned with the group’s strategic

objectives and governance standards

• It meets fortnightly to assess the financial, commercial, legal, ESG and operational impacts of

proposed investments

• It reviews group-wide cash flow forecasts to ensure liquidity is effectively managed and emerging

pressures are identified early

• The Committee debates key investment topics, oversees the implementation of agreed initiatives

and promotes best practices to enhance investment processes

• It works closely with the PLC Board, ExCo, subsidiary boards and other committees to ensure that

investment decisions are aligned across the group

Subsidiary

boards

• Day-to-day operational management of the subsidiary companies sits with their respective boards

and MDs

• The CEO and CFO sit on all the principal subsidiary company boards

• The MDs are invited to attend the Strategy Days and the Board meetings on a rotational basis to

discuss business plans and strategy

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

103

Corporate governance report

continued

The Board has a rolling 12-month forward business schedule, which is regularly reviewed to check there is appropriate

balance across the year between strategy, risk, operations and governance. There are routine items included on every agenda

such as a CEO Update and H&S Report, and one-off, topical items that need Board input or approval. The schedule ensures

that all stakeholder groups are discussed throughout the year, and includes attendees such as senior leaders and the Group

Employee Forum. In addition to the Board activities shown on page 100, listed below are some of the key priority areas for the

Board in 2025.

Board leadership and company purpose

Key areas of strategic focus for 2025

Area What was reviewed and considered

Overseeing and

reinforcing health and

safety practices

Stakeholders

considered

E

S

En

Co

Cu

Link to strategy

The safety of our people is paramount particularly given the industries in which we operate.

The Board monitors performance against industry standards and business specific KPIs. In 2025,

we achieved our main group KPI (Accident Incident Rate) with the businesses hitting most of their

respective targets too.

H&S reporting is at the forefront of every Board agenda and the Chair, CEO and Non-executive

Directors have visited many sites and depots during the year to understand the H&S culture and

drive the right behaviours.

In March 2025, the Head of Health and Safety discussed his annual H&S reports for each of the

principal businesses and outlined his recommendations for improvement.

Approval of

strategic projects

Stakeholders

considered

E

S

Sh

En

Cu

Co

Link to strategy

2025 has been a year of strategic progress and the Board has overseen the continued acquisition

of Stonebridge Homes and approved the MBO of Henry Boot Construction in line with our agreed

strategy. You can read more about what they considered in relation to the MBO on page 88.

Throughout the year, the Board also reviewed and approved major investment proposals which

included land acquisitions for Stonebridge Homes at Kingston Village and Carlton, and monitoring

progress of HBD’s Golden Valley Development at Cheltenham.

Oversight of systems

implementation

Stakeholders

considered

E

Cu

S

Link to strategy

During 2025, the Board has overseen and guided the launch of a Microsoft Dynamics 365 solution

which has digitised many of the processes used in the land and development businesses. The system

has modernised ways of working and is leading to much improved use and analysis of data to bring

about smarter decision making.

Having experienced other software and system implementations in recent years, the Board

encouraged management to consider the cultural change that would be needed to ensure the software

is a success. The Board has overseen the roll-out programme and training and will continue to monitor

usage and sentiment to ensure it’s properly embedded in to the business.

Group strategic priorities

Performance People Partners Places Planet

Stakeholders

E

Employees

S

Suppliers

Sh

Shareholders

En

Environment

Cu

Customers

P

Pensioners

Co

Communities

henryboot.co.uk104

Area What was reviewed and considered

Managing the budget,

gearing and financing

Stakeholders

considered

Sh

E

Cu

S

Link to strategy

In a challenging market and uncertain economic environment, the Board has dedicated more time

during meetings to discussing cash flow, gearing levels and capital allocation. The budget was

approved at the start of the year and financial updates discussed at every meeting. Project approvals

have come under extra scrutiny with the Board reviewing cash flow requirements and the level of risk

and mitigation involved.

The Board approved an extension of the group’s banking facilities in March 2025 and again in March

2026, increasing headroom over the going concern period. The Board will continue to monitor gearing

levels to balance strategic investment while remaining prudent and maintaining a strong balance sheet.

Stakeholder

engagement

Stakeholders

considered

S

Co

E

En

Link to strategy

In July, the Board spent time with our internal Community Investment Committee to understand their

role and how they are prioritising funding to our partners and communities. The Board also met with

BITC to discuss their place making programme and co-hosted an event in London with Crisis on how

the property sector can help to engage with homelessness.

We also held in person sessions with the GEF and discussed the results of the employee engagement

survey results. The interactions and feedback gained from engaging with our stakeholders helped to

understand their perspectives and were pivotal in shaping the next phase of our Responsible Business

Strategy. You can read more about our Board Stakeholder Policy on page 85 and our Responsible

Business Strategy on page 130.

Pictured: The Board visiting Crisis' London office in July 2025.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

105

Corporate governance report

continued

We measure company performance

against our five strategic pillars, with

one of those pillars being ‘People’.

People are the heart of our business

and one of our core three values is ‘Put

people first’. As such, it’s a key focus

for the Board to ensure that employee

views are heard and taken into account

when making decisions. The Board

has established two key methods of

direct Board employee engagement,

which demonstrate compliance with

Provision 5 of the Code:

• a network of employee forums

across the group; and

• a designated Non-executive

Director to liaise with the Group

Employee Forum.

You can read more about our people

strategy and employee engagement

on pages 35 to 39 and 106 to 107

respectively. In this section, we

outline the ways in which the Board, in

particular, engages with our people.

Employee forum

Our group and subsidiary employee

forums, launched in 2019, have

continued to meet to discuss a range

of key issues during 2025. Hallam

Land, HBD, Banner Plant and the Henry

Boot group functions have their own

Subsidiary Employee Forum (SEF) and

the Chair of each SEF meets quarterly

to form the Group Employee Forum

(GEF). As part of the integration plan,

we are reviewing the most appropriate

way to include our colleagues at

Stonebridge Homes as part of this

network.

The group is constantly looking to

develop and strengthen its approach to

employee engagement, and recognises

the employee forums as a pivotal route

to hearing the voice of employees.

The GEF and SEFs refresh their

memberships over time and rotate their

Chair, to ensure there is representation

from across the group and to add

new voices to the discussions.

The Chair, as the designated Non-

executive Director to the GEF, attends

the meetings to facilitate two-way

engagement. During the year, the

Board has sought feedback on a

number of issues and Peter Mawson

has also fed back in Board meetings

when problems or key themes have

been raised.

The CEO and other senior leaders

are invited to meetings to present on

key initiatives and seek feedback on

matters such as the brand relaunch, a

revamped intranet and the introduction

of key systems and policies. The

GEF has worked with the marketing

and communications team to ensure

that the outcomes of their work and

engagements are communicated more

widely to the workforce.

Employee engagement

Pictured: The Board meeting with the Group Employee Forum in September 2025.

henryboot.co.uk106

Outcomes

A number of the key employee issues discussed the Board during 2025 are outlined below.

Consultation

activities

Method and outline

of engagement

How the Board

responded and outcomes

GEF Role

The GEF meets formally with the Board

at least once a year. In September 2025,

GEF representatives met with the Board to

present their priorities and reflections on

how their role has developed.

The Board reviewed the GEF’s priorities and agreed

that their terms of reference needed adjusting, comms

should be refreshed, and that future meetings should

include attendance from the People/Responsible

Business teams. The Board also asked that further work

be completed during 2026 to maximise the forum’s

effectiveness and profile.

Site and

workplace visits

The Chair and the CEO undertake regular

visits to sites, offices and depot locations to

engage more informally with employees and

gauge sentiment and culture.

The Non-executive Directors periodically

attend sites and subsidiary board meetings

to further their knowledge of operations and

meet talent from all levels of the business. At

least one Board meeting a year is scheduled

to take place away from head office so that

the Board can interact with colleagues from

different regions.

Peter Mawson and Tim Roberts have undertaken a

series of visits to the majority of the group’s locations

during 2025 to talk to colleagues they do not see on

a regular basis to understand their successes and

challenges.

Most Board members have visited Stonebridge

Homes’ office or sites to welcome them to the group

and to understand how the integration is progressing.

Engagements such as these are important and help

Directors to understand the on-the-ground culture

and morale, and to know where to prioritise strategic

oversight and leadership.

NED sponsor

engagements

In 2024, the Responsible Business

Committee members were allocated

sponsorship roles aligned to the pillars

of the integrated strategic framework.

In fulfilling these positions, the sponsors

liaised with employee working groups and

external subject matter specialists to discuss

key issues and reviewed how they could

champion and support their respective

focus area.

Key highlights of this engagement included:

-Serena Lang, in her role as Planet Sponsor, attended

and supported the Yorkshire Climate Action Coalition

5th anniversary dinner in Leeds.

-Talita Ferreira, in her role as People Sponsor, routinely

attended the EDI Working Group and sat on the review

panel for the EDI Research Assistant’s presentation

of their report into practical actions Henry Boot could

adopt to support long term diversity of the workforce.

Group-wide

system

implementations

The Board has gathered feedback

anecdotally and through the GEF in relation

to recent software implementations

including the roll out of a new HR system

during 2024.

Cognisant of this feedback, the Board requested that

management prioritise the cultural change needed to

successfully introduce group wide systems as well as

the operational requirements.

The Board shaped the training and cultural change

programme, emphasising the need for proper

embedding of systems, training and championing from

managers and feedback loops.

Working Group

Governance

The GEF discussed the effectiveness of

working groups across the businesses,

including overlaps, participation levels, and

barriers to engagement. Representatives

flagged the need for clearer reporting lines

into ExCo and the Board, and raised these

structural points as part of the September

GEF–Board engagement.

As part of the Future Ways of Working programme,

the Board approved a review into working-group

governance during 2026 and endorsed the need for

clearer governance structures and reduced duplication

across working groups and forums. This work will

continue into 2026 and we will provide an update on

next year’s report.

Branding

and values

embedding

In September, the Board asked the GEF for

feedback on whether the refreshed branding

and company values had been embedded

across the businesses one year on. Follow-up

discussions took place at the October GEF

meeting where the representatives agreed

a plan to collect structured feedback for the

next Board cycle.

In early 2026, the GEF presented their findings back to

the Board. Overall, the workforce had welcomed the

refresh and found that the new branding supported to

create a share group identity. It was felt that the values

had been embedded and adopted. Some minor points

about templates and inconsistencies were raised with

the Executive Directors taking away actions to resolve

some of these issues.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

107

Our culture

At Henry Boot, people are at the heart of our company. Our culture is shaped by our three core values: put people

first; do the right thing; and be open to change. The Board has an important role to play in recognising the company’s

rich heritage but also driving our people to adapt and grow to continue delivering a positive impact for all our internal

and external stakeholders. We are guided by our purpose in ‘Creating great places today, to build a better tomorrow’.

Following the company’s updated purpose, vision and values launched in 2024, the Board oversees how the culture

is embedded throughout the business, taking action where standards are not met.

Corporate governance report

continued

The Board’s role in culture

Action

Link to culture

and effectiveness

Board’s role in

culture Outcomes and addressing cultural issues

Employee

engagement

survey

We carried out our annual

engagement survey across all our

businesses to understand how our

people feel about all aspects of life

at Henry Boot.

You can read more about the survey

on page 35.

The results provide quality insight into how people view working

for the group. The questions cover a range of topics such as the

integrity of leadership, company communications, relationships

with managers and collaboration with peers. The survey is

anonymous, which helps to facilitate honest feedback and

uses a mixture of 1–10 scoring and open text answers, giving a

rounded assessment into the culture.

The engagement survey provides an important check-in for the

Board to reflect on important issues affecting our people.

Assess

Monitor

Embed

The Board reviewed the survey results for 2025 which gave an eNPS score of +29, which is classed as

‘very good’ and was +15 higher than the average sector score in the same period.

Most of the questions in the survey are repeated year-on-year, so that the Board can monitor trends.

Our external partners help to digest the data, highlighting groups of people who score particularly low

for certain topics so that the Board can explore solutions alongside the GEF and/or SEFs.

Given the amount of change within the group over the last 12 months, the Board identified that ensuring

people feel valued is a key priority.

Purpose,

vision,

values and

behaviour

The updated purpose, vision and

values, approved by the Board, was

launched to the business during

2024. Both Peter Mawson and Tim

Roberts spoke at the internal launch

event to set the tone and future

direction for the group.

With input from internal and external stakeholders, the Board

set the updated purpose, vision and values along with the new

branding during 2024. This project also included establishing

a behaviours framework, linked to our values, which clearly

articulates how everyone should behave when at work or

representing the company.

Set

Embed

The company purpose and vision allows each individual to understand how their role fits into the

organisation and how they can contribute to the strategy. Alongside this, the behaviours framework

guides conversations around performance and encourages managers to consider not only what people

do, but how they do it when assessing performance and remuneration outcomes.

Leading

change

The Board has overseen the Leading

Change programme which takes

the learning from the ExCo’s

development journey and shares

it with those in Grades 2 and 3,

to ensure a cohesive and aligned

approach to leadership.

The Board and ExCo are keen to instil a growth mindset into our

senior leaders, which encourages a learning and collaboration

culture. In a world of constant change, we want to empower

leaders to have the skills they need to tackle adversity and

uncertainty, with a no-blame culture.

Set

Embed

The Board has seen the Leading Change programme as a key engagement and communication driver

in 2025 following the changes to the group businesses. During periods of change, it is critical to keep

leaders informed, motivated and aligned with the group strategy. This cohort of leaders have been

pivotal in relaying messages throughout the organisation and monitoring culture

Whistle-

blowing

The Board receives reports of any

whistleblowing reports or calls.

There were no such instances

during 2025.

The Board monitors any matters reported to the whistleblowing

helpline and is provided with updates at each stage of the

investigation. Calls can be raised anonymously and, therefore,

our people can be confident that any issues are reported

without fear of consequences.

Assess

Monitor

Embed

Fortunately, we do not receive many whistleblowing calls, but we take the ones we do have very

seriously. Where claims have been raised and substantiated in the past, actions are put in place to

address the issues, which have included training programmes for affected parts of the workforce on

appropriate conduct and behaviours, as well as disciplinary procedures where necessary. Regular

follows ups are provided to the Board so it can determine whether any more action needs to be taken.

Health and

safety

The Board receives progress on

all health and safety KPIs at every

Board meeting and updates are

given on major and minor accidents.

Due to the industries we work in, attitudes to health and safety

are particularly critical to ensure that our people and suppliers

are kept safe. The Board retains an oversight of all trends and

issues, intervening where necessary.

Banner Plant missed some of its KPI targets the previous year

and the Board focused on what could be done to improve

the health and safety culture in the business and keep driving

high standards.

Monitor

Embed

Following on from some RIDDORs in 2024, the Banner Plant MD attended the Board in March 2025

to give an update on the new measures put in place to reinforce best practices and safety awareness.

2025 has seen standards improve and good behaviours being celebrated.

The Chair and CEO have conducted routine visits to plant depots during the year, in addition to ad hoc

visits from other Non-executive Directors. The site visits emphasise the importance of health and safety

to our colleagues and encourage good behaviours. A safety checklist has been compiled so Directors

feel confident they know what is expected at the sites.

Responsible

Business

Strategy

The Responsible Business Strategy,

is set by the Responsible Business

Committee and the Board and

outlines our priorities for our people

and stakeholders.

The strategy aims to embed responsible business practices in

the DNA of the business at every level and measures success

beyond commercial performance. This guides the culture of the

business and encourages the workforce to perform in a way

aligned to our values and our vision of growing sustainably.

Set

Monitor

Embed

The Responsible Business Strategy sets out priorities to prioritise our people’s health and wellbeing,

encourage diversity, reduce carbon emissions and support those at risk of homelessness. These goals

have been set by taking feedback from the employee engagement survey results and engaging with our

partners and communities about their priorities and how to drive positive change. You can read more

about the strategy on page 130.

henryboot.co.uk108

The Board’s role in culture

Action

Link to culture

and effectiveness

Board’s role in

culture Outcomes and addressing cultural issues

Employee

engagement

survey

We carried out our annual

engagement survey across all our

businesses to understand how our

people feel about all aspects of life

at Henry Boot.

You can read more about the survey

on page 35.

The results provide quality insight into how people view working

for the group. The questions cover a range of topics such as the

integrity of leadership, company communications, relationships

with managers and collaboration with peers. The survey is

anonymous, which helps to facilitate honest feedback and

uses a mixture of 1–10 scoring and open text answers, giving a

rounded assessment into the culture.

The engagement survey provides an important check-in for the

Board to reflect on important issues affecting our people.

Assess

Monitor

Embed

The Board reviewed the survey results for 2025 which gave an eNPS score of +29, which is classed as

‘very good’ and was +15 higher than the average sector score in the same period.

Most of the questions in the survey are repeated year-on-year, so that the Board can monitor trends.

Our external partners help to digest the data, highlighting groups of people who score particularly low

for certain topics so that the Board can explore solutions alongside the GEF and/or SEFs.

Given the amount of change within the group over the last 12 months, the Board identified that ensuring

people feel valued is a key priority.

Purpose,

vision,

values and

behaviour

The updated purpose, vision and

values, approved by the Board, was

launched to the business during

2024. Both Peter Mawson and Tim

Roberts spoke at the internal launch

event to set the tone and future

direction for the group.

With input from internal and external stakeholders, the Board

set the updated purpose, vision and values along with the new

branding during 2024. This project also included establishing

a behaviours framework, linked to our values, which clearly

articulates how everyone should behave when at work or

representing the company.

Set

Embed

The company purpose and vision allows each individual to understand how their role fits into the

organisation and how they can contribute to the strategy. Alongside this, the behaviours framework

guides conversations around performance and encourages managers to consider not only what people

do, but how they do it when assessing performance and remuneration outcomes.

Leading

change

The Board has overseen the Leading

Change programme which takes

the learning from the ExCo’s

development journey and shares

it with those in Grades 2 and 3,

to ensure a cohesive and aligned

approach to leadership.

The Board and ExCo are keen to instil a growth mindset into our

senior leaders, which encourages a learning and collaboration

culture. In a world of constant change, we want to empower

leaders to have the skills they need to tackle adversity and

uncertainty, with a no-blame culture.

Set

Embed

The Board has seen the Leading Change programme as a key engagement and communication driver

in 2025 following the changes to the group businesses. During periods of change, it is critical to keep

leaders informed, motivated and aligned with the group strategy. This cohort of leaders have been

pivotal in relaying messages throughout the organisation and monitoring culture

Whistle-

blowing

The Board receives reports of any

whistleblowing reports or calls.

There were no such instances

during 2025.

The Board monitors any matters reported to the whistleblowing

helpline and is provided with updates at each stage of the

investigation. Calls can be raised anonymously and, therefore,

our people can be confident that any issues are reported

without fear of consequences.

Assess

Monitor

Embed

Fortunately, we do not receive many whistleblowing calls, but we take the ones we do have very

seriously. Where claims have been raised and substantiated in the past, actions are put in place to

address the issues, which have included training programmes for affected parts of the workforce on

appropriate conduct and behaviours, as well as disciplinary procedures where necessary. Regular

follows ups are provided to the Board so it can determine whether any more action needs to be taken.

Health and

safety

The Board receives progress on

all health and safety KPIs at every

Board meeting and updates are

given on major and minor accidents.

Due to the industries we work in, attitudes to health and safety

are particularly critical to ensure that our people and suppliers

are kept safe. The Board retains an oversight of all trends and

issues, intervening where necessary.

Banner Plant missed some of its KPI targets the previous year

and the Board focused on what could be done to improve

the health and safety culture in the business and keep driving

high standards.

Monitor

Embed

Following on from some RIDDORs in 2024, the Banner Plant MD attended the Board in March 2025

to give an update on the new measures put in place to reinforce best practices and safety awareness.

2025 has seen standards improve and good behaviours being celebrated.

The Chair and CEO have conducted routine visits to plant depots during the year, in addition to ad hoc

visits from other Non-executive Directors. The site visits emphasise the importance of health and safety

to our colleagues and encourage good behaviours. A safety checklist has been compiled so Directors

feel confident they know what is expected at the sites.

Responsible

Business

Strategy

The Responsible Business Strategy,

is set by the Responsible Business

Committee and the Board and

outlines our priorities for our people

and stakeholders.

The strategy aims to embed responsible business practices in

the DNA of the business at every level and measures success

beyond commercial performance. This guides the culture of the

business and encourages the workforce to perform in a way

aligned to our values and our vision of growing sustainably.

Set

Monitor

Embed

The Responsible Business Strategy sets out priorities to prioritise our people’s health and wellbeing,

encourage diversity, reduce carbon emissions and support those at risk of homelessness. These goals

have been set by taking feedback from the employee engagement survey results and engaging with our

partners and communities about their priorities and how to drive positive change. You can read more

about the strategy on page 130.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

109

01

02

03

04

05

06

Composition, succession

and evaluation

Board performance review

During 2025, a formal and rigorous internal performance review was undertaken by the Board, its committees, the Chair

and each individual Director. This included structured questionnaires, 1:1s with the Chair and Senior Independent Director

and confidential feedback from meeting attendees on preparation, participation and post-meeting follow-ups. These steps

provided a robust assessment of effectiveness and informed ongoing development priorities. The process and results are set

out below.

In line with Provision 21 of the UK Corporate Governance Code, the Nomination Committee considered whether to conduct

an externally facilitated performance review for 2025. As was reported last year, the Committee is engaging with external

providers in 2026 to develop Board dynamics and embed the new Board members and then plans to commission an

externally facilitated performance review in 2027.

Areas where the Board

scored strongly:

• Collective responsibility for decision-making

considering long term success.

• Consideration is given to the macro-economic

landscape when setting the Company’s strategy.

• Board attendees feel comfortable and

welcomed to the meeting, with an open and

collaborative environment.

Board focus areas:

• Introduce earlier and more regular debates on

strategic issues throughout the year to enhance

strategic co-creation.

• Develop the reporting and discussions on the

customer.

• Review the Board agenda to maximise the areas

where the Board can challenge and add value.

Process steps

Question content was agreed with the

respective Chairs and the questionnaires

issued. 1:1 interviews were also arranged

with Peter Mawson to discuss

individual performance and training

needs. Peter Mawson’s review

was conducted by Serena

Lang in her capacity as

Senior Independent

Director.

In March,

the Nomination Committee

noted the change to Provision 21 of the

UK Corporate Governance Code and

considered whether to commission

an externally facilitated

performance review but

agreed to proceed with

an internal approach

for 2025.

The Board

discussed and agreed an

approach in September.

Questionnaire

deadline, results

collated and reports written.

At the year-end, results were reviewed

with the Board and respective

committees, and actions were

agreed for the next year.

Progress against the actions

from the previous year were

also discussed.

Mid-year reviews

will be carried out in

the summer to discuss

performance against the

agreed actions before a full

review at the year-end.

henryboot.co.uk110

Board

2025 action areas Progress in the year

Meeting experience

Enhance the Board

meeting experience for the

Directors and attendees,

by reviewing the agenda,

upskilling presenters

to maximise their time

in the boardroom, and

scheduling time to reflect

on performance after

every meeting.

• New templates were developed for MD reports, Matters Reserved for the Board

papers, and general updates.

• Upskilling sessions were held with regular presenters to improve focus, and maximise

time in the boardroom.

• Reflection time was scheduled at the end of every Board agenda.

Board dynamics

Undertake a Board

dynamics exercise

following the new NED

arrival to understand how

best to work together.

• An approach was agreed during 2025 and commenced in 2026. Since the start of the

year, Directors have undertaken psychometric profiling assessments and the February

2026 Board meeting was observed.

Strategy innovation

Explore ways in which

the strategy development

process could be

innovated, both at the

Strategy Days and in

regular Board meetings.

• The forward business schedule has been revamped to allow more time for strategic

conversations.

• Institute of Directors workshops were attended to redesign the approach to strategy

for 2026. The Board and ExCo have agreed to implement a co-creation process to

allow the Non-executive Directors to contribute to strategy at an earlier stage.

• The format of the 2026 Strategy Days will evolve with more interactive sessions and

breakouts.

Action areas for 2026

Customer Insight:

Enhance the Board’s

understanding of the

group’s customers, with

a particular focus on

Stonebridge Homes.

Oversight of Stonebridge

Homes:

Monitor the integration of

the business into the group,

providing support and

strategic direction so that it

can deliver on its medium

term growth ambitions.

Strategic focus:

Reflect on the Board

agendas and the strategy

process to prioritise high-

value discussions in the

boardroom and facilitate

more opportunities for

strategic co-collaboration

throughout the year.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

111

Composition, succession

and evaluation continued

Audit and Risk Committee

2025 action areas Progress in the year

Internal control framework

Continue to review and

define the internal control

framework so that the

Directors are comfortable

attesting to the material

controls’ effectiveness.

• The internal controls of the subsidiary business and central functions were fully

documented during H2 2025 with over 250 controls identified.

• Testing of the material controls is planned for 2026.

• The Committee oversaw the appointment of increased internal resource to support the

new processes.

Risk management

Continue to embed a

refreshed risk management

approach and ensure

appropriate visibility

of outcomes.

• New principal risks were adopted and then embedded during the annual risk exercise.

• A structured review of the risk management framework, including a workshop, was

carried out.

Internal audit

Consider the best division

of resources between

internal and external in

relation to the carrying out

of internal audit activities,

within the next 18 months.

• The review was completed, and it was agreed that a hybrid approach remains the most

effective for the business, with external specialists to lead on the process and internal

resource to support.

Action areas for 2026

Internal controls:

Oversee the enhanced

testing over the internal

control framework over

2026 ahead of the 2027

director attestation.

Stonebridge Homes focus:

Pay particular attention

to strengthening the

internal control and risk

management framework as

Stonebridge Homes further

integrates into the group to

bring it in line with group

standards and processes.

Horizon scanning:

Evolve the risk agenda

items in February and July

to include a more dynamic

discussion on horizon

scanning for emerging risks.

AI governance framework:

Establish a framework for AI

governance.

henryboot.co.uk112

Nomination Committee

2025 action areas Progress in the year

ExCo succession

Develop the succession

plans and protocols for

their broader dissemination

and usage, for ExCo

and below.

• The approach to talent management and succession planning has evolved during 2025.

• Updated talent grids were presented to the Committee in September and

gaps discussed.

• Succession planning was aligned with wider organisational changes and

people strategies.

• Development plans are in place for succession candidates.

Skills matrix

Assess the skills needed

for the future success

of the group and review

the current position of

the Board and ExCo

against them.

• An approach for an updated skills matrix based on the Institute of Directors’ framework

was agreed.

• The information was collated in Q1 2026 and will be analysed.

• The Nomination Committee confirmed that the skills, knowledge and experience of the

Board and its committees were effective.

Inclusive behaviours

Create a framework for

defining what inclusive

behaviours are.

• The framework development was underway, and it was agreed to continue its

development alongside a broader inclusive leadership development and BITC follow-up

session in 2026.

Action areas for 2026

Succession planning:

Strengthen internal pipelines

by developing individual

development plans for

key executive roles and

completing the remaining

work for Stonebridge Homes

and other priority areas.

Board development:

Undertake the planned

development programme

for 2026, focusing on

self-discovery and team

dynamics to deliver a high

performing Board which

adds strategic value.

Upskilling Directors:

Deliver targeted sessions

and information to increase

Board knowledge in areas

identified as requiring

development.

Inclusive behaviours:

Create a framework for

defining what inclusive

behaviours are.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

113

Composition, succession

and evaluation continued

Remuneration Committee

2025 action areas Progress in the year

Reward Strategy

Review the Reward

Strategy and principles set

in 2022 remain appropriate.

• The Reward Strategy was reviewed as part of the wider 2025 benchmarking process

and the principles remained true to the organisational values.

• The workforce bonus framework will be reviewed during 2026 along with the alignment

of Stonebridge Homes’ reward structure.

Workforce benchmarking

Oversee the benchmarking

exercise across the

workforce grades

during 2025.

• A comprehensive benchmarking review was conducted in 2025 using external

consultants and sector-specific market data. Updates were provided to the Committee

in September and December ahead of 2026 implementation.

• Only one workforce grade required adjustment, confirming overall continued alignment

with market benchmarks.

Board and ExCo

benchmarking

Undertake a benchmarking

review of salaries / fees

for all ExCo members, the

Chair and Non-executive

Directors during 2025 to

apply from 1 January 2026.

• Korn Ferry benchmarked data for ExCo roles, the Chair, and Non-executive Directors

was reviewed in September.

• An updated salary and fee proposal was agreed in December, including the new ExCo

roles and the Company Secretary.

• A consistent pay-setting principle was adopted recognising current market conditions.

Action areas for 2026

Remuneration policy:

Work with advisers to

understand current best

practice and market

expectation ahead of the

next policy review. Explore

alternative approaches to

executive remuneration

to align shareholder

interests while motivating

management.

Stakeholder engagement:

Engage with stakeholders

including key shareholders

and the workforce to shape

the new Remuneration

Policy for approval at the

2027 AGM.

Stonebridge Homes:

Oversee and guide

the alignment of the

Stonebridge Homes

workforce reward with the

group’s workforce Reward

Strategy, balancing the

desire for full integration

with commerciality.

henryboot.co.uk114

Responsible Business Committee

2025 action areas Progress in the year

Responsible Business

Strategy

Support the development

of the Responsible

Business Strategy,

including providing

advice on benchmarking

against peers, best market

practice, and oversight of

the development of the

climate transition plan and

climate scenario analysis.

• Strategy workshops and engagement sessions, including a materiality workshop.

• The Committee provided guidance on material issues, stakeholder consultation and

strategic direction.

• Phase 3 of the strategy development was thoroughly reviewed against best practice and

internal and external stakeholder feedback.

• Climate-related priorities and the need for targets and alignment between the

Responsible Business Strategy, commercial practicality and resource availability

was discussed.

Data assurance

Embed an assurance

process for Responsible

Business data in alignment

with the Audit and Risk

Committee.

• It was agreed that data would be subject to an internal audit and verification process in

conjunction with the Audit and Risk Committee.

Profile awareness

Support the business

to raise profile around

responsible business

practice and non-financial

performance.

• The Committee supported the collaboration between the internal marketing and

communications team and external communications agency, to raise the group’s

responsible business profile.

• A video from Serena Lang was featured in the internal communications newsletter.

Action areas for 2026

Pilot a business unit

initiative:

Introduce a pilot within a

selected business unit to

test a practical, operational

approach to embedding

responsible business

principles. The pilot will

focus on strengthening

leadership ownership,

demonstrating commercial

benefits, and establishing

clearer accountability.

Learning from the pilot

will inform a group wide

framework.

Sharpen focus:

Refine and reduce the

number of responsible

business priorities and

KPIs to concentrate on a

smaller set of high impact

areas. This will support

clearer progress, more

meaningful outcomes, and

better alignment across

business units.

Embedding ESG:

Improve the quality and

consistency of ESG,

community engagement,

and sustainability

considerations across

all significant Board

and Committee papers.

This includes clearer

requirements for authors

to set out ESG impacts,

associated risks, and

potential commercial

benefits.

Technical capability and

confidence:

Provide targeted briefings

or development sessions

for Committee members on

technically complex ESG

areas to support a consistent

baseline understanding and

increased confidence.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

115

Other Committee members:

Serena Lang

Earl Sibley (from 1 April 2025)

Talita is a fellow of the Institute of

Chartered Accounts for England

and Wales and has recent and

relevant financial experience.

The Committee as a whole

has competence relevant to

the property development and

housebuilding sectors.

Review of the year

On behalf of the Board and the Audit

and Risk Committee (the Committee),

I am pleased to present the Directors’

Audit and Risk Committee Report for

the year ended 31 December 2025.

2025 was a pivotal year in

strengthening the group’s governance

foundations. The Committee dedicated

time to formalising the internal controls

framework in preparation for Provision

29 of the UK Corporate Governance

Code (the Code) coming into force. We

have overseen increased assurance

over the integration of Stonebridge

Homes, monitoring data quality

and resource, and enhancing audit

readiness through early-cycle work.

Four meetings were held across

the year addressing the integrity of

our financial results alongside our

external auditor, EY, and agreeing and

monitoring delivery of the internal audit

plan with our internal auditor, KPMG.

Other topics included risk oversight,

business continuity planning and

cyber resilience.

Those serving as members of the

Committee were myself and Serena

Lang, with Earl Sibley joining us from

1 April 2025.

Internal audit

Given the size of the group and

extent of the internal audit activities

required, the Committee considers

that an externally appointed internal

auditor is appropriate. This provides

independence to the internal audit

activities, as well as ensuring that

any required areas of specialism and

knowledge of audit processes can be

provided. The Committee considers a

range of potential audit areas including

those linked to the company’s principal

risks, routine financial and operational

processes and specific requests from

the Committee to determine which

audits to prioritise in any given year.

Audit and Risk Committee

report

2025 was a pivotal year in strengthening

the group’s governance foundations. The

Committee dedicated time to formalising the

internal controls framework in preparation for

Provision 29 of the UK Corporate Governance

Code coming into force.”

Talita Ferreira

Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee

2025 Key achievements:

• Defined new principal risks

and embedded the revised risk

management processes

• Mapped out our internal control

framework including identifying

over 250 internal controls

• Overseen improvements to the

year end audit processes for

Stonebridge Homes

• Reviewed and approved

the FY25 Results including

a thorough going concern

assessment

Areas of focus in 2026:

• Provision 29 preparation and

overseeing testing of the internal

control framework

• Overseeing the continuing

integration and governance of

Stonebridge Homes

• Developing an AI governance

framework

• Development of the Business

Continuity Plan and IT Disaster

Recovery Plans

henryboot.co.uk116

From early 2022 onwards, our internal audit partner has been KPMG LLP (KPMG). During 2025, internal

audit reviews carried out by KPMG included:

Topic Outline

IT General Controls This audit assessed the design and maturity of the group’s IT General Controls, recognising

the Board’s increasing responsibility under the Code to assure the effectiveness of material

controls. The review examined IT operations, access to programmes and data, and change

management programmes in place, with additional high level assessment of Stonebridge

Homes to support its integration into the wider group environment.

The audit found that the IT service has continued to mature, supported by the formalisation

of policies, introduction of an IT Service Desk and improvements to security process and

threat detection. Four medium or low risk findings were identified relating primarily to

gaps in policy documentation, incomplete incident management playbooks, limited trend

analysis of service desk data and the absence of periodic physical access reviews.

Management has acknowledged these findings and is taking action to strengthen the

controls, improve resilience, and ensure consistent alignment between the group and

Stonebridge Homes environments.

Joint Ventures This audit was undertaken in response to the increasing strategic use of JVs and their link

to the group’s principal risk relating to potential subsidiary underperformance. The audit

assessed the governance, risk management, oversight and operational controls applied

throughout the JV lifecycle, supported by interviews, document review and testing

across four live JVs: Origin, Rainham, Island and MVNE.

The review found that while processes were generally effective, improvements were

required to strengthen consistency and reduce risk. Two medium rated and two

low rated findings were identified, including the need to standardise due diligence

procedures, formalise JV checklists, clarify stakeholder roles and responsibilities, and

develop standardised contractual clauses. Management demonstrated good awareness

of these issues and has committed actions which will enhance the end to end JV

process, improve coordination between group and HBD teams, and embed lessons

learned from recent JV activity.

Business Continuity

Planning

(BCP)

A group wide internal audit was undertaken to assess the design and maturity of Henry

Boot’s BCP and Disaster Recovery Plan. The audit was commissioned due to the criticality

of these frameworks to the group’s operational resilience and the link to the principal risk

of a major business continuity incident.

The review covered business continuity, disaster recovery arrangements and supporting

policies across all business units, including Stonebridge Homes. It identified two medium

rated findings, concluding that while the BCP has been finalised, some elements – such as

KPIs, testing requirements, governance documentation and Business Impact Assessments

– require further development. Management demonstrated good awareness of the issues

and has plans in place to make improvements and continue testing during 2026.

Follow-up action

tracking

Twice a year, KPMG independently assesses the previously agreed internal audit actions to

allow the Committee to understand the level of progress made and provide comfort that

recommendations had been followed through. Where any deadlines had been extended,

KPMG reviewed whether there was a clear rationale for doing so.

The tracker document sits as a regular item on the Committee’s agenda so progress can

be monitored.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

117

Audit and Risk Committee

report continued

Risk management and

internal control framework

After substantial developments

during 2024 to review and calibrate

the group’s risk assessment and

management reporting processes,

the Board held a dedicated session in

February 2025 to debate the updated

principal risks and the associated risk

heat map and to set priorities for the

year ahead. The new and emerging

risks were also discussed in the

Committee meeting that followed and

some minor changes agreed to the

group’s internal risk appetite. Details of

the key risks that the group faces, the

key controls in place to manage and

mitigate those risks, and the enhanced

system of risk management adopted

by the company is shown on pages

57 to 64.

The February session also dedicated

time to reflect on the current status of

the group’s internal control framework

and the assurance roadmap ahead

to deliver the director attestation for

31 December 2026. Throughout 2025,

the Committee noted progress at

every meeting, included a full mapping

of over 250 internal controls across the

businesses and group departments.

This had resulted in a more refined list

which the Committee debated and

then agreed upon a final list of material

controls. A formal testing plan is being

put in place for 2026 which will include

the material controls and will provide

robust evidence and assurances to

the Board to support the director

attestation. The Committee oversaw

the appointment of a new, internal

Risk and Compliance Officer who will

provide additional resource to support

this process.

Cybersecurity and AI

Cybersecurity is one of the group's

key risks (see loss of critical systems/

data risk on page 61) and continues

to be an area of focus for the

Committee. Its position on the heat

map was discussed and elevated

given the increasing threat of cyber

attacks. In February 2026, a session

was held with the Committee, the IT

senior leadership team and external

consultants, PwC, on cyber resilience

and readiness, and the Board’s role

in cyber governance and oversight.

It was a productive session which

prompted much debate and identified

a key list of actions for management

and the Committee to progress this

year. We will provide updates in next

year’s report.

The group has not been subject

to an information security breach

within the past three years (the last

incident having occurred in 2018),

and is accredited by Cyber Essentials

(IASME), an externally audited

certification recognised within the

security industry. We have cyber

insurance in place to mitigate financial

losses and liabilities resulting from

potential cyberattacks, data breaches

or other cybersecurity incidents.

The group mitigates these risks in

other ways too, through the annual

provision of detailed security

e-learning, supplemented by an AI-

powered human risk management

platform. This AI-powered platform

combines personalised, scalable

training with gamification to engage

our people and change behaviours

by focusing on real world threats and

measurable risk reduction. Where

training is not passed successfully,

we carry out additional, targeted

training, which sits alongside our suite

of information security policies and

protocols, which have been recently

updated in line with ISO27001

recommendations.

National Cyber Security Centre

(NCSC) and Centre for Internet

Security (CIS) frameworks are also

now being followed as part of our

cyber strategy to ensure that the

measures we have are in line with best

practice, and any investment in future

technologies is focused on where we

can add the most value and improve

our security posture.

Following the recommendations of

KPMG during the 2022 internal audit,

the group has put additional measures

in place, including: USB disablement;

multi-factor authentication for all

of our people and cloud systems;

procurement of new back-up

technologies; and data migrated from

on premise to cloud storage to help

visibility and cleansing exercises.

The Committee is also keenly

monitoring the group’s approach

to the adoption of AI, noting the

crossovers between this and data

hygiene, as well as data security and

cybersecurity issues. One of the

Committee actions arising out of the

performance review for 2026 is to

establish an AI governance framework

which we hope to progress over

the year.

Internal audit

effectiveness review

The Committee undertook a

performance review of the internal

auditor’s effectiveness at the July

2025 meeting. The review consisted

of questionnaires with each of the

Committee members and the sponsors

and main contacts for each of the

audits in that period. Under review was

their scope, expertise and resource,

responsiveness, clarity of reporting

and communication, value for money

and access to the Committee. KPMG

scored highly in most areas with

positive comments noted on their

professionalism and no major concerns

identified. The results were shared with

the internal auditor and feedback taken

on board. The Committee is satisfied

that the internal auditor is performing

to a high standard and adds value to

the business.

External audit

effectiveness review

The Committee also oversaw a

full review of the effectiveness of

the external auditor in July 2025,

which collated feedback from the

Committee, finance teams, subsidiary

MDs and other key stakeholders within

the group on the 2024 full year audit.

A detailed questionnaire sought views

on the external auditor’s understanding

of the business, engagement levels

of senior audit staff, how risks are

assessed, working relationships,

constructive challenge, audit planning

and hitting deadlines.

See more details on our principal risks

and how we manage them on page 57

henryboot.co.uk118

The survey results were very positive

and concluded that EY conducted a

thorough and comprehensive audit.

Strong scores were received in relation

to the audit plan identifying and

addressing areas of higher risk and the

open lines of communication with the

Committee. Feedback and suggestions

for enhancements to the process for

the 2025 audit were discussed in a

debrief meeting. The Committee is

confident that there are no concerns

that impact the quality of audit work or

audit opinion.

Independence of the

external auditor

In order to ensure the independence

of the external auditor, the Committee

monitors the non-audit services

provided by EY to the group, and has

adopted a policy on the provision of

non-audit services by the external

auditor with the objective that such

services do not compromise the

independence or objectivity of the

external auditor. Our External Auditor

Independence Policy was developed

to supplement our approach on

external auditor independence, and is

reviewed annually in line with FRC and

Code guidance.

The Committee is required to approve

services provided by the external

auditor in excess of £25,000. All

other services below this threshold

are also monitored to ensure that

the performance of regulatory

requirements is not impaired by the

provision of permissible non-audit

services. EY did not provide any non-

audit services to the group during the

year. Details of amounts paid to the

auditor for audit services are set out in

note 3 to the Financial Statements.

In accordance with best practice, the

company requires its external audit

partner to rotate every five years.

After five years with Victoria Venning,

we welcomed Paul Copland as the

statutory auditor signing the 2025

Audit Report. EY has been the group’s

auditor for five previous financial years,

having been appointed in February

2020 after a competitive tendering

exercise, and the first full financial year

of their audit services being 2020.

The Committee members meet

with the audit partner and other

members of the audit team without

management present to discuss any

potential areas of concern. There are

no issues to report in relation to this.

The Committee also reviews a letter

from the external auditor on an annual

basis outlining the measures taken to

ensure that its independence is not

compromised from their side. The

Committee reviews the safeguards and

policies in place to maintain a high level

of objectivity.

Following a review of all these

elements, the Committee is satisfied

that the independence and objectivity

of the external auditor is not impaired

and that the amount of non-audit fees

is at a level that does not compromise

the overall quality and rigour of the

work undertaken.

Extent to which external

auditor challenged

management

Following discussions earlier in the

year, a letter from EY to Stonebridge

Homes was shared with the

Committee in July 2025 which outlined

some areas for observation that EY

had identified during Stonebridge

Homes’s FY24 audit. This included a

number of reconciliation processes

and implementation issues with

new accounting software. The

Committee reviewed EY’s observation

and stressed to management the

importance of these issues being

addressed ahead of the FY25 audit.

The Committee has received updates

on remedial actions, all of which will be

closed by the end of this audit cycle.

The external auditor has provided

robust challenge in other areas across

the year, particularly around revenue

recognition, property valuations,

maturity of borrowings, house building

inventories, contract balances as well

as going concern and viability.

Significant issues

The Committee considered the following key accounting issues and matters of judgement in relation to the group’s Financial

Statements and disclosures. In addition to these disclosures, the Independent Auditor’s Report on pages 162 to 169 discusses

other key audit matters, which were also considered by the Committee.

Focus Matters considered Committee outcome

Valuation of

investment

properties

The investment property portfolio accounts for a large

proportion of the group assets and the assessment is

subject to a degree of judgement and assumptions.

In line with our accounting policy, completed

investment properties are held at fair value. Other than

houses, the portfolio is valued twice a year by external,

independent valuers. Assets under construction

are valued by management at fair value using the

residual method.

The Committee critically reviewed the

valuations and any key movements

during the year. Having discussed the

valuations during the meeting and

considered EY’s independent valuations,

the Committee was comfortable with

the values adopted.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

119

Audit and Risk Committee

report continued

Approved by the Board and signed on its behalf by

Talita Ferreira

Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee

14 April 2026

Focus Matters considered Committee outcome

Valuation of

housebuilder

inventories

and profit

recognition

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net

realisable value.

Inventories comprise all the direct costs incurred in

bringing the individual inventories to their present

state at the reporting date, less the value of any

impairment losses.

Net realisable value of inventories is determined

by reference to expected future sales, value, and

costs to complete assumptions, which are subject

to estimation.

During the year, the Committee has

overseen resource changes in the

Stonebridge Homes’ finance team and

instigated a programme to strengthen

controls in response to EY’s observations

from the FY24 audit. Following

discussions with EY on the improved

internal processes and EY’s thorough

testing programme, the Committee was

satisfied that the carrying values are

appropriate.

Valuation

of contract

balances and

associated

revenue

and profit

recognition

As explained more fully in our accounting

policy on construction contracts on page 177, a

significant element of turnover is attributable to

construction contracts.

Contract costs and revenues may be affected by a

number of uncertainties that are dependent on the

outcome of future events and, therefore, estimates

may need to be revised as events unfold and

uncertainties are resolved.

During the year, the Committee

examined the judgements and

methodologies applied to uncertainties,

reviewed the sensitivity analysis around

the future costs on construction

contracts and agreed that the valuation

of contract balances and associated

revenue are not materially misstated.

The Committee was made aware of

an observation to present the group’s

main borrowing facility as a non-

current liability in accordance with IAS

1 Presentation of Financial Statements.

Previously, these borrowings had

been stated as current liabilities

based on contractual maturity but a

review had suggested they should

be presented as non-current as, at

the reporting date, the group had the

right to defer settlement of the liability

for at least twelve months after the

reporting date. The Committee, along

with management, supported this

observation and agreed to restate

comparative information from the

prior year. The definitions of capital

employed and ROCE have also been

revised to make the adjustments clear.

The group has prepared the

consolidated Financial Statements

in accordance with UK-adopted

International Accounting Standards.

They have been prepared on the

historical cost basis, except for

financial instruments, investment

properties and group-occupied land

and buildings, which are measured at

fair value.

The Committee is satisfied that this

basis of preparation is appropriate

given the nature of the group and

its activities.

Tax arrangements

The Committee also reviewed the

group’s tax strategy and arrangements

during the year. Deloitte provided the

corporation taxation services for the

year ended 31 December 2025.

Terms of Reference

In early 2025, the Committee reviewed

its Terms of Reference in line with

the scope of its operations, and the

requirements of the Code, to ensure

that they remained appropriate and,

in particular, that they complied with

the requirements of the FRC’s Audit

Committees and the External Audit:

Minimum Standard. The updated

Terms of Reference are available on the

company’s website.

henryboot.co.uk120

Corporate governance

statement

Compliance statement

During 2025, the company has been

subject to compliance with the

2024 UK Corporate Governance

Code (the Code).

Principles

The company has complied with all

the principles of the Code for the year

ended 31 December 2025. Details on

how we have applied the principles in

a way that feels authentic for Henry

Boot are demonstrated throughout

the Annual Report, particularly in the

sections shown below.

1

Board leadership and company purpose

A

Long term sustainable success Pages 92–93, 98–101, 85–89,

27–32, 20–21

B

Purpose, values, strategy and culture Pages 02–03, 27–32, 108–109

C

Governance reporting Pages 100–101, 104–105, 122

D

Stakeholder engagement Pages 85–89, 106–107

E

Workforce policies and practices Pages 35–39, 108

1 2

Division of responsibilities

F

Chair role Pages 92, 98–99, 125

G

Independence Pages 92–93, 128, 102–103

H

Non-executive Directors Pages 92–93, 128

I

Processes and resources Page 128

2 3

Composition, succession and evaluation

J

Succession planning and appointments Pages 124–128

K

Skills, experience and knowledge Pages 92–93, 97, 128

L

Annual evaluation Pages 110–115, 128

3 4

Audit, risk and internal control

M

Internal and external audit Pages 116–120, 57–58

N

Fair, balanced and understandable assessment Pages 16–89, 159

O

Risk management and internal control framework Pages 57–64, 116–120

4 5

Remuneration

P

Link to long term strategy and values Pages 134–151

2023 Annual Report pages 123–130

Q

Remuneration Policy Pages 139–140

2023 Annual Report pages 123–130

R

Independent judgement and discretion Pages 134, 141–151

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

121

Provisions

As in previous years, there are some

instances where the company has

chosen to take advantage of the

flexibility offered with the ‘comply

or explain’ rule when applying

certain provisions.

Given our 140-year history as a family

business and as a FTSE SmallCap

company, we have adopted alternative

solutions to the provisions where we

believe this is appropriate. The Code

recognises that good governance can

be achieved by other means and the

Board believes the approach we have

taken is the most appropriate for the

company and its shareholders while

remaining consistent with the spirit

of the Code. Set out below are some

provisions where we have deviated

from the Code.

Corporate governance

statement continued

Provision Commentary

Timeframe to

compliance

11

As described in last year’s Nomination Committee Report on page 123, the Board’s

intention was to recruit a new independent Non-executive Director in summer 2024,

when Joanne Lake and Gerald Jennings stepped down from the Board having served

for nine years.

The initial recruitment process took a pivot to focus on candidates with

housebuilding experience in light of the Stonebridge Homes acquisition. This

resulted in a new independent Non-executive Director, Earl Sibley, only joining from

1 April 2025. For 2025, during the period between 1 January to 31 March, excluding

the Chair, there were three non-independent and only two independent Board

members, however this has now been rectified.

Resolved

1 April 2026.

17

Due to the reasons mentioned above, between 1 January and 31 March 2025, there

were two independent and two non-independent Nomination Committee members.

A majority of independent Non-executive Directors was restored when Earl Sibley

joined the Committee.

Resolved

1 April 2026.

19

Peter Mawson reached his nine-year tenure as Chair on 1 October 2024. He was

an existing Non-executive Director when appointed and, as previously disclosed,

we expect that Peter will remain as Chair to oversee the integration of Stonebridge

Homes to provide consistency over this period. The Board has determined that

Peter remains an excellent Chair, who demonstrates objective judgement and adds

significant value to the company.

Chair recruitment

expected to

commence within

the next four

years.

20

As previously explained, an external search consultancy was not used for the

appointment of Peter Mawson as Chair. The Board’s preference at the time was

to appoint one of its existing independent Non-executive Directors into the role to

ensure consistency after a period where the last Chair, a Boot family member, served

on the Board for almost 37 years. External recruitment agencies have been used for

all other recent appointments. The method of recruitment for the next Chair is still to

be determined.

Executive

Director and

Non-executive

Director roles

are compliant.

The method for

the next Chair

appointment is

still TBC.

henryboot.co.uk122

Provision Commentary

Timeframe to

compliance

21

As a FTSE SmallCap company, the Chair should now commission a regularly

externally facilitated board performance review - this is not something we have

done recently. In 2026, the Board is undergoing a development programme with

support from external providers (see more on page 125). We expect to undertake an

externally facilitated review in 2027 when the most recent Non-executive Directors

are more embedded and the Board has benefited from the development work

over 2026.

31 December

2027.

29

Provision 29 which relates to the enhanced risk management and internal control

framework applies from 1 January 2026 and therefore we are not reporting on this

for the 2025 financial year but will do so in next year’s report.

The 2026

financial year.

32

Peter Mawson, who was independent on appointment but is now deemed non-

independent, remained as a Remuneration Committee member until Earl Sibley

joined on 1 April 2025. Therefore, during 1 January to 31 March 2025, we were not

compliant with this provision.

Resolved

1 April 2026.

DTR 7. 2.8A

The Board’s Diversity Policy, including its objectives, how these have been

implemented and the results is reported on pages 126 to 127.

20% vote against – AGM

At the AGM in 2025, no resolution proposed received more than 20% of

the vote against it.

Approved by the Board and signed on its behalf by

Jaimie Read

Company Secretary

14 April 2026

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

123

Nomination Committee

report

Our ongoing conversations on Board

and ExCo succession over recent years

enabled the Committee to make considered

and informed decisions on the skills and

experience required to support the group’s

future strategy.”

Peter Mawson

Chair of the Nomination Committee

Review of the year

The Nomination Committee (the

Committee) met three times during

2025 and oversaw a variety of matters.

This included the appointment of a

new Non-executive Director, a new

MD for Hallam Land and various

ExCo and senior leadership changes

as a result of our Future Ways of

Working programme. Our ongoing

conversations on Board and ExCo

succession over recent years enabled

the Committee to make considered

and informed decisions on the skills

and experience required to support the

group’s future strategy.

Diversity remains a key priority, and

we continue to undertake recruitment

processes with our Board Diversity

Policy targets in mind. Our forthcoming

Responsible Business Strategy outlines

key diversity targets and initiatives

that we want to achieve by 2030 to

encourage a more diverse workforce

and leadership team.

During the year, we spent time

discussing Board development and

agreeing an approach for 2026 which

aims to drive high performance

and maximise value added in the

boardroom. Linked to this, we

considered ExCo development and

how the two initiatives should

complement each other.

More details of 2025’s activity can

be found below. Those serving as

members of the Committee for the

year were myself, Talita Ferreira,

Serena Lang and James Sykes with

Earl Sibley joining us from 1 April 2025.

On behalf of the Board and the

Committee, I am pleased to

present the Directors’ Nomination

Committee Report for the year ended

31 December 2025.

Other Committee members:

Talita Ferreira

Serena Lang

Earl Sibley (from 1 April 2025)

James Sykes

2025 Key achievements:

• Approved the appointment

of Non-executive Director,

Earl Sibley

• Approved a host of executive

appointments including a

new MD for Hallam Land, the

creation of a COO role and a

new Company Secretary

• Oversaw a refreshed approach

to executive succession planning

and talent management

• Agreed a programme of Board

development for 2026

Areas of focus in 2026:

• Strengthen development plans

for key individuals in executive

succession planning

• Oversee a campaign to update

employee personal data to

support compliance with

forthcoming legislation and to

support monitoring of diversity

targets

• Prepare for external

performance review in 2027

• Undertake Board development

programme

henryboot.co.uk124

Non-executive Director

appointment

For our latest Non-executive Director

appointment, we engaged an external

recruitment partner, Warren Partners,

to lead the process. Recruitment

activity commenced in H1 2024;

however, during this initial search, the

Committee took the decision to pivot

its focus on candidates with volume

housebuilder expertise in light of the

developing acquisition of Stonebridge

Homes. Warren Partners were briefed

on our requirements and asked to act

in line with our Board Diversity Policy

(shown on pages 126 to 127). A range of

candidates from diverse backgrounds

was present on the long list and

interview stages. The Board will

continue to pursue making progress

on its diversity targets during future

appointment processes.

The recruitment exercise concluded

in Q1 2025 with Earl joining the Board

from 1 April 2025. Earl has added

significant value to our group over the

past twelve months.

Board and Chair

succession

The Committee reviewed Board

succession plans for each director,

taking into account their respective

lengths of service amongst other

matters. Hypothetical scenarios were

discussed to ensure the Committee

is proactively considering possible

future requirements.

The Committee is fully supportive

that I remain as Chair past the nine-

year tenure period, which I reached

in October 2024. As reported in

previous years, it is not yet known

exactly how long this will continue for,

but it is envisaged that I will remain

in post until the conclusion of the

Stonebridge Homes acquisition in

  1. This is to ensure consistency

of approach and oversight of the

integration into the wider portfolio

of businesses. We will agree nearer

the time whether the successor will

be chosen from the existing group of

Non-executive Directors or whether

an external recruitment exercise will

be commissioned.

ExCo Succession and

Future Ways of Working

(FWoW)

Over the summer, we undertook a

search process in partnership with

external recruiters, Page Executive,

to appoint a new MD for Hallam

Land. Page Executive undertook a full

market mapping exercise to identify

possible candidates externally, to be

consideration alongside a number

of internal candidates. Following a

thorough assessment and interview

process, Iain MacSween was

recommended by the Committee

for the MD role and to become a key

member of ExCo. The Committee

was encouraged by the strong pool

of internal and external candidates

which included male and female

representation.

In September, the Committee

considered a revised and more

sophisticated approach to talent

management and succession planning

for ExCo members. The Committee

discussed where gaps had been

identified, how to mitigate risks and

development plans for key individuals.

EDI initiatives to encourage more

diverse representation throughout the

business are discussed in connection

with the Responsible Business

Committee who establish goals and

processes to drive progress through

the Responsible Business Strategy.

In response to the changing

composition of the group, the FWoW

programme was established to

strengthen our agility, resilience and

responsiveness whilst efficiently

managing the cost base and improving

the sharing of expertise and resources

between Henry Boot's businesses. This

led to changes within ExCo and the

group functions which were discussed

and approved by the Nomination

Committee, based on the knowledge

of the individuals and the skills and

expertise that would be required

to support the next phase of the

group strategy.

Board Development

and Skills Matrix

In December 2025, the Committee

discussed a programme of Board

development work and agreed the

scope, goals, timeline and external

providers. Having welcomed three

new Non-executive Directors in recent

years, the development is designed

to drive high performance, facilitate

group effectiveness and deliver

“value add” to boardroom decisions.

Diagnostic assessments have already

been carried out in early 2026, along

with a Board observation at the

February meeting, with the intention

of increasing self-awareness and

exploring group level dynamics.

Further sessions are planned for the

rest of the year to discuss the results

and embed the development. Some

sessions will also involve ExCo who

have been on a similar development

journey through a specialised

programme. Both programmes will

align thought leadership, language

and principles to support the business

to deliver its strategic aims. It is

expected that an externally facilitated

performance review will follow

during 2027.

The Committee has also recently

approved an updated skills matrix

assessment which is based on the

Institute of Directors’ framework. The

results are currently being gathered

and monitored and will be shared in

next year’s report. The Chair and the

Committee will address any areas for

improvement through an upskilling

programme with targeted sessions,

information and support.

Board Diversity Policy

The Committee reviewed the Board

Diversity Policy in September, which is

aligned to the recommendations of the

Hampton-Alexander Review regarding

gender diversity on boards, and the

Parker Review on ethnic minority board

representation, as well as reflecting the

targets stated in the UK Listing Rules.

The full policy is available to view at

henryboot.co.uk/our-responsibility.

The Committee ensured that the

objectives set out within the Board

Diversity Policy were incorporated into

the recruitment activity undertaken

over the year.

We are committed to improving our

position on Board diversity when

opportunities arise. It is recognised that

there will be periods of change on the

Board and that these objectives may be

reliant upon the Board being refreshed;

however, it is our longer-term intention

to achieve these objectives. The

Board and Nomination Committee

also considers the skills and diversity

of the current directors and the wider

group when seeking to appoint a new

director to the Board.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

125

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

9

6

Nomination Committee

report continued

Objective

Progress against objective Status

The Board will ensure that it is made up of an appropriate mix of skills, experience and knowledge required

to effectively oversee and support the management of the group.

Detailed review of effectiveness undertaken confirming that the Board is adequately resourced and

performing well.

The appointment of Earl has added housebuilding experience to the Board, something which was

identified as a gap last year.

The Board has set a target to meet the objective of the Hampton Alexander Review, in that at least 40%

of our Board members are women.

Female Board representation stands at 29%.

At least 40% female representation remains our goal and we will continue to ensure that our

recruitment processes prioritise gender diversity in our long and shortlists.

We are fully committed to achieving and exceeding this goal with future Non-executive Director

succession planning and group-wide diversity initiatives.

In addition, the Board shall have as its objective that at least one of the four senior Board positions

(Chair, Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Chief Financial Officer (CFO) or Senior Independent Director (SID))

shall be a woman, as per the UK Listing Rules objective.

The role of Senior Independent Director is held by Serena Lang.

The Board has set a target to meet the objectives of the Parker Review for at least one Board member to

be from an ethnic minority background excluding white ethnic groups (as set out in categories used by the

Office for National Statistics).

We currently have no members on the Board from an ethnic minority background. We will continue

consider this over future rounds of recruitment and by progressing internal EDI initiatives.

The Board will consider candidates for appointment as Non-executive Directors from a wider pool,

including those with little or no previous FTSE Board experience.

We have consciously worked with our recruitment partners to ensure that our briefs for Non-executive

Director appointments encourage diverse candidates, in particular those without previous FTSE Board

experience, which has been represented in our candidate pool. We will continue to ensure that previous

FTSE experience is not a specified requirement in future recruitment rounds in order to attract a

broad number of applicants.

The Board will work with external recruitment consultants to provide support for Board appointments and

will ensure that Non-executive Director longlists include both women and candidates from an ethnic minority

background excluding white ethnic groups.

We have continued to appoint external recruitment partners to work with us on our latest Non-

executive Director appointment which spanned 2024 and 2025. This resulted in individuals from diverse

backgrounds on the longlist.

As previously disclosed, we did not engage an external recruiter for the appointment of Peter Mawson

in 2022. This was a considered decision to prioritise the continuity of the Board after Jamie Boot, a major

shareholder and Boot family member, retired as a director after almost 37 years’ service.

The Board (in conjunction with the Committee and the Responsible Business Committee) will support and

monitor group activities to increase the percentage of senior management roles held by women and other

underrepresented groups. Activities may include the hiring of diverse external senior managers and internal

promotion activity, but also continued emphasis on developing a diverse talent pipeline and entry level

recruitment to support this objective long term.*

The Board has recently reviewed the new Responsible Business Strategy. The strategy establishes five

priorities; one of which is to “recruit, retain, and progress diverse talented people”. Behind this priority sits

proposed targets to achieve by 2030 including refreshing our EDI strategy (utilising updated workforce

data), developing mentoring programmes, and inclusive recruitment training for hiring managers.

The Board and its committees will monitor activities and champion diversity initiatives.

While there is still more to do in this area, our intention is to develop a diverse pipeline of talent across

all levels in the group.

The Committee (together with the Responsible Business Committee), on behalf of the Board, will monitor,

challenge and support internally set targets for diversity and inclusion at all levels across the organisation.

The Responsible Business Committee and the Board will monitor the targets referenced above

from the Responsible Business Strategy.

The annual corporate objectives also include people-related targets including diversity. Performance

against these objectives is discussed at every Board meeting as part of the CEO’s Report.

The Committee (together with the Responsible Business Committee), on behalf of the Board, will report

annually against these objectives and other initiatives taking place within the company that promote gender

and other forms of diversity.

We have improved disclosure of progress against our targets for this year. Activities may include the

hiring of diverse external senior managers and internal promotion activity, but also a continued emphasis

on a diverse pipeline and graduate and apprentice recruitment to support this objective long term.

* The gender balance of those in senior management positions is shown on page 37.

You can read more about our EDI strategy and workforce diversity initiatives on page 37.

henryboot.co.uk126

Objective

Progress against objective Status

The Board will ensure that it is made up of an appropriate mix of skills, experience and knowledge required

to effectively oversee and support the management of the group.

Detailed review of effectiveness undertaken confirming that the Board is adequately resourced and

performing well.

The appointment of Earl has added housebuilding experience to the Board, something which was

identified as a gap last year.

The Board has set a target to meet the objective of the Hampton Alexander Review, in that at least 40%

of our Board members are women.

Female Board representation stands at 29%.

At least 40% female representation remains our goal and we will continue to ensure that our

recruitment processes prioritise gender diversity in our long and shortlists.

We are fully committed to achieving and exceeding this goal with future Non-executive Director

succession planning and group-wide diversity initiatives.

In addition, the Board shall have as its objective that at least one of the four senior Board positions

(Chair, Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Chief Financial Officer (CFO) or Senior Independent Director (SID))

shall be a woman, as per the UK Listing Rules objective.

The role of Senior Independent Director is held by Serena Lang.

The Board has set a target to meet the objectives of the Parker Review for at least one Board member to

be from an ethnic minority background excluding white ethnic groups (as set out in categories used by the

Office for National Statistics).

We currently have no members on the Board from an ethnic minority background. We will continue

consider this over future rounds of recruitment and by progressing internal EDI initiatives.

The Board will consider candidates for appointment as Non-executive Directors from a wider pool,

including those with little or no previous FTSE Board experience.

We have consciously worked with our recruitment partners to ensure that our briefs for Non-executive

Director appointments encourage diverse candidates, in particular those without previous FTSE Board

experience, which has been represented in our candidate pool. We will continue to ensure that previous

FTSE experience is not a specified requirement in future recruitment rounds in order to attract a

broad number of applicants.

The Board will work with external recruitment consultants to provide support for Board appointments and

will ensure that Non-executive Director longlists include both women and candidates from an ethnic minority

background excluding white ethnic groups.

We have continued to appoint external recruitment partners to work with us on our latest Non-

executive Director appointment which spanned 2024 and 2025. This resulted in individuals from diverse

backgrounds on the longlist.

As previously disclosed, we did not engage an external recruiter for the appointment of Peter Mawson

in 2022. This was a considered decision to prioritise the continuity of the Board after Jamie Boot, a major

shareholder and Boot family member, retired as a director after almost 37 years’ service.

The Board (in conjunction with the Committee and the Responsible Business Committee) will support and

monitor group activities to increase the percentage of senior management roles held by women and other

underrepresented groups. Activities may include the hiring of diverse external senior managers and internal

promotion activity, but also continued emphasis on developing a diverse talent pipeline and entry level

recruitment to support this objective long term.*

The Board has recently reviewed the new Responsible Business Strategy. The strategy establishes five

priorities; one of which is to “recruit, retain, and progress diverse talented people”. Behind this priority sits

proposed targets to achieve by 2030 including refreshing our EDI strategy (utilising updated workforce

data), developing mentoring programmes, and inclusive recruitment training for hiring managers.

The Board and its committees will monitor activities and champion diversity initiatives.

While there is still more to do in this area, our intention is to develop a diverse pipeline of talent across

all levels in the group.

The Committee (together with the Responsible Business Committee), on behalf of the Board, will monitor,

challenge and support internally set targets for diversity and inclusion at all levels across the organisation.

The Responsible Business Committee and the Board will monitor the targets referenced above

from the Responsible Business Strategy.

The annual corporate objectives also include people-related targets including diversity. Performance

against these objectives is discussed at every Board meeting as part of the CEO’s Report.

The Committee (together with the Responsible Business Committee), on behalf of the Board, will report

annually against these objectives and other initiatives taking place within the company that promote gender

and other forms of diversity.

We have improved disclosure of progress against our targets for this year. Activities may include the

hiring of diverse external senior managers and internal promotion activity, but also a continued emphasis

on a diverse pipeline and graduate and apprentice recruitment to support this objective long term.

* The gender balance of those in senior management positions is shown on page 37.

You can read more about our EDI strategy and workforce diversity initiatives on page 37.

Objective achieved Objective achieved in part Objective remains a work in progress

Key:

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

127

Nomination Committee

report continued

Board diversity disclosures

In accordance with the UK Listing Rules, the disclosures relating to gender identity and ethnic background are set out in

the table below as at 31 December 2025. The company has not met the targets relating to having 40% of women on the

Board and at least one director from a minority ethnic background. Commentary on why these targets have not been met is

included above in the Board Diversity Policy table. The information below was collected by members of the Board and ExCo

selecting which of the categories they identified as. We have chosen 31 December as the reference date to ensure that the

date falls within the relevant accounting period.

Number

of Board

members

Percentage

of the Board

Number of senior

positions on the

Board (CEO, CFO,

SID and Chair)

Number in

executive

management

Percentage

of executive

management

Men 5 71% 3 6 86%

Women 2 29% 1 1 14%

Not specified/prefer not to say – – – – –

Board composition and

independence

The governance structures in place are

designed to reflect the individuality

of the Company and the composition

of both its institutional and individual

shareholders, many of whom have

family ties to the Company. The Board

believes it has an appropriate balance

of Executive and Non-executive

Directors, and independent and non-

independent Directors, having regard

to the size and nature of the business.

The Company values its independent

Non-executive Directors who provide

objective advice, expertise and

challenge the executive team. Their

diverse backgrounds in various sectors

and knowledge of the wider business

environment are critical when it comes

to strategy development. The Non-

executive Directors meet without the

Executive Directors present, usually

the evening before the Board meetings

and on other occasions throughout

the year.

James Sykes is classed as non-

independent, having been appointed to

represent the substantial shareholdings

of the Reis family interests (see page

154). Peter Mawson is also classed as

non-independent having served more

than nine years on the Board, you can

read more about our Chair succession

plans on page 125. During our annual

review, the Committee did note that

Earl Sibley had provided support to

Stonebridge Homes Interim MD, Ed

Hutchinson, totalling 8 days across

December 2025 – January 2026. He

received additional, non-performance-

related remuneration on a day rate

basis. As the additional support was for

a limited period which has concluded,

and was seen as him carrying out his

Non-executive Director duties albeit on

a more regular basis, the Committee

determined Earl to be independent.

Talita Ferreira and Serena Lang are also

independent Non-executive Directors.

Board effectiveness and

time commitment

The Committee reviewed the following

matters in detail:

• Independence

• Diversity

• Skills, experience and knowledge

• Director tenure

• Other time commitments for each

Director

The Committee also examined

the results of the Chair, individual,

Board and committee performance

reviews (see pages 110 to 115 for

more information). Following the

review, I can confirm on behalf of the

Committee and the Board that the

performance of the Directors, the

Board and its committees continue

to be effective and that all individuals

bring expertise and enthusiasm to their

roles. All directors will seek re-election

at the upcoming AGM – biographies

are shown on pages 92 to 93 – and a

further summary of Board roles and

responsibilities can be found on our

website at henryboot.co.uk.

Terms of Reference

In September, the Committee

reviewed its Terms of Reference in

line with the scope of its operations,

and the requirements of the Code, to

ensure that they remained appropriate.

Some minor amendments were

proposed and approved. The full Terms

of Reference are available to view on

the company’s website.

Peter Mawson

Chair of the Nomination Committee

14 April 2026

henryboot.co.uk128

Other Committee members:

Peter Mawson

James Sykes

Talita Ferreira

Tim Roberts

Darren Littlewood

Earl Sibley (from 1 April 2025)

Responsible Business

Committee report

Review of the year

In 2025, the Responsible Business

Committee (the Committee) met

three times, providing oversight and

leadership on the company’s strategic

approach to, and performance on, all

responsible business practices. The

Committee’s responsibilities include

independent review and challenge

of progress against the Responsible

Business Strategy and support for the

effective integration of ESG priorities

into the group’s operations.

During the year, the Committee

oversaw the final phase of delivery of

the group’s 2022-2025 Responsible

Business Strategy. The Committee also

reviewed the initial planning stages for

development of the next iteration of

the strategy, ensuring alignment with

evolving regulatory expectations.

Those serving as members of the

Committee during the year were

myself, Peter Mawson, James Sykes,

Talita Ferreira, Earl Sibley, Tim

Roberts and Darren Littlewood. Earl

Sibley joined the Committee from

1 April 2025, following his appointment

to the Board.

On behalf of the Board and the

Committee, as Chair of the

Committee, I am pleased to present

The environmental landscape and socio-

economic issues we face today require a

dierent response than they did even ve

years ago. But what hasn't changed is our

belief that businesses have a responsibility

beyond commercial gain – to our people,

to the communities we work in, and to the

environments we shape.”

Serena Lang

Chair of the Responsible Business Committee

2025 Key achievements:

• Oversaw and monitored ongoing

development of the EDI Working

Group and employee networks,

supporting the Board’s oversight

of culture, inclusion, and

employee engagement.

• Reviewed and provided

oversight of management’s

delivery of the Climate Change

Framework, including progress

against decarbonisation

initiatives and actions to

strengthen climate resilience, in

support of the group’s long-term

sustainability.

• Advised the Board and provided

constructive challenge on

the development of the next

Responsible Business Strategy,

ensuring alignment with the

group’s purpose, values, and

long-term stakeholder interests.

• Promoted effective stakeholder

engagement by supporting

participation in external

partnerships, including BITC,

Crisis, and Homewards,

reinforcing the group’s

commitment to responsible

business practices and

community impact.

Areas of focus in 2026:

• Overseeing the launch and

implementation of phase 3

of the Responsible Business

Strategy.

• Overseeing and supporting the

development of the Climate

Transition Plan.

• Supporting further integration of

Stonebridge Homes into Henry

Boot with aligning responsible

business priorities.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

129

the Directors’ Responsible Business

Committee Report for the year ended

31 December 2025.

Responsible Business

Strategy

2025 marked the final year of the

group’s 2022-2025 Responsible

Business Strategy, a framework that

has guided our ESG priorities and long

term responsible business ambitions

over the past four years. Each year,

the Strategy is embedded through a

group Responsible Business Plan, with

subsidiary businesses developing their

own Plans to translate group-wide

goals into business-specific actions.

These Plans set out annual milestones,

provide clarity and accountability

for delivery, and ensure a consistent

approach to embedding responsible

business through the group. Progress is

monitored by ExCo, the ESG Steering

Group, and the Responsible Business

Manager, with regular reporting to the

Committee.

In anticipation of the conclusion of the

2022-2025 cycle, the Committee also

oversaw the development of the next

iteration of the Responsible Business

Strategy. This included:

• Commissioning benchmarking

and stakeholder engagement to

compare the group’s approach to

market peers and sector leaders;

• Reviewing proposals for

engagement with colleagues,

leaders, and external stakeholders

to develop the new Strategy;

• Supporting the integration of the

group’s maturing Climate Change

Framework.

The Committee was satisfied that the

organisation remained focused on

strengthening its responsible business

performance while preparing the

foundations for the next strategic cycle.

Responsible Business

Committee report continued

Case study

Board led engagement with community partners

In July, the Board took part in a

dedicated responsible business

away day in London, designed

to strengthen its understanding

of the social impact of the

group’s activities and to inform

the development of the next

Responsible Business Strategy.

The programme brought together

Board members, senior management,

and external partners working across

placemaking, community investment,

and homelessness, focussing on

giving the Board direct exposure to

how responsible business priorities

are delivered on the ground and

how insight from partners can shape

commercial decision-making.

The day opened with a session

at BITC’s London headquarters,

where the Board met with the senior

leadership team to explore their Place

programme and the role businesses

can play in embedding social value

into placemaking. The discussion

focused on how community

engagement, skills development, and

local partnerships can be integrated

into development activity from the

earliest stages, reinforcing the link

between long term social value and

commercial success.

This engagement supported the

Committee’s wider work during the

year to promote effective stakeholder

engagement and ensure that external

insight informs strategy development

and oversight.

Addressing homelessness

through sector collaboration

Homelessness remains a priority

issue within the group’s responsible

business activity, aligning with our

Purpose and our responsibility to

support our communities.

At the away day, the Board visited

Crisis’ Skylight centre in London,

meeting with the Crisis’ senior

leadership team and hearing directly

from colleagues working on the

frontline of the homelessness

response. The visit provided practical

insight into the challenges faced by

people experiencing homelessness

and the impact of early intervention,

tailored support, and cross-sector

collaboration.

The visit was followed by a property

sector event, co-hosted with

Crisis, bringing together industry

partners to explore what the sector

can do collectively to support

the Homelessness Alliance. The

discussion reinforced the value of

collaboration and shared learning

in addressing complex societal

challenges that cannot be solved by

individual organisations acting alone.

Learnings from this engagement

informed the Committee’s review

of community partnerships during

the year and was endorsed for

incorporation into the next iteration

of the Responsible Business

Strategy, under the Places pillar.

The Committee continues to oversee

the group’s national partnership with

Crisis, ensuring that engagement

remains focused on areas where the

group can add the greatest value.

Keeping strategy grounded in

lived experience

Across all elements of the away

day, a consistent theme emerged

around the importance of listening

and learning from those closest

to the issues the group seeks to

address. Direct engagement with

community partners and sector

experts provided the Board with a

deeper understanding of the real-

world impact of its decisions and

reinforced the need for responsible

business priorities to be both focused

and actionable.

This approach supports the

Committee’s role in providing

oversight and challenge, ensuring

that responsible business activity

remains aligned with the group’s

purpose, values, and long term

stakeholder interests.

henryboot.co.uk130

Other significant issues considered

Focus Matters considered Committee outcome

Culture, leadership responsibility,

and training needs

The Committee discussed the varying

levels of cultural influence across

ExCo, explored whether culture is

consistently promoted across the

group, and identified a need for clearer

cultural ownership. Members also

requested continued ESG-related

training.

It was agreed that further clarity

on cultural leadership roles would

support the new strategy and that

ongoing training and development

for Committee members would be

scheduled.

Climate Change Framework Updates were received on climate

scenario modelling, fleet transition,

subsidiary engagement and the need

for more robust data to support

decarbonisation pathway modelling.

The Committee endorsed, annual

stress-testing, and development of

a more detailed and commercially

aligned decarbonisation plan for

inclusion in the next strategy cycle.

Stakeholder engagement and

investor expectations

The Committee discussed engagement

with MDs, identification of key external

contacts, strengthening investor

ESG engagement, and incorporating

external insights into strategy planning.

The Committee requested targeted

1:1 MD interviews, improved investor

outreach, and circulation of relevant

external materials. These actions

were added to the Forward Business

Schedule.

Community partnerships and

impact initiatives

Members reviewed progress with

community initiatives, including

engaging with BITC on strategic

placemaking, supporting the

Homewards programme, and attending

a property sector homelessness

workshop delivered with Crisis.

The Committee endorsed continued

involvement and requested that insight

gained from community partners

informs the next strategy, particularly

under the Places pillar.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

131

Responsibilities of senior leaders and management

Senior leader Membership Summary of role

Chief Executive

Officer

Board

Responsible Business Committee

ESG Steering Group

ExCo

The Chief Executive Officer assumes overall responsibility

for the delivery of the group’s Responsible Business

Strategy and responsible business performance.

Chief Financial

Officer

Board

Responsible Business Committee

ESG Steering Group

ExCo

The Chief Financial Officer supports the Chief Executive

Officer to monitor and lead the group’s responsible

business performance and to embed ESG within

commercial decision making.

Responsible

Business Manager

Responsible Business Committee

(attendee)

ESG Steering Group

ExCo (attendee)

EDI Working Group

Climate Working Group

The Responsible Business Manager:

• is responsible for preparing the Responsible Business

Strategy and annual Responsible Business Plans,

monitoring the group’s performance against the

Strategy/Plans and routinely updating ExCo and the

Responsible Business Committee;

• assumes responsibility for ensuring that working groups

such as those discussing EDI, health and wellbeing,

climate change and charitable giving are functioning and

operating with good governance; and

• assists with preparation of the group’s TCFD report.

Chief Operating

Officer

Responsible Business Committee

(attendee)

ESG Steering Group

The Chief Operating Officer:

• is responsible for supporting data-led processes

that enable the integrated strategic framework to

demonstrate value.

• aligns responsible business with the outputs of other

central functions.

• scrutinises and guides on risk identification and

mitigation.

People Director ExCo

EDI Working Group

ESG Steering Group

Responsible Business Committee

(attendee)

The People Director is an Executive Sponsor for the

People pillar of the Responsible Business Strategy,

assumes responsibility for overseeing the alignment of

the Responsible Business Strategy with the group People

Strategy, and leads on emerging talent and health and

wellbeing.

Managing

Directors

ExCo The MDs all advise on the group’s strategic approach to

ESG and assume responsibility for the responsible business

performance for their respective businesses.

Responsible Business

Committee report continued

henryboot.co.uk132

Terms of Reference

During 2025, the Committee reviewed its Terms of Reference in line with the scope of its operations and key areas of focus

to ensure that they remained appropriate; minor amendments were approved. The Terms of Reference are available on the

company’s website.

Serena Lang

Chair of the Responsible Business Committee

14 April 2026

Ultimate responsibility to approve and

oversee:

• delivery of ESG targets in Responsible

Business Strategy;

• risk management framework; and

• sets and adjusts the Strategy and

overall budget.

Board

Reviews and approves overall Responsible

Business Strategy and all linked policies

and frameworks, including Climate Change

Framework, EDI strategy, charitable giving

and volunteering – plus achievement.

Responsible Business

Committee

• Oversees deliverables; and

• Endorses the approach on Strategy,

policies etc.

Executive Committee

• Delivery of subsidiary-specific ESG

targets; and

• Contribution to working groups and

committees.

Subsidiaries

Key

Delegating

Reporting

Proposing

Remuneration

Committee

Oversees alignment of

remuneration objectives

with ESG targets.

Audit and Risk

Committee

Audit oversight of

ESG delivery setting

and monitoring risk

management.

Nomination

Committee

Sets Board diversity

policy.

ESG Steering group

Initial development

and review of all ESG-

related items for the

Responsible Business

Committee including

strategy, frameworks

and policies.

Community

Investment

Committee’

Oversees the application

of the group’s

community investment

programme.

EDI and Health and

Wellbeing Working

groups

Formulate group

EDI and Health and

Wellbeing Strategies

and associated annual

action plans.

Climate Working

group

Oversees delivery

of Climate Change

Framework.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

133

Other Committee members:

Talita Ferreira

Peter Mawson

(to 1 April 2025)

Earl Sibley (from 1 April 2025)

Directors’ Remuneration

report

We delivered a resilient performance in 2025

and made signicant strategic progress

simplifying the group. The Committee is

comfortable that the outturns were appropriate

and balanced the interests of all stakeholders.”

Serena Lang

Chair of the Remuneration Committee

2025 Key achievements:

• Undertook a benchmarking

exercise for all Board and

ExCo roles

• Oversaw a benchmarking

exercise for the workforce

• Reviewed the workforce Reward

Strategy, confirming it remains

appropriate

• Reward packages agreed for

new ExCo roles

Areas of focus in 2026:

• Reviewing the Remuneration

Policy ahead of the 2027 AGM

where approval for a new policy

will be sought

• Consulting with internal and

external stakeholders on the

new policy

• Overseeing a re-design of

the workforce annual bonus

framework

• Monitoring the alignment of

Stonebridge Homes workforce

into the group reward structure

Annual Statement from the

Chair of the Remuneration

Committee

I am pleased to present the Directors’

Remuneration Report (the Report) for

the year ended 31 December 2025.

This report is divided into three

sections:

• This Annual Statement, which

summarises the work of the

Committee and our approach to

Directors’ remuneration.

• The Remuneration Policy section,

which provides a summary of the

Policy approved at the 2024 AGM.

The full Remuneration Policy can

be found on pages 123 to 130 of the

2023 Annual Report.

• The Annual Report on

Remuneration, which sets out

the remuneration outcomes

for the financial year ended

31 December 2025 and the

proposed implementation of

the Remuneration Policy for the

upcoming year.

henryboot.co.uk134

Remuneration outcomes

Annual Bonus

The 2025 annual bonus was based on

underlying profit before tax (66.6%)

and individual strategic objectives

(33.3%).

Henry Boot delivered a resilient

performance in 2025, despite

ongoing global political and economic

uncertainty. As a result, the underlying

PBT achieved was £27.5m, leading to

a formulaic outcome of 16.67% of the

maximum under the profit element.

The personal objectives were

individually-based and centred on the

execution of the planned strategic

reorganisation including the divestment

of HBC and our Future Ways of

Working project to streamline the

business, enhance performance and

strengthen our leadership capabilities.

These objectives have driven progress

towards our long term ambitions

and contributed to a successful year

operationally. For the CEO, objectives

were set based on optimisation of the

portfolio of businesses, modernisation,

embedding a high-performance culture

and further improving our group-wide

health and safety practices. For the

CFO, different objectives were set to

the CEO in relation to the optimisation

of the portfolio, digital transformation

with AI integration, leading the rollout

of the modernisation agenda with the

support functions and refreshing the

Responsible Business Strategy. There

was strong performance across these

objectives and based on a careful

evaluation of each measure, the

Executive Directors achieved 75% of

maximum under their overall individual

personal objectives. Therefore, the

formulaic outcome under the bonus

was 36.11% of maximum for both the

CEO and the CFO, across both profit

and individual measures.

The Committee reviewed the formulaic

outcome under the bonus, taking

into account the broader stakeholder

experience, including the bonus level

more broadly across the workforce

and the level of absolute profitability

delivered over the year, and the

market environment. After careful

consideration, the Committee felt that

despite strong performance, it would

be appropriate to use discretion to

reduce the formulaic bonus outcome

from 36.11% to 25% of maximum for

the CEO and the CFO. As a result, the

CEO will receive a bonus of £149,650

and the CFO will receive £98,345.

One third of the bonus is deferred into

shares and held for three years.

LTIP award for performance

period FY23–25

The three-year performance period

for the 2023 LTIP award ended on

31 December 2025. Performance was

based on EPS (30%), ROCE (30%),

Total Shareholder Return (TSR) (30%),

greenhouse gas emissions (5%) and

workforce gender balance (5%).

In what has been a challenging period

for the industry and our markets

the EPS and ROCE did not achieve

the stretching target ranges that

were set. Recognising this sector

underperformance, despite our TSR

being positive over the period, Henry

Boot’s TSR did not achieve the target

range either. However, we performed

well against our greenhouse gas

emissions and workforce gender

balance targets, delivering significant

improvements under both and so

the 10% element of the award based

on these two measures will vest in

full. After reviewing wider business

performance over the period, the

Committee considered that a payout of

10% of maximum was appropriate and

did not apply discretion to adjust the

outcome.

The Committee is comfortable

that actions taken on pay during

the year across the company were

appropriate and balanced the

interests of all stakeholders and that

the Remuneration Policy operated as

intended.

Application of the

Directors’ Remuneration

Policy for 2026

The key decisions for 2026 are set

out below.

Salary for Executive Directors

and fees for Non-executive

Directors

The CEO received a salary increase of

3% in line with the standard increase

for the wider workforce.

In reviewing the CFO’s salary

against similarly sized companies,

the Committee considered market

positioning, which indicated that the

CFO’s salary was positioned around

the lower quartile. The Committee

also took into account the additional

responsibilities assumed by the CFO

during the year, including those arising

from the implementation of the Future

Ways of Working programmes. Having

regard to these factors, the Committee

determined that the CFO’s salary be

increased by 4%, resulting in a salary

of £340,931. We intend to review the

CFO’s base salary positioning again as

part of the policy review that will take

place in 2026 ahead of AGM approval

for a new policy in 2027.

The Committee also reviewed the

Board Chair fee, which was increased

as a first step from £112,476 to

£140,000 in 2025. The Committee

again considered market benchmarks

and the scope and responsibilities

of the role, including chairing the

Nomination Committee. As a result,

the Committee determined that the

Chair fee should be increased from

£140,000 to £150,000 to move the fee

closer to, but still below a mid-market

benchmark.

The Board reviewed the fees for

the Non-executive Directors and

determined that the fees should be

increased by 3%.

During the year, we faced significant

operational difficulties with

Stonebridge Homes, our housebuilding

division. The Board moved swiftly to

appoint Ed Hutchinson as interim MD

of the division, moving him across

from Henry Boot Developments. Also,

recognising Earl Sibley’s significant

experience in the sector, in late

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

135

2025 and early 2026 Earl provided

consultancy support to Stonebridge

Homes, which the Board considered

went well beyond the standard time

commitments of a Non-executive

Director. Accordingly, exceptionally,

Earl received fees in respect of his

consultancy services on a reasonable

day rate basis. As these services are

outside the scope of his duties as a

Non-executive Director, these were

approved by the Board. Further fees

have been payable in 2026 and the

consultancy arrangement has now

ended (albeit Earl continues to support

Stonebridge Homes as part of his remit

as a NED).

Annual bonus

The maximum annual bonus for

Executive Directors will remain at

120% of salary. We have reviewed

the performance measures and,

recognising the financial priorities for

the year, we have introduced a new

measure based on the debt to equity

gearing of the business, and reduced

the individual objectives element

from one third to 25% of the overall

bonus. The annual bonus will therefore

be based 65% on underlying profit

before tax, 10% on gearing and 25%

on individual strategic objectives.

One-third of the bonus is deferred

into shares and held for three years.

Recognising the ongoing challenging

market conditions, we have increased

the level of challenge in the sliding

scale for the PBT element by reducing

the amount payable from on-target

performance from 50% to 10% of the

maximum, will pay nothing below

this and have significantly increased

the level of stretch required to earn a

maximum bonus.

We have also added a specific

requirement for any payout under

the individual objectives and gearing

elements of the FY26 annual bonus to

be subject to an overall affordability

assessment by the Committee. Full

details of the target ranges will be

contained in next year’s Report.

LTIP

The 2026 LTIP awards will be granted

at 150% of salary for the CEO and 125%

of salary for the CFO. The measures

will be unchanged with 40% based on

TSR, 25% based on EPS, 25% based

on ROACE and 10% based on ESG. For

EPS, recognising the very challenging

market conditions, the target range is

lower than the range that was set for

last year’s award but is entirely ahead

of current analyst consensus for FY27

and is considered no less stretching

than the target ranges set in prior

years. For ROACE, we have changed

the basis for measurement from

being the average over the three-year

performance period to the figure in the

final year only and on this basis have

set a target range requiring ROACE

to be 8%–10% in FY28. The carbon

emissions and senior management

gender balance continue to require

material improvements from the

current position.

The stretching targets that have been

set are considered by the Committee

to be at least as challenging as targets

set for prior years’ awards, taking into

account internal business plans and

current market conditions. We will

review the suite of measures for the

annual bonus and LTIP as part of the

policy review later in 2026.

Wider workforce

considerations

The Committee has oversight of the

salary increases, annual bonus budgets

and the long term incentive schemes

across the business and ensures that a

consistent approach is taken between

executive schemes and those applying

to the workforce generally.

Peter Mawson, who is the designated

Non-executive Director for workforce

engagement and also joins the

Committee meetings as an attendee,

meets regularly with the Group

Employee Forum (GEF) and discusses

remuneration and reward matters.

During all discussions, executive

remuneration was not raised as an

issue. Engagement will take place over

the next 12 months with the GEF on the

design of the next remuneration policy.

Shareholder engagement

The Committee consults with the

company’s larger shareholders

on executive pay matters, where

considered appropriate. The

operation of the policy remained in

line with previous years and it was not

necessary to consult with investors

during the year. As we move into the

final year of the current policy period,

and ahead of seeking shareholder

approval for a new policy at the 2027

AGM, I look forward to engaging

with our largest shareholders later in

  1. More generally, on behalf of

the Committee, I am always happy to

make myself available to shareholders

to discuss any concerns or feedback

they may have.

Closing remarks

I look forward to engaging with you

on remuneration matters. Should you

have any queries or comments, please

do not hesitate to contact me, or the

Company Secretary, as we do value

your input.

I hope that you will be able to support

the Directors’ Remuneration Report at

this year’s AGM.

Serena Lang

Chair of the Remuneration Committee

14 April 2026

Directors’ Remuneration

report continued

henryboot.co.uk136

Remuneration at a glance

Performance snapshot

2025 Annual bonus performance

Measure Performance

Achievement

(% of max for each element)

Underlying PBT (66.6%) £27.5m CEO and CFO: 16.67%

Individual Strategic objectives (33.3%) See page 143 CEO 75%

See page 144 CFO 75%

Total formulaic outcome CEO and CFO: 36.11%

Total outcome following Committee discretion CEO and CFO: 25%

LTIP performance for 2023 award based on performance over three years to 31 December 2025

Measure Performance

Achievement

(% of max for each element)

Relative TSR vs FTSE Small Cap (30%) Below median 0%

EPS in 2025 (30%) 17.6p 0%

ROCE average across 2023–25 (30%) 8.2% 0%

Greenhouse gas emissions in 2025 (5%) 2,002 tonnes 100%

Workforce gender balance at 31 December 2025 (5%) 70:30 100%

Executive pay in 2025 and compared to prior year

Total remuneration (£’000)

2025 2025

£0

£200

£400

£600

£800

£1,000

Tim Roberts Darren Littlewood

Total Remuneration (£000’s)

2024 2024

Salary

Benefits

Pension

Annual Bonus

LTIP

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

137

Fixed pay only: Comprises the salary for 2026, an estimate of the value of benefits and pension contribution in line with the

policy.

Target performance: Fixed pay plus an annual bonus payout of 50% of maximum (60% of salary for the CEO and CFO) and

LTIP vesting at 50% of face value (75% of salary for the CEO and 62.5% of salary from the CFO).

Maximum performance: Comprises fixed pay and assumes full payout under the annual bonus (120% of salary for the CEO

and CFO) and the LTIP grant vests in full (150% of salary for the CEO and 125% of salary for the CFO). The maximum scenario

includes an additional element to represent 50% share price growth on the LTIP award from the date of grant to vesting.

Implementation of Policy for 2026

Base salary 3% increase to the CEO and 4% increase to the CFO

• CEO – £513,798

• CFO – £340,931

Benefits No change

Pension 8% of salary (in line with the wider workforce)

Annual bonus

• Maximum opportunity: 120% of salary

• Subject to underlying profit, debt to equity gearing and strategic objectives

LTIP

• CEO – 150% of salary

• CFO – 125% of salary

• Subject to EPS, ROACE, TSR and ESG targets

• Two-year holding period applies after vesting

Shareholding guidelines 200% of salary (to be held for two years post-employment)

Scenario charts

Fixed pay only Target

performance

Target

performance

Maximum

perfomance

£0

£500,000

£1,000,000

£1,500,000

£2,000,000

£2,500,000

Tim Roberts Darren Littlewood

Maximum

perfomance

Fixed pay only

£596,902

100%

£1,290,529

46%

24%

30%

£2,369,505

30%

31%

39%

£1,984,156

£401,205

100%

£818,846

49%

25%

26%

£1,449,568

33%

33%

34%

£1,236,486

Fixed pay

Annual Bonus

LTIP

50% share price growth on LTIP

Directors’ Remuneration

report continued

henryboot.co.uk138

Summary of the Remuneration Policy

The Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the 2024 AGM held on 23 May 2024. Set out below is a summary

of the Remuneration Policy. The full Policy is set out in the 2023 Annual Report on pages 123 to 130.

Element Purpose and link to

strategy

Key elements

Salary Core element of fixed

remuneration reflecting

the role, experience,

market rates and

internal relativities.

• The Committee reviews base salaries annually.

• Salary increases will normally be in line with the workforce average.

Benefits These are provided on a

market competitive basis

to assist in recruiting

and retaining Executive

Directors.

• Benefits include (but are not limited to): a car allowance, private health

insurance, permanent health insurance, death in service cover and the

offer of participation in the SAYE Scheme.

Pension To provide a

contribution towards

retirement income.

• Executive Directors will receive a pension contribution in line with the

rate applying to the majority of the workforce, currently 8% of salary.

Annual bonus To incentivise the

delivery of financial

performance,

operational targets and

individual objectives

over the financial year.

• The maximum bonus opportunity is 120% of salary.

• The majority of the bonus will be based on financial metrics.

• No more than 10% of the maximum bonus opportunity will pay out for

threshold performance and no more than 50% for target performance

where practicable.

• The Committee has the discretion to adjust the formulaic outcome

of the bonus.

• At least one-third of the bonus earned will be invested into shares and

deferred for three years (during which time the shares cannot be sold).

• Malus and clawback provisions apply.

Long term

incentive plan

Provides a clear and

strong link between

the remuneration of

Executive Directors and

the creation of value for

shareholders.

• Maximum opportunity of 150% of salary.

• Performance conditions and targets will be set each year linked

to business KPIs in line with the strategy, or a measure of total

shareholder return.

• No more than 25% of the award will vest for threshold performance

where practicable.

• The Committee has the discretion to adjust the formulaic outcome.

• To the extent awards vest, the value of dividends payable over the vesting

period will be added, usually in the form of an additional award of shares.

• After awards vest, subject to selling sufficient shares to pay tax, shares

must be held for a further two years.

• Malus and clawback provisions apply.

Shareholding

guidelines

Direct share ownership

by Executive Directors

aligns their long term

interests to those of

shareholders.

• During employment, Executive Directors are required to build and

maintain a shareholding equivalent to 200% of base salary.

• Executive Directors are expected to retain at least 50% of any LTIP

awards or deferred bonus awards until holdings reach the required level.

• Any Executive Director leaving the company will be expected to retain

the lower of the shares held at cessation of employment and shares to

the value of 200% of salary, for a period of at least two years. Shares

purchased voluntarily by the individual will be excluded from this

requirement and the requirement only applies to awards made after the

May 2021 AGM.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

139

Element Purpose and link to

strategy

Key elements

Non-

executive

Director fees

Fee levels are set in

order to recruit and

retain high calibre Non-

executive Directors.

• The fees of the Chair are determined by the Committee and the fees

of the Non-executive Directors are determined by the Board (minus the

Non-executive Directors).

• The company may pay any reasonable expenses.

• Non-executive Directors are paid a basic fee. Additional fees may be

paid for chairing committees or taking additional roles such as the Senior

Independent Director or Director responsible for the Group Employee

Forum liaison.

Service contracts and letters of appointment

The Executive Directors have a service contract requiring 12 months’ notice of termination from either party as shown below:

Executive Director

Date of

appointment

Date of current

contract

Notice from

company

Notice from the

individual

Unexpired

period of

service

contract

Tim Roberts 1 January 2020 1 August 2019 12 months 12 months Rolling

Darren Littlewood 1 January 2016 1 January 2016 12 months 12 months Rolling

Contractual compensation in the event of early termination provides for compensation of basic salary, pension and benefits

for the notice period, which would be payable on a phased monthly basis.

Non-executive Directors have letters of appointment and their appointment and subsequent reappointment is subject to

approval by shareholders. Non-executive Director appointments are typically for three years, subject to a maximum of three

terms totalling nine years; however, they may be terminated without compensation at any time.

The table below details the letters of appointment for each Non-executive Director.

Non-executive Directors Date of appointment

Date of current letter of

appointment

Notice from the

company

Notice from the

individual

Peter Mawson 1 October 2015 30 July 2015 3 months 3 months

James Sykes 22 March 2011 21 August 2019 3 months 3 months

Serena Lang 1 August 2022 28 July 2022 3 months 3 months

Talita Ferreira 1 January 2024 21 December 2023 3 months 3 months

Earl Sibley 1 April 2025 18 March 2025 3 months 3 months

Copies of Executive Directors’ service contracts and Non-executive Directors’ letters of appointment are available on

request.

The policy on remuneration when recruiting new Executive Directors is included in full in the 2023 Remuneration Policy.

Directors’ Remuneration

report continued

henryboot.co.uk140

Annual Report on Remuneration

The following section provides details of how Henry Boot’s Remuneration Policy was implemented during the financial year.

The labelled parts of the Directors’ Remuneration Report are subject to audit.

The Remuneration Committee

The primary role of the Committee is to:

• review, recommend and monitor the level and structure of the remuneration packages of the Executive Directors and

senior management;

• set and approve the remuneration package for the Executive Directors; and

• determine a balance between base pay and performance-related elements of the remuneration package to align the

interests of stakeholders more widely (including shareholders) with those of the Executive Directors.

The members of the Committee are shown on page 134 and attendance at meetings is set out on page 96. The key activities

of the Committee during the year are listed below:

• Oversight of the Remuneration Policy and its implementation.

• Reviewed and approved salaries for the Executive Directors and senior management.

• Reviewed formulaic incentive outcomes for the Executive Directors, senior management and the wider workforce.

Considered whether they were aligned to company performance over the short and long term.

• Reviewed the LTIP awards for the Executive Directors and senior management.

• Reviewed the performance and determined the award for the inflight 2024 LTIP grant for the Henry Boot Construction

employees leaving the group at 31 December 2025.

• Engaged with the wider workforce on the alignment between executive pay and the wider workforce.

External advisers

During the year, the Committee received independent advice on Directors’ remuneration from Korn Ferry who are a member

of the Remuneration Consultants Group and adhere to its Code of Conduct which requires its advice to be objective

and impartial. Korn Ferry, who were appointed by the Committee, provided advice on market practice, benchmarking

and supported management with undertakings such as producing the Directors’ Remuneration Report and reviewing the

implementation of the Policy to the extent this did not impact the independence of its advice. The fees paid to Korn Ferry

for providing advice to the Committee in relation to Directors’ remuneration was £43,960. In 2025, Korn Ferry also provided

implementation advice in drafting the 2025 LTIP Rules. The Committee is satisfied that the advice received was objective and

independent.

Statement of voting at the last Annual General Meeting (AGM)

At the 2025 AGM, shareholders were asked to approve the 2024 Annual Report on Remuneration. The Directors’

Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the 2024 AGM. The votes received are set out below:

2025 AGM

(22 May 2025)

Nature of

vote Votes for %

Votes

against % Votes total

Votes

withheld

Approve the 2024

Directors’ Remuneration

Report

Advisory 75,824,093 99.53 360,177 0.47 76,184,270 1,712,436

2024 AGM

(23 May 2024)

Nature of

vote

Votes for % Votes

against

% Votes total Votes

withheld

Approve the Directors’

Remuneration Policy

Binding 84,106,729 97.06 2,544,271 2.94 86,651,000 26,734

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

141

Single total figure of remuneration (audited)

The table below reports the total remuneration receivable by Directors in respect of qualifying services during the year.

Year ended

31 December

2025

Salary

and

fees

1

£’000

Taxable

benefits

2

£’000

Pension-

related

benefits

£’000

Other

£’000

Total

fixed

£’000

Annual

bonus

£’000

Long term

incentives

4

£’000

Total

variable

£’000

Total

remuneration

£’000

Tim Roberts 499 42 40 0 581 150 55 205 786

Darren

Littlewood 328 33 26 0 387 98 29 127 514

James Sykes 56 0 0 0 56 0 0 0 56

Peter Mawson 143 0 0 0 143 0 0 0 143

Serena Lang 68 0 0 0 68 0 0 0 68

Talita Ferreira 61 0 0 0 61 0 0 0 61

Earl Sibley

3

49 0 0 0 49 0 0 0 49

Year ended

31 December

2024

Salary

and

fees

1

£’000

Taxable

benefits

2

£’000

Pension-

related

benefits

£’000

Other

£’000

Total

fixed

£’000

Annual

bonus

£’000

Long term

incentives

£’000

Total

variable

£’000

Total

remuneration

£’000

Tim Roberts 484 41 39 – 564 280 – 280 844

Darren

Littlewood 318 32 25 – 376 187 – 187 563

James Sykes 54 – – – 54 – – – 54

Joanne Lake 48 – – – 48 – – – 48

Gerald Jennings 47 – – – 47 – – – 47

Peter Mawson 113 – – – 113 – – – 113

Serena Lang 60 – – – 60 – – – 60

Talita Ferreira 56 – – – 56 – – – 56

1

Salary includes the value subject to salary sacrifice.

2

Taxable benefits include the provision of a company car or a cash allowance alternative and private medical insurance. The value of benefits is not

pensionable.

3

Earl Sibley was appointed as a Non-executive Director with effect from 1 April 2025. The fees shown are pro-rated for his period of appointment during the

year. Earl Sibley undertook additional consultative work for Stonebridge Homes in 2025 separate to his NED role, the fee paid for this service totalled £7,500

(see page 128 for more details).

4

Value of shares based on a three-month average share price of 222p to 31 December 2025. This value will be restated next year based on the actual share

price on the date of vesting and will include dividend equivalent shares.

The information in the single total figure of remuneration in the table above is derived from the following:

Salary or fees The amount of salary or fees received in the year.

Taxable benefits The taxable benefits received in the year by Executive Directors.

Annual bonus The value of bonus payable and the calculations underlying this are disclosed on pages 143 to 144.

Long term incentives The value of LTIP awards are those related to shares that vested as a result of the performance over

the three-year period ended 31 December of the reporting year.

Pension-related

benefits

Pension-related benefits represent the cash value of pension contributions or salary in lieu of

contributions received by Executive Directors at a rate of 8% of salary for both Tim Roberts and

Darren Littlewood.

Other SAYE awards granted to Executive Directors during the year.

Directors’ Remuneration

report continued

henryboot.co.uk142

Individual elements of remuneration

Pension entitlement

Tim Roberts and Darren Littlewood receive a salary supplement in lieu of pension contribution equivalent to 8% of salary, in

line with the workforce rate.

2025 bonus

The maximum annual bonus opportunity for the Executive Directors was 120% of salary. Two-thirds of the bonus was subject

to stretching PBT targets and one-third personal strategic objectives. Performance against the targets is set out in the table

below.

Threshold Target Stretch Outcome (% of Maximum)

Measure

Weighting

(% of salary)

10% of

maximum

50% of

maximum

100% of

maximum

Actual

result

Tim

Roberts

Darren

Littlewood

Financial

Underlying PBT 80% £27m £30m £33m £27.5m 16.67% 16.67%

Non-financial

Personal objectives 40% See below 75% 75%

Formulaic outcome 36.11% 36.11%

Outcome following

Committee discretion 25% 25%

The proportion of personal strategic objectives achieved was assessed by the Committee as follows:

2025 personal objectives – Tim Roberts

Objective Details

Weighting

(% of salary) Performance against objective

Outcome

(% of max)

1

Evaluate and oversee

implementation of

group strategy

18% Strong: Completed the MBO of Henry Boot

Construction leading to a simplified equity

narrative for the group. Progressed the Future

Ways of Working initiative and oversaw the initial

integration of Stonebridge Homes including a new

leadership team.

72%

2

Support modernisation agenda

and key internal changes across

group support functions to

achieve a more aligned business

partner model

6% Strong: Reviewed resource and organisational

structure across the group and completed phase 1 of

the restructure of the group functions. Successfully

rolled out Microsoft D365 to Hallam Land and HBD

and associated change management initiatives.

83%

3

Oversee and drive culture of

high performance through

enhancing leadership

capabilities and developing

strategic capacity

3% Reasonable: Integrated new ExCo members

and progressed the ExCo development work

with external support. Oversaw the delivery of

a development programme for Grades 2 and 3.

Scheduled work for Grades 4 and 5 was paused due

to competing priorities in the year.

67%

4

Oversee and direct group

wide Health and Safety

practices to avoid Health and

Safety incidents

5% Strong: The group was well ahead of its main H&S

KPI, Accident Incident Rate, scoring 405 against a

target of <750. Overall, strong performance across

the group and particular improvement seen at

Banner Plant.

80%

5

Oversee implementation of ESG

Policy and embracing new ways

of working

8% Strong: Established the framework for the new

Responsible Business Strategy through membership

of the ESG Steering Group, ExCo and Responsible

Business Committee. Led the 'Planet' Pillar of the

strategy and acted as a mentor to the Chair of the

Climate Working Group.

75%

Total 40% 75%

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

143

2025 personal objectives – Darren Littlewood

Objective Details

Weighting

(% of salary) Performance against objective

Outcome

(% of max)

1

With CEO, support the

implementation of the group

strategy

18% Strong: Completed the MBO of Henry Boot

Construction leading to a simplified equity narrative

for the group. Supported the Future Ways of

Working initiative and evolved the investor relations

policy.

78%

2

Lead on key initiatives for the

group’s digital transformation,

security and AI integration, with

a focus on culture and change

management

7% Reasonable: Oversaw the successful

implementation of Microsoft D365 including a

programme of change management. Developed the

group’s approach to AI, establishing an AI working

group and strengthened the IT security framework.

57%

3

Support modernisation agenda

and key internal changes across

group support functions to

achieve a more aligned business

partner model

7% Strong: Operational efficiencies and synergies

identified and monitored as HBC leaves and

Stonebridge integrates into the group. Oversaw the

evolution of the IT department to adopt a business

partner model and provide a programme of training

and upskilling.

71%

4

Support the delivery of our

Responsible Business priorities,

refreshing our strategy and

ensuring we maintain an

effective risk and compliance

framework

8% Excellent: Good progress made on the 2025

Responsible Business Strategy targets including

specific initiatives to align with our decarbonisation

targets. An internal controls register has been

established for all group departments ahead of the

director attestation in 2027.

88%

Total 40% 75%

As detailed in the Chair’s letter, after careful consideration, the Committee felt that, despite strong performance in

challenging market conditions, it would be appropriate to use discretion to reduce the formulaic bonus outcome. As a

result, the bonus outcome was reduced to 25% of maximum for the CEO and 25% for the CFO. The adjusted annual bonus

outcomes for Executive Directors are shown below.

Annual bonus outcome

Executive

% of

maximum % of salary

Bonus

outcome (£)

Tim Roberts 25% 30% £149,650

Darren Littlewood 25% 30% £98,345

Two-thirds of the bonus will be payable in cash. The remaining one-third will be invested in shares and deferred for three

years. No further performance conditions or service requirements apply.

Directors’ Remuneration

report continued

henryboot.co.uk144

Long term Incentive Plan (LTIP)

LTIP awards were granted to Tim Roberts and Darren Littlewood on 26 April 2023. The LTIP shares in this award were subject

to the performance criteria set out in the table below.

Performance condition

Weighting

(% of award)

Threshold

(25% vesting)

Maximum

(100%

vesting)

Actual

performance

Outcome

(% of

maximum)

EPS in 2025 30% 20p 28p 17.6p 0%

ROCE (averaged over three years) 30% 9.5% 12% 8.2% 0%

TSR vs FTSE Small Cap

(excluding investment trusts)

30% Median Upper

quartile

Below median 0%

Greenhouse gas emissions in 2025 5% 2,650 tonnes 2,002 tonnes 5%

Workforce gender balance at 31 December 2025 5% 70 male :

30 female*

70:30

5%

Total vesting (out of 100%) 10%

* The Committee based this assessment on the workforce gender balance before the organisational and management changes instigated as part of the Future

Ways of Working programme, which was accelerated from Q1 2026 to December 2025. Through several management initiatives there has been a sustained

improvement in gender balance over the performance period from a start point of 75:25 on 1 January 2023.

After reviewing wider business performance over the period, the Committee considered that this result was appropriate and

did not apply discretion to adjust the outcome.

Executive Director Number of shares granted

Number of

shares due to

vest

Estimated

number of

shares for

dividend

equivalents Total

Tim Roberts 249,397 24,940 2,923 £61,856.37

Darren Littlewood 131,117 13,112 1,537 £32,520.48

-

The share price was 237p at the time of grant, compared to the three-month average share price of 222p to 31 December 2025. Therefore, no part of the

award is currently attributable to share price appreciation.

-After awards vest, subject to selling sufficient shares to pay tax, shares must be held for a further two years.

-Dividend equivalent shares will be awarded on the shares that vest and will be valued on an average share price for the three business days before the vest

date of 26 April 2026. For the purpose of the table above, the estimated number of dividend equivalents has been based on the three-month average share

price up to 31 December 2025. For the FY26 Annual Report, this figure will be restated.

-The total value above has been calculated based on the three-month average share price up to 31 December 2025 of 222p.

LTIP awards granted in the year (audited)

LTIP awards were granted during the year to Tim Roberts and Darren Littlewood on 24 April 2025.

Type of award % of salary

Number of

shares

Face value

of grant at

213.67p per

share

1

% of award

vesting at

threshold

Tim Roberts LTIP – nil cost options 150% 350,194 £748,248 25%

Darren Littlewood LTIP – nil cost options 125% 191,781 £409,772 25%

1

The share price is calculated based on the average share price for the three business days preceding the grant.

The awards are subject to the following performance conditions which will be measured over the three-year period ending

31 December 2027:

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

145

Measure Weighting

Threshold

(25% of max)

Maximum

(100% of

max)

TSR relative to the FTSE Small Cap Index (excluding investment trusts) 40% Median

performance

Upper

quartile

EPS in 2027 25% 20p 27p

Return on Average Capital Employed (average over three years) 25% 8% 10%

Scope 1 and 2 Greenhouse Gas Emissions in 2027 5% 2,456 tonnes

Management gender balance by 2027 5% 72 male : 28 female

1

1

Individuals identifying as male or female.

Payments to past Directors

There were no payments made to past Directors during the year.

Payments made for loss of office

There were no payments made for loss of office.

Statement of Directors’ shareholdings and share interests (audited)

The following table sets out the shareholdings and share interests in ordinary shares of the Directors and connected persons

in the company as at 31 December 2025. The Executive Directors are subject to a shareholding requirement of 200% of salary

under the Remuneration Policy. Executive Directors are expected to retain at least 50% of any LTIP awards or deferred bonus

awards until holdings reach the required level. There are no holding requirements for Non-executive Directors.

At 31 December 2025

Director

2

Beneficially

owned at

1 January

2025

Beneficially

owned

Unvested

options with

performance

conditions

1

Unvested

options

without

performance

conditions

1

Vested

unexercised

options

Total

interests

Shareholding

as a % of

salary or

fees

3

Tim Roberts 440,367 463,467 1,000,209 11,967 – 1,475,643 203

Darren Littlewood 299,562 314,799 542,293 11,967 – 869,059 208

Peter Mawson 13,200 13,200 – – – 13,200 20

Talita Ferreira – – – – – – –

Serena Lang – – – – – – –

Earl Sibley

4

n/a – – – – – –

James Sykes 20,000 20,000 – – – 20,000 78

1

All outstanding scheme interests are in the form of options.

2

The table above includes the holdings of persons connected with each of the Directors.

3

The shareholding as a percentage shown above is based on the share price at 31 December 2025 (225p). The salary/ fee used for this calculation is that

which commences on 1 January 2026.

4

Earl Sibley joined the Board on 1 April 2025.

There have been no other transactions between 31 December 2025 and 31 March 2026.

Directors’ Remuneration

report continued

henryboot.co.uk146

LTIP

Date of grant

Market

price at

date of

grant

At

1 January

2025

Granted

during the

year

Exercised

during the

year

Lapsed

during the

year

At

31 December

2025

Actual

exercise

date/earliest

vesting date

Tim Roberts 29/04/2022 324.33p 175,938 – – 175,938 – 29/04/2025

26/04/2023 235.67p 249,397 – – – 249,397 26/04/2026

25/04/2024 181.33p 400,618 – – – 400,618 25/04/2027

24/04/2025 213.67p

350,194 – –

350,194

24/04/2028

825,953

350,194 – 175,938

1,000,209

Darren Littlewood 29/04/2022 324.33p 92,497 – – 92,497 – 29/04/2025

26/04/2023 235.67p 131,117 – – – 131,117 26/04/2026

25/04/2024 181.33p 219,395 – – – 219,395 25/04/2027

24/04/2025 213.67p

191,781 – –

191,781

24/04/2028

443,009 191,781 – 92,497 542,293

Sharesave plan

Date of grant

At

1 January

2025

Granted

during the

year

Exercised

during the

year

Lapsed

during the

year

At

31 December

2025

Exercise

price

Date from

which

exercisable Expiry date

Tim Roberts 20/10/2023 11,967 – – – 11,967 155p 01/12/2026 01/06/2027

Darren

Littlewood 20/10/2023 11,967 – – – 11,967 155p 01/12/2026 01/06/2027

Ten-year TSR performance graph

The chart below shows the TSR for the company compared to the FTSE SmallCap Index over ten years. The FTSE SmallCap

index has been chosen as Henry Boot is a constituent of the FTSE SmallCap index.

Henry Boot PLC

FTSE SmallCap Index

Value (£) – rebased

50

100

150

200

250

Dec 25Dec 24Dec 23Dec 22Dec 21Dec 20Dec 19Dec 18Dec 17Dec 16Dec 15

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

147

CEO remuneration for the previous ten years

Year 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 2024 2025

Name

Jamie

Boot

John

Sutcliffe

John

Sutcliffe

John

Sutcliffe

John

Sutcliffe

Tim

Roberts

Tim

Roberts

Tim

Roberts

Tim

Roberts

Tim

Roberts

Tim

Roberts

Total

Remuneration

(£’000)

981 1,118 1,277 1,250 912 715 982 929 1,001 844 786

Annual bonus

(% of max)

87.8 91.1 99.2 76.8 64.8 50.0 83.3 61.6 64.3 48.2 25%

LTIP

(% of max)

25 67 100 87 65 nil nil 15.1 18.15 nil 10%

Percentage change in Directors’ remuneration

The table below sets out in relation to salary, taxable benefits and annual bonus the percentage increase in remuneration for

Directors compared to the wider workforce.

Average percentage

change 2024/25

Average percentage

change 2023/24

Average percentage

change 2022/23

Average percentage

change 2021/22

Average percentage

change 2020/21

Salary/

fees

Taxable

Benefits

Annual

Bonus

Salary/

fees

Taxable

Benefits

Annual

Bonus

Salary/

fees

Taxable

Benefits

Annual

Bonus

Salary/

fees

Taxable

Benefits

Annual

Bonus

Salary/

fees

Taxable

Benefits

Annual

Bonus

Chief Executive

Officer 3% 2% -47% 3% 2% -23% 3% 8% 7% -5% 6% -22% 5% 0% 68%

Chief Financial

Officer 3% 3% -47% 3% 1% -21% 3% 3% 5% 0% 11% -19% 9% 0% 87%

James Sykes 3% n/a n/a 3% n/a n/a 4% n/a n/a 6% n/a n/a 5% n/a n/a

Peter Mawson 26% n/a n/a 4% n/a n/a 22% n/a n/a 85% n/a n/a 28% n/a n/a

Serena Lang 14% n/a n/a 8% n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Talita Ferreira 9% n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Earl Sibley

1

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Workforce 3% 0% -12% 3% 0% -5% 3% 0% -9% 6% 0% 55% 10% 0% 0%

1

Earl Sibley was appointed to the Board on 1 April 2025 and so the percentage change cannot be calculated.

CEO pay ratio

The CEO pay ratio comparing the CEO single total figure of remuneration to the equivalent pay for the lower quartile,

median and upper quartile of UK employees (calculated on a full-time equivalent basis). The ratios have been calculated in

accordance with the Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations.

Method

25th

percentile

pay ratio

Median pay

ratio

75th

percentile

pay ratio

2025 Option A 20:1 14:1 9:1

2024 Option A 23:1 16:1 11:1

2023 Option A 28:1 21:1 13:1

2022 Option A 28:1 20:1 12:1

2021 Option A 31:1 22:1 14:1

2020 Option A 26:1 18:1 11.1

2019 Option A 41:1 27:1 17:1

The Committee selected Option A as the method of calculation as it is generally recognised as the most statistically robust

and is consistent with the approach used historically. The pay and benefits for UK employees have been determined by

reference to the last day of the financial year (31 December 2025) using the same method as used for the single total figure.

Directors’ Remuneration

report continued

henryboot.co.uk148

Each employee’s pay and benefits were calculated using each element of remuneration on a full-time basis, consistent with

the CEO. No adjustments (other than the approximate up-rating of pay elements to achieve full-time equivalent rates) were

made. No components of pay have been omitted.

25th

Percentile

50th

Percentile

75th

Percentile

Salary/wages £34,099 £43,000 £63,644

Total remuneration £37,768 £55,505 £83,264

The pay ratio decreased in 2025, predominantly due to a lower bonus award. There have been no changes to the company’s

employment models or the calculation methods used in both periods. The Committee is satisfied that the median pay ratio

reported this year is consistent with our wider pay, reward and progression policies for employees.

Relative importance of the spend on pay

The following table sets out the percentage change in dividends, and the overall spend on pay across our whole organisation:

2025

£’000

2024

£’000

Change

%

Ordinary dividends 10,516 10,300

1

2.1

Overall expenditure on pay 34,539 34,326

2

0.6

1

Figure reinstated with the 2024 actual dividends over the period.

2

Figure reinstated without Henry Boot Construction Limited who are now classed as a discontinued operation.

Implementation of Remuneration Policy in 2026

There are no material changes to the implementation of the Remuneration Policy in 2026. The following section sets out the

implementation of the Remuneration Policy in 2026.

Executive Directors

Base salary

Tim Roberts received an increase of 3%, in line with the standard increase for the wider workforce. Darren Littlewood

received a 4% increase to reflect an increase in his responsibilities and market positioning. The base salaries for 2026 are

set below:

Salaries effective from

1 January

2026

£

1 January

2025

£

Change

%

Tim Roberts £513,798 £498,833 3%

Darren Littlewood £340,931 £327,818 4%

Pension

The Executive Directors will continue to receive cash in lieu of pension contribution at a level of 8% of base salary in line with

the majority of employees.

2026 bonus

The maximum bonus opportunity for Executive Directors is 120% of salary. The Committee has reviewed the performance

measures and, recognising the financial priorities for the year, has introduced a new measure based on the debt to equity

gearing of the business. The annual bonus will therefore be based 65% on underlying profit before tax, 10% on gearing and

25% on individual strategic objectives. For context, the 2025 bonus was based on two-thirds underlying profit before tax

and one-third on individual strategic objectives. One-third of the bonus is deferred into shares and held for three years.

Recognising the ongoing challenging market conditions, we have increased the level of challenge in the sliding scale for the

PBT element by reducing the amount payable from on-target performance from 50% to 10% of the maximum and significantly

increased the level of stretch required to earn a maximum bonus. Full details of the target ranges will be contained in next

year’s report.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

149

The profit targets are considered to be commercially sensitive and will therefore be disclosed retrospectively in next year’s

report. The new gearing measure will require our gearing to be within our preferred 10%–20% range and an overview of the

high-level strategic personal objectives for each Executive Director is set out below. The Committee has reviewed the detail

and sub-objectives that sit behind the overarching personal objectives below and is satisfied that they are stretching, robust

and are aligned to the achievement of the company’s medium term strategy.

2026 strategic personal objectives – Tim Roberts

Objective

Weighting

(%)

1 Progress the group strategy, oversee the reset within Stonebridge Homes and support the businesses

with their growth plans 40%

2 Realise planned cost savings and efficiencies and establish collaborative and strategic practices across

the group 30%

3

Develop the ExCo and senior management teams and launch Phase 3 of the Responsible Business

Strategy 30%

2026 strategic personal objectives – Darren Littlewood

Objective

Weighting

(% )

1 Support the reset of Stonebridge Homes and oversee the transition of services from the group to Henry

Boot Construction 30%

2 Establish the Investment Committee to oversee the capital allocation strategy and develop the data

analytics, IT and investor relations teams 40%

3 Oversee the restructured group functions and the internal controls framework 30%

Two-thirds of any bonus earned will be payable in cash and for the remaining one-third of the bonus, Executive Directors will

be required to invest this into shares which must be held for three years.

2026 LTIP awards

The 2026 LTIP awards will be granted at 150% of salary for the CEO and 125% of salary for the CFO.

The 2026 LTIP awards will be subject to relative TSR, EPS, ROACE and ESG-related targets, based on a reduction in Scope 1

and 2 emissions and improvements to the senior management gender balance.

The detailed performance metrics, which will be measured over the three-year period to 31 December 2028, are as follows:

Total Shareholder Return (TSR)

relative to constituent companies of

the FTSE Small Cap Index excluding

Investment Trusts (40% weighting)

We strive to achieve high shareholder returns. TSR reflects the extent to which

shareholders and the market consider that the company strategy is appropriate and is

being implemented and articulated well by the Executive Directors.

EPS (25% weighting) Our ambition is to grow earnings per share sustainably over the long term. This should

give rise to an ability to grow dividends faster than inflation; a key driver to long term

growth in shareholder value.

Return on Average Capital Employed

(25% weighting)

We aim to deliver strong ROACE performance. This is a further driver to long term

shareholder value growth.

ESG – Scope 1 and 2 Greenhouse

Gas Emissions (5% weighting)

Senior Management Gender Balance

(5% weighting)

We strive to ensure that our business decisions create sustainable and long term value

for all our stakeholders. We want to deliver our commercial purpose while leaving a

lasting positive legacy. With regards to diversity, our focus for this award is on senior

management and the differing life experiences and strategic perspectives our female

colleagues can bring.

These performance criteria provide a good balance between financial and stock market performance and broader

stakeholder interests. Set out below are the target ranges.

Directors’ Remuneration

report continued

henryboot.co.uk150

Weighting

Threshold target

(25% of maximum)

Maximum

target

(100% of

maximum)

Henry Boot TSR relative to the FTSE Small Cap Index (excluding

Investment Trusts)

40% Median performance Upper

quartile

performance

or above

EPS in 2028 25% 17p 23p

Return on Average Capital Employed in 2028

1

25% 8.0% 10.0%

Scope 1 and 2 Greenhouse Gas Emissions in 2028 5% 1,688 tonnes

Senior management gender balance in 2028 5% 70 male : 30 female

2

1

Including discontinued operations and before the revised classification of the group’s main borrowing facility.

2

Individuals identifying as male or female. Senior management for this purpose is defined as those in grades 1-4 and anyone in grades 5-9 with line

management responsibilities.

The target ranges for the EPS and Return on Average Capital Employed elements have been set to be at least as challenging

to prior years’ awards, taking into account internal business plans, consensus analyst estimates and the challenging

market conditions.

Awards will be subject to a two-year holding period post vesting.

Operation of malus and clawback

Details of malus and clawback are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Policy. The approach to malus and clawback

was deemed appropriate based on governance standards, best practice and the business cycle of Henry Boot. Malus and

clawback were not operated in respect of the Executive Directors during 2025.

Non-executive Directors

The Committee reviewed the Board Chair fee taking into account market data and the time commitment. As a result of the

review the Chair fee was increased from £140,000 to £150,000.

The Board reviewed the fees for the Non-executive Directors. This resulted in an increase of 3%, in line with the increase in

base salary for the Executive Directors.

As noted in the Chair letter, Earl Sibley provided additional consultancy support in early 2026, for which fees were payable.

No further services are anticipated.

Fees effective from

1 January

2026

£

1 January

2025

£ Change %

Chair fee

1

150,000 140,000 7%

Base Non-executive Director fee 57,537 55,861 3%

Remuneration and Audit and Risk Committee Chair fee 5,683 5,517 3%

Responsible Business Committee Chair fee 2,841 2,758 3%

Non-executive Director designated to workforce engagement fee 2,841 2,758 3%

Senior Independent Director fee 3,978 3,862 3%

1

Fee includes role as Chair of Nomination Committee.

Approved by the Board and signed on its behalf by

Serena Lang

Chair of the Remuneration Committee

14 April 2026

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

151

Directors’ report

The Directors’ Report for the financial year ended

31 December 2025 is detailed below.

Activities of the group

The principal activities of the group are land promotion,

property investment and development, and home building.

Strategic Report

In accordance with the Companies Act 2006, we are

required to present a fair review of the group’s business

along with a description of the principal risks and

uncertainties it faces. The Strategic Report for the year

ended 31 December 2025 is set out on pages 16 to 89.

Corporate governance statement

The Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules of the

Financial Conduct Authority require certain information

to be included in a corporate governance statement in the

Directors’ Report. Information that fulfils the requirements

of the Corporate Governance Statement can be found in the

Governance section on pages 90 to 169, and also within this

Directors’ Report.

Results for the year and dividends

The results are set out in the Consolidated Statement

of Comprehensive Income on page 170. The companies

affecting the profit or net assets of the group in the year are

listed in note 36 to the Financial Statements.

The Directors recommend that a final dividend of 4.62p

per ordinary share be paid on 29 May 2026, subject to

shareholder approval at the 2026 AGM to be held on

21 May 2026, to ordinary shareholders on the register at the

close of business on 1 May 2026. If approved, this, together

with the interim dividend of 3.24p per ordinary share paid

on 24 October 2025, will make a total dividend of 7.86p

per ordinary share for the year ended 31 December 2025.

Further details are disclosed in note 10 to the Financial

Statements on page 191.

Financial instruments

The group’s policy in respect of financial instruments is set

out within the Accounting Policies on page 181 and details

of credit risk, capital risk management, liquidity risk and

interest rate risk are given respectively in notes 18, 25 and 26

to the Financial Statements.

Going concern and viability statement

The Directors have, at the time of approving the Financial

Statements, a reasonable expectation that the company

and the group have adequate resources to continue in

operational existence for the foreseeable future. Further

detail is contained in the Strategic Report on pages 65 to 66.

Fair, balanced and understandable

The Audit and Risk Committee and the Board have assessed

the tone, balance and language of the Annual Report and

Financial Statements, being mindful of the requirements

of the UK Corporate Governance Code and the need for

consistency between the narrative section of the document

and the Financial Statements. The Board’s formal statement

on the Annual Report and Financial Statements being

fair, balanced and understandable is contained within the

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities which can be found

on page 159.

Political donations

The company made no political donations in the year or in

the previous year.

Directors and their interests

Details of the Directors who held office during the financial

year ending 31 December 2025 and as at the date of this

Annual Report and Financial Statements can be found

on pages 92 and 93. At no time during the year has any

Director had any interest in any significant contract with

the company.

The interests of Directors and persons closely

associated with them in the share capital of the

company as at 31 December 2025, are disclosed in the

Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 146. Between

31 December 2025 and 31 March 2026, being a date not

more than one month prior to the date of the Notice of the

AGM, there were no changes in the beneficial interests of

any of the current Directors during this period.

Details of Directors’ long term incentive awards and share

options are provided in the Directors’ Remuneration Report

on pages 146 to 147.

henryboot.co.uk152

Directors’ service contracts and

letters of appointment

Details of unexpired terms of Directors’ service contracts

and/or letters of appointment of the Non-executive

Directors proposed for reappointment at the AGM on

21 May 2026 are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration

Policy.

Tim Roberts and Darren Littlewood each have a one-year

rolling service agreement in accordance with our policy on

Directors’ contracts. Termination of these arrangements

would therefore be subject to their contractual terms and

conditions which require a notice period of one year to the

Director. Contractual compensation in the event of early

termination provides for compensation at basic salary,

pension and benefits for the notice period.

Non-executive Directors, including the Chair, do not have

service contracts. All Non-executive Directors have letters

of appointment and their appointment and subsequent

reappointment is subject to approval by shareholders.

Non-executive Director appointments are typically for

three years; however, they may be terminated without

compensation at any time. The full Directors’ Remuneration

Policy can be viewed on pages 123 to 130 of the 2023

Annual Report.

Training and development

Formal and tailored inductions are arranged for all new

Directors and continued development is monitored by

the Chair as part of the performance review process.

The programme of induction includes attendance at PLC

Board and subsidiary meetings, meetings with key internal

and external stakeholders including the Group Employee

Forum Chair, site visits, training on director duties and

other personalised development to encourage a seamless

integration into the business.

Non-executive Directors are encouraged to familiarise

themselves with the company’s business, and they do

this throughout the year by engaging with the workforce,

attending subsidiary board and other management meetings

and by visiting sites and depots. You can read more about

engagement with employees and other stakeholders on

pages 106 to 107 and 85 to 89 respectively.

Specific training requirements were considered as part of

the Board’s performance review, details of which can be

found on pages 110 to 115. General updates on regulations

and best practice are provided through a mixture of

briefings, Board papers and specialist training. Board

development plans for 2026 are described on page 125.

Employment policy and involvement

Employees

Employees are at the heart of all that we do; our culture

ensures that employees can grow, thrive and succeed.

Details of how we seek to promote and achieve this are set

out in our people section on pages 35 to 39, the employee

engagement report on pages 106 to 107 and Nomination

Committee Report on pages 124 to 128. Our policy on

equal opportunities for all employees, including disabled

employees, can be found under our Equality and Diversity

Policy at henryboot.co.uk.

Employee engagement

Details of our employee engagement activities can be found

on pages 106 to 107.

People engagement and internal

communications

We continued to take a strategic approach to our people

engagement in 2025, working closely with leaders from

across the business to deliver day-to-day communications

and also guide our people through business changes,

most notably the management buyout of Henry Boot

Construction.

A robust approach was taken, analysing key audiences from

across the business including risk factors associated with

each cohort of people, their communication preferences,

timing and language. The approach was well received

throughout the group, gaining positive feedback in the Hive

employee engagement survey results.

Regular monthly cross-departmental collaboration meetings

encouraged a joined-up approach between all group service

functions, ensuring a consistent and timely year-round

plan of internal communications. Other areas of focus for

the year included the introduction of D365, supporting

our responsible business agenda through targeted

communications in direct relation to the 5Ps (Performance,

People, Partners, Planet, Places), increased awareness of

physical and mental health support, and the completion of

digital screen installation.

Our monthly internal newsletter ‘the lowdown’ hit its annual

target for engagement after gaining feedback from the

business through a series of focus groups across the country,

and iterative changes reflecting best practice. We also made

movements to engage with a new internal communications

platform provider, now appointed for 2026. They offer

an improved emailing platform allowing us to better

optimise campaigns, respond to device type, and manage

engagement metrics more accurately.

Employee share schemes

The group encourages participation in the company’s

employee share schemes to share in the potential growth

and future success of the group. Eligible employees are

invited to participate in Sharesave and, depending on

the grade, either the Company Share Option Plan or the

Long term Incentive Plan on an annual basis. Details of

employee share schemes are set out in note 30 to the

Financial Statements.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

153

Directors’ indemnity provisions

Directors risk personal liability under civil and criminal law

for many aspects of the company’s main business decisions.

As a consequence, the Directors could face a range of

penalties, including fines and/or imprisonment. In keeping

with normal market practice, the company believes that

it is prudent and in the best interests of the company to

protect the individuals concerned from the consequences

of innocent error or omission. As a result, the company

operates a directors’ and officers’ liability insurance policy

in order to indemnify Directors and other senior officers of

the company and its subsidiaries. This insurance policy does

not provide cover where the Director or officer has acted

fraudulently or dishonestly.

In addition, subject to the provisions of and to the extent

permitted by relevant statutes, under the Articles of

Association of the company, the Directors and other

officers throughout the year, and at the date of approval

of these Financial Statements, were indemnified out of the

assets of the company against liabilities incurred by them

in the course of carrying out their duties or the exercise of

their powers.

Health and safety

The health and safety of our employees and others

is paramount.

Further information on our approach to health and safety is

provided in the 'our people' section on page 38.

Relationship with stakeholders

Details of how we engage with stakeholders and uphold our

Directors’ duties more widely under s.172 of the Companies

Act 2006, including our suppliers, customers and other

stakeholders, can be found on pages 85 to 89.

Shareholder relations

The company actively communicates with its institutional

and private shareholders and values a two-way conversation

on key company issues. It is this close relationship with

shareholders that is viewed as one of the company’s

particular strengths.

During the year, a number of formal presentations were

made by members of the Board to institutional shareholders

and meetings were held with other major shareholders.

Feedback from these meetings was provided to the Board

by our brokers, through written reports or verbal updates

from the CEO, CFO or the Chair. At every Board meeting,

an update is given to the Non-executive Directors on

any feedback from investors, particularly after investor

roadshow programmes. The Board receives a report at every

meeting on share movements during the period and market

trends. The company uses the Investor Relations section of

its website, henryboot.co.uk, to publish statutory documents

and communications to shareholders, such as the Annual

Report and Financial Statements. The website is designed

to communicate with both present and potential investors

and includes all London Stock Exchange announcements,

investor presentations and press releases. Following

feedback, the company has increased the frequency of

RNS reach announcements to give updates on operational

successes and other company news.

Greenhouse gas emissions

The greenhouse gas emissions disclosures required by

the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors’

Report) Regulations 2013 are included within the Strategic

Report on page 84. This information is incorporated by

reference into (and shall be deemed to form part of)

this report.

Substantial interests in voting rights

Excluding Directors, as at 31 March 2026, being a date not

more than one month prior to the date of the Notice of the

AGM, the information in the table below had been disclosed

to the company in accordance with the requirements in

the UK Listing Rules and the Disclosure Guidance and

Transparency Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority.

Voting rights over

ordinary shares

Number % of issued

Rysaffe Nominees and J J

Sykes (joint holding)

1

20,012,155 14.93

David John Gladman 14,760,550 11.02

The London & Amsterdam Trust

Company Limited 8,487,371 6.37

FIL Limited 7,010,581 5.23

The Fulmer Charitable Trust

2

5,739,580 4.40

1

Rysaffe Nominees and James Sykes are joint registered holders on behalf

of various Reis family trusts and are therefore not included under the

beneficial interests of James Sykes set out in the Directors’ Remuneration

Report.

2

The shares of the Fulmer Charitable Trust, a recognised charity, are

registered in the names of Mr John Spencer Reis, Mrs Sally Anne Reis and

Mrs Caroline Mary Mytum as Trustees.

These figures represent the number of shares and

percentage held as the date of notification to the company.

Details of Directors’ holdings can be found on page 146.

Directors’ report

continued

henryboot.co.uk154

Shares held by the Henry Boot PLC

Employee Trust

The company has an established Employee Trust (the

Trust) for the benefit of the group’s employees to satisfy

existing grants by the company under various share-

based payment arrangements. Details of the company’s

share-based payment arrangements are provided in

note 30 to the Financial Statements. The Trustee of the

Trust, a subsidiary of the company of which the Directors

throughout 2025 were Tim Roberts, Darren Littlewood,

Jaimie Read (from 2 December 2025) and Amy Stanbridge

(until 2 December 2025), exercises the voting rights in

relation to shares held as it, in its absolute discretion, thinks

fit, but having regard to the interests of the beneficiaries.

In respect of the financial year of the company ended on

31 December 2025, the Trust has waived the right to receive

from the company all dividends (if any) in respect of the

shares held within the Trust.

During 2025, the Trust did not purchase any ordinary shares

in the company, although it does from time to time in order

to satisfy upcoming grants. Further details are provided in

note 32 to the Financial Statements.

Share buy-backs

The Company did not acquire any of its own shares

(including treasury shares) through the Trust or by any other

means during the period. As referenced above, it does make

purchases of ordinary shares through the Trust from time to

time in order to satisfy upcoming share plan requirements.

Future developments

Important events since the financial year end and likely

future developments are described in the Strategic Report

on pages 16 to 89 and in note 35 to the Financial Statements.

Research and development

During the year, the Company has not undertaken any

material research and development activity.

Company branches

Details of the Company’s office and depot locations are

shown on page 09. The Company does not have any

overseas branches.

Statement of disclosure of

information to the auditor

The Directors of the company who held office at the date of

approval of this Annual Report each confirm that:

• so far as they are aware, there is no relevant audit

information (information needed by the company’s

auditor in connection with preparing their report) of

which the company’s auditor is unaware; and

• they have taken all the steps that they ought to have

taken as Directors in order to make themselves aware of

any relevant audit information and to establish that the

company’s auditor is aware of that information.

Independent auditor

The external auditor, Ernst & Young LLP, has carried out the

audit of the 2025 financial results. Resolutions re-appointing

Ernst & Young LLP as auditor (Resolution 11) and authorising

the Audit and Risk Committee to fix their remuneration

(Resolution 12) will be proposed at the AGM.

Accountability and audit

Details of the Directors’ responsibilities and the Statement

of Directors’ Responsibilities are contained on page 159. The

Independent Auditor’s Report is given on pages 162 to 169.

Annual General Meeting (AGM)

The Notice of the AGM can be found on pages 236 to 239,

which also details methods of shareholder engagement to

take place in conjunction with the AGM. It is also available

at henryboot.co.uk, where a copy can be viewed and

downloaded.

Additional shareholder information

This section sets out details of other matters on which the

Directors are required to report annually, but which do not

appear elsewhere in this document.

The information below summarises certain provisions

of the current Articles of Association of the company

(as adopted by special resolution on 22 May 2025) (the

Articles) and applicable English law concerning companies

(the Companies Act 2006). This is a summary only and

the relevant provisions of the Companies Act 2006 or

the Articles should be consulted if further information

is required.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

155

Share capital

The company’s issued share capital comprises two classes

of shares being, respectively, ordinary shares of 10p each

(ordinary shares) and cumulative preference shares of £1 each

(preference shares). Further details of the share capital of the

company are set out in note 30 to the Financial Statements.

As at 7 April 2026, the ordinary shares represent 97.11% of the

total issued share capital of the company by nominal value

and the preference shares represent 2.89% of such total

issued share capital. The ordinary shares and the preference

shares are in registered form. Both classes of share are

admitted to the Official List of the Financial Conduct

Authority.

The Notice of the AGM on pages 236 to 239 includes the

following resolutions:

• An ordinary resolution (Resolution 13) to renew the

authority of the Directors to allot shares up to a maximum

nominal amount of £4,482,935 representing approximately

one-third (33.33%) of the company’s issued ordinary

share capital at 7 April 2026. The authority will expire on

21 August 2027 or at the conclusion of the next AGM,

whichever is the earlier, but it is the present intention of

the Directors to seek annual renewal of this authority. The

Directors do not have any present intention of exercising

the authority.

• A special resolution (Resolution 14) to enable the Directors

to continue to allot equity securities for cash in connection

with a rights or other issue pro rata to the rights of the

existing shareholders, but subject to certain exceptions,

and for any other purpose provided that the aggregate

nominal value of such allotments does not exceed

£672,440 (approximately 5% of the company’s issued

ordinary share capital at 7 April 2026). The authority will

expire on 21 August 2027 or at the conclusion of the next

AGM, whichever is the earlier, but it is the present intention

of the Directors to seek annual renewal of this authority.

The Directors also confirm their intention that, in line

with the Pre-Emption Group’s Statement of Principles, no

more than 7.5% of the issued ordinary share capital of the

company (excluding treasury shares) will be issued for cash

on a non pre-emptive basis during any rolling three-year

period without prior consultation with shareholders.

• A special resolution (Resolution 15) to renew the authority

of the company to make market purchases of up to

13,448,805 of its own issued ordinary shares (10% of the

company’s issued ordinary share capital at 7 April 2026).

The minimum price that may be paid under the authority

for an ordinary share is 10p and the maximum price is

limited to not more than 5% above the average of the

middle market quotations for an ordinary share as derived

from the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List for

the five business days before the purchase is made.

The Directors will exercise the authority only if they are

satisfied that it would be likely to result in an increase in

expected earnings per share of the ordinary share capital

in issue and that any purchase will be in the best interests

of shareholders generally. If the Directors do decide to

exercise the authority, ordinary shares so acquired will

either be cancelled or held as treasury shares, depending

upon the circumstances prevailing at the time.

Rights and obligations attaching to shares

Subject to the Companies Act 2006 and other shareholders’

rights, any share may be issued with such rights and

restrictions as the company may by ordinary resolution

decide or, if no such resolution has been passed or so far

as the resolution does not make specific provision, as the

Board of Directors for the time being of the company (the

Board) may decide. Subject to the Companies Act 2006, the

Articles and any resolution of the company, the Board may

deal with any unissued shares as it may decide.

Rights of preference shares

The preference shares carry the following rights (subject to

Board approval) in priority to the ordinary shares but carry

no further right to participate in profits or assets:

• the right to receive out of the profits of the company a

fixed cumulative preferential dividend at the rate of 5.25%

per annum on the capital paid up thereon;

• the right on a return of assets on a winding up to payment

of the capital paid up thereon together with a sum

calculated at the rate of 6.00% per annum in respect of

any period up to the commencement of the winding up

for which such preferential dividend as referred to above

has not been paid; and

• the right on a return of assets in a reduction of capital to

repayment of the capital paid up thereon together with

a sum equal to all arrears (if any) of such preferential

dividend as referred to above. The preference shares

shall not confer on the holders of them any right to

receive notice of or to be present or to vote at any general

meeting unless either:

– a resolution is proposed directly affecting the rights or

privileges of the holders of the preference shares as a

separate class; or

– at the date of the notice convening the general

meeting, the fixed cumulative preferential dividend

provided in the Articles shall be in arrears for more

than six months.

Voting

Voting on each resolution will be conducted by way of a poll

in accordance with the terms of the Articles. The results of

the poll will be announced to the London Stock Exchange

and will be made available on the company’s website at

www.henryboot.co.uk as soon as practicable following the

conclusion of the AGM. Under the Companies Act 2006,

shareholders are entitled to appoint a proxy to exercise all or

any of their rights to attend and to speak and vote on their

behalf at a general meeting or class meeting.

Directors’ report

continued

henryboot.co.uk156

Restrictions on voting

A shareholder shall not be entitled to vote at any general

meeting or class meeting in respect of any shares held by

him unless all calls and other sums presently payable by

him in respect of that share have been paid. In addition,

holders of default shares (as defined in the Articles) shall

not be entitled to vote during the continuance of a default

in providing the company with information concerning

interests in those shares required to be provided (following

relevant notification) under the Companies Act 2006.

Deadlines for voting rights

Full details of the deadlines for exercising voting rights in

respect of the resolutions to be considered at the AGM to

be held on 21 May 2026 are set out in the Notice of AGM on

pages 236 to 239.

Documents available for inspection

at and prior to the AGM

Copies of contracts of service and letters of appointment of

the Directors with the company and the Articles are available

for inspection at the company’s registered office on any

weekday (Saturdays, Sundays and Bank Holidays excepted)

during normal business hours.

Dividends and distributions

The company may, by ordinary resolution, declare a dividend

to be paid to the shareholders but no dividend shall exceed

the amount recommended by the Board. The Board may pay

interim dividends and also any fixed rate dividend whenever

the financial position of the company justifies its payment

in the opinion of the Board. If the Board acts in good faith,

none of the Directors shall incur any liability to the holders

of shares with preferred rights for any loss they may suffer

in consequence of the payment of an interim dividend on

other shares.

Variation of rights

The Articles specify that the special rights attached to any

class of shares may, either with the consent in writing of

holders of three-quarters of the issued shares of that class or

with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate

meeting of such holders (but not otherwise), be modified

or abrogated.

Transfer of shares

Under and subject to the restrictions in the Articles,

any shareholder may transfer some or all of their shares

in certificated form by transfer in writing in any usual

form or in any other form which the Board may approve.

Uncertificated shares must be transferred by means of a

relevant system, such as CREST. The Board may, save in

certain circumstances, refuse to register any transfer of a

certificated share not fully paid up.

The Board may also refuse to register any transfer of

certificated shares unless it is:

• in respect of only one class of shares;

• duly stamped or exempt from stamp duty;

• delivered to the office or at such other place as the Board

may decide for registration; and

• accompanied by the certificate for the shares to be

transferred and such other evidence (if any) as the Board

may reasonably require to show the right of the intending

transferor to transfer the shares.

In addition, the Board may refuse to register any transfer of

shares which is in favour of more than four transferees.

Repurchase of shares

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 and

to any rights conferred on the holders of any class of shares,

the company may purchase all or any of its shares of any

class, including any redeemable shares.

Amendment to the Articles of Association

Any amendments to the Articles may be made in

accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006

by way of special resolution.

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

157

Appointment and replacement

of Directors

The Directors shall not, unless otherwise determined by

an ordinary resolution of the company, be less than three

nor more than 15 in number. Directors may be appointed

by the company by ordinary resolution or by the Board. A

Director appointed by the Board shall retire from office at

the next AGM of the company but shall then be eligible

for reappointment. The Board may appoint one or more

Directors to hold any office or employment under the

company for such period (subject to the Companies Act

2006) and on such terms as it may decide and may revoke or

terminate any such appointment.

At each AGM, each Director shall retire from office in

accordance with the Articles. A Director who retires may,

if willing to act, be reappointed.

In addition to any power of removal conferred by the

Companies Act 2006, the company may by ordinary

resolution remove any director before expiration of his

period of office. A Director may also be removed from office

by the service on them of a notice to that effect signed

by all the other Directors. The office of a Director shall be

vacated if:

i. they cease to be a director by virtue of the Companies

Act 2006 or are otherwise prohibited by law from being

a Director;

ii. they become bankrupt or make any arrangement or

composition with their creditors generally;

iii. they are, in the opinion of a registered medical practitioner

who is treating them, physically or mentally incapable

of acting as a Director and may remain so for more than

three months, and the board resolves that their office

be vacated;

iv. their contract of service as a director expires or is

terminated for any reason and is neither renewed nor a

new contract granted within 14 days;

v. for more than six months they are absent, without

permission from the Board, from meetings of the Board

held during that period, and the Board resolves that their

office be vacated; or

vi. they serve on the company notice of their wish to resign.

Powers of the Directors

The business of the company shall be managed by the Board

which may exercise all the powers of the company, subject

to the provisions of the Articles and any resolution of the

company’s shareholders.

The Articles specify that the Board may exercise all the

powers of the company to borrow money and to mortgage

or charge all or any part of its undertaking, property and

assets and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and

other securities, subject to the provisions of the Articles.

Conflicts of interest

Directors are asked to declare any conflicts of interests at

the start of any board and committee meeting if they relate

to any agenda items, and a register of standing conflicts of

interests is also maintained.

Takeovers and significant agreements

The company is a party to the following significant

agreements that take effect, alter or terminate on a change

of control of the company following a takeover bid:

• the company’s share schemes and plans; and

• bank facilities whereby upon a ‘change of control’ the

lenders shall consult with the company for a period not

greater than 30 days (commencing on the date of the

change of control) to determine whether and on what

basis the lenders are prepared to continue the facility.

Information rights

Beneficial owners of shares who have been nominated by the

registered holder of those shares to enjoy information rights

under Section 146 of the Companies Act 2006 are required

to direct all communications to the registered holder of their

shares, rather than to the company’s registrars, Computershare

Investor Services PLC or to the company directly.

Approved by the Board and signed by its order by

Jaimie Read

Company Secretary

14 April 2026

Directors’ report

continued

henryboot.co.uk158

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in

respect of the Financial Statements

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual

Report and the Financial Statements in accordance with

applicable United Kingdom law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial

statements for each financial year. Under that law, the

Directors have elected to prepare the group and parent

company Financial Statements in accordance with UK-

adopted international accounting standards (IFRSs). Under

company law, the Directors must not approve the Financial

Statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and

fair view of the state of affairs of the group and the company,

and of the profit or loss of the group and the company for

that period.

In preparing these Financial Statements, the Directors are

required to:

• select suitable accounting policies in accordance with IAS

8 ‘Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates

and Errors’ and then apply them consistently;

• make judgements and accounting estimates that are

reasonable and prudent;

• present information, including accounting policies, in a

manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and

understandable information;

• provide additional disclosures when compliance with the

specific requirements in IFRSs is insufficient to enable

users to understand the impact of particular transactions,

other events and conditions on the group and company

financial position and financial performance;

• in respect of the group Financial Statements, state

whether UK-adopted international accounting standards

have been followed, subject to any material departures

disclosed and explained in the financial statements;

• in respect of the parent company Financial Statements,

state whether UK-adopted international accounting

standards, have been followed, subject to any material

departures disclosed and explained in the financial

statements; and

• prepare the Financial Statements on the going concern

basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the

company and/or the group will continue in business.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate

accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain

the company’s and group’s transactions, and disclose with

reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of

the company and the group and enable them to ensure that

the company and the group Financial Statements comply

with the Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for

safeguarding the assets of the group and parent company

and, hence, for taking reasonable steps for the prevention

and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also

responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’

Report, Directors’ Remuneration Report and corporate

governance statement that comply with that law and

those regulations. The Directors are responsible for the

maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial

information included on the company’s website.

The Directors confirm, to the best of their knowledge:

• that the consolidated Financial Statements, prepared in

accordance with UK-adopted international accounting

standards, give a true and fair view of the assets,

liabilities, financial position and profit of the parent

company and undertakings included in the consolidation

taken as a whole;

• that the Annual Report, including the Strategic

Report, includes a fair review of the development and

performance of the business and the position of the

company and undertakings included in the consolidation

taken as a whole, together with a description of the

principal risks and uncertainties that they face; and

• that they consider the Annual Report, taken as a whole,

is fair, balanced and understandable, and provides the

information necessary for shareholders to assess the

company’s position, performance, business model and

strategy.

Approved by the Board and signed on its behalf by

Tim Roberts

Director

Darren Littlewood

Director

14 April 2026

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

159

Financial

Statements

Pictured: INTER, Welwyn Garden City, 71,000 sq ft of Grade-A

Industrial and Logistic space across 3 units.

henryboot.co.uk160

Financial Statements

Independent auditor’s report 162

Consolidated statement of

comprehensive income

170

Statements of financial position 171

Statements of changes in equity 172

Statements of cash flows 173

Notes to the financial statements 174

161

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Independent

auditor’s report

to the members of Henry Boot PLC

Opinion

In our opinion:

• Henry Boot PLC’s group financial statements and parent

company financial statements (the “financial statements”)

give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of

the parent company’s affairs as at 31 December 2025 and

of the group’s profit for the year then ended;

• the group financial statements have been properly

prepared in accordance with UK adopted international

accounting standards;

• the parent company financial statements have been

properly prepared in accordance with UK adopted

international accounting standards as applied in

accordance with section 408 of the Companies Act

2006; and

• the financial statements have been prepared in

accordance with the requirements of the Companies

Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements of Henry Boot (the

‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘group’) for the

year ended 31 December 2025 which comprise:

Group Parent Company

Group statement of

financial position as at

31 December 2025

Parent Company

statement of financial

position as at

31 December 2025

Consolidated statement

of comprehensive income

for the year ended

31 December 2025

Parent Company

statement of changes in

equity for the year ended

31 December 2025

Group statement of changes

in equity for the year ended

31 December 2025

Parent Company

statement of cash flows

for the year ended

31 December 2025

Group statement of cash

flows for the year ended

31 December 2025

Related notes 1 to 38 to

the financial statements

including material

accounting policy

information

Related notes 1 to 38 to

the financial statements,

material accounting policy

information

The financial reporting framework that has been applied

in their preparation is applicable law and UK adopted

international accounting standards and as regards the parent

company financial statements, as applied in accordance with

section 408 of the Companies Act 2006.

Basis for opinion

We conducted our audit in accordance with International

Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable

law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further

described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of

the financial statements section of our report. We believe

that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and

appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

Independence

We are independent of the group and parent in accordance

with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit

of the financial statements in the UK, including the FRC’s

Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities,

and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in

accordance with these requirements.

The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical

Standard were not provided to the group or the parent

company and we remain independent of the group and the

parent company in conducting the audit.

Conclusions relating to going concern

In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that

the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting

in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.

Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group

and parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going

concern basis of accounting included:

• In conjunction with our walkthrough of the Group’s

financial close process, obtaining an understanding

of management’s going concern assessment process

and challenging management to ensure key factors

were considered in their assessment. We obtained

an understanding of each of management’s modelled

scenarios, including the base case and a severe

downside case.

• Assessing the appropriateness of the duration of the

going concern assessment period to 31 December 2027

and considering our knowledge of significant events or

conditions beyond this period, based on our procedures

on the Group’s business plan, cash flow forecasts and

from knowledge arising from other areas of the audit.

• Obtaining management’s going concern assessment,

including the cash flow forecasts and forecast covenant

compliance, for the going concern period through to

31 December 2027, The Group has modelled a base

case and severe but plausible downside scenarios. The

downside scenario models significant curtailment of

activity in 2026 followed by modest growth through 2027.

• Assessing the historical accuracy of forecasting and

challenging the appropriateness of key assumptions in

management’s forecasts;

• Considering the mitigating factors included in

management’s downside scenario and assessing whether

they are within control of the Group, for example,

reducing uncommitted development and acquisition

expenditure

henryboot.co.uk162

• Verifying the inputs into the cash flow forecasts, the

debt facility terms, and reconciling the available liquidity

(cash and available facilities) as at 31 December 2025.

We further reviewed signed borrowing agreements to

confirm both availability to the Group and the forecast

debt repayments through the going concern assessment

period.

• Assessing management’s break case which focuses on a

breach in the EBIT cover covenant;

• Performing an independent reverse stress test to consider

other factors which could lead to the Group utilising all

liquidity or breaching the financial covenants during the

going concern period and assessing how likely these are

to materialise; and

• reviewing the Group’s going concern disclosures included

in the annual report in order to assess that the disclosures

were appropriate and in conformity with the reporting

standards.

Based on the work we have performed, we have not

identified any material uncertainties relating to events

or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast

significant doubt on the group and parent company’s

ability to continue as a going concern for a period to

31 December 2027.

In relation to the group and parent company’s reporting

on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance

Code, we have nothing material to add or draw attention

to in relation to the directors’ statement in the financial

statements about whether the directors considered it

appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors

with respect to going concern are described in the relevant

sections of this report. However, because not all future

events or conditions can be predicted, this statement is not

a guarantee as to the group’s ability to continue as a going

concern.

Overview of our audit approach

Audit

scope

• We performed an audit of the complete

financial information of six components

and audit procedures on specific

balances for a further fifteen components

and central procedures on intercompany,

payroll and cash.

Key audit

matters

• Valuation of contract balances and

associated revenue and profit recognition

• Valuation of house building inventories

and profit recognition

• Valuation of investment properties

Materiality

• Overall group materiality of £1.46m which

represents 5% of profit before tax.

An overview of the scope of the parent

companyand group audits

In the current year our audit scoping has continued to

reflect the requirements of ISA (UK) 600 (Revised). We

have followed a risk-based approach when developing

our audit approach to obtain sufficient appropriate

audit evidence on which to base our audit opinion. We

performed risk assessment procedures, with input from

our component auditors, to identify and assess risks of

material misstatement of the Group financial statements

and identified significant accounts and disclosures. When

identifying components at which audit work needed

to be performed to respond to the identified risks of

material misstatement of the Group financial statements,

we considered our understanding of the Group and its

business environment, the potential impact of climate

change, the applicable financial framework, the group’s

system of internal control at the entity level, the existence of

centralised processes, applications and any relevant internal

audit results.

We then identified five components as individually relevant

to the Group due to relevant events and conditions

underlying the identified risks of material misstatement of

the group financial statements being associated with the

reporting components.

For those individually relevant components, we identified

the significant accounts where audit work needed to be

performed at these components by applying professional

judgement, having considered the group significant

accounts on which centralised procedures will be

performed, the reasons for identifying the financial reporting

component as an individually relevant component and the

size of the component’s account balance relative to the

group significant financial statement account balance.

We then considered whether the remaining group significant

account balances not yet subject to audit procedures, in

aggregate, could give rise to a risk of material misstatement

of the group financial statements. We selected sixteen

components of the group to include in our audit scope to

address these risks.

Having identified the components for which work will be

performed, we determined the scope to assign to each

component.

Of the six components selected, we designed and

performed audit procedures on the entire financial

information of ones component (“full scope components”).

For fifteen components, we designed and performed audit

procedures on specific significant financial statement

account balances or disclosures of the financial information

of the component (“specific scope components”).

Across these twenty-one components we performed

centralised audit procedures on intercompany, payroll

and cash.

Our scoping to address the risk of material misstatement

for each key audit matter covered 100% of each key audit

matter.

163Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Independent

auditor’s report

to the members of Henry Boot PLC continued

Involvement with component teams

All audit work performed for the purposes of the audit was

undertaken by the Group audit team.

Climate change

Stakeholders are increasingly interested in how climate

change will impact Henry Boot PLC. The Group has

concluded that the property development industry is one

of the higher risk sectors and they continuously monitor

the risks and opportunities arising and the materiality of

the financial impacts of those risks may present to the

business. This is explained on pages 68 to 84 in the required

Task Force on Climate related Financial Disclosures and on

page 60 in the principal risks and uncertainties. They have

also explained their climate commitments on page 44. All

of these disclosures form part of the “Other information,”

rather than the audited financial statements. Our procedures

on these unaudited disclosures therefore consisted solely

of considering whether they are materially inconsistent with

the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the

course of the audit or otherwise appear to be materially

misstated, in line with our responsibilities on “Other

information”.

In planning and performing our audit we assessed the

potential impacts of climate change on the Group’s business

and any consequential material impact on its financial

statements.

The Group has explained in the basis of preparation note

their articulation of how climate change has been reflected

in the financial statements. There are no significant

judgements or estimates relating to climate change in the

notes to the financial statements. The Group has concluded

that the environmental impact on the Group’s operations

is relatively low and no issues were identified that would

materially impact the carrying values of such assets or have

any other impact on the financial statements.

Our audit effort in considering the impact of climate change

on the financial statements was focused on evaluating

whether management’s assessment of the impact of the

physical climate risk of flooding has been appropriately

reflected in inventory asset values and that the Group’s

relevant transition costs have been appropriately reflected

in the investment property valuation. We also challenged

the Directors’ considerations of climate change risks in their

assessment of going concern and viability and associated

disclosures. Where considerations of climate change were

relevant to our assessment of going concern, these are

described above. As part of this evaluation, we performed

our own risk assessment, supported by our climate change

internal specialists, include other relevant steps to our risk

assessment to determine the risks of material misstatement

in the financial statements from climate change which

needed to be considered in our audit.

We also challenged the Directors’ considerations of climate

change risks in their assessment of going concern and

viability and associated disclosures. Where considerations

of climate change were relevant to our assessment of going

concern, these are described above.

Based on our work, whilst we have not identified the

impact of climate change on the financial statements to

be a standalone key audit matter, we have considered the

impact on the valuation of investment properties. Details of

the impact, our procedures and findings are included in our

explanation of the key audit matter below.

henryboot.co.uk164

Key audit matters

Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial

statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not

due to fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy,

the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in

the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate

opinion on these matters.

Risk Our response to the risk

Valuation of contract balances

and associated revenue and profit

recognition

Refer to the Audit Committee Report

(pages 119 to 120); Accounting policies

(page 176); and Notes 1,17 and 22 of

the Consolidated Financial Statements

(pages 184, 206 and 210)

The group has reported revenues

from construction and development

contracts for the year of £38.9m (2024

- £17.9m). The group has reported

contract assets of £8.4m (2024- £12.7m)

and contract liabilities of nil (2024 -

£4.9m).

For construction and development

contract activity the performance

obligation is satisfied over time. This

means that revenue is recognised

by measuring the progress towards

completing the performance obligation

satisfactorily.

This assessment requires management

to estimate the stage of completion

of construction and development

contract activity and assess costs

to complete. Forecasting is highly

subjective and is an area that could lead

to misstatement of revenue, profit and

related construction and development

contract balances either through error

or management bias.

• Walkthroughs to understand the key process and identify key controls;

• For a sample of contracts in progress at the year end, we recalculated the

percentage completion, revenue recognised in the year and corresponding

contract assets and liabilities;

• For cost plus contracts, we verified the accuracy and allowability of costs by

tracing a sample of incurred costs to third party support and recalculating

revenue using the agreed cost plus margin to confirm the correctness of

amounts recognised

• We analysed the historical accuracy by comparing original forecast margins

to their final actual margins on completed contracts;

• We performed look back margin analysis (focused on completed contracts)

to identify any historic trends related to deterioration of margin and actual

margin levels achieved to identify whether there is a history of not achieving

forecast margin;

• We challenged the total cost to complete assumptions (including cost

contingencies), for a sample of incomplete projects, by:

• Holding discussions with project managers and quantity surveyors to

understand the basis for the assumptions and attending the year end

valuation meetings where the costs to complete are challenged internally;

• Understanding the nature of costs to come and evaluating the split

between fixed and variable costs to assess the cost volatility risk;

• Testing a sample of costs to complete by agreeing through to purchase

order, contract or other 3rd party evidence;

• Assessing management’s consideration of key supplier resilience for

contracts where costs with sub-contractors are fixed; and

• Obtaining the post year end CVRs (Cost Variance Reports) to identify any

margin movements that should have been reflected at year end.

• Checking level of contracted costs against estimates to identify cost

inflation not being factored into estimates.

• We performed sensitivity analysis for the incomplete contracts to determine

what level of cost increase would exhaust the annual contingency or result in

a material impact to the amounts recognised as revenue and cost of sales in

the year;

• We performed sensitivity analysis for project delay would result in a material

impact to the amounts recognised as revenue and cost of sales in the year

(See Appendix A);

• We visited a sample of sites to gain a deeper understanding of the projects

and to identify any contra-indicators of the stage of completion through

discussion with the onsite project managers.

Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee

Based on our audit procedures we have concluded that the valuation of contract balances and associated revenue and

profit recognition recognised in the year are not materially misstated.

165Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Independent

auditor’s report

to the members of Henry Boot PLC continued

Risk Our response to the risk

Valuation of house building inventories

and profit recognition

Refer to the Audit Committee Report

(page 120); Accounting policies (page

180); and Note 20 of the Consolidated

Financial Statements (page 209)

The Group holds house building

inventories of £156m (2024- £112m).

There is a risk that the margin used to

recognise profit on each development

is incorrect and that the carrying value

of inventory could be overstated.

The carrying value of inventory

is determined by reference to

assumptions inherent in the site

forecasts, such as costs to complete

and expected selling price. These are

used to calculate the expected margin

on each development and the cost of

sale recorded when a plot is sold. There

is a risk that these assumptions may

be subject to management override

or error.

We performed the following audit procedures to challenge management’s

judgements over costs to complete and expected selling prices on material

incomplete sites:

• Performed walkthroughs to understand the key process and identify key

controls

• For completed sites, we compared budgeted and actual costs and margin to

assess the historical accuracy of management’s forecasting;

• Tested a sample of costs incurred in the period by agreeing to third party

invoices and ensuring the cost allocation to the correct site

• Challenged the cost to complete assumptions on all material

incomplete sites:

• We met with the Commercial Director to review site status and

performance to date, and to understand the basis for cost to complete

assumptions, including any excess costs or savings recognised since the

initial forecasts.

• We tested a sample of cost to complete estimates by tracing them to

third party supporting documentation (such as tenders and purchase

orders), with particular focus on cost categories subject to higher levels of

estimation.

• We compared original budgeted margins to current expected site margins

to assess the historical accuracy of management’s forecasting and its

impact on cost of sales.

• We tested for inventory impairment where the total expected selling

price of a development was lower than the combined carrying value of

inventory and estimated costs to complete.

• We reviewed post year end site forecasts and attended relevant

management meetings to identify any cost increases that should have

been reflected in the year end estimates.

• We assessed the appropriateness of material journal entries recorded

between sites. We evaluated the historical accuracy of management’s

cost assumptions by analysing variances between budgeted and final

margins on completed developments.

• Challenged the expected selling price assumptions on all material

incomplete sites:

• Met with the Commercial Director to understand the basis for expected

selling price assumptions applied to material incomplete sites.

• Reviewed industry publications to identify any contradictory market

evidence in relation to expected selling prices.

• Tested a sample of expected selling prices to current market prices,

using external property websites and the most recent selling prices for

comparable house types.

Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee

Based on our audit procedures we have concluded that the house building inventory balance and profit recognised in the

year are not materially misstated.

henryboot.co.uk166

Risk Our response to the risk

Valuation of investment properties

Refer to the Audit Committee Report

(page 119); Accounting policies (page

179); and Note 14 of the Consolidated

Financial Statements (pages 198

to 202).

The Group holds Investment property

of £94.6m (2024 - £96.3m). The change

in fair value of investment properties is

a £2.1m gain (2024: £4.5m gain)

There is a risk that the carrying value

of investment properties is misstated,

given that the carrying value of

these assets is based on a number of

assumptions which contain inherent

uncertainties and which require

management judgement. Uncertainties

in the valuations include yields,

market rent, actual rent achieved and

commercial property values amongst

other building specific assumptions.

In addition, there is a risk that

management inappropriately override

the valuation determined by the

external valuer.

To address the significant risk, we have performed the following procedures:

• Walkthroughs to understand the key process and identify key mitigating

controls

• For a sample of investment properties, we engaged our internal EY

valuation specialists to assess the appropriateness of valuations prepared

by managements external valuer. This was inclusive of reviewing external

valuation reports and testing the underlying data and assumptions that are

used in forming these valuations. This involved independently validating

the key assumptions, including rental levels, yields and wider commercial

property market inputs against third party evidence and general market

activity.

• Engaged in discussions with managements external valuers to confirm their

approach, including their considerations of climate risk and considered

contrary evidence. We additionally challenged valuers on their assumptions.

• We assessed the competence and objectivity of managements specialist

valuers; and

• We reconciled third party property valuations to the property book values

(IP) and tested any material reconciling items.

Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee

Based on our audit procedures we have concluded that the investment property balance is not materially misstated.

Our application of materiality

The magnitude of an omission or misstatement that,

individually or in the aggregate, could reasonably be

expected to influence the economic decisions of the users

of the financial statements. Materiality provides a basis for

determining the nature and extent of our audit procedures.

We determined materiality for the Group to be £1.46 million

(2024: £1.5 million), which is 5% (2024: 5%) of Profit before

Tax. We believe that Profit before Tax provides us with us

with an appropriate basis of materiality and is the most

relevant measure for stakeholders as it is a focus of both

management and investors.

We determined materiality for the Parent Company to be

£3.2 million (2024: £2.7 million), which is 2% (2024: 2%) of

Equity. However, we have capped the materiality for our

audit testing to the allocated materiality of the Group.

Performance materiality

The application of materiality at the individual account

or balance level. It is set at an amount to reduce to an

appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate

of uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceeds

materiality.

On the basis of our risk assessments, together with our

assessment of the Group’s overall control environment,

our judgement was that performance materiality was 50%

(2024: 75%) of our planning materiality, namely £0.73m

(2024: £1.1m). We have set performance materiality at this

percentage due to this being a recurring audit with a history

of few misstatements. Audit work at component locations

for the purpose of obtaining audit coverage over significant

financial statement accounts is undertaken based on a

percentage of total performance materiality.

Audit work was undertaken at component locations for

the purpose of responding to the assessed risks of material

misstatement of the group financial statements. The

performance materiality set for each component is based

on the relative scale and risk of the component to the Group

as a whole and our assessment of the risk of misstatement

at that component. In the current year, the range of

performance materiality allocated to components was

£0.15m to £0.44m (2024: £0.2m to £0.7m).

Reporting threshold

An amount below which identified misstatements are

considered as being clearly trivial.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report

to them all uncorrected audit differences in excess of £73k

(2024: £80k), which is set at 5% of planning materiality, as

well as differences below that threshold that, in our view,

warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.

We evaluate any uncorrected misstatements against both

the quantitative measures of materiality discussed above and

in light of other relevant qualitative considerations in forming

our opinion.

167Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Independent

auditor’s report

to the members of Henry Boot PLC continued

Other information

The other information comprises the information included

in the annual report set out on pages 1 to 233, other than the

financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The

directors are responsible for the other information contained

within the annual report.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover

the other information and, except to the extent otherwise

explicitly stated in this report, we do not express any form of

assurance conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and,

in doing so, consider whether the other information is

materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our

knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise

appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such

material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements,

we are required to determine whether this gives rise

to a material misstatement in the financial statements

themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we

conclude that there is a material misstatement of the other

information, we are required to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.

Opinions on other matters prescribed

by the Companies Act 2006

In our opinion, the part of the directors’ remuneration report

to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance

with the Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course

of the audit:

• the information given in the strategic report and

the directors’ report for the financial year for which

the financial statements are prepared is consistent

with the financial statements and those reports have

been prepared in accordance with applicable legal

requirements;

• the information about internal control and risk

management systems in relation to financial reporting

processes and about share capital structures, given in

compliance with rules 7.2.5 and 7.2.6 in the Disclosure

Rules and Transparency Rules sourcebook made by the

Financial Conduct Authority (the FCA Rules), is consistent

with the financial statements and has been prepared in

accordance with applicable legal requirements; and

• information about the company’s corporate governance

statement and practices and about its administrative,

management and supervisory bodies and their

committees complies with rules 7.2.2, 7.2.3 and 7.2.7 of

the FCA Rules.

Matters on which we are required to

report by exception

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group

and the parent company and its environment obtained in

the course of the audit, we have not identified material

misstatements in:

• the strategic report or the directors’ report; or

• the information about internal control and risk

management systems in relation to financial reporting

processes and about share capital structures, given in

compliance with rules 7.2.5 and 7.2.6 of the FCA Rules

We have nothing to report in respect of the following

matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006

requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:

• adequate accounting records have not been kept by the

parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have

not been received from branches not visited by us; or

• the parent company financial statements and the part of

the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not

in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

• certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified

by law are not made; or

• we have not received all the information and explanations

we require for our audit

• a Corporate Governance Statement has not been

prepared by the company

Corporate Governance Statement

We have reviewed the directors’ statement in relation to

going concern, longer-term viability and that part of the

Corporate Governance Statement relating to the group

and company’s compliance with the provisions of the UK

Corporate Governance Code specified for our review by the

UK Listing Rules.

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we

have concluded that each of the following elements of the

Corporate Governance Statement is materially consistent

with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained

during the audit:

• Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness

of adopting the going concern basis of accounting and

any material uncertainties identified set out on page

65 to 66;

• Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the

company’s prospects, the period this assessment covers

and why the period is appropriate set out on page

65 to 66;

• Directors’ statement on whether it has a reasonable

expectation that the group will be able to continue

in operation and meets its liabilities set out on page

65 to 66;

• Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable

set out on page 152;

• Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust

assessment of the emerging and principal risks set out on

page 57 to 64;

• The section of the annual report that describes the review

of effectiveness of risk management and internal control

systems set out on page 116 to 120; and

• The section describing the work of the audit committee

set out on page 116 to 120.

henryboot.co.uk168

Responsibilities of directors

As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities

statement set out on page 159, the directors are responsible

for the preparation of the financial statements and for being

satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such

internal control as the directors determine is necessary to

enable the preparation of financial statements that are free

from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are

responsible for assessing the group and parent company’s

ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as

applicable, matters related to going concern and using the

going concern basis of accounting unless the directors

either intend to liquidate the group or the parent company

or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but

to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the

audit of the financial statements

Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about

whether the financial statements as a whole are free from

material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error,

and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion.

Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is

not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with

ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when

it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are

considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they

could reasonably be expected to influence the economic

decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial

statements.

Explanation as to what extent the audit was

considered capable of detecting irregularities,

including fraud

Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-

compliance with laws and regulations. We design

procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined above,

to detect irregularities, including fraud. The risk of not

detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than

the risk of not detecting one resulting from error, as fraud

may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery

or intentional misrepresentations, or through collusion. The

extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting

irregularities, including fraud is detailed below.

However, the primary responsibility for the prevention

and detection of fraud rests with both those charged with

governance of the company and management.

• We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory

frameworks that are applicable to the group and

determined that the most significant are those that relate

to the reporting framework (UK adopted international

accounting standards as applied in accordance with

section 408 of the Companies Act 2006), the relevant

tax compliance regulations in the UK, employment law

and building safety regulations. We understood how

Henry Boot PLC is complying with those frameworks

by making enquiries of management, Internal Audit,

those responsible for legal and compliance procedures

and the Company Secretary. We corroborated our

enquiries through our review of board minutes and

papers provided to the Audit Committee. We assessed

the susceptibility of the group’s financial statements to

material misstatement, including how fraud might occur

by meeting with management from various parts of the

business to understand where it considered there was a

susceptibility to fraud. We also considered performance

targets and their propensity to influence efforts made

by management to manage earnings. We considered the

programmes and controls that the Group has established

to address risks identified, or that otherwise prevent,

deter and detect fraud; and how senior management

monitors those programmes and controls. Where the

risk was considered to be higher, we performed audit

procedures to address each identified fraud risk, as

set out in the Key Audit Matters section above. These

procedures included testing manual journals and were

designed to provide reasonable assurance that the

financial statements were free from material fraud and

error. Based on this understanding we designed our audit

procedures to identify non-compliance with such laws

and regulations. Our procedures involved journal entry

testing, with a focus on manual consolidation journals,

and journals indicating large or unusual transactions

based on our understanding of the business; enquiries

of Group management and Internal Audit; and focused

testing, as referred to in the key audit matters section

above. In addition, we completed procedures to conclude

on the compliance of the disclosures in the Annual

Report and Accounts with the requirements of the

relevant accounting standards, UK legislation and the UK

Corporate Governance Code 2018.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit

of the financial statements is located on the Financial

Reporting Council’s website at https://www.frc.org.uk/

auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our

auditor’s report.

Other matters we are required to address

• Following the recommendation from the audit committee,

we were appointed by the company on 22 May 2025

to audit the financial statements for the year ending

31 December 2025 and subsequent financial periods

• The period of total uninterrupted engagement including

previous renewals and reappointments is five years,

covering the years ending 31 December 2020 to

31 December 2025.

• The audit opinion is consistent with the additional report

to the audit committee.

Use of our report

This report is made solely to the company’s members,

as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the

Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken

so that we might state to the company’s members those

matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s

report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent

permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility

to anyone other than the company and the company’s

members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for

the opinions we have formed.

Paul Copland (Senior statutory auditor)

for and on behalf of Ernst & Young LLP, Statutory Auditor

Edinburgh

14 April 2026

169Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Consolidated statement of

comprehensive income

For the year ended 31 December 2025

Note

2025

£’000

2024

£’000

(Restated)

Revenue 1 251,549 266,192

Cost of sales (185,725) (194,257)

Gross profit 65,824 71,935

Other operating income 1 16,040 12,609

Administrative expenses (40,296) (42,023)

Other operating expenditure 1 (16,329) (13,018)

25,239 29,503

Increase in fair value of investment properties 14 2,087 4,464

Profit on sale of investment properties 512 102

Profit on sale of assets held for sale 887 –

Share of profit of joint ventures and associates 16 1,727 2,431

Operating profit 3 30,452 36,500

Finance income 5 3,940 5,115

Finance costs 6 (7,975) (8,664)

Profit before tax 26,417 32,951

Tax 7 (8,062) (7,434)

Profit for the year from continuing operations 18,355 25,517

Profit for the year from discontinued operations 38 2,176 (1,887)

Profit for the period 20,531 23,630

Other comprehensive (expense)/income not being reclassified to

profit or loss in subsequent years:

Revaluation of group occupied property 12 25 64

Deferred tax on property revaluations 19 63 (67)

Actuarial (loss)/gain on defined benefit pension scheme 28 (6,927) 2,196

Deferred tax on actuarial (loss)/gain 19 1,732 (549)

Total other comprehensive (expense)/

income not being reclassified to profit or loss in subsequent years (5,107) 1,644

Total comprehensive income for the year 15,424 25,274

Profit for the year attributable to:

Owners of the Parent Company 23,517 23,333

Non-controlling interests (2,986) 297

20,531 23,630

Total comprehensive income attributable to:

Owners of the Parent Company 18,410 24,977

Non-controlling interests (2,986) 297

15,424 25,274

Earnings per share

Basic, profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Parent 9 17.6p 17.4p

Diluted, profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Parent 9 17.1p 17.0p

Earnings per share from continuing operations

Basic, profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Parent 15.9p 18.9p

Diluted, profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Parent 15.5p 18.4p

1

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

henryboot.co.uk170

Statement of

financial position

As at 31 December 2025

Note

Group Parent Company

2025

£’000

2024

(Restated)

£’000

2025

£’000

2024

(Restated)

£’000

Assets

Non-current assets

Intangible assets 11 1,265 617 1,145 –

Property, plant and equipment 12 26,913 29,293 1,887 2,495

Right-of-use assets 13 2,929 3,460 1,261 1,615

Investment properties 14 94,646 96,275 – –

Investments 15 – – 38,973 38,906

Investment in joint ventures and associates 16 22,886 13,280 – –

Retirement benefit asset 28 3,009 9,930 3,009 9,930

Trade and other receivables 18 47,920 8,458 198,833 193,366

Deferred tax assets 19 – 219 177 244

199,568 161,532 245,285 246,556

Current assets

Inventories 20 368,065 332,871 – –

Contract assets 17 8,419 12,693 – –

Trade and other receivables 18 69,920 90,467 61,166 25,803

Cash 8,399 16,764 4,803 9,535

Current tax receivable – – – 2,664

Assets held for sale 21 – 9,315 – –

454,803 462,110 65,969 38,002

Liabilities

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables 23 86,411 89,820 23,411 66,490

Contract liabilities 22 – 4,882 – –

Current tax liabilities 4,701 2,909 7,434 –

Borrowings 26 871 1,943 9 42

Lease liabilities 13 882 895 399 392

Provisions 27 857 1,723 – –

93,722 102,172 31,253 66,924

Net current assets/(liabilities) 361,081 359,938 34,716 (28,922)

Non-current liabilities

Trade and other payables 23 21,722 11,991 1,210 197

Borrowings 26 112,222 73,592 112,000 72,500

Lease liabilities 13 2,450 3,017 1,179 1,579

Deferred tax liability 19 4,115 7,568 986 2,845

Provisions 27 – 154 – –

140,509 96,322 115,375 77,121

Net assets 420,140 425,148 164,626 140,513

Equity

Share capital 30 13,811 13,801 13,811 13,801

Property revaluation reserve 31 856 1,008 – –

Retained earnings 31 409,918 399,791 141,853 117,927

Other reserves 31 (1,271) 8,293 9,607 9,430

Cost of shares held by ESOP trust 32 (645) (645) (645) (645)

Equity attributable to owners of the Parent Company 422,669 422,248 164,626 140,513

Non-controlling interests 37 (2,529) 2,900 – –

Total equity 420,140 425,148 164,626 140,513

1

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

The Parent Company made a profit for the year of £38,559,000 (2024: £21,855,000).

The Financial Statements on pages 170 to 233 of Henry Boot PLC, registered number 160996, were approved by the Board of

Directors and authorised for issue on 14 April 2026.

On behalf of the Board

Tim Roberts

Director

Darren Littlewood

Director

171Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Statement of

changes in equity

For the year ended 31 December 2025

Attributable to owners of the Parent Company

Group Note

Share

capital

£’000

Property

revaluation

reserve

£’000

Retained

earnings

£’000

Other

reserves

£’000

Cost of

shares

held by

ESOP

trust

£’000

Total

£’000

Non-

controlling

interests

£’000

Total

equity

£’000

At 31 January 2024 13,799 1,011 383,219 8,248 (875) 405,402 4,716 410,118

Profit for the year 31 – – 23,333 – – 23,333 297 23,630

Other comprehensive income – (3) 1,647 – – 1,644 – 1,644

Total comprehensive income – (3) 24,980 – – 24,977 297 25,274

Equity dividends 10 – – (10,019) – – (10,019) (2,113) (12,132)

Proceeds from shares issued 2 – – 45 – 47 – 47

Share-based payments 31, 32 – – 1,611 – 230 1,841 – 1,841

2 – (8,408) 45 230 (8,131) (2,113) (10,244)

At 31 December 2024 13,801 1,008 399,791 8,293 (645) 422,248 2,900 425,148

Profit for the year 31 – – 23,517 – – 23,517 (2,986) 20,531

Other comprehensive income – 88 (5,195) – – (5,107) – (5,107)

Total comprehensive income – 88 18,322 – – 18,410 (2,986) 15,424

Realised gain on disposal of

revalued property – (240) 240 – – – – –

Acquisition of non-

controlling interest – – – (9,741) – (9,741) (309) (10,050)

Equity dividends 10 – – (10,535) – – (10,535) (2,134) (12,669)

Proceeds from shares issued 10 – – 177 – 187 – 187

Share-based payments

31 – – 2,100 – – 2,100 – 2,100

10 (240) (8,195) (9,564) – (17,989) (2,443) (20,432)

At 31 December 2025

13,811 856 409,918 (1,271) (645) 422,669 (2,529) 420,140

Parent Company Note

Share

capital

£’000

Retained

earnings

£’000

Other

reserves

£’000

Cost of

shares held

by ESOP

trust

£’000

Total

equity

£’000

At 31 January 2024 13,799 102,833 9,385 (875) 125,142

Profit for the year 8 – 21,855 – – 21,855

Other comprehensive income – 1,647 – – 1,647

Total comprehensive income – 23,502 – – 23,502

Equity dividends 10 – (10,019) – – (10,019)

Proceeds from shares issued 2 – 45 – 47

Share-based payments 32 – 1,611 – 230 1,841

2 (8,408) 45 230 (8,131)

At 31 December 2024 13,801 117,927 9,430 (645) 140,513

Profit for the year 8 – 38,559 – – 38,559

Other comprehensive income – (5,195) – – (5,195)

Total comprehensive income – 33,364 – – 33,364

Equity dividends 10 – (10,535) – – (10,535)

Proceeds from shares issued 10 – 177 – 187

Share-based payments

– 1,097 – – 1,097

10 (9,438) 177 – (9,251)

At 31 December 2025

13,811 141,853 9,607 (645) 164,626

henryboot.co.uk172

Statement of

cash flows

For the year ended 31 December 2025

Group Parent Company

Note

2025

£’000

2024

£’000

2025

£’000

2024

£’000

Cash flows from operating activities

Cash used in operations 33 (16,077) 42,573 494 3,935

Interest paid (7,082) (7,772) (6,556) (6,859)

Tax paid (7,751)

(9,235)

(6,315)

(6,500)

Net cash flows from operating activities (30,910) 25,566 (12,377) (9,424)

Cash flows from investing activities

Disposal of subsidiary 38 (9,050) – – –

Purchase of intangibles 11 (1,229) – (1,229) –

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

(excluding equipment for hire) 12 (153) (1,391) (13) (68)

Capital expenditure on investment property 14 (3,539) (96) – –

Investment in joint ventures and associates 16 (4,944) – – –

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

(excluding equipment held for hire) 685 272 – –

Proceeds on disposal of assets held for sale 13,054 – – –

Proceeds on disposal of investment properties 5,170 625 – –

Advances of loans to joint ventures and associates (8,266) (17,410) – –

Repayment of loans from joint ventures and associates 13,654 13,456 – –

Advances made to subsidiary undertakings – – (50,241) (13,427)

Repayments received from subsidiary undertakings – – 24,426 21,948

Interest received 2,139 3,695 433 352

Dividends received from joint ventures and subsidiaries

8, 16

2,850

46,694

35,484

Net cash flows from investing activities 7,521 2,001 20,070 44,289

Cash flows from financing activities

Acquisition of non-controlling interest 37 (10,050) – – –

Proceeds from shares issued 187 47 187 47

Repayment to joint ventures and associates 939 (75) – –

Advances received from subsidiary undertakings – – 879 9,466

Repayments made to subsidiary undertakings – – (42,030) (18,675)

Repayment of borrowings (59,442) (56,117) (57,500) (54,500)

Proceeds from new borrowings 97,000 45,134 97,000 43,500

Principal elements of lease payments (941) (694) (393) (161)

Dividends paid – ordinary shares 10 (10,514) (9,998) (10,514) (9,998)

– non-controlling interests 10 (2,134) (2,113) – –

– preference shares

10

(21)

(21)

(21)

(21)

Net cash flows from financing activities 15,024 (23,837) (12,392) (30,342)

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents (8,365) 3,730 (4,699) 4,523

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 16,764

13,034

9,493

4,970

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 8,399 16,764 4,794 9,493

173Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025

The principal Accounting Policies adopted in the preparation of the group’s Financial Statements are set out below.

These policies have been consistently applied to all years presented, unless otherwise stated.

The company is a public limited company, listed on the London Stock Exchange and incorporated and domiciled in the United

Kingdom. Theaddress of its registered office is Isaacs Building, 4 Charles Street, Sheffield, England, United Kingdom S1 2HS.

Basis of preparation and statement of compliance

The Consolidated Financial Statements of the group and the Financial Statements of the Parent Company have been

prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards (IASs). They have been prepared on the

historical cost basis, except for financial instruments, investment properties and group occupied land and buildings, which

are measured at fair value.

The Directors have taken advantage of the exemption available under Section 408 of the Companies Act and not presented a

statement ofcomprehensive income for the Parent Company alone. See note 8.

The group has considered the impact of climate change when preparing the Financial Statements. In particular, the

potential effect on balance sheet assets arising from either future physical or transition risk. Having undertaken this process,

we are satisfied no impairments are required at this time, largely due to the natural churn and development of property

assets, continued investment and replacement of plant hire equipment, and the consideration of appraisal processes on

land acquisitions.

Prior year restatements

Discontinued operations - As described in note 38, on 31 December 2025, the group disposed of HBC Construction Limited

(formerly Henry Boot Construction Limited) which has been classified as a discontinued operation in the year. In accordance

with IFRS 5, the results of the discontinued operation have been presented as a single amount within the income statement.

Consequently, the group has restated its comparative information for the year ended 31 December 2024 to reflect the

discontinued classification.

Part exchange properties - Prior year restatement of revenue and costs of sale relating to the sale of part exchange homes

have been restated for the period ended 31 December 2024. The group previously recognised consideration on disposal

of part exchange homes in revenue and the related expense in cost of sales. The increase in volume of part exchange sales

has resulted in the consideration received being reclassified as other operating income and expenditure being reclassified

as other operating expenditure separating out the trading of non-core operations. There is no impact on the Statement

of Financial Position, Statement of Changes in Equity or Statement of cash flows. The impact on the 31 December 2024

income statement is to decrease revenue and cost of sales by £12,609,000 and £13,018,000 respectively and increase other

operating income and other operating expenditure by the same.

Non-current borrowings - Comparative information has been restated in respect of the classification of the groups main

borrowing facility. In the prior year, the group presented these borrowings as current liabilities based on contractual maturity.

Following a review of the terms of the group’s financing arrangements, and in accordance with IAS 1 Presentation of Financial

Statements, borrowings are now presented as non-current where, at the reporting date, the group had the right to defer

settlement of the liability for at least twelve months after the reporting date. This reclassification has no impact on profit

for the year, earnings per share or cash flows. The impact on the statement of financial position as at 31 December 2024

is to decrease current borrowings and increase non-current borrowings by £72,500,000. Comparative figures have been

restated accordingly.

Consolidation

The Consolidated Financial Statements are a consolidation of the Financial Statements of the Parent Company and all

entities controlled by the company (its subsidiaries) made up to 31 December each year. Subsidiaries are all entities over

which the group has control. The group controls an entity when the group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns

from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. Subsidiaries

are fully consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the group. They are deconsolidated from the date that

control ceases.

Where necessary, adjustments are made to the Financial Statements of subsidiaries to bring the Accounting Policies

used in line with those used by the group. All intra-group transactions, balances, income and expenses are eliminated on

consolidation. The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the year are included in the Consolidated Statement

of Comprehensive Income from the effective date of acquisition or to the effective date of disposal. Non-controlling interests

in the fair value of the net assets of consolidated subsidiaries are identified separately from the group’s equity therein. Non-

controlling interests consist of the amount of those interests at the date of the original business combination and the non-

controlling interests’ share of changes in equity since the date of the combination.

In the Parent Company’s Financial Statement, investments in subsidiaries are accounted for at cost less impairment. Cost also

includes direct attributable costs of investment.

henryboot.co.uk174

Going concern

In undertaking their going concern review, which covers the period to December 2027, the Directors considered the group’s

principal risk areas that they consider material to the assessment of going concern.

As the UK economy continues to prove challenging, the Directors have assessed the groups ability to operate in a more

uncertain environment in modelling a base case scenario. They have also modelled what they consider to be a severe

downside scenario, including further curtailment in activities. This downside scenario shows a c26% reduction in sales

and c90% reduction in operating profits from the base case. Development activity and land sales only take place where

already contracted or well progressed. For Stonebridge Homes a 10% decline in house prices is assumed along with a

10% reduction in the number of plots sold and Banner Plant revenue declines c17%. This downside model assumes that

acquisition and development spend is restricted other than that already committed and is all consistent with previous

experience in recessionary environments. Having started 2026 with net debt of £108.0m, and with c.£118.6m of net debt

as at 20 March 2026, against current facilities of £155.0m the Directors have concluded that the group is able to control

the level of uncommitted expenditure while delivering contracted schemes. Allowing it to retain and even improve the cash

position in the event of a severe downside scenario, although the impact of doing so on the profit and loss account would

be unavoidable.

The group meets its day-to-day working capital requirements through a secured loan facility. The facility with Barclays Bank

PLC, HSBC UK Bank plc and National Westminster Bank Plc runs for three years and includes two one-year extensions.

The facility includes an accordion to increase the facility by up to £60.0m, increasing the overall facility to £185m.

None of the modelling undertaken by the Directors gives rise to any breach of bank facility covenants. The most sensitive

covenant in our facilities relates to the ratio of EBIT (Earnings Before Interest and Tax) on a 12-month rolling basis to senior

facility finance costs. Our downside modelling, which reflects a 26% reduction in revenue and 90% reduction in operating

profit from our base case for 2025, demonstrates headroom over this covenant throughout the forecast period to the end of

December 2027.

As part of the going concern assessment, the Directors considered a reverse stress test to determine the level of adverse

performance required to exhaust debt facility headroom and cause covenant breaches over the assessment period. The

Directors concluded that the combination of events required to cause such breaches are remote, and even in a case of

worsening economic conditions, the group has several mitigations available to it which remain unmodelled in the stress

test scenarios

The Directors have also considered the current ongoing conflict in the Middle East and the potential impact upon the group

should the conflict be prolonged. Whilst the group is not immune to global economic shocks, the Directors believe that the

strength of the group balance sheet, the facility headroom demonstrated in the groups downside modelling, and the strong

supply and demand fundamentals underpinning our key markets mean the group is well positioned to manage economic

deterioration as a result of the conflict.

The Directors have also performed a break case scenario that sees the EBIT cover covenant breached. This scenario is

considered to be remote.

The Directors expect that the company and the group will have adequate resources, liquidity and available bank facilities to

continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, they continue to adopt the going concern basis of

accounting in preparing the Financial Statements.

Operating segments

The chief operating decision maker is the person or group that allocates resources to, and assesses the performance of, the

operating segments of an entity. The group has determined that its chief operating decision maker is the Board of Henry Boot

PLC (the ‘Board’).

Management has determined the operating segments based on the reports reviewed by the Board in making

strategic decisions.

The Board considers the business based on the following operating segments:

• Property investment and development, inclusive of property investment, property development and associated

trading activities;

• Home building, inclusive of housebuilding and related activities;

• Land promotion, inclusive of land management, development and trading activities; and

• Construction, inclusive of its PFI company and plant hire activities.

While the following is not a reportable segment, information about it is considered by the Board in conjunction with the

reportable segments:

• Central overheads, comprising central services, pensions, head office administration and financing activities.

175Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Joint ventures and associates

Joint ventures are all entities in which the group has shared control with another entity, established by contractual agreement.

Associates are all entities over which the group has significant influence, but not control, generally accompanied by a share

of between 20% and 50% of the voting rights. Joint ventures and associates are accounted for using the equity method

of accounting and are initially recognised at cost. The group’s share of profits or losses is recognised in the Consolidated

Statement of Comprehensive Income. If the share of losses equals its investment, the group does not recognise further losses,

except to the extent that there are amounts receivable that are long term and may not be settled in the foreseeable future.

Unrealised gains on transactions between the group and its joint ventures and associates are eliminated to the extent of the

group’s interest in them. Unrealised losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence ofan impairment of the

asset transferred. The accounting policies of the joint ventures and associates are consistent with those of the group.

Business combinations and goodwill

Acquisitions of subsidiaries and businesses are accounted for using the acquisition method. The consideration for each

acquisition is measured as the aggregate of the fair values (at the date of exchange) of assets given, liabilities incurred or

assumed, and equity instruments issued by the group in exchange for control of the acquiree.

The consideration transferred includes the fair value of any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration

agreement. Subsequent changes in fair value of contingent consideration classified as a financial asset or financial liability

are accounted for in accordance with IFRS 9. Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed

in a business combination are measured, initially, at their fair values atthe acquisition date. Acquisition-related costs are

recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income as incurred.

Goodwill arising on consolidation of subsidiary undertakings is recognised as an asset and initially measured at cost, being the

excess of the cost of the business combination over the group’s interest in the net fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities

and contingent liabilities recognised. Goodwill is, subsequently, measured at cost less any accumulated impairment losses.

Goodwill is subjected to an impairment test at the reporting date or when there has been an indication that the goodwill should

be impaired; any loss is recognised immediately through the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income and is not,

subsequently, reversed. For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units. The allocation is

made to those cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from the business combination in which goodwill arose.

Critical judgements and estimates

The critical judgements and estimates in applying the group’s Accounting Policies that have the most significant effect on the

amounts recognised in the Financial Statements, apart from those noted below, relate to revenue recognition and inventories.

These are referred to on 178 and 180, and each is interpreted by management in the light of IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts

with Customers’ and IAS 2 ‘Inventories’.

The key assumptions concerning the future and other key sources of estimation uncertainty at the reporting date, are:

• Retirement benefit costs – the estimates used in retirement benefit costs are arrived at in conjunction with the scheme’s

actuary and advisers, those having the most significant impact being the liabilities discount rate, RPI and mortality rates.

Note 28 to the Financial Statements gives details of the sensitivity surrounding these estimates;

• Fair value of investment properties and of group occupied properties – the fair value of completed investment property

and of group occupied property is determined by independent valuation experts using the yield method valuation

technique. The fair value of investment property under construction has been determined using the residual method by

the Directors of the company. The most significant estimates used inthese valuations are rental values, yields and costs

to complete. Notes 12 and 14 to the Financial Statements give details of the valuation methods used and the sensitivity

surrounding these estimates. In determining fair value measurement, the impact of climate-related matters, including

legislation, which may affect the fair value measurement of investment property, has been considered; and

• Provisions – amounts recognised in relation to provisions are based on assumptions in respect of cost estimates, the timing of cash

flows anddiscount rates used. Note 27 to the Financial Statements gives details of the sensitivity surrounding these estimates.

The reference to estimates in policy notes on IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ and IAS 2 ‘Inventories’ is not

intended to comply with the requirements of paragraph 125 of IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial Statements’, as it is not expected

there is a significant risk of a material adjustment to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities within the next financial year.

Revenue recognition

Revenue is measured based on the consideration specified in a contract with a customer at an amount that reflects the

consideration to which the group expects to be entitled in exchange for transferring promised goods or services to a

customer and excluding amounts collected on behalf of third parties. The group recognises revenue when it transfers control

over a product or service to a customer. Where consideration is not specified within the contract and, therefore, subject to

variability, the group estimates the amount of consideration to be received from its customer. The consideration recognised

is the amount that is highly probable not to result in a significant reversal in future periods. Where a modification to an

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk176

existing contract occurs, the group assesses the nature of the modification and whether it represents a separate performance

obligation required to be satisfied by the group or whether it is a modification to the existing performance obligation.

The group has some contracts for which the period between the transfer of the promised goods or services to the customer

and payment by the customer exceeds one year. The group adjusts its transaction price for the time value of money.

The group’s activities are wide ranging and, as such, depending on the nature of the product or service delivered and the

timing of when control is passed to the customer, the group will account for revenue over time or at a point in time. Where

revenue is measured over time, the group uses the input method to measure progress of delivery.

Product and service Nature, timing of satisfaction of performance obligations and significant payment terms

Construction contracts Typically, the group’s construction contracts consist of one performance obligation, being

the delivery of construction works. However, for certain contracts (for example, where

contracts involve separate phases or products that are not highly interrelated), multiple

performance obligations exist. Where multiple performance obligations exist, total

transaction price is allocated to performance obligations based on the relative stand-alone

selling prices of each performance obligation.

Revenue attributed to each performance obligation is recognised over time based on the

percentage of completion, as the benefit is transferred to the customer, reflecting the

enhancement in value of the customer’s asset. The percentage of completion is calculated

as the costs incurred to date as a percentage of the total costs expected to satisfy the

performance obligation. Estimates of revenues, costs or extent of progress toward

completion are revised if circumstances change. Any resulting increases or decreases in

estimated revenues or costs are reflected in the percentage of completion calculation in the

period in which the circumstances that give rise to the revision become known.

Losses are recorded in full when the unavoidable costs of fulfilling a contract exceed the

economic benefits.

Any revenues recognised in excess of amounts invoiced are recognised as contract

assets within current assets. Any payments received in excess of revenue recognised are

recognised as contract liabilities within current liabilities.

Sale of land and properties Revenue from the sale of land and properties is generally a single performance obligation,

which is satisfied at the point in time when control of the land and properties has passed,

typically on legal completion when the legal title has transferred.

Land and properties are treated as disposed when control of the asset is transferred to the

buyer. Typically, this will either occur on unconditional exchange or on completion. Where

completion is expected to occur significantly after exchange, or where the group continues

to have significant outstanding obligations after exchange, the control will not usually

transfer to the buyer until completion.

Variable consideration such as overages are estimated based on the amount of consideration

the group expects to be entitled to, taking into account the terms which may give rise to

variability and it is only recognised where it is highly probable there will not be a significant

future reversal. This is estimated at contract inception and reassessed over the life of

the contract.

Revenue includes the fair value of consideration received or receivable on the sale of part

exchange properties.

PFI concession Revenue from the group’s PFI concession is recognised at the point in time, by the calculation

of ‘shadow tolls’ based on individual vehicle usage of the A69.

The concession is accounted for in accordance with IFRIC 12 ‘Service Concession

Arrangements’ using the intangible asset model.

Operating leases

(recognised as income

under IFRS 16 ‘Leases’)

Revenue from operating leases is recognised on a straight-line basis over the lease

term, except for contingent rental income, which is recognised in the period in which it

was earned. When the group provides incentives to its tenants, the cost of incentives is

recognised over the lease term, on a straight-line basis, as a reduction to revenue.

Plant and equipment hire

(recognised as income under

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’)

Revenue from plant and equipment hire is measured as the fair value of rental proceeds,

which relate to the period of account.

177Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Judgements and other estimates in applying IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’

The following are the judgements and other estimates in applying accounting policies that the Directors have made in the

process of applying IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ and that have the most significant effect on the

amounts recognised in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Estimates in determining the recognition of revenue on construction contracts over time – construction contract revenue

is recognised in accordance with the stage of completion of the contract where the contract’s outcome can be estimated

reliably. The principal method used to recognise the stage of completion is the input method using cost incurred to date as

a percentage of estimated total costs to complete. The assessment of the final outcome of each contract is determined by

regular review of the revenues and costs to complete that contract by an in-house or external survey of the work.

Judgement in determining the recognition of revenue at a point in time on land sale contracts – there is often judgement

involved in evaluating when a customer obtains control of land during a sale, particularly where the contract includes

licensing (or the granting of early access to housebuilders before completion), risk or deferred payment term clauses. In

determining the revenue recognition, the Directors consider the present right for payment, legal title, physical possession,

risks and rewards of ownership and acceptance of the asset in forming their opinion. Where necessary, third-party advice

is taken.

Interest income and expense

Interest income and expense are recognised within ‘Finance income’ and ‘Finance costs’ in the Consolidated Statement of

Comprehensive Income using theeffective interest rate method, except for borrowing costs relating to qualifying assets,

which are capitalised as part of the cost of that asset. The group has chosen not to capitalise borrowing costs on all qualifying

assets, which are measured at fair value.

The effective interest rate method is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial asset or financial liability and of

allocating the interest income or interest expense over the relevant period. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly

discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts throughout the expected life of the financial instrument, or a shorter

period where appropriate, to the net carrying amount of the financial asset or financial liability.

Leasing

Where the group acts as a lessor in the case of operating leases, rentals receivable are recognised on a straight-line basis

over the term of the relevant lease. Initial direct costs incurred in negotiating and arranging an operating lease are added to

the carrying amount of the leased asset and recognised over the lease term on the same basis as rental income.

Leases

The group assesses whether a contract is, or contains, a lease, at inception of the contract. The group recognises a right-of-

use asset and a corresponding lease liability with respect to all lease arrangements in which it is the lessee, except for short

term leases (defined as leases with a lease term of 12 months or less) and leases of low-value assets. For these leases, the

group recognises the lease payments as an operating expense on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease unless another

systematic basis is more representative of the time pattern in which economic benefits from the leased assets are consumed.

Lease liability: The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments that are not paid at the

commencement date, discounted by using the rate implicit in the lease. If this rate cannot be readily determined, the group

uses an incremental borrowing rate, which is the rate of interest that the lessee would have to pay to borrow over a similar

term, and with a similar security, the funds necessary to obtain an asset of a similar value to the right-of-use asset in a similar

economic environment.

Right-of-use assets: The right-of-use assets comprise the initial measurement of the corresponding lease liability, lease

payments made at or before the commencement day and any initial direct costs. They are, subsequently, measured at cost

less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. Right-of-use assets are depreciated over the shorter period of lease

term and useful life of the underlying asset.

The group applies IAS 36 to determine whether a right-of-use asset is impaired and accounts for any identified impairment

loss in line with the group’s existing impairment accounting policy.

Sale and leaseback

The group’s sale and leaseback of assets are accounted for such that the transfer of the asset is not deemed a sale under IFRS

15, this is on the basis that control of the assets remain with the group as the group has the right to repurchase the assets.

As the transfers do not qualify as a sale, the group accounts for the transaction as a financing transaction. This means that the

group continues to recognise the asset on its balance sheet within property, plant and equipment, and that the proceeds from

the sale and leaseback are recognised as a financial liability at amortised cost in accordance with IFRS 9. This arrangement is

similar to a loan secured over the underlying asset. Cash flows are reported in new borrowings and repayment of borrowings

on the group’s cash flow statement.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk178

Share-based payments

Equity-settled share-based payments to employees of the company and its subsidiary undertakings are measured at fair value

of the equity instruments at the date of grant and are expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period. Fair value is

measured using a Monte Carlo pricing model, taking into account any market performance conditions, and excludes the effect

of non-market-based vesting conditions. Details regarding the determination of the fair value of equity-settled share-based

transactions are set out in note 30. At each reporting period date, the group estimates the number of equity instruments

expected to vest as a result of the effect of non-market-based vesting conditions. The impact of the revision, if any, is

recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income with a corresponding adjustment to equity reserves.

SAYE share options are treated as cancelled when employees cease to contribute to the scheme. This results in accelerated

recognition oftheexpenses that would have arisen over the remainder of the original vesting period.

Intangible assets excluding goodwill

Intangible assets are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment. The PFI asset, which is accounted for

under IFRIC 12 ‘Service Concession Arrangements’, represents the capitalised cost of the initial project, together with the

capitalised cost of any additional major works to the road and structures, which are then amortised, on a straight-line basis,

over 20 years or the remaining life of the concession. The concession lasts a period of 30 years and is now in its final year.

Software relates to the groups D365 implementation, a digital transformation programme to standardise processes, enhance

data integrity, and consolidate core operational and financial systems across the business. Expenditure on software is

recognised as an intangible asset when it is probable that the expected future economic benefits attributable to the asset will

flow to the group and the cost of the asset can be measured reliably. This includes direct costs incurred in configuring and

customising the D365 platform, licence fees, implementation support, and other costs directly attributable to preparing the

software for its intended use. Costs relating to preliminary project activities, research, scoping, training, and general process

redesign are expensed as incurred. Capitalised software is initially recognised at cost and is subsequently carried at cost less

accumulated amortisation and impairment losses.

Amortisation is charged on a straight-line basis over the asset’s estimated useful economic life, reflecting the period over

which the group expects to obtain economic benefit from the digital platform. D365-related software costs are amortised

over five years. The amortisation period and method are reviewed at each reporting date and adjusted if necessary.

The group assesses capitalised software for indicators of impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances suggest

that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised when the carrying amount of the asset

exceeds its recoverable amount.

Property, plant and equipment

Group occupied properties are stated in the Statement of Financial Position at their revalued amounts, being the fair value,

based on market values, less any subsequent accumulated depreciation or impairment loss. Fair value is determined annually

by independent valuers. Surpluses on revaluations are recorded in OCI and credited to the revaluation reserve. However,

to the extent that it reverses a revaluation deficit of the same asset previously recognised in profit or loss, the increase is

recognised in profit or loss. Deficits on revaluations are charged against the revaluation reserve to the extent that there are

available surpluses relating to the same asset and are otherwise charged to profit or loss in the Consolidated Statement of

Comprehensive Income. The residual value of group occupied properties is deemed to be the lower of fair value and original

cost of the properties which are held for capital appreciation.

Equipment held for hire, vehicles and office equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and any recognised

impairment loss. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset plus any costs attributable to bringing the asset to its

working condition for its intended use.

Depreciation is charged so as to write off the cost or valuation of assets over their estimated useful lives, using the straight-

line method, mainly atthe following annual rates:

• Land and buildings – 4%

• Leasehold improvements – between 10% and 20% or based on lease term

• Equipment held for hire – between 6% and 50%

• Vehicles – between 10% and 25%

• Office equipment – between 25% and 33%

Investment property

Investment properties are those properties that are not occupied by the group and are held for long term rental yields, capital

appreciation or both. Investment property also includes property that is being constructed or developed for future use as

investment property.

179Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Investment properties are, initially, measured at cost, including related transaction costs.

At each subsequent reporting date, investment properties are remeasured to their fair value; further information regarding

the valuation methodologies applied can be found in note 14 to the Financial Statements. Movements in fair value are

included in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income.

Where the group employs professional valuers, the valuations provided are subject to a comprehensive review to ensure they

are based on accurate and up-to-date tenancy information. Discussions are also held with the valuers to test the valuation

assumptions applied and comparable evidence utilised to ensure they are appropriate in the circumstances.

Subsequent expenditure is capitalised to the asset’s carrying value only where it is probable that the future economic benefits

associated with the expenditure will flow to the group. All other expenditure is expensed to the Consolidated Statement of

Comprehensive Income in the period in which it arises.

Investment property is derecognised when it is disposed of at its carrying value.

Where specific investment properties have been identified as being for sale within the next 12 months, a sale is considered

highly probable and the property is immediately available for sale, their fair value is shown under assets classified as held-for-

sale within current assets, measured in accordance with the provisions of IAS 40 ‘Investment Property’.

Inventories

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and estimated net realisable value and are subject to regular impairment reviews.

Inventories comprise developments in progress, land held for development or sale, options to purchase land and planning

promotion agreements.

• Property developments in progress includes properties being developed for onward sale.

• Housebuilder land and work in progress includes construction of residential housing for onward sale.

• Land held for development or sale is land owned by the group that is promoted through the planning process in order to

gain planning permission, adding value to the land.

• Options to purchase land are agreements that the group entered into with the landowners whereby the group has the

option to purchase the land within a limited time frame. The landowners are not generally permitted to sell to any other

party during this period, unless agreed to by the group. Within the time frame, the group promotes the land through the

planning process at its expense in order to gain planning permission. Should the group be successful in obtaining planning

permission, it would trigger the option to purchase and subsequently sell on the land.

• Planning promotion agreements are agreements that the group has entered into with the landowners, whereby the group

acts as promoter for the landowners in exchange for a fee of a set percentage of the proceeds or profit of the eventual

sale. The group promotes the land through the planning process at its own expense. If the land is sold, the group will

receive a fee for its services.

• The group capitalises various costs in promoting land held under planning promotion agreements. In some instances, the

agreements allow for the group to be reimbursed certain expenditure following the conclusion of a successful sale, at

which point the reimbursed costs are recognised as revenue. These costs are held in inventory at the lower of cost and

estimated net realisable value.

Inventories comprise all the direct costs incurred in bringing the individual inventories to their present state at the reporting

date, including any reimbursable promotion costs, less the value ofany impairment losses.

Impairment reviews are considered on a site-by-site or individual development basis by management at each reporting date;

write-downs or reversals are made to ensure that inventory is then stated at the lower of cost or net realisable value.

Net realisable value is considered in the light of progress made in the planning process, feedback from local planning officers,

development appraisals and other external factors that might be considered likely to influence the eventual outcome.

Where it is considered that no future economic benefit will arise, costs are written off to the Consolidated Statement of

Comprehensive Income.

Where individual parcels of land held for development are disposed of out of a larger overall development site, costs are

apportioned based on anacreage allocation after taking into account the cost or net realisable value of any remaining residual

land that may not form part of the overall development site or that may not be available for development. Where the group

retains obligations attached to the development site as awhole, provisions are made relating to these disposals on the same

acreage allocation basis.

Other estimates in applying IAS 2 ‘Inventories’

The following are the estimates in applying accounting policies that the Directors have made in the process of applying IAS 2

‘Inventories’, and that have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk180

Estimates in determining the carrying value of work in progress inventory – there is often estimation involved in forecasting

future costs to complete and selling prices, which can be affected by market conditions and unexpected events. In

determining the carrying value, the Directors consider previous experience, communications with suppliers and market

trends in forming their opinion. Where necessary, third-party advice is taken.

Assets classified as held for sale

Non-current assets are classified as held for sale when their carrying amount is to be recovered, principally, through a sale

transaction and a sale isconsidered highly probable. They are stated at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs

to sell, or fair value in the case of Investment Property, if their carrying amount is to be recovered, principally, through a sale

transaction rather than through continuing use and a sale is considered highly probable.

Tax

The tax charge on the profit or loss for the year comprises the sum of tax currently payable and any deferred tax movements

in the year.

Tax currently payable is based on taxable profit for the year adjusted for any tax payable or repayable in respect of earlier

years. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income because

it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable ordeductible in other years and items that may never be taxable or

deductible.

The group’s liability for current taxation is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted, or substantively enacted, by the

reporting date.

Corporation tax liabilities of wholly owned subsidiary companies are, generally, transferred to and paid by the Parent

Company and credit is given by the Parent Company for loss relief surrendered.

Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and

liabilities in the Financial Statements and the corresponding tax bases used in computing taxable profits.

The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each reporting date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer

probable that sufficient taxable profits or gains will be available to allow all or part of the assets to be recovered.

The carrying value of the group’s investment property is assumed to be realised by sale and the deferred tax is then

calculated based on the respective temporary differences and tax consequences arising from this assumption.

Deferred tax is calculated at tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is

realised, based on rates that have been enacted, or substantively enacted, at the reporting date. Deferred tax is charged

or credited in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, except when it relates to items charged or credited

directly to equity, in which case the deferred tax is also dealt with in equity.

Deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities are offset where the group has a legally enforceable right to do so and when

the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to tax levied by the same tax authority where there is an intention to settle the

balances on a net basis.

Financial instruments

The group retains such financial instruments as are required, together with retained earnings, in order to finance the

group’s operations.

Financial assets or financial liabilities are recognised by the group in the Statement of Financial Position only when the group

becomes a party tothe contractual provisions of the instrument.

The principal financial instruments are:

• Trade and other receivables are measured initially at fair value and then amortised cost – where the time value of money

is material, receivables are amortised using the effective interest rate method (see Interest income and expense in notes 5

and 6). IFRS 9’s simplified approach to provisioning is used to calculate the group’s lifetime expected credit loss;

• Cash and cash equivalents, which comprise cash in hand, demand deposits and other short term highly liquid investments

that are readily convertible to a known amount of cash and are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value with an

original maturity of three months or less;

• Trade and other payables, which are on normal credit terms, are not interest bearing and are stated at their nominal

values – where the time value of money is material, payables are carried at amortised cost using the effective interest rate

method (see Interest income and expense in notes 5 and 6); and

• Borrowings – see below.

181Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

For the purpose of the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents consist of cash and short term deposits, as defined

above, net of outstanding bank overdrafts as they are considered an integral part of the group’s cash management.

Borrowings

Borrowings are recognised, initially, at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are, subsequently, carried at

amortised cost; any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Fees paid on the establishment of loan facilities are recognised as transaction costs of the loan to the extent that it is probable

that some, or all, ofthe facility will be drawn down. In this case, the fee is deferred and amortised until the drawdown

occurs. To the extent that there is no evidence that it is probable that some or all of the facility will be drawn down, the fee is

capitalised as a pre-payment for liquidity services and amortised over the period ofthe facility to which it relates.

Government grants

Government grants are recognised at their fair value in the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position, within deferred

income, where there is reasonable assurance that the grant will be received and all attached conditions will be complied with.

Government grants relating to revenue items are released to the Statement of Comprehensive Income and recognised

within cost of sales over the period necessary to match the grant on a systematic basis to the costs that they are intended

to compensate.

Government grants relating to capital items are released against the carrying value of the grant supported assets when the

completion conditions of those assets are met.

Provisions

Provisions are recognised when the group has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event. It is

probable that the group will be required to settle that obligation with an outflow of economic benefits and a reliable estimate

can be made of the amount of the obligation.

The amount recognised as a provision is the best estimate of the consideration required to settle the present obligation at

the reporting date, taking into account the risks and uncertainties surrounding the obligation. Where a provision is measured

using the cash flows estimated to settle the present obligation, its carrying amount is the present value of those cash flows.

Onerous contracts are provided for at the lower of costs or termination.

When some, or all, of the economic benefits required to settle a provision are expected to be recovered from a third party,

a receivable is recognised as an asset if it is virtually certain that reimbursement will be received and the amount of the

receivable can be measured reliably.

The land promotion provision represents management’s best estimate of the group’s liability to provide infrastructure and

services as a result of obligations that remain with the group following the disposal of land. Where the infrastructure and

services obligations relate to developments on which land is being disposed of over a number of phases, provisions are

calculated based on an acreage allocation methodology, taking into account the expected timing of cash outflows to settle

the obligations.

The group regularly reviews its contract obligations and whether they are considered to be onerous. In the event that the

costs of meeting the obligations exceed the economic benefits expected to be received through the life of the development,

a provision would be recognised based on the lower of the cost of fulfilling the contract or terminating the contract.

The road maintenance provision represents management’s best estimate of the group’s liability under a five-year rolling

programme for the maintenance of the group’s PFI asset.

Other provisions include any liabilities for which the Directors anticipate that a present obligation would result in a future

outflow of resources, including legal and regulatory penalties or claims, being taken into account in the Financial Statements.

Specific details of the group’s provisions relating to land promotion and road maintenance can be found in note 27.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk182

Retirement benefit costs

Payments to the defined contribution retirement benefit scheme are charged as an expense as they fall due.

The cost of providing benefits under the defined benefit retirement scheme is determined using the Projected Unit Credit

Method, with actuarial calculations being carried out at each reporting date. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised in

full in the period in which they occur. They are recognised within ‘Other comprehensive income’ within the Consolidated

Statement of Comprehensive Income. The net periodic benefit cost, comprising the employer’s share of the service cost

and the net interest cost, is charged to the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income. The group’s net obligations

in respect of the scheme are calculated by estimating the amount of future benefit that employees have earned in return for

their service in the current and prior periods. This is then discounted to present value and the fair value of the scheme’s assets

is then deducted.

Share capital

Ordinary share capital is classified as equity. Preference share capital is classified as equity as it is non-redeemable or

is redeemable only at the company’s option and any dividends are discretionary. Dividends on preference share capital

classified as equity are recognised as distributions within equity.

Dividends

The group recognises a liability to pay a final dividend when the distribution is authorised and the distribution is no longer at

the discretion of the group. Under UK company law, a distribution is authorised when it is approved by the shareholders. An

interim dividend is recognised when paid. A corresponding amount is then recognised directly in equity.

Impact of new or amended accounting standards and interpretations

At the date of authorisation of these Financial Statements, the following standards, amendments and interpretations to

existing standards areeffective or mandatory for the first time for the accounting year ended 31 December 2025:

Effective from

IAS 21 (amended 2023) ‘Lack of Exchangeability’ 1 January 2025

The adoption of these standards and interpretations has not had a significant impact on the group.

At the date of the authorisation of these Financial Statements, the following standards, amendments and interpretations were

in issue, but not yet effective:

Effective from

IFRS 7 and IFRS 9 (amended 2024) ‘Classification and Measurement of Financial Instruments’ 1 January 2026

Annual improvements (Volume 11) ‘Annual Improvements to IFRS Standards’ 1 January 2026

IFRS 7 and IFRS 9 (amended 2024) ‘Contracts Referencing Nature-Dependent Electricity’ 1 January 2026

IFRS 18 (issued 2024) ‘Presentation and Disclosures in Financial Statements’ 1 January 2027

IFRS 19 (issued 2024)* ‘Subsidiaries without Public Accountability: Disclosures’ 1 January 2027

IAS 21 (issued 2024)*

‘The effects of foreign exchange rates: Translation to a

Hyperinflationary Presentation Currency’ 1 January 2027

*Not yet endorsed by the UK Endorsement Board.

A review of the impact of these standards, amendments and interpretations has been conducted and the Directors do not

believe that they will give rise to any significant financial impact. A more detailed assessment of IFRS 18 will be performed

in 2026.

In 2025, the company did not early adopt any new or amended standards and does not plan to early adopt any of the

standards issued but not yet effective.

183Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

  1. Revenue

Analysis of the group’s revenue is as follows:

Timing of revenue

recognition

Timing of revenue

recognition (restated)

Activity in the United Kingdom

2025

£’000

At a point

in time

£’000

Over time

£’000

2024

£’000

At a point

in time

£’000

Over time

£’000

Construction contracts:

– Property investment and

development

2

38,888 – 38,888 17,882 – 17,882

Sale of land and properties:

– Property investment and

development

2

24,423 24,423 – 45,015 45,015 –

– Housebuilder unit sales

3

69,747 69,747 – 88,123 88,123 –

– Land Promotion

4

82,799 82,799 – 77,888 77,888 –

PFI concession

1

14,963 14,963 –

14,864 14,864 –

Revenue from contracts

with customers 230,820 191,932 38,888

243,772 225,890 17,882

Plant and equipment hire

1

14,824 15,962

Investment property rental income

2

5,717 6,298

Other rental income – Property

investment and development

2

– 12

Other rental income – Land Promotion

4

188

148

251,549 266,192

1

Construction segment.

2

Property investment and development segment.

3

Home building segment

4

Land promotion segment.

5

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

There were no contingent rents recognised as investment property rental income during the year (2024: £nil).

Other income of £16,040,000 (2024: £12,609,000) relates to part exchange property sales in the home building segment, the

related expense is included in other operating expenditure and amounts to £16,329,000 (2024: £13,018,000).

There are no customers that individually account for 10% or more of group revenue.

2. Segment information

For the purpose of the Board making strategic decisions, the group is currently organised into four operating segments:

Property investment and development; Home building; Land Promotion; and Construction. Central overheads are not

a reportable segment; however, information about them is considered by the Board in conjunction with the reportable

segments.

During the year, the group added a new operating segment – Home building – following the acquisition of a further 12.5%

interest in Stonebridge Homes which now stands at 62.5%. The segment was identified based on the internal reporting

provided to the chief operating decision maker, being the Board of Henry Boot. The Home building segment is managed

separately due to its distinct nature and customer profile. Comparative results have been restated.

Operations are carried out entirely within the United Kingdom. Inter-segment sales are charged at prevailing market prices.

The accounting policies of the reportable segments are the same as the group’s Accounting Policies. The group’s Principal

Accounting Policies are described on pages 174 to 183.

Segment profit represents the profit earned by each segment before tax and is consistent with the measure reported to the

group’s Board for the purpose of resource allocation and assessment of segment performance.

Revenues from external sales are detailed in note 1.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk184

2. Segment information continued

2025Property Investment and Home Land Central Development BuildingPromotionConstructionoverheadsEliminationsTotalRevenue£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000External sales 69,028 69,747 82,987 29,787 – – 251,549Inter-segment sales 335 – – 16,291 84 (16,710) –Total revenue 69,363 69,747 82,987 46,078 84 (16,710) 251,549Gross profit/(loss) 14,871 (2,208) 43,760 9,415 (9) (5) 65,824Other operating income – 16,040 – – – – 16,040Administrative expenses (10,648) (6,659) (10,864) (2,754) (9,376) 5 (40,296)Other operating expenditure – (16,329) – – – – (16,329)Increase in fair value of investment properties2,087 – – – – – 2,087Profit on sale of investment properties512 – – – – – 512Profit on sale of assets held for sale887 – – – – – 887Share of profit of joint ventures and associates1,727 – – – – – 1,727Operating profit/(loss) 9,436 (9,156) 32,896 6,661 (9,385) – 30,452Finance income 1,353 2 1,306 531 50,053 (49,305) 3,940Finance costs (57) (170) (1,022) (362) (6,651) 287 (7,975)Profit/(loss) before tax 10,732 (9,324) 33,180 6,830 34,017 (49,018) 26,417Tax (2,818) 2,158 (8,398) (1,733) 2,729 – (8,062)Profit/(loss) for the year 7,914 (7,166) 24,782 5,097 36,746 (49,018) 18,355Other informationCapital additions 3,539 16 17 3,277 14 – 6,863Depreciation of plant, property and equipment, and right-of-use assets 335 110 6 3,263 1,067 – 4,782Amortisation of intangible assets – – – 581 – – 581Increase in fair value of investment properties (2,087) – – – – – (2,087)Provisions – – 379 2,709 – – 3,088Pension scheme debit/(credit) – – – – 530 – 530

185Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

2. Segment information continued

2024 (restated)Property Investment and Home Land Central Development BuildingPromotionConstructionoverheadsEliminationsTotalRevenue£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000External sales 69,194 88,136 78,036 30,826 – – 266,192Inter-segment sales387 – – 777 150 (1,314) –Total revenue 69,581 88,136 78,036 31,603 150 (1,314) 266,192Gross profit 17,848 9,539 33,747 10,806 4 (9) 71,935Other operating income – 12,609 – – – – 12,609Administrative expenses and pension (9,929) (7,270) (9,456) (3,641) (11,736) 9 (42,023)Other operating expenditure – (13,018) – – – – (13,018)Increase in fair value of investment properties4,464 – – – – – 4,464Profit on sale of investment properties102 – – – – – 102Share of profit of joint ventures and associates2,431 – – – – – 2,431Operating profit/(loss) 14,916 1,860 24,291 7,165 (11,732) – 36,500Finance income 5,486 45 1,784 486 36,183 (38,869) 5,115Finance costs(85) – (1,517) (492) (6,891) 321 (8,664)Profit before tax 20,317 1,905 24,558 7,159 17,560 (38,548) 32,951Tax(3,681) 1,023 (6,482) (1,883) 3,589 – (7,434)Profit for the year 16,636 2,928 18,076 5,276 21,149 (38,548) 25,517Other informationCapital additions 175 325 12 4,999 159 – 5,670Depreciation of plant, property and equipment, and right-of-use assets 491 3 3 3,159 1,067 – 4,722Impairment 199 – – 1,040 – – 1,239Amortisation of intangible assets – – – 522 – – 522Increase in fair value of investment properties (4,464) – – – – – (4,464)Provisions – – 554 2,272 – – 2,826Pension scheme debit/(credit) – – – – 338 – 338

1

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk186

2. Segment information continued

20252024£’000£’000Segment assets1Property investment and development231,251 246,892Home building 159,869 120,770Land promotion 210,435 183,539Construction 28,536 37,896Central overheads 12,8727,632642,963 596,729Unallocated assetsDeferred tax assets – 219Retirement benefit asset 3,009 9,930Cash and cash equivalents 8,39916,764Total assets 654,371623,642Segment liabilitiesProperty investment and development 23,463 24,870Home building 45,500 21,948Land promotion 30,086 38,767Construction 4,034 18,082Central overheads 5,9074,903108,990 108,570Unallocated liabilitiesCurrent tax liabilities 4,701 2,909Deferred tax liabilities 4,115 7,568Current lease liabilities 882 895Current borrowings 871 1,943Non-current lease liabilities 2,450 3,017Non-current borrowings 112,22273,592Total liabilities 234,231198,494Total net assets 420,140 425,148

1

Includes investment in joint ventures and associates of £22,886,000 (2024: £13,280,000).

187Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

  1. Operating profit

Operating profit has been arrived at after charging/(crediting):

20242025(restated)£’000£’000Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 12) 3,899 3,864Depreciation of right-of-use assets (note 13) 883 673Impairment of goodwill included in administrative expenses – 1,040Impairment of land and buildings included in administrative expenses (note 12) – 199Amortisation of PFI assets included in cost of sales (note 11) 581 522Amortisation of capitalised letting fees (note 14) 19 34Impairment losses recognised on trade receivables (note 18) 70 –Increase in fair value of investment property (note 14) (2,087) (4,464)Cost of inventories recognised as expense 139,584 174,265Employee costs 34,539 34,326Amounts payable to Mazars LLP by Road Link (A69) Limited in respect of audit services 19 17Gain on sale of equipment held for hire (66) (1,156)Gain on sale of other property, plant and equipment (596) (151)

1

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

The remuneration paid to Ernst & Young LLP, the company’s external auditor, was as follows:

20252024£’000£’000Fees payable for the audit of the company’s Annual Financial Statements and Consolidated Financial Statements 230 240Fees payable to the auditor and its associates for other services:– Audit of the company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation 342315Total audit fees 572 555

4. Employee costs

Group Parent Company20242025(restated)20252024£’000£’000£’000£’000Wages and salaries 24,114 24,794 5,748 5,915Share-based payment expense 1,514 1,423 778 706Social security costs 3,602 3,362 1,006 871Defined benefit pension costs (see note 28) 797 734 790 698Defined contribution pension costs (see note 28) 3,539 3,438 679 606Other pension costs 87 89 31 60Other employee costs 886486303–34,539 34,326 9,335 8,856

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk188

4. Employee costs continued

The average monthly number of employees during the year, including Executive Directors, was:

20252024(restated)NumberNumberProperty investment and development 43 48Home building 86 87Land promotion 41 38Road Link 5 5Plant hire 121 133Parent company 8490380 400

5. Finance income

20252024£’000£’000Interest on bank deposits 746 574Interest on other loans and receivables 1,393 3,121Interest credit on defined benefit pension scheme 536 347Unwinding of discounting: trade receivables 1,265 1,0733,940 5,115

6. Finance costs

20242025(restated)£’000£’000Interest on bank loans and overdrafts 6,716 7,282Interest on other loans and payables 481 507Unwinding of discounting: trade payables and borrowings 7788757,975 8,664

1

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

189Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

  1. Tax

20242025(restated)£’000£’000Current tax:UK corporation tax on profits for the year 8,023 6,519Adjustment in respect of earlier years 1,510(654)Total current tax 9,5335,865Deferred tax (note 19):Origination and reversal of temporary differences (1,471)1,569Total deferred tax (1,471)1,569Total tax 8,062 7,434

1

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

The group has applied a corporation tax rate of 25% (2024: 25%) in determining current tax charges, which has been the

enacted and in force since 1 April 2023.

Deferred tax balances at the year end have been measured at 25% (2024: 25%), being the rate at which timing differences are

expected to reverse.

The charge for the year can be reconciled to the profit per the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income as follows:

20252024£’000£’000Profit before tax 26,417 32,951

20252024%%Tax at the UK corporation tax rate 25.00 25.00Effects of:Permanent differences 3.56 2.47Capital gains 0.49 0.03Other temporary timing differences (2.09) (0.14)Corporation tax adjustment in respect of earlier years 5.83 (2.45)Joint venture results reported net of tax (1.67)(1.98)Effective tax rate 31.12 22.93

The tax charge in the year is higher (2024: lower) than the standard rate of corporation tax, predominantly due to prior year

adjustments in respect of capital taxes and allowances (2024: due to prior year adjustments in respect of capital taxes and

allowances and profits from joint ventures and associates reported net of tax).

In addition to the amount charged to profit for the year, the following amounts relating to tax have been recognised in other

comprehensive income:

20252024£’000£’000Deferred tax:– property revaluations 63 (67)– actuarial (loss)/gain 1,732(549)Total tax recognised in other comprehensive income/(expense) 1,795 (616)

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk190

8. Results of the Parent Company

As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the Statement of Comprehensive Income of the Parent Company

is not presented as part of these Financial Statements. The profit dealt with in the Financial Statements of the Parent

Company, and approved by the Board on 11 April 2026, is £38,559,000 (2024: £21,855,000) and includes dividends received

from subsidiaries of £46,694,000 (2024: £35,484,000).

9. Earnings per ordinary share

The calculation of the basic and diluted earnings per share is based on the following information:

20252024£’000£’000Profit for the year from continuing operations 18,355 25,220Profit/(loss) for the year from discontinued operations 2,176(1,887)Profit for the year 20,531 23,630Non-controlling interests 2,986 (297)Preference dividend (21)(21)23,496 23,312

20252024NumberNumberWeighted average number of shares in issue 134,032,136 133,992,175Less shares held by the ESOP on which dividends have been waived (267,730)(314,250)Weighted average number for basic earnings per share 133,764,405 133,677,925Adjustment for the effects of dilutive potential ordinary shares 3,929,1123,314,322Weighted average number for diluted earnings per share 137,693,517 136,992,247

2025 2024Basic earnings per share 17.6p 17.4pDiluted earnings per share 17.1p 17.0p

The group has two types of dilutive potential ordinary shares, being: those share options granted to employees where the

exercise price is less than the average market price of the company’s ordinary shares during the year; and expected future

vesting of shares under the 2015 Long Term Incentive Plan.

10. Dividends

20252024£’000£’000Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the year:Preference dividend on cumulative preference shares 21 21Final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2024 of 4.62p per share (2023: 4.40p) 6,180 5,879Interim dividend for the year ended 31 December 2025 of 3.24p per share (2024: 3.08p) 4,3344,11910,535 10,019

The proposed final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2025 of 4.62p per share (2024: 4.62p) makes a total dividend for

the year of 7.86p (2024: 7.70p).

The proposed final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders at the AGM and has not been included as a liability in

these Financial Statements. The total estimated dividend to be paid is £6,200,000.

Notice has been received from Moore Street Securities Limited waiving its right as corporate trustee for the Employee Share

Ownership Plan (ESOP) to receive all dividends in respect of this and the previous financial year.

Dividends paid to non-controlling interests during the year amounted to £2,134,000 (2024: £2,113,000).

191Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

11. Intangible assets

GoodwillPFI assetSoftwareTotal£’000£’000£’000£’000CostAt 1 January 2024 and 31 December 2024 4,973 19,176 – 24,149Additions at cost– – 1,229 1,229At 31 December 2025 4,973 19,176 1,229 25,378

Accumulated impairment losses and amortisation

At 1 January 2024 3,933 18,037 – 21,970Amortisation – 522 – 522Impairment losses for the year1,040 – – 1,040At 31 December 2024 4,973 18,559 – 23,532Amortisation – 497 84 581At 31 December 2025 4,973 19,056 84 24,113Carrying amountAt 31 December 2025 – 120 1,145 1,265At 31 December 2024 – 617 – 617

The group acquired the trade and assets of Premier Plant Tool Hire & Sales Limited on 30 March 2017. They were immediately

hived up into the immediate Parent Company Banner Plant Limited, which sits in the Construction segment. The goodwill

arising on the acquisition of £900,000 is now fully impaired.

The group’s investment in Road Link (A69) Holdings Limited is 61.2%. The goodwill arising on the acquisition of £4,073,000

is now fully impaired. This company’s subsidiary, Road Link (A69) Limited, operates a PFI concession, which comprises

managing and maintaining the A69 Carlisle to Newcastle trunk road. The company receives payment from National Highways

based on the number and type of vehicles using the road. The concession lasts for a period of 30 years and will revert to

National Highways on 31 March 2026.

Although the Companies Act 2006 Section 390(5) requires a coterminous year end, the subsidiary company’s accounting

reference date is 31 March in order to align with National Highways financial year end and, hence, interim Financial

Statements are prepared for incorporation into these Consolidated Financial Statements.

Amortisation of the PFI asset and Software is recognised within cost of sales in the Consolidated Statement of

Comprehensive Income.

SoftwareParent Company£’000CostAdditions at cost1,229At 31 December 2025 1,229Accumulated amortisation –Amortisation 84At 31 December 2025 84Carrying amountAt 31 December 2025 1,145At 31 December 2024 –

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk192

  1. Property, plant and equipment

Land and Leasehold Equipment Office buildingsimprovementsheld for hire VehiclesequipmentTotalGroup£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000Cost or fair valueAt 1 January 2024 5,467 2,469 45,185 5,230 4,298 62,649Additions at cost 39 38 4,183 907 407 5,574Transfer to assets held for sale (985) – – – – (985)Disposals – – (4,534) (727) (490) (5,751)Decrease in fair value in year64 – – – – 64At 31 December 2024 4,585 2,507 44,834 5,410 4,215 61,551Additions at cost (45) 5 1,942 135 58 2,095Disposals – – (2,464) (856) (292) (3,612)Disposal of subsidiary – – – (104) (401) (505)Increase in fair value in year 25 – – – – 25At 31 December 2025 4,565 2,512 44,312 4,585 3,580 59,554Being:Cost – 2,512 44,312 4,585 3,580 54,989Fair value at 31 December 2025 4,565 – – – – 4,5654,565 2,512 44,312 4,585 3,580 59,554

Accumulated depreciation and

impairment

At 1 January 2024 802 77 26,330 2,799 3,423 33,431Charge for year – 359 2,484 594 427 3,864Impairment 199 – – – – 199Eliminated on disposals– – (4,140) (608) (488) (5,236)At 31 December 2024 1,001 436 24,674 2,785 3,362 32,258Charge for year – 412 2,593 572 322 3,899Eliminated on disposals – – (2,021) (768) (291) (3,080)Disposal of subsidiary – – – (35) (401) (436)At 31 December 2025 1,001 848 25,246 2,554 2,992 32,641Carrying amountAt 31 December 2025 3,564 1,664 19,066 2,031 588 26,913At 31 December 2024 3,584 2,071 20,160 2,625 853 29,293

At 31 December 2025, the group had entered into contractual commitments for the acquisition of property, plant and

equipment amounting to £883,000 (2024: £84,000).

One property was transferred to ‘assets held for sale’ during the prior year.

Included within equipment held for hire are assets with a book value of £4,387,000 (2024: £4,871,000) that are held under

sale and leaseback financing arrangements. The original cost of these assets was £5,705,000 (2024: £5,705,000). Financial

liabilities associated with the assets are disclosed in note 26.

193Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

  1. Property, plant and equipment continued

Fair value measurements of the group’s land and buildings

Land and buildings have been revalued at 31 December 2025 by Jones Lang LaSalle Limited (2024: by Jones Lang LaSalle

Limited) in accordance with the Practice Statements contained in the RICS Appraisal and Valuation Standards on the basis

of market value at £3,564,000 (2024: £4,570,000), including accumulated impairment of £1,001,000 (2024: £1,001,000) this

also includes £nil (2024: £985,000) transferred to assets held for sale in the year. Jones Lang LaSalle Limited are professional

valuers who hold recognised and professional qualifications, and have recent experience in the location and category of the

land and buildings being valued.

The valuation conforms to International Valuation Standards and was based on recent market transactions with similar

characteristics and location using the yield method valuation technique. The yield method of valuation involves applying

market-derived capitalisation yields, and the actual or market-derived future income streams, where appropriate, with

adjustments for letting voids or rent-free periods as applicable to each item of land and buildings.

On the historical cost basis, the land and buildings would have been included at a carrying amount of £2,680,000

(2024: £2,725,000).

The following table provides an analysis of the fair values of land and buildings by the degree to which the fair value

is observable:

Decrease Level 1Level 2Level 320252024in year£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Freehold land – – 60 60 60 –Buildings– – 3,5043,5043,524(20)Total fair value – – 3,564 3,564 3,584 (20)

The group’s policy is to recognise transfers into and out of fair value hierarchy levels as of the date of the event or change in

circumstances that causes the transfer. The Directors determine the applicable hierarchy that land and buildings fall into by

assessing the level of comparable evidence in the market which that asset falls into and the inherent level of activity. As at

the reporting date and throughout the year, all land and buildings were determined to fall into Level 3 and so there were no

transfers between hierarchies.

Explanation of the fair value hierarchy:

Level 1 – fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets

or liabilities thattheentity can access at the measurement date

Level 2 – fair value measurements are those derived from the use of a model with inputs (other than quoted prices included

in Level 1) thatareobservable from directly or indirectly observable market data

Level 3 – fair value measurements are those derived from use of a model with inputs that are not based on observable

market data

Information about fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3):

20252024ClassBuildingsBuildingsValuation technique Yield Yield Rental value per sq ft (£) – weighted average 6.52 6.69– low 1.46 3.91– high 15.00 15.00Yield % – weighted average 11.10 11.22– low 3.307.54– high 19.88 18.65

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk194

  1. Property, plant and equipment continued

The sensitivity analysis to significant changes in unobservable inputs relating to fair value measurements (Level 3) are set

out below:

20252024Impact on Impact on valuation valuation£’000 £’000BuildingsBuildingsYield – improvement by 0.5% 167160Rental value per sq ft – increase of £1 average 597 555

The sensitivities have been selected by management on the basis that they consider these measures to be a reasonable

expectation of likely changes to the significant unobservable inputs in the next 12 months.

Leasehold Office improvementsequipmentTotalParent Company£’000£’000 £’000CostAt 1 January 2024 2,469 1,827 4,296Additions 38 30 68Disposals– (486) (486)At 31 December 2024 2,507 1,371 3,878Additions 5 8 13Disposals – (273) (273)At 31 December 2025 2,512 1,106 3,618Accumulated depreciationAt 1 January 2024 77 1,198 1,275Charge for year 359 234 593Disposals– (485) (485)At 31 December 2024 436 947 1,383Charge for year 412 209 621Disposals – (273) (273)At 31 December 2025 848 884 1,732Carrying amountAt 31 December 2025 1,664 222 1,887At 31 December 2024 2,071 424 2,495

195Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

13. Leases

The group as lessee

Group Parent Company2025202420252024Right-of-use assets£’000£’000£’000£’000Land and buildings 2,562 2,926 949 1,168Vehicles 56 75 – 6Office equipment 311 459 312 4412,929 3,460 1,261 1,615

Lease liabilitiesDue within one year 882 895 399 392Due after more than one year 2,450 3,017 1,179 1,5793,332 3,912 1,578 1,971

Contractual maturities of lease liabilities including future interest:

On demand or within one year 1,023 1,060 475 486In the second year 963 950 467 476In the third to fifth years inclusive 1,563 2,110 818 1,229In more than five years 136 255 – 57Total contractual cash flows 3,685 4,375 1,760 2,248Future finance charges on lease liabilities (353) (463) (182) (277)Present value of contractual cash flows 3,332 3,912 1,578 1,971

Additions to the right-of-use assets during the 2025 financial year were £959,000 (2024: £(82,000)) for the group and £nil

(2024: £nil) for the Parent Company.

The statement of profit or loss shows the following amounts relating to leases:

Group Parent Company2025202420252024£’000£’000£’000£’000Depreciation charge of right-of-use assetsLand and buildings 714 664 219 198Vehicles 22 4 4 7Office equipment 147 190 129 121883 858 352 326Interest expense (included in finance cost) 180 209 95 187

The total cash outflow for leases in 2025 was £1,120,000 including interest expense of £180,000 (2024: £904,000) for the

group and £488,000 including interest expense of £95,000 (2024: £297,000) for the Parent Company.

The group leases various offices, equipment and vehicles. Rental contracts are, typically, made for fixed periods of 4–10

years and may have extension options.

Contracts may contain both lease and non-lease components. The group allocates the consideration in the contract to the

lease and non-lease components based on their relative stand-alone prices. However, for leases of real estate for which the

group is a lessee, it has elected not to separate lease and non-lease components and, instead, accounts for these as a single

lease component.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk196

13. Leases continued

Lease terms are negotiated on an individual basis and contain a wide range of different terms and conditions. The lease

agreements do not impose any covenants other than the security interests in the leased assets that are held by the lessor.

Leased assets may not be used as security for borrowing purposes.

Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. Lease liabilities include the net

present value of the following lease payments:

• Fixed payments (including in-substance fixed payments), less any lease incentives receivable.

• Variable lease payments that are based on an index or a rate, initially measured using the index or rate as at the

commencement date.

• Amounts expected to be payable by the group under residual value guarantees.

• The exercise price of a purchase option if the group is reasonably certain to exercise that option.

• Payments of penalties for terminating the lease, if the lease term reflects the group exercising that option.

Lease payments to be made under reasonably certain extension options are also included in the measurement of the liability.

The lease payments are discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease. If that rate cannot be readily determined,

which is generally the case for leases in the group, the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate is used.

The group is exposed to potential future increases in variable lease payments based on an index or rate, which are not

included in the lease liability until they take effect. When adjustments to lease payments based on an index or rate take

effect, the lease liability is reassessed and adjusted against the right-of-use asset.

Lease payments are allocated between principal and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to profit or loss over the lease

period so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period.

Right-of-use assets are measured at cost comprising the following:

• The amount of the initial measurement of lease liability;

• Any lease payments made at, or before, the commencement date less any lease incentives received; and

• Any initial direct costs and restoration costs.

Right-of-use assets are, generally, depreciated over the shorter of the asset’s useful life and the lease term on a straight-

line basis. If the group is reasonably certain to exercise a purchase option, the right-of-use asset is depreciated over the

underlying asset’s useful life. While the group revalues its land and buildings that are presented within property, plant and

equipment, it has chosen not to do so for the right-of-use buildings held by the group.

Payments associated with short term leases of equipment and vehicles and all leases of low-value assets are recognised on

a straight-line basis as an expense in profit or loss and amount to £nil (2024: £nil) in the period. Short term leases are leases

with a lease term of 12 months or less. Low-value assets comprise IT equipment and small items of office furniture. Cash

outflows during the period related to these leases equal the rent expense and are included within operating activities in the

Statement of Cash Flows.

The group as lessor

The group has entered into operating leases on its investment property portfolio, which, typically, have lease terms between

one and 25 years, and include clauses to enable periodic upward revision of the rental charge according to prevailing market

conditions. Ordinarily, the lessee does not have an option to purchase the property at the expiry of the lease period and some

leases contain options to break before the end of the lease term.

Future aggregate minimum rentals receivable under non-cancellable operating leases at 31 December are as follows:

20252024£’000£’000Within 1 year 5,364 6,800Between 1 and 2 years 4,726 6,209Between 2 and 3 years 4,055 5,360Between 3 and 4 years 4,014 4,627Between 4 and 5 years 3,993 4,510More than 5 years 29,91237,52952,064 65,035

197Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

14. Investment properties

Fair value measurements recognised in the Statement of Financial Position

The following table provides an analysis of the fair values of investment properties recognised in the Statement of Financial

Position by the degree to which the fair value is observable:

Increase/ (decrease) Level 1Level 2Level 320252024in year£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Completed investment propertyIndustrial – – 74,911 74,911 70,692 4,219Leisure – – 5,743 5,743 5,585 158Residential – – 3,282 3,282 3,783 (501)Office – – – – 2,418 (2,418)Retail– – 10,71010,71013,797 (3,087)– – 94,64694,64696,275 (1,629)Investment property under constructionIndustrial – – – – – –Total carrying amount – – 94,646 94,646 96,275 (1,629)

The group’s policy is to recognise transfers into, and out of, fair value hierarchy levels as of the date of the event or change

in circumstances that causes the transfer. The Directors determine the applicable hierarchy that a property falls into by

assessing the level of comparable evidence in the market which that asset falls into and the inherent level of activity. As at

the reporting date and throughout the year, all property was determined to fall into Level 3 and so there were no transfers

between hierarchies.

Explanation of the fair value hierarchy:

Level 1 – fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets

or liabilities thattheentity can access at the measurement date

Level 2 – fair value measurements are those derived from the use of a model with inputs (other than quoted prices included

in Level 1) thatareobservable from directly or indirectly observable market data

Level 3 – fair value measurements are those derived from use of a model with inputs that are not based on observable

market data

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk198

14. Investment properties continued

Investment properties have been split into different classes to show the composition of the investment property portfolio of

the group as at the reporting date. Management has determined that aggregation of the results would be most appropriate,

based on the type of use that each property falls into, which is described below:

Class

Industrial

Includes manufacturing and warehousing, which are usually similar in dimensions and construction

method.

Leisure

Includes restaurants and gymnasiums or properties in which the main activity is the provision of

entertainment and leisure facilities to the public.

Residential

Includes dwellings under assured tenancies.

Office

Includes buildings occupied for business activities not involving storage or processing of physical goods.

Retail

Includes any property involved in the sale of goods.

Land Includes land held for future capital appreciation as an investment.

Investment properties under construction are categorised based on the future anticipated highest and best use of

the property.

Completed investment property

Industrial Leisure Residential Office Retail ClassLevel 3Level 3 Level 3Level 3Level 320252024Fair value hierarchy£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Carrying valueAt 1 January 70,692 5,585 3,783 2,418 13,797 96,275 100,602Subsequent expenditure on investment property 636 – – 72 – 708 73Capitalised letting fees – – – – – – 20Amortisation of capitalised letting fees (12) (6) – – (1) (19) (34)Disposals (1,030) – (520) – (3,107) (4,657) (523)Transfer to assets held for sale – – – (2,851) – (2,851) –Transfers from/(to) investment property under construction 3,660 – – – – 3,660 (5,030)Increase in fair value in year965 164 19 361 211,5301,167At 31 December 74,911 5,743 3,282 – 10,710 94,646 96,275Adjustment in respect of tenant incentives1,643 117 – 522 3632,6452,867Market value at 31 December 76,554 5,860 3,282 522 11,073 97,291 99,142

One property was transferred to ‘assets held for sale’ during the year.

Tenant incentives are included in trade receivables.

There is no actively traded market for the group’s commercial property and, as such, the adopted valuation is completed

using the professional judgement of the group’s professional valuers, who use the yield method to determine fair value. The

calculation of the capital value of a property under this method uses a yield to multiple against the rental income stream with

due allowance for a fixed assumed purchaser’s cost. The primary variables of the yield method are thus: the yield, which is

based on historic yields for properties that are similar but to which there may be adjustment to take into account; factors

such as geographical location and lease terms; and the contracted rent, which is based on contracted rents that exist at the

balance sheet date, but may also include a provision for rents that may be achieved in the future after accounting for a period

of vacancy, such rents being based on rental income terms that exist in similar properties, adjusted for geographic location

and lease terms.

199Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

14. Investment properties continued

With the exception of the residential class, completed investment property has been revalued at 31 December 2025 by Jones

Lang LaSalle Limited in accordance with the Practice Statements contained in the RICS Valuation – Global Standards (the

‘Red Book’) on the basis of market value at £93,345,000 (2024: £95,360,000). Jones Lang LaSalle Limited are professional

valuers who hold recognised and professional qualifications and have recent experience in the location and category of

the investment property being valued. The valuation conforms to International Valuation Standards, as incorporated within

the Red Book and was based on recent market transactions with similar characteristics and location using the yield method

valuation technique. The yield method of valuation involves applying market-derived capitalisation yields, and the actual

or market-derived future income streams where appropriate, with adjustments for letting voids or rent-free periods as

applicable to each property. For all completed investment properties, their current use equates to the highest and best use.

Residential properties are valued using recent comparable sales transactions with a significant unobservable input being the

discount used, to reflect the lower value achieved where properties are held under an assured tenancy, which, typically, earn

a low market level of rent. The discount applied recognises that the value is higher where the house is offered with the benefit

of vacant possession at the end of the assured tenancy.

The fair value of the residential class at 31 December 2025 has been determined by the Directors of the company at

£3,282,000 (2024: £3,783,000). The fair value takes into account market evidence based on recent comparable sale

transactions adjusted to take into account the tenanted nature of the properties.

Information about fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3):

2025ClassIndustrial Leisure Residential Office RetailSales Valuation technique Yield Yieldcomparison YieldYieldRental value per sq ft (£) – weighted average7.79 21.51 – – 12.79– low0.65 1.82 – – 7.27– high15.50 48.00 – – 18.50Yield % – weighted average6.33 7.12 – – 6.49– low3.60 5.79 – – 6.19– high7.86 9.83 – – 7.05% discount applied to houses held under assured tenancies– – 25.00 – –

2024Class Industrial Leisure Residential Office RetailSales Valuation technique Yield Yieldcomparison YieldYieldRental value per sq ft (£) – weighted average7.12 26.58 – 13.44 14.97– low0.65 1.82 – – 7.25– high16.00 45.00 – 25.00 26.00Yield % – weighted average6.01 8.99 – 13.78 6.51– low3.65 8.26 – – 4.87– high7.26 10.07 – 24.57 18.01% discount applied to houses held under assured tenancies– – 25.00 – –

There is considered to be no inter-relationship between observable and unobservable inputs.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk200

14. Investment properties continued

The sensitivity analysis to significant changes in unobservable inputs relating to fair value measurements (Level 3) is set

out below:

Impact on valuation2025£’000Industrial Leisure Residential Office RetailYield – improvement by 0.5% 5,697 383 – – 784Rental value per sq ft – increase by £1 average 10,448 255 – – 838Tenancy discount – increase by 1% 1 – 557 – –

Impact on valuation2024£’000Industrial Leisure Residential Office RetailYield – improvement by 0.5% 5,641 300 – 96 1,031Rental value per sq ft – increase by £1 average 10,654 214 – 205 922Tenancy discount – increase by 1% – – 41 – –

The sensitivities have been selected by management on the basis that it considers these measures to be a reasonable

expectation of likely changes to the significant unobservable inputs in the next 12 months.

The property rental income earned by the group from its occupied investment property, all of which is leased out under

operating leases, amounted to £5,733,000 (2024: £6,298,000). Direct operating expenses arising on investment property

generating rental income in the year amounted to £311,000 (2024: £432,000). Direct operating expenses arising on the

investment property, which did not generate rental income during the year, amounted to £61,000 (2024: £101,000).

At 31 December 2025, the group had entered into no contractual commitments for the acquisition and repair of investment

property (2024: £nil).

Investment property under construction

Industrial ClassLevel 320252024Fair value hierarchy£’000£’000£’000Carrying valueAt 1 January – – –Subsequent expenditure on investment property 2,788 2,788 3Capitalised letting fees 43 43 –Transfer from inventory 272 272 –Transfer (to)/from completed investment property (3,660) (3,660) 5,030Transfers to assets held for sale – – (8,330)Increase in fair value in year5575573,297At 31 December – – –Adjustment in respect of tenant incentives–––Market value at 31 December – – –

201Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

14. Investment properties continued

Investment property under construction

Information about fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3):

2025 ClassIndustrialValuation technique ResidualRental value per sq ft (£) – weighted average –– low –– high –Yield % – weighted average –– low –– high –

2024 ClassIndustrialValuation techniqueResidualRental value per sq ft (£) – weighted average –– low –– high –Yield % – weighted average –– low –– high –

The sensitivity analysis to significant changes in unobservable inputs relating to fair value measurements (Level 3) is set

out below:

Impact on valuation 2025 £’000IndustrialYield – improvement by 0.5% –Rental value per sq ft – increase by £1 average –

Impact on valuation 2024 £’000IndustrialYield – improvement by 0.5%–Rental value per sq ft – increase by £1 average–

Investment properties under construction are developments that have been valued at 31 December 2025 at fair value by the

Directors of the company using the residual method at £nil (2024: £nil). The residual method of valuation involves estimating

the gross development value of the property using market-derived capitalisation yields and market-derived future income

streams. From this gross development value, the remaining gross development costs to be incurred are deducted, using

market-derived data cost estimates or the actual known costs and including cost contingencies for construction risk, as

appropriate. In addition, a deduction for the anticipated development profits yet to be earned is made, taking into account the

progress of the development to date in line with key milestones.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk202

  1. Investments

TotalParent Company – shares in group undertakings£’000CostAt 1 January 2024 37,771Additions1,135At 31 December 2024 38,906Additions 735Disposals(668)At 31 December 2025 38,973Carrying amountAt 31 December 2025 38,973At 31 December 202438,906

Additions in the current and prior year related to capital contributions made by Henry Boot PLC relating to subsidiary share

schemes settled by the parent company. Disposals relate to HBC Construction Limited, see note 38.

Amounts due from, and to, subsidiary companies are listed in notes 18 and 23 and details of all subsidiary companies are

listed in note 36.

All trading subsidiaries operate in the United Kingdom and are wholly owned, with the exception of:

• Road Link (A69) Holdings Limited and its subsidiary Road Link (A69) Limited, which is 61.2% owned by Henry Boot

Construction Limited; and

• Stonebridge Homes Group Limited and its wholly owned subsidiaries (as indicated in note 37), which is 62.5% owned by,

Henry Boot Land Holdings Limited.

They are all incorporated in the United Kingdom. All subsidiary companies have only one class of ordinary issued share

capital.

16. Investment in joint ventures and associates

2025 2024Joint JointventuresAssociatesTotal venturesAssociatesTotalGroup£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000CostAt 1 January 8,449 4,831 13,280 8,000 2,484 10,484Share of profit/(loss) for the year 1,168 559 1,727 3,073 (642) 2,431Dividends received – – – (2,850) – (2,850)Additions 87 7,792 7,879 – 2,989 2,989Dividends waived by partner – – –226 – 226At 31 December 9,704 13,182 22,886 8,449 4,831 13,280

During the year, the group increased its equity investment in Rainham Holdco SARL, an associate undertaking, by a further

£2,935,000 (2024: 2,989,000), which maintains our interest at 20%. This was settled by offsetting a corresponding loan.

The group also increased investment in a number of joint ventures under our Origin Platform of £4,944,000 (2024: £nil).

203Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

16. Investment in joint ventures and associates continued

The group’s share of its joint ventures’ and associates’ aggregated assets, liabilities and results are as follows:

2025 2024Joint Joint venturesAssociatesTotalventuresAssociatesTotal£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Investment property 747 23,271 24,018 – 5,633 5,633Current assets 43,336 18,372 61,708 35,121 19,479 54,600Non-current assets – – –710 – 710Total assets 44,083 41,643 85,726 35,831 25,112 60,943Current liabilities (29,329) (1,169) (30,498) (5,135) (1,808) (6,943)Non-current liabilities (5,050) (27,292) (32,342)(22,247) (18,473) (40,720)Net investment 9,704 13,182 22,886 8,449 4,831 13,280

2025 2024Joint Joint venturesAssociatesTotalventuresAssociatesTotal£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Revenue 4,513 – 4,513 8,809 – 8,809Administration and other expenses (2,602) (398) (3,000) (4,383) (24) (4,407)Increase in fair value of investment properties – 1,987 1,98777 – 77Operating profit/(loss) 1,911 1,589 3,500 4,503 (24) 4,479Finance costs (331) (564) (895)(200) (618) (818)Profit/(loss) before tax 1,580 1,025 2,605 4,303 (642) 3,661Tax (412) (466) (878)(1,230) – (1,230)Share of profits/(losses) after tax 1,168 559 1,727 3,073 (642) 2,431

Details of the group’s investments in joint ventures and associates are listed in note 36.

Material joint ventures and associates

The Directors do not consider any of the joint ventures or associates they hold an interest in to be material in the current year.

In the previous year, the directors considered Newmarket Lane Holdings Limited (NML Group) to be the only material joint

ventures or associates they held an interest in.

When determining materiality, only joint ventures and associates where Henry Boot PLC’s share of net assets or share of

profit before tax were greater than 5% of the groups results, were deemed material.

The NML Group is a property development joint venture between the group, two individual shareholders and Hazeltime

Limited. The NML Group includes three legal entities: Newmarket Lane Holdings Limited, Newmarket Lane Limited, and

Newmarket Lane Management Company Limited. The NML Group is incorporated in England, and the group has ownership

of 50% of the NML Group. The joint venture is accounted for using the equity method of accounting.

The table over provides summarised financial information for Newmarket Lane Holdings Limited (Group). The information

disclosed reflects the amounts presented in the financial statements of Newmarket Lane Holdings Limited (Group) and not

the group’s share of those amounts.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk204

16. Investment in joint ventures and associates continued

Summarised balance sheet

Newmarket Lane Holdings Limited (Group)20252024£’000£’000Investment properties (non-current) – –Inventories 13,000 12,883Trade and other receivables 256 217Cash and cash equivalents 942 1,227Trade and other payables (497) (673)Borrowings (non-current) –(240)Net assets 13,701 13,414Reconciliation to carrying amount:Opening net assets 1 January 13,414 13,882Profit/(loss) for the period 287 4,775Other distribution (5,244)(5,243)Closing net assets 8,457 13,414Group’s share in % 50% 50%Group’s share in £’000 4,228 6,707Carrying amount £’000 4,228 6,707

Summarised statement of comprehensive income

20252024£’000£’000Revenue 564 12,186Interest income – 52Interest expense (48) –Profit before tax 383 6,674Tax (96) (1,899)Profit for the year 287 4,775Group’s share in % 50% 50%Group’s share in £’000 143 2,388Carrying amount £’000 143 2,388

205Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

  1. Contract assets

20252024£’000£’000Construction contracts – Construction segment – 8,329Construction contracts – Property investment and development segment 8,419 4,3648,419 12,693Due within one year 8,419 12,693Due after more than one year – –8,419 12,693

Amounts relating to construction contracts are balances due from customers under construction contracts that arise

when the group receives payments from customers in line with a series of performance-related milestones. The group will,

previously, have recognised a contract asset for any work performed, but not yet invoiced, as conditional to reaching certain

agreed milestone. Any amount previously recognised as a contract asset is reclassified to trade receivables at the point at

which it is invoiced to the customer.

Contract assets have decreased following the disposal of HBC Construction Limited on 31 December 2025.

There were no significant impairment losses recognised on any contract asset in the reporting period or in the prior year.

The group does not recognise any assets arising from the costs incurred to obtain a contract as the related amortisation

period would have been less than one year.

  1. Trade and other receivables

Group Parent Company2025202420252024 £’000£’000£’000£’000Trade receivables 70,978 50,688 631 378Loss allowance (654) (703) – –Prepayments 17,128 10,230 2,893 2,893Amounts owed by joint ventures and associates 30,388 38,710 – –Amounts owed by group undertakings – – 256,475 215,898117,840 98,925 259,999 219,169Due within one year 69,920 90,467 61,166 25,803Due after more than one year 47,920 8,458 198,833 193,366117,840 98,925 259,999 219,169

Amounts due after more than one year relate to deferred consideration included in trade receivables on inventory sold that

are discounted to present value and are due for payment between March 2026 and September 2029 (2024: January 2025

and July 2028), and amounts owed by joint ventures and associates that are not expected to be recovered in the next 12

months (2024: not expected to be recovered in the next 12 months).

Group

Movement in the trade receivables loss allowance

20252024£’000£’000At 1 January 703 1,347Impairment losses recognised 70 –Amounts written off as uncollectable (utilisation) 36 –Amounts recovered during the year (6) (682)Impairment losses reversed (149)38At 31 December 654 703

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk206

  1. Trade and other receivables continued

The loss allowance as at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024 for trade receivables and contract assets was determined

as follows:

Gross Expected carrying Loss loss rate amount allowance 2025%£’000£’0000–30 days 1.2 40,991 43830–60 days 0.1 9,990 860–90 days 0.1 3,014 290–120 days 1.4 148 2120+ days 0.8 25,254 20479,397 654

Gross Expected carrying Loss loss rate amount allowance2024%£’000£’0000–30 days 0.3 57,336 17330–60 days 0.7 1,509 1160–90 days 0.7 539 490–120 days 10.7 103 11120+ days12.9 3,894 50463,381 703

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables of the group and Parent Company

approximates to their fair value.

Parent Company

Amounts owed by group undertakings include loans of £239.1m (2024: £213.2m) and are repayable on demand, unsecured

and are stated net of provisions for impairment of £448,000 (2024: £1,519,000), of which no significant impairment

(2024: £nil) has been provided in the year, £1,071,000 (2024: £1,000) has been recovered in the year and £nil (2024: £nil) was

written off. Expected credit losses are based on the assumption that repayment of the loan is demanded at the reporting

date. Where there are insufficient liquid assets, the Parent Company considers the expected manner of recovery to measure

expected credit losses. This might be a ‘repay over time’ strategy, or a fire sale of fewer liquid assets. No interest was charged

on loans in the current or prior year.

The Parent Company has no significant impaired trade receivables in the current or prior year.

Credit risk

The group’s principal financial assets are bank balances and cash, contract assets and trade and other receivables, which

represent the group’s maximum exposure to credit risk in relation to financial assets. The group’s credit risk is, primarily,

attributable to its trade receivables. The amounts presented in the Statement of Financial Position are net of loss allowances

for doubtful receivables, estimated by the group’s management based on prior experience and forward-looking assessments

of the economic environment in accordance with IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’. The group has no significant concentration

of credit risk, with exposure spread over a large number of counterparties and customers. Recovery of amounts owed by joint

ventures and associates is based on delivery of the intended scheme and realisation of asset values, forecast appraisal are

prepared periodically, which support recoverability.

The credit risk on liquid funds is limited because the counterparties are banks with high credit ratings assigned by

international credit rating agencies.

207Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

19. Deferred tax

Deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities are offset where the group has a legally enforceable right to set off current

tax assets against current tax liabilities and when the deferred tax assets and liabilities relate to tax levied by the same tax

authority where there is an intention to settle the balances on a net basis. The amounts after offsetting are as follows:

Accelerated Retirement capital Property benefit Other timing allowancesrevaluationsschemedifferencesTotalGroup£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000At 1 January 2024 (1,384) (2,056) (1,932) 213 (5,159)Recognised in profit or loss (731) (847) (2) 6 (1,574)Recognised in other comprehensive income – (67) (549) – (616)At 31 December 2024 (2,115) (2,970) (2,483) 219 (7,349)Deferred tax asset – – – 219 219Deferred tax liability (2,115) (2,970) (2,483) – (7,568)Recognised in profit or loss (100) (379) (2) 1,952 1,471Recognised in other comprehensive income – 63 1,732 – 1,795Disposal of subsidiary (32) – – – (32)At 31 December 2025 (2,247) (3,286) (753) 2,171 (4,115)Deferred tax asset – – – – –Deferred tax liability (2,247) (3,286) (753) 2,171 (4,115)

Parent CompanyAt 1 January 2024 (230) – (1,932) 244 (1,918)Recognised in profit or loss (132) – (2) – (134)Recognised in other comprehensive income – – (549) – (549)At 31 December 2024 (362) – (2,483) 244 (2,601)Deferred tax asset – – – 244 244Deferred tax liability(362) – (2,483) – (2,845)Recognised in profit or loss 129 – (2) (67) 60Recognised in other comprehensive income– – 1,732 – 1,732At 31 December 2025 (233) – (753) 177 (809)Deferred tax asset – – – 177 177Deferred tax liability (233) – (753) – (986)

Deferred tax assets relating to deductible temporary differences are recognised if it is probable that they can be offset

against future taxable profits or existing temporary differences.

Deferred tax balances at the year end have been measured at 25% (2024: 25%), being the rate at which timing differences

are expected to reverse. Management does not expect any significant reversal of deferred tax assets or liabilities in the next

12 months.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk208

20. Inventories

20252024£’000£’000Property developments in progress 57,761 66,605Housebuilder land and work in progress 156,379 111,639Land held for development or sale 60,096 73,963Options to purchase land 9,032 9,209Planning promotion agreements 84,797 71,455368,065 332,871

Within property developments in progress, £342,000 (2024: £nil) has been written down and recognised as an expense in

the year. These costs relate to development projects no longer likely to proceed. Within land held for development or sale,

options to purchase land and planning promotion agreements, £507,000 (2024: £1,511,000) has been written down and

recognised as an expense in the year. These costs relate to land, options and planning promotion agreements where planning

permission for development has been refused or is deemed to be doubtful.

  1. Assets classified as held for sale

Assets classified as held for sale are investment properties and land and buildings within the Property investment and

development segment, which are individually being actively marketed for sale with expected completion dates within one

year. The gain recognised after measurement at fair value to sell on the transfer of assets during the year was £nil (2024: £nil).

Assets classified as held for sale comprise the following:

Investment Property and Land and Buildings20252024£’000£’000Fair valueAt 1 January 9,315 –Transfer from property, plant and equipment (note 12) – 985Transfer from investment property (note 14) 2,851 8,330Disposals (12,166) –At 31 December – 9,315Adjustment in respect of tenant incentives ––Market value at 31 December – 9,315

Assets classified as held for sale have been valued at 31 December 2025 at fair value by the Directors of the company at £nil

(2024: £9,315,000).

209Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

  1. Contract liabilities

20252024£’000£’000Construction contracts – Construction segment – 4,882Construction contracts – Property investment and development segment – –– 4,882Due within one year – 4,882

20252024£’000£’000Revenue recognised that was included in the contract liability balance at the beginning of the periodConstruction contracts – Construction segment – 1,060Construction contracts – Property investment and development segment – –Revenue recognised from performance obligations satisfied in previous periodsConstruction contracts – Construction segment – –Construction contracts – Property investment and development segment – –

Contract liabilities have decreased in the year as the group disposed of its contracting business, HBC Construction Limited.

23. Trade and other payables

Group Parent Company2025202420252024£’000£’000£’000£’000Trade payables 89,595 83,595 3,725 2,043Social security and other taxes 11,102 9,733 614 606Accrued expenses 4,273 5,481 1,563 2,250Deferred income 1,922 2,700 – –Amounts owed to joint venture and associates 1,241 302 – –Amounts owed to group undertakings – – 18,719 61,788108,133 101,811 24,621 66,687Due within one year 86,411 89,820 23,411 66,490Due after more than one year 21,722 11,991 1,210 197108,133 101,811 24,621 66,687

1

Trade payable includes financial liabilities guaranteed as part of the disposal of HBC Construction Limited. See note 38.

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade payables approximates to their fair value.

Amounts due after more than one year include £nil (2024: £379,000) of deferred income, £902,000 (2024: £nil) of amounts

owed to joint venture and associates, £19,610,000 (2024: £11,611,000) relating to deferred land payments and 1,210,000

(2024: £nil) of trade payables relating to financial guarantees.

Included within deferred income is £nil relating to an advanced payment from National Highways (2024:£862,000). This is

being released as revenue and interest within the income statement under the terms of the A69 Road Link contract. During

the year, £825,000 (2024: £707,000) has been recognised as revenue and £145,000 (2024: £226,000) recognised as interest.

The balance of deferred income represents advanced rental receipts from investment property tenants in the Property

investment and development segment, relating to the first quarter of 2026.

Parent Company

Amounts owed to group undertakings (including loans of £12.5m (2024: £53.9m) are repayable on demand, unsecured and

bear no interest (2024: 0–0.60%).

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk210

24. Financial liabilities

The table below summarises the maturity profile of the group’s financial liabilities based on contractual undiscounted

payments.

GroupOn demand <1 year 1–2 years 3–5 years >5 years Total 2025 Note£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Bank loans 26 – – – 112,000 – 112,000Other loans – sale and leaseback 26 – 880 213 – – 1,093Lease liabilities 13 – 882 860 1,459 131 3,332Trade and other payables 23 – 73,387 21,722 – – 95,109– 75,149 22,795 113,459 131 211,534

Total GroupOn demand <1 year1-2 years 3–5 years >5 years (restated) 2024 Note£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Bank loans 26– – – 72,500 – 72,500Other loans – sale and leaseback 26– 1,943 880 212 – 3,035Lease liabilities 13– 895 822 1,940 255 3,912Trade and other payables 23– 7 7,767 11,611 – – 89,378– 80,605 13,313 74,171 255 168,825

Parent Company On demand < 1 year 1–2 years 3–5 years >5 years Total 2025 Note£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Bank loans 26 – – – 112,000 – 112,000Lease liabilities 13 – 393 400 1,122 56 1,971Trade and other payables 23 – 22,797 1,210 – – 24,007– 23,190 1,610 113,122 56 137,978

Total Parent Company On demand <1 year 1–2 years 3-5 years >5 years (restated) 2024 Note£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Bank loans 26– – – 72,500 – 72,500Lease liabilities 13– 393 400 1,122 56 1,971Trade and other payables 23– 65,884 197 – – 66,081– 66,277 597 73,622 56 140,552

1

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

211Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

25. Capital risk management

The group’s objectives when managing capital are:

• to safeguard the group’s ability to continue as a going concern and have the resources to provide returns for shareholders

and benefits for other stakeholders; and

• to maximise returns to shareholders by allocating capital across our businesses based on the level of expected return

and risk.

The group sets the amount of capital in proportion to risk. The group manages the capital structure and makes adjustments

to it in the light of changes in economic conditions and the risk characteristics of the underlying assets. In order to maintain

or adjust the capital structure, the group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to

shareholders, issue new shares or sell assets to reduce debt.

The group monitors capital on the basis of net debt to equity. Net debt is total debt less cash and cash equivalents and, at

31 December 2025, this was £108.0m (2024: £62.7m). Equity comprises all components of equity and, at 31 December 2025,

this was £420.1m (2024: £425.1m).

During 2025, the group achieved its strategy, which was to maintain the debt to equity ratio below 30% (2024: 30%). This

level was chosen to ensure that we can access debt relatively easily and inexpensively if required.

In May 2024, the group concluded negotiations with three banking partners to put in place a £125m facility to replace the

£105m facility it had in place at 31 December 2013. The renewed facilities commenced on 24 May 2024, with a renewal

date of 24 May 2027 and an option to extend the facilities by one year, each year, for the next two years occurring on

the anniversary of the facility. The first of these extensions was called upon on 31 March 2025 extending the facility to

21 March 2028. Bank facilities in place at 31 December 2024 totalled £125m with an accordion to extend the facility by up to

£60m taking the facility to £185m. The accordion was called on 21 March 2025 extending the facility to £140m and again on

5 March 2026 to £155m The group had drawn £112.0m of the facility at 31 December 2025 (2024: £72.5m).

The group’s secured bank facilities are subject to covenants over the loan-to-market value of investment properties,

EBIT cover, gearings and minimum consolidated tangible assets value. The group operated comfortably within all of its

requirements throughout the year and continues to do so over forecast periods.

On 27 June 2024, the group extended a £25.0m Receivables Purchase Agreement with HSBC Invoice Finance UK Limited

(HSBC). The Receivables Purchase Agreement allows the group to sell eligible deferred receivables generated through its

land sale activities to HSBC Invoice Finance (UK) Limited. Under the terms of the agreement, the group irrevocably assigns

all rights to HSBC Invoice Finance (UK) Limited and all tangible risks and rewards of ownership of the financial asset are

transferred. Upon transfer of contractual rights, the deferred receivable asset is derecognised in the financial statements of

the group. There is a maximum agreement limit of £25.0m of which receivables due from eligible housebuilders can be sold.

Amounts of £13.4m (2024: £15.9m) were sold under the agreement at the year end.

The group’s capital risk management disclosures are consistent with the Parent Company.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk212

26. Borrowings

Group Parent Company202420242025(restated)2025(restated)£’000£’000£’000£’000Bank overdrafts – – 9 42Bank loans 112,000 72,500 112,000 72,500Other loans – sale and leaseback 1,0933,035––113,093 75,535 112,009 72,542Due within one year 871 1,943 9 42Due after one year 112,22273,592112,00072,500113,093 75,535 112,009 72,542

The weighted average interest rates paid were as follows:

20252024%%Bank overdrafts 6.80 6.80Bank loans – floating rate 5.84 6.67Other loans – sale and leaseback 6.02 5.97

1

See ‘prior year restatements’ on page 174

Bank overdrafts are repayable on demand and bank loans are drawn for periods of between one and six months.

Other loans relate to sale and leaseback arrangement entered into by the group. The loan draw downs in 2025 amounted to

£nil (2024: £1,633,000) and are all repayable over 36 months from the date when the loans were drawn down.

Borrowings are recognised at amortised cost. The fair value of the group’s borrowings is not considered to be materially

different from the carrying amounts.

Liquidity risk

The company’s objectives when managing liquidity are:

• to safeguard the group’s ability to meet expected and unexpected payment obligations at all times; and

• to maximise the group’s profitability.

At 31 December 2025, the group had available £33,000,000 (2024: £52,500,000) undrawn committed borrowing facilities.

Interest rate risk

Interest on floating rate borrowings is arranged for periods from one to six months. These borrowings are secured by a fixed

and floating charge over the assets of the group, excluding those of Road Link (A69) Limited.

The bank overdraft is at floating rates, thus exposing the group to cash flow interest rate risk.

Based on approximate average borrowings during 2025, a 1.0% (2024: 1.0%) increase or decrease in interest rates, which the

Directors consider to be a reasonably possible change, would affect profitability before tax by £1,058,000 (2024: £949,000).

Other loans – sales and leaseback – are arranged at fixed rates, thus not exposing the group to cash flow interest rate risk.

213Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

  1. Provisions

Land Road promotionmaintenanceTotal£’000£’000£’000At 1 January 2024 3,131 1,268 4,399Additional provisions in year 554 2,272 2,826Utilisation of provisions (2,571) (2,777) (5,348)At 31 December 2024 1,114 763 1,877Included in current liabilities 960 763 1,723Included in non-current liabilities 154 – 1541,114 763 1,877Additional provisions in year 379 2,709 3,088Utilisation of provisions (747) (3,361) (4,108)At 31 December 2025 746 111 857Included in current liabilities 746 111 857Included in non-current liabilities – – –746 111 857

The Land Promotion provision represents management’s best estimate of the group’s liability to satisfy outstanding S106

infrastructure/planning obligations, arising from obtaining planning consent on the relevant schemes. These obligations are

contracted independently between the group and the relevant planning authorities, and are not assumed by the customer at

the point the land is subsequently disposed and, therefore, remain an obligation of the group. These obligations are expected

to be fully satisfied within the next 18 months.

The provision is calculated using the present value of the estimated cash flows required to settle the present obligations,

pro rata on an acreage allocation basis where disposals occur over a number of phases, such that provisions are only made

in relation to the land that has been disposed of. Based on a 1.0% change in the discount rate and a 5.0% change in the

estimated cash outflows, both of which the Directors consider to be a reasonably possible change, land promotion provisions

would change and affect profitability before tax by £3,000 and £37,000 respectively (2024: £7,000 and £57,000).

The group maintains rigorous forecasting and budgeting for the S106 infrastructure/planning obligations to which its provisions

relate. The group’s outstanding obligations are not considered to be ‘onerous’ contracts, as the costs of meeting the obligations

are not anticipated to exceed the economic benefits expected to be received throughout the life of the developments.

The Road Maintenance provision represents management’s best estimate of the group’s liability under a five-year rolling

programme for the maintenance of the group’s PFI assets. Based on a 5.0% change in the estimated cash outflows, which the

Directors consider to be a reasonably possible change, the Road Maintenance provision would change and affect profitability

before tax by £187,000 (2024: £176,000).

Off balance sheet arrangements

The group is currently undertaking the infrastructure of land promotions at Bridgwater and Cranbrook, spanning 122 and 53

acres respectively (2024: 122 and 53). The group is liable for various planning and infrastructure obligations required to be

met under section agreements imposed by the local councils. The group shares its planning and infrastructure obligations

relating to the Cranbrook site with two other parties – the group’s share being 30%. These shared obligations are secured by

performance bonds and legal charges. The group deems the possibility of default by the other parties as highly remote. The

infrastructure of these developments is anticipated to continue until 2025 and 2026 respectively, with costs being incurred

throughout these periods.

The group has cumulatively disposed of 122 and 50 acres respectively (2024: 122 and 50), and has, subsequently, recognised

provisions to the value of £745,000 (2024: £1,113,000), being the group’s best estimate of the consideration required to

settle the present obligations at the reporting date. Subsequent disposals are expected to occur over a number of phases;

provisions are made in relation to the land that has been disposed of. The present value of the estimated cash flows relating

to future disposals, amounting to £41,000 (2024: £24,000), has, therefore, not been recognised in these Financial Statements.

Contingent liabilities

Contingent liabilities may arise in respect of subcontractor and other third-party claims made against the group, in the normal

course of trading. These claims can include those relating to cladding/legacy fire safety matters and defects. A provision for

such claims is only recognised to the extent that the Directors believe that the group has a legal or constructive obligation

as a result of a past event and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefit will be required to settle the obligation.

However, such claims are predominantly covered by the group’s insurance arrangements.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk214

28. Retirement benefit obligations

Defined contribution pension plan

The group operates a defined contribution pension plan for all qualifying employees. The plan is administered and managed

by Aviva and the group matches member contributions, providing a minimum of 5% (2024: 5%) of salary is paid by the

employee, on a pound-for-pound basis up to a maximum of 8% (2024: 8%).

The total cost charged to income of £3,539,000 (2024: £3,438,000) represents contributions payable to the plan by the

group.

Defined benefit pension scheme

The group sponsors a funded defined benefit pension scheme in the UK. The scheme is administered within a Trust, which

is legally separate from the group. Trustees are appointed by both the group and the scheme’s membership, and act in the

interest of the scheme and all relevant stakeholders, including the members and the group employers. The Trustees are also

responsible for the investment policy for the scheme’s assets.

The scheme closed to the future accrual of benefits on 18 March 2021. Until this date, members accrued an annual pension of

either 1/45th or 1/60th of final pensionable salary for each year of pensionable service. Increases in pensionable salary were

limited to 1% per annum. Once in payment, pensions increase in line with inflation. The scheme also provides a two-thirds

spouse’s pension on the death of a member.

Members of the scheme who were active up to 18 March 2021 paid contributions at the rate of either 5% or 7% of

pensionable salary, and the group employers paid the balance of the cost as determined by regular actuarial valuations.

The Trustee is required to use prudent assumptions to value the liabilities and costs of the scheme whereas the accounting

assumptions must be best estimates.

The group has not recognised any obligation under a minimum funding requirement as it is entitled to a refund of any residual

assets once all members have left the scheme.

The scheme poses a number of risks to the group. These include:

Investment risk

The present value of obligations is calculated using a discount rate determined by reference to high quality corporate bond

yields. If the return on the scheme’s assets is below this rate, the scheme deficit will increase.

Interest rate risk

A decrease in the yield on high quality corporate bonds will reduce the discount rate and, thus, increase the value placed on

the scheme’s liabilities.

Inflation risk

The present value of the liabilities is calculated by reference to a best estimate of future inflation. If inflation turns out to be

higher than this estimate, then the deficit will increase.

Longevity risk

The present value of the liabilities is calculated using a best estimate of the life expectancy of scheme members. An increase

in life expectancies will increase the scheme’s liabilities.

The scheme is subject to regular actuarial valuations, which are usually carried out every three years. The next actuarial

valuation is due to be carried out with an effective date of 31 December 2025. These actuarial valuations are carried out in

accordance with the requirements of the Pensions Act 2004 and so include deliberate margins for prudence. This contrasts

with these accounting disclosures, which are determined using best estimate assumptions.

A formal actuarial valuation was carried out as at 31 December 2024. The results of that valuation have been projected to

31 December 2025 by a qualified independent actuary, and the next formal valuation will be 31 December 2027. The figures in

the following disclosure were measured using the Projected Unit Method.

20252024%%Retail Prices Index (RPI) 2.85 3.05Consumer Prices Index (CPI) 2.45 2.65Rate in increase to pensions in payment liable for Limited Price Indexation (LPI) 2.45 2.65Revaluation of deferred pensions 2.45 2.65Liabilities discount rate 5.60 5.55

215Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

28. Retirement benefit obligations continued

20252024Mortality assumptionsYearsYearsRetiring today (aged 65)Male 21.8 21.1Female 23.8 23.4Retiring in 20 years (currently aged 45)Male 23.5 22.1Female 25.0 24.6

The mortality assumptions adopted are the Self Administered Pension Schemes (SAPS) tables with allowance for future

improvements in line with Continuous Mortality Investigation (CMI) 2022 with an annual improvement of 1% per annum.

The sensitivities regarding the principal assumptions used to measure the scheme liabilities are set out below:

Impact on scheme liabilitiesIncrease in Decrease in Change in assumptionassumptionassumption£’000£’000Rate of inflation 0.25% 2,839 (3,018)Liabilities discount rate 0.25% (3,498) 3,667Rate of mortality 1 year 5,299 (5,209)

Amounts recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income in respect of the scheme are as follows:

20252024£’000£’000Service cost:Ongoing scheme expenses 790 698Net interest income (536) (347)Pension protection fund 7 36Pension expenses recognised in profit or loss 261 387Remeasurement on the net-defined benefit liability:Return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense) 6,091 12,978Actuarial loss/(gain) arising from changes in demographic assumptions 2,091 (255)Actuarial gain arising from changes in financial assumptions (2,820) (15,088)Actuarial loss arising from experience assumptions 1,565 169Actuarial loss/(gain) recognised in other comprehensive income 6,927 (2,196)Total 7,188 (1,809)

The amount included in the Statement of Financial Position arising from the group’s obligations in respect of the scheme is

as follows:

20252024£’000£’000Present value of scheme obligations (137,682) (138,220)Fair value of scheme assets 140,691 148,1503,009 9,930

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk216

28. Retirement benefit obligations continued

This amount is presented in the Statement of Financial Position as follows:

20252024£’000£’000Non-current assets 3,009 9,930

Movements in the present value of scheme obligations in the year were as follows:

20252024£’000£’000At 1 January 138,220 155,264Interest on obligation 7,427 6,940Actuarial losses 836 (15,174)Benefits paid (8,801)(8,810)At 31 December 137,682 138,220

Movements in the fair value of scheme assets in the year were as follows:

20252024£’000£’000At 1 January 148,150 162,990Interest income 7,963 7,287Actuarial losses on scheme assets (6,091) (12,978)Employer contributions 260 360Benefits paid (8,801) (8,811)Ongoing scheme expenses (790)(698)At 31 December 137,682 148,150

The categories of plan assets are as follows:

20252024£’000£’000Quoted investments, including pooled diversified growth funds: Equity 12,395 18,100Diversified credit funds 29,316 39,381Asset backed securities 10,471 –Cash and net current assets 4,831 4,052Unquoted investments:Direct lending 5,116 8,502Multi-asset credit 15,340 12,154Liability-driven investment 40,641 37,816Infrastructure 10,583 10,784Special situations 11,99817,361At 31 December 140,691 148,150

The weighted average duration of the defined benefit obligation is 11 years (2024: 11 years).

The current estimated amount of total contributions expected to be paid to the scheme during the 2025 financial year is £nil,

being £nil payable by the group and £nil payable by scheme members.

The company’s level of recovery plan funding to the scheme is £nil per month from January 2026 to December 2026, with an

ongoing provision to increase contributions to £300,000 if the scheme is in deficit over £3.0m for two quarters. In addition to

this, the company contributes a further £260,000 per annum towards the administration expenses of the scheme.

217Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

28. Retirement benefit obligations continued

On 16 June 2023, the High Court handed down a judgement in the case Virgin Media vs. NTL Trustees II Limited. The

case centred on changes to the rules of pension schemes that were contracted out of SERPS. The law required that,

before amending a scheme’s rules, the trustees needed to obtain written confirmation from the scheme actuary that

the amended benefits would still meet the minimum level. The actuary’s written confirmation is commonly known as a

Section 37 certificate.

The judgement handed down in the Virgin Media case confirmed the position under the law and held that any rule

amendments made without the actuarial confirmation having been obtained would be void.

The group’s scheme was contracted out over the relevant period and several rule amendments that affected members’

benefits were made in that time. The Trustees have conducted a preliminary search of their records and have located most,

but not all, of the Section 37 certificates. An exhaustive search has not yet been completed.

In June 2025, the UK government announced its intention to introduce legislative changes to give affected pension schemes

the ability to retrospectively obtain the required actuarial confirmation. These changes are part of the current Pension

Schemes Bill, which is expected to be enacted in mid to late 2026. If the original Section 37 certificates cannot be located for

the group’s scheme, then it is expected that these new provisions will be used to provide retrospective confirmation.

29. Related party transactions

Transactions between the company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation and

are disclosed below:

20252024Parent Company£’000£’000Management charges receivable 7,693 6,552Interest payable (221) (264)Rents payable (29) (108)Recharge of expenses (6) (10)

Transactions between the company and its remaining related parties are as follows:

20252024Purchases of goods and services£’000£’000Related companies of key management personnel (amounts paid for Non-executive Director services) 56 54

Amounts owing by related parties (note 18) or to related parties (note 23) are unsecured, repayable on demand and will be

settled in cash. The group is committed to the ongoing funding of some joint ventures and associates where the entity has

made commitments to deliver specific schemes. No guarantees have been given or received. No significant provisions have

been made for impaired receivables in respect of the amounts owed by related parties. Other than as disclosed above and in

note 16, there are no further related party transactions with joint ventures and associates.

Remuneration of key management personnel

The key management personnel of the group are the Board of Directors and members of the Executive Committee, as

presented on pages 92 to 93 and 94 to 95. They are responsible for making all of the strategic decisions of the group and

its subsidiaries, as detailed on pages 27 and 45. The remuneration of the Board of Directors is set out in the Remuneration

Report on pages 134 to 151. The remuneration of the relevant eight (2024: six) members who served in the Senior

Management Team is set out below, in aggregate, for each of the categories specified in IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’.

Board of Directors Other key management2025202420252024£’000£’000£’000£’000Short term employee benefits 1,537 1,730 1,937 2,027Post-employment benefits 68 10 177 138Share-based payments – – 36 –1,605 1,740 2,150 2,165

There were no termination payments or long term benefits paid to the Board of Directors or key management personnel.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk218

30. Share capital

Authorised, allotted, issuedand fully paid20252024£’000£’000400,000 5.25% cumulative preference shares of £1 each (2024: 400,000) 400 4001134,110,155 ordinary shares of 10p each (2024: 134,010,541)13,41113,40113,811 13,801

1

Including treasury shares.

The company has one class of ordinary share, which carries no rights to fixed income, but which entitles the holder thereof to

receive notice of and attend and vote at general meetings or appoint a proxy to attend on their behalf. During the year, 99,614

ordinary shares (2024: 24,778) were issued in satisfaction of share option exercises.

Subject to Board approval, the preference shares carry the right to a cumulative preferential dividend payable half yearly at

the rate of 5.25% per annum. They also carry a right, in priority to the ordinary equity, on a return of assets on a winding-up or

reduction of capital, to repayment of capital, together with the arrears of any preferential dividend. With the exception of any

resolution proposed to directly affect the rights or privileges of the holders of the preference shares, the holders thereof are

not entitled to receive notice of, be present or vote at any general meeting of the company.

Share-based payments

The company operates the following share-based payment arrangements:

(i) The Henry Boot 2010 Sharesave Plan

This savings-related share option plan was approved by shareholders in 2010 and is HMRC approved. Grants of options to

participating employees were made on 3 October 2019 at a price of 224.0p at a discount of 9.7%, on 5 October 2020 at a

price of 237.0p at a discount of 6.0%, on 15 October 2021 at a price of 225.0p at a discount of 20.5%, on 21 October 2022 at

a price of 198.0p at a discount of 15.7%, on 20 October 2023 at a price of 155.0p at a discount of 15.3%, on 3 October 2024

at a price of 183.0p at a discount of 20.4% and on 17 October 2025 at a price of 1.76 at a discount of 18.5%. These become

exercisable for a six-month period from 1 December 2022, 1 December 2023, 1 December 2024, 1 December 2025,

1 December 2026, 1 December 2027 and 1 December 2028 respectively. There are no performance criteria attached to the

exercise of these options, which are normally capable of exercise up to six months after the third anniversary of the Sharesave

contract commencement date. The right to exercise options terminates if a participating employee leaves the group, subject

to certain exceptions.

Options Options outstanding at outstanding at 1 January Options Options Options 31 December 20252025grantedlapsedexercised2025October 2021 grant 50,400 – (8,960) (1,840) 39,600October 2022 grant 157,451 – (13,452) (65,356) 78,643October 2023 grant 1,428,751 – (100,777) (35,617) 1,292,357October 2024 grant 297,477 – (78,883) – 218,594October 2025 grant–213,539 (4,665) – 208,874Weighted average exercise price 164p 176p 172p 184p 164p

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised during the year was 216.00p

(2024: 222.34p).

219Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

30. Share capital continued

Options Options outstanding at outstanding at 1 January Options Options Options 31 December 20242024grantedlapsedexercised2024October 2019 grant 1,607 – (1,607) – –October 2020 grant 80,824 – (80,824) – –October 2021 grant 99,136 – (42,000) (6,736) 50,400October 2022 grant 234,716 – (76,811) (454) 157,451October 2023 grant 1,587,303 – (151,973) (6,579) 1,428,751October 2024 grant – 297,47 7 – – 297,47 7Weighted average exercise price 167p 183p 192p 191p 164p

(ii) The Henry Boot 2015 Long Term Incentive Plan

This plan was approved by shareholders at an AGM held on 21 May 2015. Details of the plan and the vesting requirements are

also set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Policy, which is available to view on the website.

In respect of (ii) above, the aggregate total of movements in share options granted and awards of shares is as follows:

20252024NumberNumberShare options granted at 1 January 3,147,462 2,202,108Lapses of share options in year (748,000) (433,560)Awards of shares in year – (95,130)Share options granted in year 1,176,282 1,474,044Share options granted at 31 December 3,575,744 3,147,462

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised during the year was nil

(2024: 205.00p). The weighted average exercise price of all share options issued in the scheme is £nil. Additional shares have

been awarded in the year based at a dividend equivalent value over the vesting period.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk220

30. Share capital continued

(iii) The Henry Boot PLC 2010 and 2020 Approved Company Share Options Plans

These plans, more commonly known a CSOP, were approved by shareholders in 2010 for grants before May 2020, and in

2020 for grants after 2020.Any full-time Director or employee (full-time or part-time) is eligible to participate at the discretion

of the Remuneration Committee of the Board. Options are granted by deed with no consideration payable by the participant.

The aggregate subscription price at the date of grant of all outstanding options granted to any one participant under the plan

and any other HMRC-approved plan operated by the company (but excluding options granted under any savings-related

share option plan) must not exceed £60,000. The aggregate market value at the date of grant of ordinary share options,

which may be granted to any one participant in any one financial year of the company, shall not normally exceed two times

the amount of a participant’s remuneration for that financial year. The Remuneration Committee may impose objective

conditions as to the performance of the group, which must normally be satisfied before options can be exercised. Options

are normally exercisable only within the period of 3–10 years after the date of grant. The right to exercise options, generally,

terminates if a participant leaves the group, subject to certain exceptions. The second grant of options under the plan was

made to certain senior employees (none of whom, at the time, were Directors of group companies) on 1 October 2014 at

an option price of 191.0p. The third grant of options under the plan was made to certain senior employees (none of whom,

at the time, were Directors of group companies) on 6 October 2017 at an option price of 298.9p. The fourth grant of

options under the plan was made to certain employees (two of whom, at the time, were Directors of group companies) on

14 September 2018 at an option price of 291.0p. The fifth grant of options under the plan was made to certain employees (two

of whom, at the time, were Directors of group companies) on 3 October 2019 at an option price of 249.0p. The sixth grant of

options under the plan was made to certain employees (none of whom, at the time, were Directors of group companies) on

5 October 2020 at an option price of 263.0p. The seventh grant of options under the plan was made to certain employees

(none of whom, at the time, were Directors of group companies) on 29 September 2021 at an option price of 281.0p. The

eighth grant of options under the plan was made to certain employees (none of whom, at the time, were Directors of group

companies) on 5 October 2022 at an option price of 247.0p. The ninth grant of options under the plan was made to certain

employees (none of whom, at the time, were Directors of group companies) on 4 October 2023 at an option price of 194.0p.

The tenth grant of options under the plan was made to certain employees (none of whom, at the time, were Directors of

group companies) on 3 October 2024 at an option price of 229.0p. The eleventh grant of options under the plan was made to

certain employees (none of whom, at the time, were Directors of group companies) on 1 October 2025 at an option price of

220.0p. There were no performance conditions imposed on either of these grants.

Options Options outstanding at outstanding at 1 January Options Options Options 31 December 20252025grantedlapsedexercised2025October 2017 grant 38,483 – (1,674) – 36,809September 2018 grant 119,738 – (12,372) – 107,366October 2019 grant 250,239 – (28,718) – 221,521October 2020 grant 260,441 – (32,888) – 227,553September 2021 grant 299,094 – (34,881) – 264,213October 2022 grant 476,774 – (60,557) – 416,217October 2023 grant 611,996 – (96,553) (6,679) 508,764October 2024 grant 581,026 – (86,136) (569) 494,321October 2025 grant – 383,193 (15,074) (46) 368,073Weighted average exercise price 239p 220p 234p 197p 237p

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised during the year was 245.65p (2024:

225.76p).

221Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

30. Share capital continued

Options Options outstanding at outstanding at 1 January Options Options Options 31 December 20242024grantedlapsedexercised2024October 2014 grant 10,000 – – (10,000) –October 2017 grant 51,867 – (13,384) – 38,483September 2018 grant 135,548 – (15,810) – 119,738October 2019 grant 268,498 – (18,259) – 250,239October 2020 grant 278,282 – (17,841) – 260,441September 2021 grant 329,837 – (30,743) – 299,094October 2022 grant 541,892 – (65,118) – 476,774October 2023 grant 711,467 – (98,462) (1,009) 611,996October 2024 grant – 590,416 (9,390) – 581,026Weighted average exercise price 241p 229p 237p – 239p

Fair value

Fair value is measured by a Monte Carlo pricing model using the following assumptions:

Weighted average Weighted average Expected Expected Risk-free Expected exercise priceshare pricevolatilityliferatedividend yield29.37% 0.00% 1.95% LTIP £nil 181.5p to 324.0pto 38.73% 3 yearsto 4.34%to 3.24%CSOP 2014 191.0p 191.0p 31.17% 3 years 1.23% 3.16%CSOP 2017 298.9p 309.0p 30.37% 3 years 0.51% 3.02%CSOP 2018 291.0p 291.0p 29.28% 3 years 0.91% 2.90%CSOP 2019 249.0p 249.0p 29.25% 3 years 0.28% 3.24%CSOP 2020 263.0p 263.0p 38.07% 3 years 0.00% 2.61%CSOP 2021 281.0p 281.0p 38.60% 3 years 0.41% 2.49%CSOP 2022 247.0p 250.0p 38.25% 3 years 4.15% 1.95%CSOP 2023 194.0p 192.0p 30.05% 3 years 4.54% 2.37%CSOP 2024 229.0p 235.0p 30.38% 3 years 3.72% 2.83%CSOP 2025 220.0p 222.0p 27.66% 3 years 3.86% 3.24%Sharesave 2019 224.0p 248.0p 29.25% 3 years 0.28% 3.24%Sharesave 2020 237.0p 263.0p 38.07% 3 years 0.00% 2.61%Sharesave 2021 225.0p 2.83.0p 38.60% 3 years 0.58% 2.49%Sharesave 2022 198.0p 235.0p 38.25% 3 years 3.89% 1.95%Sharesave 2023 155.0p 183.0p 30.05% 3 years 4.53% 2.37%Sharesave 2024 183.0p 230.0p 30.38% 3 years 3.75% 2.83%Sharesave 2025 176.0p 216.0p 27.66% 3 years 3.74% 3.24%

The volatility measured at the standard deviation of continuously compounded share returns is based on statistical analysis of

daily share prices over the last three years.

The weighted average fair value of share options granted during the year was 84.93p (2024: 72.52p).

Expense recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

20252024£’000£’000The total expense recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income arising from share-based payment transactions 2,100 1,841

The total expense recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income arose solely from equity-settled

share-based payment transactions.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk222

31. Reserves

OtherProperty Retained Capital Share Total revaluationearningsredemptionpremiumCapitalotherGroup£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000At 1 January 2024 1,011 383,219 271 7,768 209 8,248Profit for the year – 23,333 – – – –Dividends paid – (10,019) – – – –Proceeds from shares issued – – – 45 – 45Arising on employee share schemes – 1,611 – – – –Realised gain on disposal of investment property – – – – – –Increase in fair value in year 64 – – – – –Deferred tax on revaluation surplus (67) – – – – –Actuarial gain on defined benefit pension scheme – 2,196 – – – –Deferred tax on actuarial loss – (549) – – – –At 31 December 2024 1,008 399,791 271 7,813 209 8,293Profit for the year – 23,517 – – – –Transfer between reserves (240) 240 – – – –Acquisition of subsidiary – – – – (9,741) (9,741)Dividends paid – (10,535) – – – –Proceeds from shares issued – – – 177 – 177Arising on employee share schemes – 2,100 – – – –Increase in fair value in year 25 – – – – –Deferred tax on revaluation surplus 63 – – – – –Actuarial gain on defined benefit pension scheme – (6,927) – – – –Deferred tax on actuarial loss – 1,732 – – – –At 31 December 2025 856 409,918 271 7,990 (9,532) (1,271)

OtherRetained Investment Capital Share Total earnings revaluationredemption premium Capital other Parent Company£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000At 1 January 2024102,833 1,135 271 7,768 211 9,385Profit for the year21,855 – – – – –Dividends paid(10,019) – – – – –Premium arising from shares issued– – – 45 – 45Arising on employee share schemes1,611 – – – – –Actuarial gain on defined benefit pension scheme2,196 – – – – –Deferred tax on actuarial loss(549) – – – – –At 31 December 2024117,927 1,135 271 7,813 211 9,430Profit for the year38,559 – – – – –Dividends paid(10,535) – – – – –Premium arising from shares issued– – – 177 – 177Arising on employee share schemes1,097 – – – – –Actuarial gain on defined benefit pension scheme(6,927) – – – – –Deferred tax on actuarial loss1,732 – – – – –At 31 December 2025141,853 1,135 271 7,990 211 9,607

223Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

31. Reserves continued

Property revaluation reserve

The property revaluation reserve represents the unrealised surpluses arising on revaluation of the group occupied land and

buildings and is not available for distribution until realised on disposal.

Retained earnings

Retained earnings represent the accumulated profits and losses of the group. This reserve is distributable to the extent it does

not arise from revaluation gains.

Capital redemption reserve

The capital redemption reserve represents the purchase and cancellation by the company of its own shares and comprises

the aggregate nominal value of all the ordinary shares repurchased and cancelled. This reserve in not distributable.

Share premium reserve

The share premium reserve represents the difference between the sums received from the issue of shares and their nominal

value net of share issue expenses. This reserve is not distributable.

Capital reserve

The capital reserve represents realised profits arising on the disposal of investments and is available for distribution.

Investment revaluation reserve

This reserve was carried forward from previous accounting framework, and represents accumulated unrealised revaluation

gains. This is distributable only when the related investment in subsidiaries are sold or impaired.

32. Cost of shares held by the ESOP trust

20252024£’000£’000At 1 January 645 875Disposals –(230)At 31 December 645 645

Quoted investments represent own shares held by the Henry Boot PLC Employee Trust as an ESOP to provide an incentive to

greater ownership of shares in the company by its employees.

At 31 December 2025, the Trustee held 267,730 shares (2024: 267,730 shares) with a cost of 645,492 (2024: £645,492) and

a market value of £602,394 (2024: £615,780). All of these shares were committed to satisfy existing grants by the company

under the Henry Boot PLC 2015 Long Term Incentive Plan. In accordance with IAS 32, these shares are deducted from

shareholders’ funds. Under the terms of the Trust, the Trustee has waived all dividends on the shares it holds.

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk224

33. Cash generated from operations

Group Parent Company2025202420252024Note£’000£’000£’000£’000Profit before tax - continuing operations 26,417 28,369 32,827 17,733Profit before tax - discontinued operations 2,6492,291––Profit before tax 29,066 30,660 32,827 17,733Adjustments for:Amortisation of intangibles 11 581 522 84 –Goodwill impairment 11 – 1,040 – –Depreciation and impairment of property, plant and equipment 12 3,899 4,063 621 593Depreciation of right-of-use assets 13 883 857 353 326Revaluation (increase)/decrease in investment properties 14 (2,087) (4,464) – –Amortisation of capitalised letting fees 3 19 34 – –Share-based payment expense 4 2,100 1,841 778 706Pension scheme debit/(credit) 530 338 530 338Movements on provision against loans to subsidiaries – – – (1)(Profit)/loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 3 (596) (151) 2 1Profit on disposal of equipment held for hire 3 (66) (1,156) – –Gain on disposal of investment properties (512) (102) – –Profit on disposal of assets held for sale (887) – – –Gain on disposal of joint ventures – – – –Finance income 5 (3,940) (5,115) (969) (699)Profit on disposal of investment – – (2,000) –Dividends received from subsidiaries – – (46,694) (35,484)Finance costs 6 7,975 8,678 6,651 6,891Share of profit of joint ventures and associates16(1,727)(2,431)––Operating cash flows before movements in equipment held for hire 35,238 34,614 (4,817) (9,596)Purchase of equipment held for hire 12 (1,942) (4,183) – –Proceeds on disposal of equipment held for hire 5091,550––Operating cash flows before movements in working capital 33,805 31,981 (4,817) (9,596)Increase in inventories (35,466) (35,253) – –(Increase)/decrease in receivables (34,646) 18,791 5,838 12,402Decrease in contract assets 100 966 – –Increase/(decrease) in payables and provisions 21,528 22,266 (527) 1,129(Decrease)/increase in contract liabilities (1,398)3,822––Cash generated from operations (16,077) 42,573 494 3,935

225Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Net debt is an alternative performance measure used by the group and comprises the following:

Group Parent Company2025202420252024Analysis of net debt: Note£’000£’000£’000£’000Cash and cash equivalents 8,399 16,764 4,803 9,535Bank overdrafts27––(9)(42)Net cash and cash equivalents 8,399 16,764 4,794 (9,493)Bank loans 27 (112,000) (72,500) (112,000) (72,500)Other loans (1,092)(3,035)––Lease liabilities13(3,332)(3,912)(1,578)(1,971)Net debt (108,025) (62,683) (108,784) (64,978)

Group 2025

Reconciliation of liabilities from financing 1 January Cash flows New leases Other 31 December activities£’000£’000£’000£’000£’000Advances from joint ventures and associates 302 939 – – 1,241Bank loans 72,500 39,500 – – 112,000Other loans – sale and leaseback 3,035 (1,943) – – 1,092Lease liabilities 3,912 (941) 959 (598) 3,332Total liabilities from financing activities 79,749 37,555 959 (598) 117,665

Group 2024

1 January Cash flows New leases 31 December Reconciliation of liabilities from financing activities£’000£’000£’000£’000Advances from joint ventures and associates 377 (75) – 302Bank loans 83,500 (11,000) – 72,500Other loans – sale and leaseback 3,018 17 – 3,035Lease liabilities4,275 (694) 331 3,912Total liabilities from financing activities 91,170 (8,647) 331 79,749

Parent 2025

1 January Cash flows New leases 31 December Reconciliation of liabilities from financing activities£’000£’000£’000£’000Bank loans 72,500 39,500 – 112,000Lease liabilities 1,971 (488) 95 1,578Total liabilities from financing activities 74,471 39,012 95 113,578

Parent 2024

1 January Cash flows New leases 31 December Reconciliation of liabilities from financing activities£’000£’000£’000£’000Bank loans 83,500 (11,000) – 72,500Lease liabilities2,214 (161) (82) 1,971Total liabilities from financing activities 85,714 (11,161) (82) 74,471

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

33. Cash generated from operations continued

henryboot.co.uk226

  1. Guarantees and contingencies

The Parent Company has guaranteed the performance of certain contracts entered into by group undertakings in the

ordinary course of business. These guarantees are accounted for under IFRS 9 and are impracticable to quantify.

The Parent Company has given cross guarantees to certain of the group’s bankers and bondsmen in respect of facilities

available to group undertakings in the normal course of business. At the year end, amounts guaranteed against these facilities

were £112,000,000 and £30,563,000 respectively.

In the opinion of the Directors, no loss is expected to arise in connection with these matters.

35. Events after the balance sheet date

Since the balance sheet date, the group has proposed a final dividend for 2025. Further information can be found in note 10.

In December 2024, terms were agreed to take full ownership of Stonebridge Homes Group Limited, having exchanged

contracts to acquire the 50% share the group does not already own over a five year period. The first tranche of the transaction

completed in January 2025, resulting in Henry Boot becoming the majority shareholder and the second tranche completed in

January 2026.

There were no other significant events since the balance sheet date that may have a material effect on the financial position

or performance of the group.

  1. Additional information – subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates

Details of the company’s subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates, all of which are incorporated in England (unless otherwise

stated) and are either consolidated or equity accounted in the group Financial Statements at 31 December 2025, are

as follows:

Subsidiary name

Registered

number

Proportion

of ownership

Direct or

indirect Activity

Banner Plant Limited 00607575 100% Direct

Plant hire

Capitol Park Property Services Limited

2, 3

08795137 4.6% Indirect

Inactive

Comstock (Kilmarnock) Ltd.

3

SC166157 100% Indirect

Land promotion

Constructionend Limited

3

00976647 100% Direct

Inactive

First National Housing Trust Limited

3

00276288 100% Direct

Property investment

Glasgowend Limited

3

01576203 100% Direct

Inactive

Hallam Homes Limited

3

04804157 100% Direct

Inactive

Hallam Land Management Limited 02456711 100% Direct

Land promotion

HB Island Limited

3

11641820 100% Direct

Holding company

HBGP Limited

3

11641976 100% Direct

Holding company

HB Origin Limited 16099933 100% Direct

Holding company

HBD City Court Limited

3

13351580 100% Indirect

Property investment and

development

HBD Summerhill Limited

3

13285696 100% Indirect

Property investment and

development

HBD Dev Co 1 Limited

3

14128256 100% Indirect

Property investment and

development

HBD Golden Valley Limited

3

13966492 85% Indirect

Property development

HBD GP Limited

3

16096484 100% Direct

Holding company

HBD Spark Limited

3

16096078 100% Indirect

Inactive

Henry Boot & Sons Limited

3

04066798 100% Direct

Inactive

Henry Boot Biddenham Limited

3

05901324 100% Direct Land promotion

Henry Boot Construction Limited (formerly

Henry Boot Inner City Limited)

3

02145413 100% Direct Holding company

Henry Boot Deansgate Limited

3

15269405 100% Indirect

Property investment and

development

Henry Boot Developments Limited 01390361 100% Direct

Property investment and

development

227Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Subsidiary name

Registered

number

Proportion

of ownership

Direct or

indirect Activity

Henry Boot Cornwall House Limited

3

11176009 100% Indirect Property development

Henry Boot Estates Limited 00276603 100% Direct Property investment

Henry Boot Homes Limited

3

04804114 100% Direct Inactive

Henry Boot Investments 1 Limited

3

03125802 100% Indirect Holding company

Henry Boot ‘K’ Limited

3

06386834 100% Indirect

Property investment and

development

Henry Boot Land Holdings Limited

3

04570294 100% Direct Holding company

Henry Boot (Launceston) Limited

3

09276678 100% Direct Land promotion

Henry Boot Leasing Limited

3

03248776 100% Direct Motor vehicle leasing to Group

Henry Boot (Manchester) Limited

3

06051156 100% Direct Property development

Henry Boot Nottingham Limited

3

08682793 100% Indirect Inactive

Henry Boot Projects Limited

3

01679963 100% Direct Inactive

Henry Boot Scotland Limited

3

03996796 100% Direct Inactive

Henry Boot Swindon Limited

3

06051131 100% Direct Inactive

Henry Boot Tamworth Limited

3

05901334 100% Indirect Inactive

Henry Boot Wentworth Limited

3

01670475 100% Direct Property development

Investments (North West) Limited

3

06956932 100% Indirect Property development

Marboot Centregate Ltd

3

09662598 100% Indirect Property development

Marboot Centregate 2 Limited

3

10129169 100% Indirect Property development

Moore Street Securities Limited 02493145 100% Direct Employee benefit trust

Road Link (A69) Holdings Limited 03125851 61.2% Indirect Holding company

Road Link (A69) Limited 03125840 61.2% Indirect PFI road maintenance

St John’s Manchester Limited

3

12276168 100% Indirect Property development

Saltwoodend Limited

3

05075297 100% Indirect Inactive

SJ Manchester Limited Partnership

3

LP022152 100% Indirect Inactive

SJM GP Limited

3

13665805 100% Indirect Holding company

SJM (Nominee) Limited

3

13666505 100% Indirect Holding company

Stonebridge Homes Group Limited

1, 3

12065057 62.5% Indirect Holding company

Stonebridge Homes Limited

1

07279118 62.5% Indirect Property development

Stonebridge Offices Limited

1, 3

07728107 62.5% Indirect Property investment

Winter Ground Limited

3

04572581 100% Indirect Inactive

1

Stonebridge-related entities are included as subsidiaries due to the group’s additional voting rights, having two of the three Director appointments.

2

Subsidiary by virtue of management control.

3

Entities exempt from preparing audited statutory financial statements by virtue of s479A of Companies Act 2006.

Joint ventures and associates

Proportion

of ownership

Direct or

indirect Activity

Aptus 1 Propco Limited 25% Indirect Property development

Aptus 1 Holdco Limited 25% Indirect Holding company

Aytoun Street Developments Limited 50% Indirect Property development

Bigmouth Manchester Limited 50% Indirect Property development

Crimea Land Mansfield LLP 50% Indirect Land promotion

HBB Preston East Ltd 50% Indirect Property development

HBB Roman Way Limited 50% Indirect Property development

Henry Boot Barnfield Limited 50% Indirect Property development

Inter Holdco Limited

1

25% Indirect Holding company

Inter Propco Limited

1

25% Indirect Property development

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

36. Additional information – subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates continued

henryboot.co.uk228

Joint ventures and associates

Proportion

of ownership

Direct or

indirect Activity

Island Site Limited Partnership 50% Indirect Property development

Island Site (General Partner) Limited 50% Indirect Holding company

Island Site (Nominee) Limited 50% Indirect Property development

Kirklees Henry Boot Partnership Limited 50% Indirect Inactive

Markham Vale 6 Holdco Limited

1

25% Indirect Holding company

Markham Vale 6 Propco Limited

1

25% Indirect Property development

Markham Vale 9 Holdco Limited

1

25% Indirect Holding company

Markham Vale 9 Propco Limited

1

25% Indirect Property development

Montagu 406 Regeneration LLP 50% Indirect Property investment

MVNE LLP 50% Indirect Property development

Newmarket Lane Holding Limited 50% Indirect Holding company

Newmarket Lane Limited 50% Indirect Management company

Newmarket Lane Management Company Limited 50% Indirect Management company

Origin Logistics GP Limited

1

25% Indirect Property development

Origin Logistics LP

1

25% Indirect Holding company

Rainham HoldCo S.a.r.l.

1

20% Indirect Property investment and development

Road Link Limited

1

37.6% Indirect Inactive

Spark 1 Holdco Limited

1

25% Indirect Holding company

Spark 1 Propco Limited

1

25% Indirect Property development

Spark 2 Holdco Limited

1

25% Indirect Holding company

Spark 2 Propco Limited

1

25% Indirect Property development

1

Associate company.

The address of the registered office of all subsidiaries, joint venture and associates is the same as the Parent Company, with

the exception of:

• Road Link Limited, Road Link (A69) Limited and Road Link (A69) Holdings Limited, whose registered office is Stocksfield

Hall, Stocksfield, Northumberland NE43 7TN

• Comstock (Kilmarnock) Ltd., whose registered office is 48 St. Vincent Street, Glasgow G2 5HS

• Henry Boot Barnfield Limited, HBB Roman Way Limited and HBB Preston East Limited, whose registered office is 8

Kenyon Road, Lomeshaye Industrial Estate, Nelson, Lancashire, England, BB9 5SP

• Kirklees Henry Boot Partnership Limited, whose registered office is Legal Services, 2nd Floor Civic Centre 3,

Huddersfield, West Yorkshire, HD1 2WZ

• Island Site Limited Partnership, whose registered office is Guardsman Tony Downes House, 5 Manchester Road,

Droylsden, Tameside, M43 6SF

• Crimea Land Mansfield LLP; whose registered office is C/O Harworth Group, Advantage House Poplar Way, Catcliffe,

Rotherham, S60 5TR

• Rainham HoldCo S.a.r.l., whose registered office is 1 Rue Isaac Newton, L-2242, Luxembourg

Management Companies

The companies listed below are Management Companies (MCs). All MCs are companies limited by guarantee without share

capital (unless otherwise stated) and incorporated in the UK. The capital, reserves and profit or loss for the year has not

been stated for these MCs as beneficial interest in any assets or liabilities of these companies are not held by the group, and

the group are not exposed to variable returns from the MC’s. These companies have not been included in the consolidated

accounts, are temporary members of the group and will be handed over to residents or property owners in due course.

MCs controlled by the group

Woodside Park Newlay Estate Management Company Limited, Fox Valley Management Company Limited

1

, Moorlands

Cleckheaton Management Company Limited, Brookfield Garth Hampsthwaite Management Company Limited, Kingsley

36. Additional information – subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates continued

229

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Road Harrogate Management Company Limited, Weyland Road Management Company Limited, Willow Crest Cawood

Management Company Limited, The Willows Whinney Lane Management Company Limited, Victoria Gardens (Headingley)

Management Company Ltd

1

, Derry Hill Menston Management Company Limited, Hawbank Field Skipton Management

Company Limited, Branton Lane Go Management Company Limited, Carr Road Deepcar Management Company Limited,

Grainger Park Goldsborough Management Company Limited, Hatfield Lane Armthorpe Management Company Limited,

Heathlands (Wakefield) Residents Management Company Limited, Merlin Drive SH Management Company Limited, The

Pastures Hibaldstow Management Company Limited, Nightingale Chase (Guisborough) Management Company Limited,

Oakland Park (Masham) Management Company Limited, Regency Place (Chapelgarth) Management Company Limited,

The Oaks (Morpeth) Management Company Limited, Woodland Place (Middlesborough) Management Company Limited,

Airport Business Park Southend Management Limited, Airport Business Park (Quad) Management Limited, Butterfield

Quad Management Company Limited, Butterfield Quad 2 Management Company Limited, Capital Park Property Services

Limited, Chocolate Works York Management Company Limited, Clock Tower (York) Management Company Limited, IAMP

Management Company Limited, SETL Management Company Limited, Spark Walsall Management Company Limited and

Wyvern Park Skipton Management Company Limited.

1

Company limited by share capital.

  1. Partly owned subsidiaries

In January 2025, we increased our ownership in Stonebridge Homes Limited (Stonebridge) to 62.5% as part of the transaction

agreed in December 2024 to take full ownership by 2030. The deal is structured to complete in three tranches, with the total

purchase price linked to the performance of Stonebridge over this period. Post period end, in February 2026, we increased

our ownership further to 75%. The third and final tranche to acquire the remaining 25% is expected to be completed in

January 2030, with consideration payable in 2030 and 2031.

The Group continues to control Stonebridge, and accordingly the transaction has been accounted for as an equity transaction

in accordance with IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements. As such, no gain or loss has been recognised in profit or loss.

The carrying amount of non-controlling interests in Stonebridge immediately before the transaction was £1,236,000.

The reduction in non-controlling interest arising from the change in ownership interest was £309,000, and the difference

between this amount and the consideration paid has been recognised directly in equity and attributed to the owners of the

parent. A summary of the effects on the Group’s equity is as follows:

2025£’000Consideration paid 10,050Decrease in non-controlling interest (309)Adjustment recognised directly in equity 9,741

Financial information of subsidiaries that have material non-controlling interests is provided below:

20252024Name Country of incorporation£’000£’000Stonebridge Homes Limited England 62.5% 50%Road Link (A69) Limited England 61.2% 61.2%20252024Name£’000£’000Accumulated balances of material non-controlling interest:Stonebridge Homes Limited (3,993) 1,054Road Link (A69) Limited 1,3991,846Profit allocated to material non-controlling interest:Stonebridge Homes Limited (4,673) (1,527)Road Link (A69) Limited 1,687 1,832

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

36. Additional information – subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates continued

henryboot.co.uk230

  1. Partly owned subsidiaries continued

The summarised financial information of these subsidiaries is provided below. This information is based on amounts before

inter-company eliminations.

Stonebridge Homes Road Link (A69) LimitedLimited2025202420252024£’000£’000£’000£’000Summarised statement of profit or lossRevenue 69,747 100,745 14,963 14,864Cost of sales (71,955) (91,614) (8,227) (7,808)Administrative and other expenses (7,110) (7,177) (1,101) (756)Net finance costs (7,436)(6,060)162(5)Profit/(loss) before tax (16,754) (4,106) 5,797 6,295Tax 4,2891,052(1,450)(1,574)Profit/(loss) for the year (12,465)(3,054)4,3474,721Total comprehensive (expense)/income (12,465) (3,054) 4,347 4,721Attributable to non-controlling interests (4,673) (1,527) 1,687 1,832Dividends paid to non-controlling interests –2708281,843Summarised balance sheetNon-current assets 3,471 1,529 121 619Inventories 156,378 110,276 – –Trade and other receivables 2,293 6,736 3,953 3,242Cash and cash equivalents 503 348 1,658 4,810Current liabilities (140,377) (116,724) (2,127) (3,730)Non-current liabilities (12,743)(58)–(182)Net assets 9,525 2,107 3,605 4,759Less non-voting shares only attributable to Parent (20,000) – – –Net assets attributable to equity holders (10,475) 2,107 3,605 4,759Equity holders of Parent 13,453 1,054 2,206 2,913Non-controlling interest (3,928)1,0541,3991,846Summarised cash flowOperating (20,123) 1,362 2,038 4,233Investing (49) (281) 310 221Financing –(540)(5,500)(4,750)Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents (20,172) 541 (3,152) (296)

231Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

  1. Discontinued operations

On 31 December 2025 the Group, disposed of its 100% interest in HBC Construction Limited (formerly Henry Boot

Construction Limited) for a total consideration of £4,000,000 to the current management team. The transaction is funded

through vendor loan notes issued by the group and includes potential future payments subject to performance. The

agreement also makes certain guarantees to HBC Construction Limited relating to performance bonds and credit insurance.

The fair value of these guarantees is include in the profit and loss on disposal.

2025£’000Sales proceeds 4,000Book value of assets –Fair value of guarantees provided (2,000)Profit on disposal 2,000

The results of HBC Construction Limited for the year are presented below:

20252024£’000£’000Revenue 55,427 49,578Expenses (54,762) (51,855)Operating profit 665 (2,277)Finance income/(cost) (20)(14)Profit/(loss) before tax from discontinued operations 645 (2,291)Tax (469)404Profit/(loss) for the year from discontinued operations 176 (1,887)

Profits from discontinued operations, comprising the results of HBC Construction Limited and the profit on disposal amount

to £2,176,000 (2024: £1,887,000).

The major classes of assets and liabilities of HBC Construction Limited at the disposal date were as follows:

2025£’000AssetsProperty, plant and equipment 69Right-of-use assets 634Contract assets 32Trade and other receivables 12,847Cash 9,051LiabilitiesTrade and other payables (22,007)Lease liabilities (626)Net assets directly associated with disposal group –

Notes to the

financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025 continued

henryboot.co.uk232

The net cash flows incurred by HBC Construction Limited are as follows:

20252024£’000£’000Operating 32,597 12,010Investing 2,412 3,171Financing (26,095)(15,000)Net cash flow 8,914 181

p

20252024Earnings per share£’000£’000Basic, profit/(loss) for the year from discontinued operations 1.6p (1.4)Diluted, profit/(loss) for the year from discontinued operations 1.6p(1.4)p

  1. Discontinued operations continued

233

Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Shareholder

information

henryboot.co.uk234

Shareholder Information

Notice of Annual General Meeting

236

Financial calendar

240

Advisers

240

Group contact information

241

Glossary

242

235Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Notice of Annual General Meeting

THIS DOCUMENT IS IMPORTANT and requires your

immediate attention. If you are in any doubt about the

action you should take, you should immediately consult

your stockbroker, bank manager, solicitor, accountant or

other independent professional adviser authorised under

the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. If you have

sold or otherwise transferred all your shares in Henry Boot

PLC, please forward this document and the accompanying

Form of Proxy to the person through whom the sale or

transfer was effected, for transmission to the purchaser

or transferee.

The Board of Henry Boot PLC considers all of the proposed

resolutions to be in the best interests of shareholders as a

whole and, accordingly, recommends that shareholders vote

in favour of all the resolutions proposed.

Notice of Annual General Meeting

Notice is hereby given that the Annual General Meeting

(AGM) of Henry Boot PLC (Company) will be held at

DoubleTree by Hilton Sheffield City, Bramall Lane, Sheffield

S2 4SU on Thursday 21 May 2026 at 12.30pm, for the

following purposes:

To consider and, if thought fit, pass the following resolutions,

which will be proposed as ordinary resolutions of

the Company.

Resolution 1

To receive the Directors’ Report, Auditor’s Report, Strategic

Report and the Financial Statements for the year ended

31 December 2025

Resolution 2

To declare a final dividend of 4.62p per ordinary share

Resolution 3

To approve the Directors’ Remuneration Report (other than

the part containing the Directors’ Remuneration Policy) for

the year ended 31 December 2025

Resolution 4

To reappoint Timothy Roberts as a Director of the Company

Resolution 5

To reappoint Darren Littlewood as a Director of

the Company

Resolution 6

To reappoint Peter Mawson as a Director of the Company

Resolution 7

To reappoint Talita Ferreira as a Director of the Company

Resolution 8

To reappoint Serena Lang as a Director of the Company

Resolution 9

To reappoint Earl Sibley as a Director of the Company

Resolution 10

To reappoint James Sykes as a Director of the Company

Resolution 11

To reappoint Ernst & Young LLP as auditor of the Company

Resolution 12

To authorise the Audit and Risk Committee to fix the

auditor’s remuneration

Resolution 13

THAT, pursuant to Section 551 of the Companies Act 2006,

the Directors be and are, generally and unconditionally,

authorised to allot shares in the Company or to grant rights

to subscribe for, or to convert, any security into shares

in the Company up to an aggregate nominal amount of

£4,482,935, provided that (unless previously revoked, varied

or renewed) this authority shall expire on 21 August 2027

or at the conclusion of the next AGM of the Company

after the passing of this resolution, whichever is the earlier,

save that the Company may make an offer or agreement

before this authority expires, which would, or might, require

shares to be allotted or rights to subscribe for, or to convert,

any security into shares to be granted after this authority

expires and the Directors may allot shares or grant such

rights pursuant to any such offer or agreement as if this

authority had not expired. This authority is in substitution for

all existing authorities under Section 551 of the Companies

Act 2006 (which, to the extent unused at the date of this

resolution, are revoked with immediate effect).

To consider and, if thought fit, pass the following

resolutions, which will be proposed as special resolutions of

the Company.

henryboot.co.uk236

Resolution 14

THAT subject to the passing of Resolution 13, and pursuant

to Section 570 of the Companies Act 2006, the Directors

be, and are generally, empowered to allot equity securities

(within the meaning of Section 560 of the Companies

Act 2006) for cash pursuant to the authority granted by

Resolution 13 as if Section 561(1) of the Companies Act 2006

did not apply to any such allotment, provided that this power

shall be limited to the allotment of equity securities:

a. in connection with an offer of equity securities (whether

by way of a rights issue, open offer or otherwise):

i. to holders of ordinary shares in the capital of the

Company in proportion (as nearly as practicable) to

the respective numbers of ordinary shares held by

them; and

ii. to holders of other equity securities in the capital

of the Company, as required by the rights of those

securities or, subject to such rights, as the Directors

otherwise consider necessary,

but subject to such exclusions or other arrangements as

the Directors may deem necessary or expedient in relation

to treasury shares, fractional entitlements, record dates

or any legal or practical problems under the laws of any

territory or the requirements of any regulatory body or stock

exchange; and

b. otherwise than pursuant to paragraph a. of this resolution,

up to an aggregate nominal amount of £672,440,

and (unless previously revoked, varied or renewed) this

power shall expire on 21 August 2027 or at the conclusion

of the next AGM of the Company after the passing of this

resolution, whichever is the earlier, save that the Company

may make an offer or agreement before this power expires,

which would, or might, require equity securities to be

allotted for cash after this power expires, and the Directors

may allot equity securities for cash pursuant to any such

offer or agreement as if this power had not expired. This

power is in substitution for all existing powers under Section

570 of the Companies Act 2006 (which, to the extent

unused at the date of this resolution, are revoked with

immediate effect).

Resolution 15

THAT pursuant to Section 701 of the Companies Act

2006, the Company be, and is, hereby, generally and

unconditionally, authorised to make market purchases

(within the meaning of Section 693(4) of the Companies Act

2006) of ordinary shares of 10p each in the capital of the

Company (ordinary shares), provided that:

a. the maximum aggregate number of ordinary shares

hereby authorised to be purchased is 13,448,805;

b. the minimum price (excluding expenses), which may be

paid for an ordinary share is 10p;

c. the maximum price (excluding expenses), which may be

paid for an ordinary share is not more than the higher of:

i. an amount equal to 105% of the average of the middle

market quotations for an ordinary share as derived

from the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List

for the five business days immediately preceding the

day on which the purchase is made; and

ii. an amount equal to the higher of the price of the

last independent trade of an ordinary share and the

highest current independent bid for an ordinary

share on the trading venue where the purchase is

carried out;

d. the authority hereby conferred shall expire at

the conclusion of the next AGM of the Company

after the passing of this resolution or, if earlier, on

21 August 2027; and

e. the Company may make a contract to purchase ordinary

shares under the authority hereby conferred prior to

the expiry of such authority, which will, or may be,

completed or executed wholly or partly after the expiry of

such authority.

By order of the Board

Jaimie Read

Company Secretary

14 April 2026

Henry Boot PLC

Registered Office:

Isaacs Building

4 Charles Street

Sheffield

United Kingdom

S1 2HS

Registered in England and Wales No. 160996

237Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Notice of Annual General Meeting continued

Notes

1. The holders of preference shares in the Company are not

entitled to attend and vote at the AGM.

2. The right to vote at the meeting is determined by reference

to the register of members. Only those ordinary shareholders

registered in the register of members of the Company as at

the close of business on 19 May 2026 (or, if the meeting is

adjourned, at the close of business on the date that is two

working days before the date of the adjourned meeting) shall

be entitled to attend and vote at the meeting in respect of

the number of ordinary shares registered in their name at

that time. Changes to entries in the register of members after

that time shall be disregarded in determining the rights of any

person to attend or vote (and the number of votes they may

cast) at the meeting.

3. Voting on each resolution will be conducted by way of a poll.

The Company believes that a poll is more representative of

shareholders’ voting intentions because shareholder votes are

counted according to the number of votes held and all votes

tendered are taken into account. The results of the poll will be

announced to the London Stock Exchange and will be made

available on the Company’s website at henryboot.co.uk as

soon as practicable following the conclusion of the AGM.

4. An ordinary shareholder is entitled to appoint any other

person as their proxy to exercise all or any of their rights to

attend and to speak and vote at the meeting. A proxy need not

be a shareholder of the Company. An ordinary shareholder

may appoint more than one proxy in relation to the meeting,

provided that each proxy is appointed to exercise the rights

attached to a different ordinary share or ordinary shares

held by that ordinary shareholder. Failure to specify the

number of ordinary shares each proxy appointment relates

to or specifying a number, which, when taken together with

the numbers of ordinary shares set out in the other proxy

appointments, is in excess of the number of ordinary shares

held by the ordinary shareholder, may result in the proxy

appointment being invalid.

5. APPOINTMENT OF PROXY BY JOINT HOLDERS: In the

case of joint holders, where more than one of the joint

holders purports to appoint a proxy, only the appointment

submitted by the most senior holder will be accepted.

Seniority is determined by the order in which the names

of the joint holders appear in the Company’s register of

members in respect of the joint holders (first named being the

most senior).

6. A proxy may only be appointed in accordance with the

procedures set out in notes 7 to 9 below and the notes to the

form of proxy. The appointment of a proxy will not preclude

an ordinary shareholder from attending and voting in person

at the meeting.

  1. A form of proxy is enclosed with the notice issued to

holders of ordinary shares. When appointing more than one

proxy, complete a separate proxy form in relation to each

appointment. Additional proxy forms may be obtained by

contacting the Company’s registrar or the proxy form may be

photocopied. State clearly on each proxy form the number

of shares in relation to which the proxy is appointed. To

be valid, a form of proxy must be received by post (during

normal business hours only) at the offices of the Company’s

registrars: Computershare Investor Services PLC, The

Pavilions, Bridgwater Road, Bristol BS99 6ZY, no later than

12.30pm on 19 May 2026 (or, if the meeting is adjourned, 48

hours (excluding any part of a day that is not a working day)

before the time of any adjourned meeting).

8. As an alternative to completing the hard copy form of

proxy, an ordinary shareholder may appoint the Chair

as their proxy electronically using the online service at

investorcentre.co.uk/eproxy. For an electronic proxy

appointment to be valid, the appointment must be received

by Computershare Investor Services PLC no later than

12.30pm on 19 May 2026 (or, if the meeting is adjourned, no

later than 48 hours (excluding any part of a day that is not a

working day) before the time of any adjourned meeting).

Proxymity Voting – if you are an institutional investor, you may

also be able to appoint a proxy electronically via the Proxymity

platform, a process that has been agreed by the Company and

approved by the Company’s registrar. For further information

regarding Proxymity, please go to proxymity.io. Your proxy

must be lodged by 12.30pm on 19 May 2026 (or, if the meeting

is adjourned, no later than 48 hours (excluding any part of a

day that is not a working day) before the time of any adjourned

meeting) in order to be considered valid. Before you can

appoint a proxy via this process, you will need to have agreed

to Proxymity’s associated terms and conditions. It is important

that you read these carefully as you will be bound by them and

they will govern the electronic appointment of your proxy.

9. CREST members who wish to appoint a proxy or proxies

for the AGM (or any adjournment of it), through the CREST

electronic proxy appointment service, may do so by using the

procedures described in the CREST Manual, which is available

at euroclear.com. CREST personal members or other CREST

sponsored members, and those CREST members who have

appointed a voting service provider(s), should refer to their

CREST sponsor or voting service provider(s), who will be able

to take the appropriate action on their behalf.

In order for a proxy appointment or instruction made using the

CREST service to be valid, the appropriate CREST message (a

CREST Proxy Instruction) must be properly authenticated in

accordance with Euroclear UK & Ireland Limited’s specifications

and must contain the information required for such instructions,

as described in the CREST Manual. The message, regardless

of whether it constitutes the appointment of a proxy or is an

amendment to the instruction given to a previously appointed

proxy, must, in order to be valid, be transmitted so as to be

received by Computershare Investor Services PLC (ID: 3RA50)

no later than 12.30pm on 19 May 2026 (or, if the meeting is

adjourned, 48 hours (excluding any part of a day that is not a

working day) before the time of any adjourned meeting). For

this purpose, the time of receipt will be taken to be the time (as

determined by the timestamp applied to the message by the

CREST Applications Host) from which Computershare Investor

Services PLC is able to retrieve the message by enquiry to

CREST in the manner prescribed by CREST. After this time,

any change of instructions to proxies appointed through

CREST should be communicated to the appointee through

other means.

CREST members and, where applicable, their CREST sponsors

or voting service providers should note that Euroclear UK &

Ireland Limited does not make available special procedures in

CREST for any particular messages. Normal system timings and

limitations will, therefore, apply in relation to the input of CREST

Proxy Instructions. It is the responsibility of the CREST member

concerned to take (or, if the CREST member is a CREST

personal member or sponsored member or has appointed a

voting service provider(s)), to procure that their CREST sponsor

or voting service provider(s) take(s) such action as shall be

necessary to ensure that a message is transmitted by means of

the CREST system by any particular time. In this connection,

CREST members and, where applicable, their CREST sponsors

henryboot.co.uk238

or voting service providers are referred, in particular, to those

sections of the CREST Manual concerning practical limitations

of the CREST system and timings.

The Company may treat a CREST Proxy Instruction as invalid

in the circumstances set out in Regulation 35(5)(a) of the

Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001.

  1. An ordinary shareholder that is a corporation may authorise

one or more persons to act as its representative(s) at the

meeting. Each such representative may exercise (on behalf of

the corporation) the same powers as the corporation could

exercise if it were an individual shareholder, provided that

where there is more than one representative and the vote

is otherwise than on a show of hands, they do not do so in

relation to the same shares.

  1. Where a copy of this notice is being received by a person who

has been nominated to enjoy information rights under Section

146 of the Companies Act 2006 (Nominated Person):

a. the Nominated Person may have a right under an

agreement between them and the shareholder by whom

they were nominated to be appointed, or to have someone

else appointed, as a proxy for the meeting; or

b. if the Nominated Person has no such right or does not wish

to exercise such right, they may have a right under such an

agreement to give instructions to the shareholder as to the

exercise of voting rights.

The statement of the rights of ordinary shareholders in relation

to the appointment of proxies in notes 5 to 9 above does not

apply to a Nominated Person. The rights described in such

notes can only be exercised by ordinary shareholders of

the Company.

  1. A shareholder or shareholders having a right to vote at the

meeting and holding at least 5% of the total voting rights of

the Company (see note 17 below), or at least 100 shareholders

having a right to vote at the meeting and holding, on average,

at least £100 of paid up share capital, may require the

Company to publish on its website a statement setting out

any matter that such shareholders propose to raise at the

meeting relating to either the audit of the Company’s Financial

Statements (including the Auditor’s Report and the conduct

of the audit) that are to be laid before the meeting or any

circumstances connected with the auditor of the Company

ceasing to hold office since the last AGM of the Company in

accordance with Section 527 of the Companies Act 2006.

Any such request must:

a. identify the statement to which it relates, by either setting

out the statement in full or, if supporting a statement

requested by another shareholder, clearly identifying the

statement that is being supported;

b. comply with the requirements set out in note 13 below; and

c. be received by the Company at least one week before

the meeting.

Where the Company is required to publish such a statement

on its website:

i. it may not require the shareholders making the

request to pay any expenses incurred by the

Company in complying with the request;

ii. it must forward the statement to the Company’s

auditor no later than the time when it makes the

statement available on the website; and

iii. the statement may be dealt with as part of the

business of the meeting.

  1. Any request by a shareholder or shareholders to require the

Company to publish audit concerns as set out in note 12:

a. may be made either:

i. in hard copy, by sending it to the Company Secretary,

Henry Boot PLC, Isaacs Building, 4 Charles Street,

Sheffield S1 2HS; or

ii. in electronic form, by sending it by email to

[email protected]. Please state ‘Henry

Boot PLC: AGM’ in the subject line of the email;

b. must state the full name(s) and address(es) of the

shareholder(s); and

c. where the request is made in hard copy form, it must be

signed by the shareholder(s).

  1. Shareholders have the right to ask questions at the meeting

relating to the business being dealt with at the meeting in

accordance with Section 319A of the Companies Act 2006.

The Company must answer any such question unless:

a. to do so would interfere unduly with the preparation

for the meeting or would involve the disclosure of

confidential information;

b. the answer has already been given on a website in the form

of an answer to a question; or

c. it is undesirable in the interests of the Company or the

good order of the meeting that the question be answered.

  1. The information required by Section 311A of the Companies

Act 2006 to be published in advance of the meeting, which

includes the matters set out in this notice and information

relating to the voting rights of shareholders, is available at

henryboot.co.uk.

  1. Except as expressly provided above, shareholders who wish

to communicate with the Company in relation to the meeting

should do so using the following means:

a. telephone +44 114 255 5444; or

b. email [email protected].

No other methods of communication will be accepted.

  1. As at 7 April 2026 (being the last practicable date before

publication of this notice), the Company’s issued ordinary

share capital was 134,488,051 ordinary shares, carrying one

vote each and representing the total number of voting rights in

the Company.

  1. The following documents will be available for inspection

during normal business hours at the registered office of the

Company from the date of this notice until the time of the

meeting. They will also be available for inspection at the place

of the meeting from at least 15 minutes before the meeting

until it ends.

a. Copies of the service contracts of the Executive Directors.

b. Copies of the letters of appointment of the Non-executive

Directors.

19. Biographies for each of the Directors are shown on

pages 92 to 93 of the Annual Report for the year ended

31 December 2025.

239Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Financial calendar

Advisers

London Stock

Exchange announcements

Annual Results 2025:

24 March 2026

Interim Results 2026:

22 September 2026

Pre-close Trading Statement 2026:

end January 2027

Annual Report and

Financial Statements

Annual Report and Financial Statements 2025

(available and online):

by 21 April 2026

Annual General Meeting

21 May 2026

Dividends paid on ordinary shares

2025 Final dividend date (subject to approval at AGM):

29 May 2026

2026 Interim dividend date (subject to approval):

23 October 2026

Chartered Accountants

and Statutory Auditors

Ernst & Young LLP

12 Wellington Place

Leeds LS1 4AP

Bankers

Barclays Bank PLC

2nd Floor

1 Park Row

Leeds LS1 5WU

HSBC UK Bank Plc

City Point

29 Kings Street

Leeds LS1 2HL

National Westminster Bank PLC

2 Whitehall Quay

Leeds LS1 4HR

Corporate Finance

KPMG Corporate Finance

1 Sovereign Square

Sovereign Street

Leeds LS1 4DA

Financial PR

FTI Consulting

200 Aldersgate

Aldersgate Street

London EC1A 4HD

Registrars

Computershare Investor Services PLC

The Pavilions

Bridgwater Road

Bristol BS13 8AE

Solicitors – Corporate

DLA Piper UK LLP

Elshaw House

51 Carver Street

Sheffield S1 4FT

Solicitors – Operational

Addleshaw Goddard LLP

3 Sovereign Square

Sovereign Street

Leeds LS1 4ER

Stockbrokers

Deutsche Numis Securities Limited

Joint Corporate Broker

The London Stock Exchange Building

10 Paternoster Square

London EC4M 7LT

Peel Hunt LLP

Joint Corporate Broker

Moor House

120 London Wall

London EC2Y 5ET

henryboot.co.uk240

Group contact information

Land Promotion

Hallam Land

Management Limited

Registered office and Head office

Isaacs Building, 4 Charles Street,

Sheffield S1 2HS United Kingdom

t: +44 114 255 5444

e: i[email protected].uk

w: hallamland.co.uk

Regional offices

Bristol, Glasgow, Leeds, London and

Northampton

Property Investment

and Development

Henry Boot

Developments Limited

Registered office and Head office

Isaacs Building, 4 Charles Street,

Sheffield S1 2HS United Kingdom

t: +44 114 350 4477

e: hel[email protected]

w: hbd.co.uk

Regional offices

Birmingham, Bristol, Glasgow, Leeds,

London and Manchester

Stonebridge Homes Limited

Registered office

Isaacs Building, 4 Charles Street,

Sheffield S1 2HS United Kingdom

Head office

1 Featherbank Court, Horsforth, Leeds

LS18 4QF

t: +44 113 357 1100

e: [email protected]

w: stonebridgehomes.co.uk

Construction

Banner Plant Limited

Registered office

Isaacs Building, 4 Charles Street,

Sheffield, S1 2HS United Kingdom

Head office

Callywhite Lane, Dronfield, Derbyshire

S18 2XS

t: +44 1246 299 400

e: d[email protected]

w: bannerplant.co.uk

Hire centres

Chesterfield, Derby, Dronfield,

Leicester, Leeds, Rotherham and

Wakefield

241Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Overview Strategic report Governance Financial statements Shareholder information

Glossary

We have used some terms in this report to explain how

we run our business that might be unfamiliar to you. The

following list gives a definition for some of the more

frequently used terms:

Commercial property

This refers to buildings or land intended to generate a profit,

either from capital gain or rental income, such as office

building, industrial property, retail stores, etc.

Director

A statutory director of Henry Boot PLC.

Disclosure and Transparency Rules (DTR)

Issued by the United Kingdom Listing Authority.

Dividend

A distribution of a portion of a company’s earnings, decided

by the board of directors, to a class of its shareholders.

Earnings per share (EPS)

Profit for the period attributable to equity shareholders

divided by the average number of shares in issue during

the period.

ESG

Environmental, Social and Governance.

Gearing

Net debt expressed as a percentage of equity

shareholders’ funds.

IAS

International Accounting Standard.

IFRS

UK-adopted International Financial Reporting Standard.

SONIA

The effective overnight interest rate paid by banks for

unsecured transactions in the British sterling market.

Net asset value per share (NAV)

Equity shareholders’ funds divided by the number of shares

in issue at the balance sheet date.

NPPF

National Planning Policy Framework.

Operating profit

Profit earned from a company’s core activities.

Option agreement

A legal agreement between a landowner and another

party for the right to buy land within a set time scale at the

conclusion of a satisfactory planning permission.

Ordinary share

Any shares that are not preferred shares and do not have

any predetermined dividend amounts. An ordinary share

represents equity ownership in a company and entitles

the owner to a vote in matters put before shareholders in

proportion to their percentage ownership in the company.

PFI contract

A Private Finance Initiative contract is a contract between a

public body and a private company and involves the private

sector making capital investment in the assets required to

deliver improved services.

They are typified by long contract lengths, often 30 years

or more.

Planning Promotion Agreement (PPA)

A legal agreement between a landowner and another party

for a set time scale and financial consideration to promote

land through the UK planning system.

Pre-let

A lease signed with a tenant prior to completion of

a development.

Retail Prices Index (RPI)/Consumer Prices Index (CPI)

Monthly inflation indicators based on different ‘baskets’ of

products issued by the Office of National Statistics.

Return on average capital employed

(ROCE)/Capital Employed

Return on Capital Employed is an APM and is defined as

operating profit/capital employed where capital employed is

the average of total assets less current liabilities and pension

asset/obligation at the opening and closing balance sheet

dates. Before the revised classification of the group’s main

borrowing facility. Previously presented as current liabilities

these borrowings are now classified as non-current

henryboot.co.uk242

The production of this report supports the work of the

Woodland Trust, the UK’s leading woodland conservation

charity. Each tree planted will grow into a vital carbon store,

helping to reduce environmental impact as well as creating

natural havens for wildlife and people.

S106

Section 106 agreements (S106) are private agreements

made between local authorities and developers. They can

be attached to a planning permission to make acceptable

development which would otherwise be unacceptable in

planning terms.

Subsidiary company

A company whose voting stock is more than 50% controlled

by another company, usually referred to as the parent

company or holding company.

A subsidiary is a company that is partly or completely owned

by another company that holds a controlling interest in the

subsidiary company.

TCFD

Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures

(fsb-tcfd.org/)

Total shareholder return (TSR)

Dividends and capital growth in the share price, expressed

as a percentage of the share price at the beginning of

the year.

Total accounting return (TAR)

The growth in NAV per share plus dividends paid, expressed

as a percentage of NAV per share at the beginning of

the period.

UK planning system

This system consists of the process of managing the

development of land and buildings. The purposes of

this process are to save what is best of our heritage and

improve the infrastructure upon which we depend for a

civilised existence.

243Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

Henry Boot PLC

Registered office:

Isaacs Building, 4 Charles Street

Sheffield, S1 2HS United Kingdom

Registered in England and Wales no. 160996

Tel: 0114 255 5444

Email: [email protected]

Stock Code: BOOT.L

Henry Boot Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025

213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:EquityAttributableToOwnersOfParentMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:NoncontrollingInterestsMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-01-012024-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222024-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222023-12-31ifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31ifrs-full:OtherReservesMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-01-012025-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMemberifrs-full:SeparateMember213800H5873O9TC3XT222025-12-31HEN:CostOfSharesHeldByEsopTrustMemberifrs-full:SeparateMemberiso4217:GBPiso4217:GBPxbrli:shares